Panasonic Manual Service DP 6020

Order Number: MGCS041001C0
H21
Digital Imaging Systems

DP-3510/4510/6010
DP-3520/4520/6020
DP-3530/4530/6030
[ Version 5.0 ]
WARNING
This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public.
It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.
Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service
or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.
© 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is
a violation of law. Published in Japan.
This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit
Boards (PCBs).
Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder:
Distinction of PbF PCB:

PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a mark following
the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB.
Caution:
Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically
the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron
with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care
while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long
to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB.
Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C).
ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.:
URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs.
The contents of this Service Manual and the Specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in
the product design without reservation and without notice.
Published in Japan.
2
Important Notice
Please read this notice completely BEFORE installing any
optional accessories. As failure to properly install the additional
board or connector with the power ON (only the front power
switch Off) could damage the copier's SPC or SC board.
Please follow the instructions below:
1. It is essential that you turn OFF power to the Main Power
Switch located in the rear of the copier.
2. It is essential that you unplug the Main AC Power Cord from
the wall outlet.
3. Please carefully read the installation instructions and follow
each step.
Note 1:
The Main Power Switch location may differ slightly depending on the model.
Note 2:
O = Power OFF, l = Power ON
Note:
If the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disk Scan Function from being
performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is
important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switches on
the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk
Drive Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position.
(This interrupts all the power to the machine, but does not disconnect the main line.)
4. Unplug the AC Power Cord to shut the power Off completely.
* The specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves
the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice.
3
Precautions
For Your Safety
To prevent severe injury and loss of life, read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonic
machine to ensure proper and safe operation of your machine.
Please ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet and is easily accessible.
This section explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.
WARNING: Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
This section also explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must not be performed.
These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure
that must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely.
WARNING
Power and Ground Connection Cautions
Ensure that the plug connection is free of dust. In a damp environment, a contaminated
connector can draw a significant amount of current that can generate heat and eventually
cause fire if left unattended over an extended period of time.
Always use the power cord provided with your machine. When an extension power cord is
required, always use a properly rated cord.
120 V/15 A or AC 220 - 240V/10 A
If you use a cord with an unspecified current rating, the machine or plug may emit smoke or
become hot to the touch.
Do not attempt to repair, pull, bend, chafe or otherwise damage the power cord. Do not
place a heavy object on the cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.
Never touch a power cord with wet hands. Danger of electric shock exists.
If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact your Service Provider
for a replacement. Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.
Stop operation immediately if your machine emits smoke, excessive heat, unusual noise, or
abnormal smell, or if water is spilt onto the machine. These conditions can cause fire.
Immediately switch Off and unplug the machine, and contact your Service Provider.
Do not disconnect or reconnect the machine while the power switch is in the On position.
Disconnecting a live connector can cause arcing, consequently deforming the plug and
cause fire.
When disconnecting the machine, grasp the plug instead of the cord. Pulling on a cord
forcibly can damage it and cause fire or electric shock.
When the machine is not used over an extended period of time, switch it Off and unplug it.
If an unused machine is left connected to a power source for a long period, degraded insulation
can cause electric shocks, current leakage or fire.
Be sure to switch Off and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine
for cleaning, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machineÕ
s interior can cause
electric shock.
4
Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any unusual
condition, contact your Service Provider.
The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle.
The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent.
The plug and receptacle are free of dust.
The cord is not cracked or frayed.
Operating Safeguards
Do not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to, the surface may be very hot and may cause
severe burns.
Do not place any liquid container such as a vase or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause fire or
shock hazard.
Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get into the
machine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks.
If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch Off and unplug the machine immediately.
Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock.
Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modification can cause
smoke or fire.
Consumable Safeguards
Never dispose of toner, toner cartridge or a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner remaining in the
cartridge can cause an explosion, burns and/or injuries.
Keep button batteries/stamp out of the reach of children. If a button battery/stamp is swallowed accidentally,
get medical treatment immediately.
CAUTION
Installation and Relocation Cautions
Do not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials such as curtains that
may catch fire.
Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment. Prolonged exposure to
these adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks.
Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can with stand.
If tilted, the machine may tip-over and cause injuries.
When relocating the machine, remove the toner and/or developer, and pack the machine
with proper packing materials for shipping.
When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with the
power cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock.
5
CAUTION
Operating Safeguards
Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate the
machine accidentally, resulting in injuries.
Do not use a highly flammable spray or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire.
When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against the scanning
glass. The glass may break and cause injuries.
Never touch a labelled area found on or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheet of
paper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it yourself to avoid injuries or
burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbon paper and coated paper. When a
paper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire.
Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can tip-over or the
heavy object can fall, causing damage and/or injuries.
Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time to minimize
the ozone density in the air.
When copying with the document cover open, do not look directly at the exposure lamp.
Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or eye injury.
Pull out paper trays slowly to prevent injuries.
When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the machine.
A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper is wrapped
around the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or impossible to see,
do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries or burns. Switch Off the
machine immediately, , and wait until it cools down. .
Consumable Safeguards
Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated or scratched drum can be
hazardous to your health.
Do not mix new and old batteries together, as they can burst or leak, causing fire or injuries.
Be sure to use the specified type of batteries only.
Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries can
burst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.
Others
When clearing a paper jam or other fault, follow the appropriate procedure given in this manual.
The machine has a built-in circuit for protection against lightning-induced surge current. If lightning
strikes in your neighborhood, switch Off the machine. Disconnect the power cord from the machine
and reconnect only when the lightning has stopped.
If you notice flickering or distorted images or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may
be causing radio interference. Switch it Off and if the interference disappears, the machine is the
cause of the radio interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected.
Move the machine and the TV and/or radio away from each other.
Reposition or reorient the machine and the TV and/or radio.
Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets operating on different circuits.
Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas and cables until the interference stops. For an outdoor
antenna, ask your local electrician for support.
Use a coaxial cable antenna.
6
Table of Contents
Specifications Table ................................ 9 System Description ............................. 263

1.1. Copy Function...........................................9 6.1. Copy Process ....................................... 263
1.2. Fax, Printer, Network Scanner and 6.2. Precautions with Consumables ............ 264
Internet Fax Functions ............................17 6.3. New Digital Image Control Qualitative
1.3. System Combination...............................26 Reasoning Based Adaptive Controller
1.4. Options and Supplies List .......................27 (New Digital QUANTUM) ..................... 266
1.5. External View..........................................29 6.4. Inverting Automatic Document

Feeder (i-ADF) ..................................... 268
1.6. Control Panel ..........................................32
6.5. Glossary of Electrical
1.7. Fans and Motors.....................................33 Abbreviations ....................................... 270
1.8. Sensors...................................................34
1.9. Clutches and Switches ...........................35 Installation............................................ 279
1.10. PC Boards ..............................................35 7.1. Precautions During Set Up................... 279
7.2. Unpacking ............................................ 281
Disassembly Instructions ..................... 36 7.3. Installation Procedure .......................... 282
2.1. General Disassembly..............................36 7.4. Adjustment ........................................... 287
2.2. Disassembly Instructions ........................37
2.3. Screw Identification Template...............113 Options and Supplies.......................... 288
8.1. Service Notes "Firmware Update"
Maintenance, Adjustments and for PCL-IPX/SPX or PS-IPX/SPX
Check Points ........................................ 119 Option Installation
(For DP-3530/4530/6030) .................... 288
3.1. Preventive Maintenance .......................119
8.2. Service Notes "Firmware Update"
3.2. Required Tools .....................................121
for PCL-IPX/SPX or PS-IPX/SPX
3.3. Preventive Maintenance Points ............122 Option Installation
3.4. Preventive Maintenance Check List .....124 (For DP-3520/4520/6020) .................... 292
3.5. Resetting the P/M 8.3. Service Notes for "Firmware Update"
(Preventive Maintenance) Counter .......126 for PCL or PS Option Installation
(For DP-3510/4510/6010) .................... 296
3.6. Updating the Firmware .........................128
8.4. Installing the Printer Controller Module
3.7. Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure
for GDI-IPX/SPX (DA-GC601)
(Order) ..................................................139
(Not Available in the USA/Canada) ...... 300
3.8. Adjusting the Printer Registration,
LSU Image Side to Side .......................143
for PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-PC602) ........... 301
3.9. QUANTUM Control in F8-14.................144
3.10. Calibrating the LCD ..............................146 for PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-PC601) ........... 303
Troubleshooting .................................. 147 for PCL6 (DA-PC600) .......................... 305
4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ..........147 8.8. Installing the Printer Controller Module
4.2. Improper LCD Display ..........................148 for PS / PCL6-IPX/SPX
(DA-MC602) ......................................... 307
4.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems.............149
4.4. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......165
for PS / PCL6-IPX/SPX
4.5. Error Codes (For Copier) ......................173 (DA-MC601) ......................................... 309
4.6. Information Codes Table 8.10. Installing the Printer Controller Module
(For Facsimile)......................................188 for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC600) .................. 311
4.7. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile).........194 8.11. Installing the Network Scanner Module
4.8. Troubleshooting (For Printer)................201 (DA-NS600).......................................... 313
8.12. Installing the Network Scanner Module
Service Modes...................................... 203 for DDS (DA-NS601) ............................ 314
5.1. Service Modes (For Copier)..................203 8.13. Installing the Internet Fax / E-Mail
Module (DA-NF600) ............................. 316
5.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile) .............234
7
Table of Contents
8.14. Installing the Fax Communication 9.3. Network Layer ...................................... 429
Board (DA-FG600)............................... 320 9.4. Transport Layer .................................... 433
8.15. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit 9.5. Upper Layer.......................................... 435
(DA-HD60) ........................................... 329
9.6. SMTP
8.16. Installing the Accounting Software (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)............ 440
(DA-WA10)........................................... 335
9.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305 ........................ 441
8.17. Installing the DD Server Software
(DA-WS20)........................................... 336 9.8. Communication Protocols .................... 447
8.18. Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board 9.9. POP

(DA-EM600) ......................................... 337 (Post Office Protocol Version 3) ........... 450
8.19. Installing the Sorting Image Memory 9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC .................. 453
16/64/128 MB 9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail
(DA-SM16B/64B/28B).......................... 338 Account Type (SMTP or POP) ............. 454
8.20. Installing the Expansion Flash 9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Memory Card 4/8 MB (DHCP) - Extended Feature ................. 455
(UE-410047/410048) ........................... 339 9.13. Message Disposition Notifications
8.21. Installing the System (MDN) - Extended Feature ................... 458
Console 1 (DA-DS603) / 9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
Console 2 (DA-DS604) ........................ 340 (LDAP) - Extended Feature.................. 462
8.22. Installing the System 9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response
Console 1 (DA-DS601) / Mechanism POP (APOP)
Console 2 (DA-DS602) ........................ 343 - Extended Feature............................... 462
8.23. Installing the 3000-Sheet Tray 9.16. SMTP Service Extension
(DA-MA301) ......................................... 346 for Authentication (SMTP Auth)
8.24. Installing the Letter / Legal Size - Extended Feature............................... 464
Adapter for 3000-Sheet Tray 9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT
(DA-TK31)............................................ 349 - Extended Feature............................... 466
8.25. Installing the Exit Tray
(DA-XT600).......................................... 354 Schematic Diagram ............................. 467
8.26. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher 10.1. General Circuit Diagram....................... 467
(DA-FS600).......................................... 357
8.27. Installing the 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher Options .................................. 469
Finisher (DA-FS605) ............................ 368
11.1. DA-FS600, DA-FS605, DA-SP31......... 469
8.28. Installing the Punch Unit
(DA-SP31)............................................ 381 11.2. DA-FS330............................................. 671
8.29. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher 11.3. DA-FS355, DA-SP41............................ 709

(DA-FS330).......................................... 385
8.30. Installing the 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (DA-FS355A).......................... 391
8.31. Installing the Punch Unit
(DA-SP41)............................................ 400
8.32. Installing the Power Supply
for Finisher (DA-PW600)...................... 408
8.33. Installing the Key Counter Harness
Kit (DZTY000128) ................................ 410
8.34. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater
(DZTQ000041)..................................... 412
8.35. Replacing the OPC Drum .................... 420
General Network Information ............. 423

9.1. Network Protocol.................................. 423
9.2. Layer Functions and Technology......... 425
8
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1 Specifications Table
1.1. Copy Function
Description
Items DP-3510/ DP-4510/ DP-6010/ Remarks
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Basic Specifications
1 Type Console
2 Platen Fixed
3 Original Position Left
4 Recording Paper Path Center
5 Face Up / Face Down Face Down
6 Drum Organic Photo Conductor (OPC)
7 Copy Process Dry Electrostatic System
Magnetic Dual Component Development
8 Developing Process
System
9 Toner Recycle No
10 Fusing System Heat & Pressure
Ledger (11 x 17 in) /
11 Max Original Size
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
12 Paper Size
LTR For USA and Canada
1st Paper Tray
A4 For EU
(1,550 Sheet Paper Tray)
A4 For Other Destinations
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada
Paper Tray A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4 (FLS) For EU
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R For USA and Canada
Sheet Bypass A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4 (FLS) For EU
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R For Other Destinations
Sheet Bypass Envelope No
Less than Less than
13 Warm-up Time 68 °F (20 °C)
30 sec. 180 sec.
From Platen/ Letter/ A4
Less than Less than Less than Portrait/ 1st Paper Tray.
14 First Copy Time
5.8 sec. 4.5 sec. 3.5 sec. Period between Start Key is
pressed and Paper ejected.
15 Copy Speed
Ledger / A3 20 cpm 27 cpm 34 cpm
Legal / B4, FLS 23 cpm 31 cpm 39 cpm
Letter-R 28 cpm 37 cpm 49 cpm
A4-R 27 cpm 36 cpm 48 cpm
LTR / A4 35 cpm 45 cpm 60 cpm
16 Zoom
Enlargement Selected Original size / Copy size
Reduction Selected Original size / Copy size
Zoom 25 - 400% 1% Step
Ver. 5.0
9 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
17 Paper Feed Front loading universal Paper Tray
Paper Tray
1,550 sheets x 1
Capacity LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
550 sheets x 1
Auto Size Setting Yes (2nd Tray only)
Low Level Warning Empty only
Sheet Bypass
Capacity 50 sheets LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Auto Size Setting Yes
Paper Capacity
2,150 sheets
(Std. Configuration)
Max. Paper Capacity 6,250 sheets LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
18 Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
Yes (Standard) For USA, Canada and EU
Duplex Type
Option Yes (Standard) For Other Destinations
Original Set Face Up
Scanning Method Sheet Through
Capacity (Original) 70 sheets (LTR / A4) LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Available for single side
SADF Mode Yes
scanning only.
Free Stop Yes From 30 to 70 degrees.
19 Multi Copy Range 1-999 sets
20 Gradation
Text 2 steps
Text / Photo 2 step error diffusion
Photo 256 steps
21 Resolution 600 dpi Scanning and Printing.
Standard Sorting Memory
22 32 MB
Size
23 Standard Page Memory Size 20 MB For Printing.
24 Exit Tray Capacity 250 sheets
25 Color No
26 Dimensions
23.6 x 29.6 x 29.0 in
H: Up to Platen Glass.
(600 x 753 x 736 mm)
(W x D x H)
23.6 x 29.6 x 35.4 in
H: Up to i-ADF.
(600 x 753 x 900 mm)
27 Occupancy Area
47.2 x 29.6 in Includes Bypass Paper
(W x D)
(1,200 x 753 mm) Tray.
251 lb 258 lb 258 lb Main Unit only,
(114 kg) (117 kg) (117 kg) without i-ADF.
28 Weight
283 lb 290 lb 290 lb
Main Unit with i-ADF.
(128.5 kg) (131.5 kg) (131.5 kg)
Ver. 5.0
10 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Options
1 Paper Feed System
550 sheets x1 (3rd)
Yes DA-DS601
Paper Feed Module
Paper Size Detection Manual (Control Panel)
Low Level Paper Warning Empty only
Dimensions
23.6 x 28.7 x 11.4 in
(W x D x H)
(600 x 730 x 290 mm)
Weight 63.5 lb (28.8 kg)
550 sheets x 2 (3rd/4th)
Yes DA-DS602
Paper Feed Module
Dimensions
23.6 x 28.7 x 11.4 in
(W x D x H)
(600 x 730 x 290 mm)
Weight 66.1 lb (30.0 kg)
Letter : 3,000 sheets
3000 sheets DA-MA301
Letter-R : 2,500 sheets
Paper Feed Module LTR / LGL : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
Legal : 1,500 sheets
Dimensions
11.6 x 17.5 x 19.9 in
(295 x 445 x 505 mm)
(W x D x H)
17.4 x 17.5 x 19.9 in With LTR-R / LGL Size
(442 x 445 x 505 mm) Adapter (DA-TK31)
27.1 lb (12.3 kg)
Weight With LTR-R / LGL Size
37.0 lb (16.8 kg)
Adapter (DA-TK31)
Max. Paper Capacity 6,250 sheets LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
2 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher Yes - DA-FS355A
3 2-Bin Finisher Yes - DA-FS330
4 2-Bin Finisher - Yes DA-FS600
5 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher - Yes DA-FS605
6 Counter
Key Counter Capability Yes
Supplied as service part.
7 Dehumidifier Yes
Part Number: DZTQ000041
8 Electronic Sorting Board Standard (32 MB) CODEC + 32 MB memory
Optional Image Memory 1
Yes
(16 MB)
Optional Image Memory 2 Only one of three available
Yes
(64 MB) types can be installed.
Optional Image Memory 3
Yes
(128 MB)
Ver. 5.0
11 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Features
1 Automatic Features
Auto Magnification Selection Yes
Auto Paper Selection Yes
Auto Density Control Yes
Auto Paper Tray Selection Yes
Reservation while Power
Auto Start Yes
On Initializing
Energy Saver Mode
Standby Mode Yes
Energy Saver Mode Yes
Turns Off the Heater
Sleep Mode Yes (20W) Power.
NW Function available
For USA, Canada and EU
Yes (4W) With Finisher Power Supply
NW Function not available
Auto Off Mode For Other Destinations
Without Finisher Power
Yes (3W)
Supply
NW Function not available
Requires the Fax
Remote Diagnostic Yes Communication Board
(DA-FG600) option.
Machine Stops while Out of
Yes Copier function
Toner
2 Additional Features
Photo Mode Yes 256-step (Gray Scale)
Manually overriden when
Original Detection Release Yes using the Original Size
keys.
Edit / Effects
Book Mode Yes
Edge Mode Yes
Margin Mode Yes
X-Y Zoom Yes 25 - 400%
Available only when using
Page Numbering Yes
the ADF.
Inverse Mode (Negative /
Yes
Positive)
Centering Mode Yes
Mirror Mode No
Others (Inverting ADF &
ADU)
LDR → LTR x 2
2-Page Copy Mode Yes
(A3 → A4 x 2, B4 → B5 x 2)
2 in 1 Yes
Ver. 5.0
12 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
4 in 1 Yes
6 in 1 Yes
8 in 1 Yes
Copy from 4 single-sided
Booklet Mode Yes pages to 1 booklet mode
sheet.
Duplex Copy
1→2 Yes
2→1 Yes
2→2 Yes
Book→2 Yes
Book Format Yes
Facing Pages Yes
Image Rotation (90 degrees) Yes
Electronic Sorting Yes
Rotation Sorting Yes
Insertion Job
Cover Mode Yes
Page Insertion Mode Yes
OHP Interleave Mode Yes Non-copy / Copy
Presentation Mode Yes
Department Counter Yes 300 Departments
i-ADF
LDR and LTR, LGL and
Multi Size Feed Yes LTR-R, A3 and A4, B4 and
B5, A4-R and A5
SADF Mode Yes
Original Counter No
Job Memory Yes (5)
Job Time Display No
Concurrent Copy Yes (12)
Tandem Copy Mode Yes
Remote Copy Mode Yes
Scan Once Print Many Mode Yes
Job Complete Notice Yes
Trial Copy Mode Yes
Weekly Timer Yes
User Mode Yes
Interrupt Yes
Electronic Counter Yes
Digital Sky Shot Mode Yes
Check / Slip Mode Yes
Ver. 5.0
13 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
3 Control Panel
Display Wide Touch Panel LCD
GREEN : Scanning /
Status Lamp Yes Printing
RED : Alarm / Warning
Key
Original Size Yes
Copy Size Yes
Keypad Yes
Clear Yes
Stop Yes
Start Yes
Energy Saver Yes
Function Yes
Interrupt Yes
Reset Yes
One-Touch Key No
Copier / Printer / NW
Mode Change Yes Scanner / Fax and Internet
Fax Mode change.
LCD Main Indication
English (American) For USA and Canada
Message Language
(Default) For EU and Other
Specified Language
Destinations
Original Size / Image Yes
Indication (with Image)
Paper Size / Image Yes
Indication (with Image)
Paper Tray Selection Yes
Selected Paper Tray
Yes
Status
Original Mode Selection Yes Text / Text-Photo / Photo
Copy Density Selection Yes
Setting Confirmation Yes
Zoom Magnification Yes
Function Classification Yes
Number of Copies Yes
SADF / Multi Size Feed
Yes
Mode
Error Code Yes
Finishing Yes
Warning Indicators Yes
Add Toner Yes
Toner Waste Container
Yes
Full
Add Paper (No Paper) Yes
Ver. 5.0
14 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Add Paper
No
(Under 50 Sheets)
Paper Jam Indication Yes
Paper Jam Location Yes
Service Alert Call Yes
User Error Yes
Machine Error Yes
History of Jam Errors Yes
4 Main Unit
Total Counter Yes (Standard) Mechanical Counter
Max. Weight of Documents
11 lb (5 kg)
on the Platen Glass
ADF with Document Guide Yes
Clip Pocket Yes
Operating Instructions
No
Pocket
Warning / Caution Label Specified Language
5 Optical System
Original Detection Method Reflective Photo Sensor Type
Scanning Method 600 dpi CCD
Supplied as a Service Part
Dehumidifier Yes
Mechanical Multi Copy
No
Mode
6 Process System
Separate OPC Unit and
Type
Developer Unit Type
Toner 24K 35K
Developer Life 240K
Drum Life 240K LTR / A4
Toner Waste Container 240K
Supplied as a Service Part
Dehumidifier Yes
Manually adds toner to the
Manual Add Toner Yes developer
(up to TDC threshold)
Efficiency
1 Productivity
Warm-Up Time from Approx. Approx.
68 °F (20 °C)
Standby 30 sec. 180 sec.
ADF Productivity (LTR / A4)
Inverting ADF 100% Throughput
Ver. 5.0
15 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
ADU Copy Productivity When ejecting to Outer
(LTR / A4) Tray
Transport Method Stackless
1→2
1 copy 45%
5 copies 75% Throughput
10 copies 90%
PM Cycle
1 PM Cycle
Major PM 120K 120K 240K
Minor PM (Cleaning) - - 120K
Packing Configuration
1 Packing Dimension
28.5 x 34.3 x 42.9 in
(W x D x H)
(725 x 870 x 1090 mm)
302 lb 309 lb
For USA and Canada
(137 kg) (140 kg)
2 Packing Weight
298 lb 304 lb For EU and
(135 kg) (138 kg) Other Destinations
3 Accessories
OPC Unit Yes
Developer No
Toner No
Toner Waste Container Yes
Option For USA and Canada
Outer Tray For EU and
Yes
Other Destinations
Operating Instructions Yes
Power Supply
99 - 138 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz
100 VAC Power Supply
Single phase
1 Power Requirement
180 - 264 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz
220 VAC Power Supply
Single phase
2 Power Consumption Less than 1500 W
Ambient Conditions
1 Temperature 50 - 80 °F (10 - 30 °C)
2 Relative Humidity 30 - 80%
UL1950 / CSA C22.2 No.950 For USA and Canada
3 Safety For EU and
EN60950
Other Destinations
4 Energy Saver Energy Star Compliant
Class A computing device in FCC Rules
5 EMI For USA and Canada
Part 15
Refer to the Part Manual for
6 Lead Free Solder (PbF) This Product uses Lead Free (PbF) PCBs
details
Ver. 5.0
16 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.2. Fax, Printer, Network Scanner and Internet Fax Functions
1.2.1. Fax Function
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Main Specifications
1 Compatibility G3 ITU-T Std. & Non-Std. (PCC)
2 PSTN Line Port Yes 1-Line Only
3 Leased Line Port No
4 V.24 Line Port No
5 Modem Speed 33.6 - 2.4 kbps
6 Coding Scheme JBIG / MMR / MR / MH
7 ECM Yes Conforms to ITU-T
8 Short Protocol Yes (B, D)
ITU-T Image No. 1
9 Transmission Speed Approx. 3 sec.
(A4, Std. Resolution)
Transmission
Std. 8 x 3.85
Fine 8 x 7.7
S-Fine 8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
Communication Resolution
10
(pels/mm x lines/mm)
Reception
Std. 8 x 3.85
Fine 8 x 7.7
S-Fine 8 x 15.4
16 x 15.4
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
Scanner Mechanism
1 Scanning Device CCD (i-ADF / Platen)
2 Scanning Speed
Resolution Vertical Horizontal
Std: 8 x 3.85
1.0 sec. 0.7 sec.
Fine: 8 x 7.7 A4, Scanned in Vertical or
1.0 sec. 0.7 sec.
(pels/mm x lines/mm) Horizontal Direction
S-Fine: 16 x 15.4
2.0 sec. 1.4 sec.
600dpi: 600 x 600 2.0 sec. 1.4 sec.
Std. 8 x 3.85
Fine 8 x 7.7
Scanning Resolution
3 S-Fine 8 x 15.4
(pel/mm x lines/mm)
16 x 15.4
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
4 Document Size (Max.) ADF: Ledger / A3
5 Effective Scanning Width LDR (11.5 in) / A3 (292 mm)
6 A3 size TX / RX Yes Conforms to ITU-T A3
7 Reduction XMT Yes A3 to B4 / A3 to A4 / B4 to A4
Ver. 5.0
17 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Face-Up, feed from top page
8 ADF Capacity 70 sheets
LTR / A4 (17 lb / 64 g/m2)
9 Collation Stack Yes Face Down
Printer Mechanism
1 Recording Method LP
35 ppm 45 ppm 60 ppm
2 Recording Speed (A4 (A4 (A4
Horizontal) Horizontal) Horizontal)
600 x 600 dpi
3 Recording Resolution Fax
406 x 391 dpi
Invoice : Not supported.
Ledger size is transmitted as
A3 size for N. American
4 Recording Paper Size Ledger / Legal / Letter / A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 models. If A3 is received,
approx. 1" of image on both
edges are not printed on
Ledger size paper.
5 Effective Printing Width 11.4 in (289 mm) Conforms to ITU-T A3
Optional max. 6,250 sheets
6 Recording Paper Capacity 2,150 sheets
LTR / A4 : 20 lb (75 g/m2)
7 Collation Stack Yes Face Down
8 Consumables Toner Bottle, OPC Drum and Staples
Fax Memory
Flash ROM, ITU-T Image No.1
1 Standard Memory 2 MB (120 pages)
(A4, Std. Resolution)
4 MB Expansion Flash Memory
2 Optional Memory
8 MB Card
Dual Operation
1 Multi Task Operation Yes
2 Direct XMT Reserve Yes
3 Memory XMT Reserve Yes
Number of Memory Job
4 Yes (Max. 50 files)
Files
Dialing/Telephone Features
Plus an additional 800 stations
available to select from, when
1 Address Book Dialing 200 Stations
the optional Hard Disk Drive
(DA-HD60) is installed.
Full Number Dialing
2 Yes Max. 70 stations
(Buffered Dialing)
Address Book Directory
3 Yes
Search Dialing
200 Address Book + 70 Full
4 Total Auto Dialers 270 Stations
Number Dialing
5 Program Dials 12
6 Max. Tel Number Digits 36
Max. Station Name
7 15
Characters
Ver. 5.0
18 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Direct Dialing
8 Yes Voice mode
(Monitor Dialing)
9 Automatic Redialing Yes
10 Manual Redialing Yes
11 Line Monitor Speaker Yes Available for Line-1 only
12 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial) Yes In Monitor Dialing mode only
13 Pulse / Tone Dialing Yes 10 pps / DTMF
14 Pulse to Tone Change Yes
15 Flash Key Yes
16 Handset No
Transmission Features
1 Direct Transmission Yes
2 Memory Transmission Yes Page Retransmission
Quick Memory
3 Yes
Transmission
Multi-Station Transmission
4 Yes Max. 270 Stations
(Sequential Broadcasting)
Direct Deferred
5 No ADF Deferred Transmission
Transmission
6 Deferred Transmission Yes Max. 50 Timers
Deferred Multi-Station
7 Yes
Transmission
Priority Direct
8 Yes Priority ADF Transmission
Transmission
Priority Memory
9 No
Transmission
10 Batch Transmission Yes Real Time (up to 5 Files)
90 Degree Rotation
11 Yes
Transmission
12 Cover Sheet Yes
13 Confidential Mail Box Yes 20 Mailboxes
14 Multi-Copy Transmission No
FAX : Back-up with Flash
Memory.
15 Memory Back-Up Yes
Copy / Printer : No Back-up
with D-RAM
16 Duplex Scanning Yes With Inverting ADF (i-ADF)
Reception Features
1 Substitute Reception Yes
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
2 Fixed Reduction Yes (in 1% Steps),
Top & Left Alignment
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100%
3 Auto Reduction Yes (in 1% Steps),
Top & Left Alignment
Page End Approx. 0.51 in (13
4 Overlap Printing Yes
mm)
Ver. 5.0
19 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
5 Receive to Memory Yes
Distinctive Ring Detector
6 No
(DRD)
90 Degree Rotation
7 Yes
Reception
8 Duplex Printing Yes
Polling
1 Polling Yes
2 Turnaround Polling No
3 Multi-Station Polling Yes Max. 270 Stations
4 Deferred Polling Yes Max. 50 Timers
Deferred Multi-Station
5 Yes Max. 50 Timers / 270 Stations
Polling
6 Direct Polling Tx No
7 Memory Polling Tx Yes 1 File
8 Preset Polling Password Yes
Temporary Polling
9 Yes
Password
10 Continuous Polling Yes
Convenience
1 Panel Display Wide Touch Panel Display
2 Voice Contact No
3 Edit File Mode Yes With View Mode
4 Incomplete File Save Yes With View Mode
5 Automatic Cover Sheet Yes
Certainty
1 Verification Stamp Yes
2 Header / Total Page Print Yes
200 Transactions / with View
3 Transaction Journal Yes
Mode
4 Comm. Journal Yes With Image Data
5 Last Ind. XMT Journal Yes
List Printouts
1 One-Touch List -
2 ABBR. No. List -
3 Program List Yes
4 Address Book Search List Yes Auto Dialer List
5 Fax Parameter List Yes
6 File List Yes With View Mode
7 Ind. XMT Journal Yes
8 Journal Yes Last 200 Transactions
Identifications
1 Logo Yes 25 Characters
2 Multiple Logo No
3 Character ID Yes 16 Characters
4 Numeric ID Yes 20 Digits
Ver. 5.0
20 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Special Communications
1 Password XMT / RCV Yes
2 Selective Reception Yes TSI Check
3 Relay XMT Request No
4 Relay XMT Center No
5 Confidential XMT / Polling No
6 Confidential Center No
7 Mailbox XMT / Polling Yes
8 Mailbox Center No
9 File XMT No
Received File Transfer
10 Fax Forward Yes
(Only with I-FAX Option)
11 Sub-address XMT Yes T. Routing
12 Sub-address RCV Yes
13 OMR-XMT No
Standards
FCC Part 68: 1997 / Industry Canada
1 PSTN
No. CS-03: Issue 8 1996
Others
1 Fax Access Code Yes
2 PIN Code Access Yes For USA and Canada only
3 Intelligent Redial (AI) Yes 4 Files
4 Department Code Yes 300 Departmental Codes
5 Power Saver Mode Yes
6 Self Diagnostic Function Yes
Remote Diagnostic
7 Yes
Function
8 Check & Call Function Yes
9 V.24 / Encryption Interface No
Ver. 5.0
21 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.2.2. Printer Function
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F Centronics Parallel Interface IEEE-1284 Compliant
Ethernet 10Base-T/
2 LAN (Network)
100Base-TX
3 USB Port No
4 IEEE-1394 No
Printer Function
Ledger, Legal, Letter, Invoice, A3, A4,
1 Printing Size
A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4
2 Bypass Yes
3 Stapling Yes
4 Printing Resolution (dpi) 600 x 600 Selectable, 600 dpi Printer
5 Interface Centronics Parallel Interface/Ethernet
Win 98 / Me /
6 OS
Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP
7 GDI Yes
Requires Optional PCL6
8 PDL (PCL6) Yes
Emulation Kit
Requires Optional PS / PCL6
9 PDL (PS3) Yes
Emulation Kit
10 Duplex Printing Yes
11 Collation Stack Yes
12 Status Monitor (Local) No
13 Network Printing Yes
14 Network Status Monitor Yes
15 Smoothing Yes
16 Applicable PC IBM PC, AT or Compatible
17 Multi-Task Operation
Printing while Fax-XMT
Yes
from Memory
Printing while Fax-RCV into
Yes
Memory
Fax-XMT from Memory
Yes
while Printing
Fax-RCV into Memory while
Yes
Printing
Output to separate tray for
18 Yes
Printing, Fax, Copy
Requires Optional PCL6 or PS
19 Font Yes
/ PCL6 Emulation Kit
Requires Optional HDD Unit
20 Security Print Yes
Max. 100 Boxes
Ver. 5.0
22 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.2.3. Network Scanner Function
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Interface
1 Centronics Parallel I/F No IEEE-1284 Compliant
Ethernet 10Base-T/
2 LAN (Network)
100Base-TX
3 USB Port No
4 IEEE-1394 No Firewire
Network Scanning Function
1 Scanning Device CCD (i-ADF / Platen)
2 Halftone 256 Halftone Shades With Error Diffusion
3 Max. Document Size A3, Ledger
600 x 600
Scanning Resolution Selectable, 600 dpi Optical
4 300 x 300
(dpi) Scanner
150 x 150
Win 98 / Me /
5 OS
Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP
6 2-Sided Scanning Yes With i-ADF.
PDF format is available for
7 File Format Mult-page TIFF / PDF DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/
6020/6030 only.
Auto Pop-up on the PC
Screen
8 Completion Notice Yes (requires Network Status
Monitor - installed with PDMS
Software)
9 Protocol TCP/IP, Non-Std
Ver. 5.0
23 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.2.4. Internet Fax Function
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
Main Specifications
Communication
1 TCP / IP SMTP / MIME
Protocols
2 Max. Modem Speed NA
3 Coding Scheme MH / MMR / JBIG
PDF format is available for DP-3520/
3530/4520/4530/6020/6030 only.
Selectable (PDF format can be used for
Scan-to-Email when sending to a PC.
4 File Format TIFF / PDF
However, since current Internet Fax
standards do not support this file
format, it cannot be used for sending to
another Internet Fax machine)
5 Line Interface RJ-45 (Ethernet) Ethernet LAN
Scanner Mechanism
1 Max. Document Size Ledger, A3
2 Effective Scanning Width 11.4 in (289 mm)
Std 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85)
Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) LAN: 600 dpi, 16 x 15.4 Scanning
Scanning Resolution
3 S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4) Resolution is available with
(pel/mm x lines/mm)
406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) Parameter setting
600dpi 600 x 600 dpi
Printer Mechanism
1 Printing Resolution 600 dpi
Effective Recording
2 11.4 in (289 mm)
Width
Transmission Features
Simultaneous operation of G3 Fax and
1 Multi-Task Operation Yes
LAN is available
2 Memory Transmission Yes
Sequential Multi-Station
3 -
Transmission
Max. 270 Stations
Simultaneous Multi-
4 Yes (200 Address Book + 70 Full Number
Station Transmission
Dialing)
5 Sender Selection Yes
G3 / Email Mixed
6 Yes
Broadcasting
7 Deferred Transmission Yes
Received File Transfer, only with
8 Fax Forward Yes
Internet FAX Option
Inbound Routing, only with Internet
9 Sub-address RCV Yes
FAX Option
Ver. 5.0
24 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Description
3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030
10 Mail Header
Email Header Print
Yes All or From / To / Subject only
Selection
Subject Line Random Entry
LAN Features
Internet Fax A3 Communication is available with
1 Yes
Communication Parameter setting
2 Internet Mail Reception Yes
Internet Fax Server
3
Features
Internet Fax Relay XMT Yes Internet Fax → Internet Fax → G3FAX
Email Relay MXT Yes PC → Internet Fax → G3FAX
Received Fax / Email
Yes Local print available
Forward
PC to FAX Transmission Yes Requires Panafax Desktop Software
Using Sub-Address
Inbound Routing Yes
Local print available
Address Book
Yes Via Email
Registration from PC
I-Fax Parameters
4 Yes
Registration via Email
Internet Delivery
5 Yes With MDN
Confirmation
6 Network Scanning Yes 600 dpi
7 Network Printing
LPR / LPD Yes 600 dpi
GDI Yes
Requires Optional PCL6 or PS
PDL Yes
Emulation Kit
8 DHCP Client Yes
9 LDAP Yes Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
10 TIFF Viewer Yes Selectable, PDMS / TIFF Viewer
Certainty
Comm. Journal Email from RCV side to Panasonic
1 Yes
(w / Image) Internet FAX's only
ID
1 Email Address Yes
Ver. 5.0
25 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.3. System Combination
Inverting ADF (i-ADF)

ADF PC Board
Scanner Unit Document Sensor

and Motor
Panel
Main PC Board PCL6 Fax Communication
(PNL PC Board) MJR
(SC PC Board) Emulation Option Option
PS/PCL6 Printer
Emulation Option
Network Parallel Port

Scanner Option Interface
KEY Counter
Automatic
Harness Option 10/100 Ethernet
Duplex Unit Internet Fax Option
Interface
Dehumidifier
Heater Option Electronic Sorting Board
Expansion Flash Image Memory

Memory Card
16, 64, 128MB
4 or 8MB
Either Option
Hard Disk Option
SPC PC Board DRV PC Board 1,550 Sheet

Paper Tray
2-Bin
Saddle-Stitch
Finisher
3000 Sheet
2-Bin Finisher Paper
Tray
1-Bin
Saddle-Stitch
Finisher 550 Sheet Paper Tray
or
Exit Tray (Outer)

550 Sheet x 1 Paper Tray
550 Sheet x 2 Paper Tray
Standard Configuration
Option
Ver. 5.0
26 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.4. Options and Supplies List
■ Options
Option Name Option Number Remark
Printer Controller Module for PCL6 DA-PC600
Multi Page Description Language For DP-3510 / 4510 / 6010
DA-MC600
Controller Module for PS/PCL6
Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/ For DP-3520 / 4520 / 6020
DA-PC601
SPX (For USA and Canada, can also be used
Multi Page Description Language for DP-3510 / 4510 / 6010 without IPX/
DA-MC601 SPX)
Controller Module for PS/PCL6-IPX/SPX
Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/
DA-PC602
SPX
For DP-3530 / 4530 / 6030
Multi Page Description Language
DA-MC602
Controller Module for PS/PCL6-IPX/SPX
Printer Controller Module for GDI-IPX/SPX DA-GC601
For DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030
Document Distribution System DA-WR10
Network Scanner Module DA-NS600 For Network Scanning
Internet Fax / E-Mail Module DA-NF600 Internet Fax / Email Communication
Fax Communication Board DA-FG600 G3 Fax Communication
Hard Disk Drive Unit DA-HD60
Expansion Board DA-EM600 F-ROM Board (8 MB)
Image Memory (16 MB) DA-SM16B
Image Memory (64 MB) DA-SM64B For Electronic Sorting
Image Memory (128 MB) DA-SM28B
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB UE-410047 Additional Page Memory for Fax
Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB UE-410048 Communication Board (DA-FG600)
DD Server Software DA-WS20 For DD Server Function
Accounting Software DA-WA10 For Accounting Function
Stand DA-D351
For USA and Canada only
Stand (Short) DA-D352
System Console 1 (Tray x 1) DA-DS601
For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020
For DP-3530 / 4530 / 6030
3000-Sheet Tray (LCT) DA-MA301 3,000-Sheet Large Capacity Tray
Letter-R / Legal Size Adapter
DA-TK31 For USA and Canada
for LCT (DA-MA301)
Exit Tray (Outer) DA-XT600
2-Bin Finisher DA-FS600
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher DA-FS605 For DP-4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Punch Unit for DA-FS600/605 DA-SP31
1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher DA-FS355
For DP-3510/ 3520/3530/4510/4520/4530
Punch Unit for DA-FS355 DA-SP41
2-Bin Finisher DA-FS330 For DP-3510 / 3520 / 3530
For Other than USA, Canada and Euro
Power Supply for Finisher DA-PW600
Destinations
Key Counter Harness Kit DZTY000128
Dehumidifier Heater DZTQ000041 Supplied as a Service Part
Ver. 5.0
27 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
PS/PS3 is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company.
■ Supplies
Part Name Part Number Remarks
DQ-TU24D 24K for DP-3510/4510
DQ-TU35D 35K for DP-6010
Toner
DQ-TU241G 24K for DP-3520/3530/4520/4530
DQ-TU351G 35K for DP-6020/6030
FQ-SS32 Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS330
DQ-SS35 Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS355/
355A
Staple Cartridge Staple Cartridge Refills (3)
FQ-SS50
for DA-FS605 (Saddle Stitch)
Staple Cartridge Refills (3)
FQ-SS66
for DA-FS600 / 605
OPC Drum DQ-H240D
Developer DQ-Z241D
Note:
The Part Number(s) may differ for other than USA and Canada destinations. Please ask your sales
company for details.
Ver. 5.0
28 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.5. External View
1. Standard Configuration
(For USA only)
29.8 in (758 mm)

Product complies with DHHS Rules 21
CFR Subchapter J in effect at date
of manufacture.
Top View Manufacturer's name and address Factory ID
35.4 in (900 mm)

12.7 in 10.4 in
23.6 in (600 mm)
(322 mm) (265 mm)
Left View Front View Right View Rear View
! CAUTION
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS
INCORRECTLY REPLACED.
REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS.
2. With Optional System Console Configuration

35.4 in (900 mm)
46.0 in (1169 mm)
(269 mm)
10.6 in
Ver. 5.0
29 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Space Requirements With Options
Copier + Exit Tray
3.9 in 3.9 in (100 mm)
(100 mm)
23.6"(600 mm)
29.8"(758 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm) 12.7 in 10.4 in (265 mm)
(322 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)

54.6 in
(1387 mm)
Copier + Finisher
3.9 in (100 mm)
11.8 in 29.5 in (750 mm)
(300 mm)
23.6 in (600 mm)
29.8 in (758 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm) 10.4 in (265 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)

83.3 in
(2115 mm)
Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT

3.9 in (100 mm) 11.4 in (290 mm) 11 in (280 mm)
11.8 in 29.5 in (750 mm)
(300 mm)
29.8 in (758 mm)
23.6 in (600 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)

95.3 in
(2420 mm)
Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT + (LT-R_LGL Adapter)

3.9 in (100 mm)
29.5 in (750 mm) 17.3 in (440 mm)11 in (280 mm)
11.8 in (300 mm)
29.8 in (758 mm)
23.6 in (600 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)

19.9 in (505 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
101.2 in
(2570 mm)
Ver. 5.0
30 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.5.1. Serial Number Contents
The contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Sequential Production Number

5-Digit Sequential Production Number
00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units

A0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units
(Letters “I” and “O” are skipped)
Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)

3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation
(Except Letters “I” and “O”)
For Example:
2QC = DP-3510-PU 2KM = DP-4510-PU 2KN = DP-6010-PU
3LR = DP-3520-PU 3LS = DP-4520-PU 3LT = DP-6020-PU
3ZH = DP-3530-PU 3ZJ = DP-4530-PU 3ZK = DP-6030-PU
Production Facility
Production Year
Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is
represented as: A ~ T
A : 01 (2001) K : 11 (2011)
B : 02 L : 12
C : 03 M : 13
D : 04 N : 14
E : 05 O : 15
F : 06 P : 16
G : 07 Q : 17
H : 08 R : 18
I : 09 S : 19
J : 10 (2010) T : 20 (2020)
Production Month
A : January G : July
B : February H : August
C : March I : September
D : April J : October
E : May K : November
F : June L : December
Ver. 5.0
31 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.6. Control Panel
DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020
DP-3530/4530/6030
DP-6030
PRINT DATA ACTIVE

STATUS
Ver. 5.0
32 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.7. Fans and Motors
ADF Paper Feed Motor
ADF Feed Motor
Scanning Motor
Cooling Fan3
Corona Wire Cleaning Motor
Cooling Fan2 Ozone Fan
Dust Fan
Cooling Fan1
Hopper Motor
Main Motor
Inverting Motor
Drum Motor
Suction Fan
Cooling Fan
Lift Motor (Tray 1)
Drive Motor Lift Motor (Tray 2)
Lift Motor
(Tray 3)
Lift Motor
(Tray 4)
Ver. 5.0
33 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.8. Sensors
ADF Exit Sensor ADF Original
Width Sensor1
ADF Original Sensor
ADF Original
ADF Cover Open Width Sensor2
Sensor
ADF Original Length Sensor1
ADF Registration
Sensor1 ADF Original Length Sensor2
ADF Registration Platen Cover (ADF) Angle Sensor
Sensor3
ADF Registration Platen Cover (ADF) Open Sensor
Sensor2 Cleaning Sensor (Start)
Home Position Cleaning Sensor (End)
Sensor
ADF Paper Pass Toner Bottle Home Position
Sensor Sensor
Paper Size Sensor TDC Sensor
Exit Sensor Toner Sensor
Fuser Unit Paper Sheet Bypass Size Sensor
Exit Sensor
Inverting Exit Sensor Sheet Bypass NP Sensor
Interlock Sensor Registration Sensor
Inverting Paper Sensor Right Cover Open Sensor
ADU Paper Feed Sensor Timing Sensor
ADU Intermediate Sensor Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 1)
ADU Exit Sensor NP Sensor (Tray 1)
Paper Path Sensor (Tray 1)
Lower Exit Cover Sensor Intermediate Roller Sensor
Inverting Paper Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 2)
Path Sensor NP Sensor (Tray 2)
Toner Waste Container Paper Path Sensor (Tray 2)
Detection Sensor System Console Paper
Path Sensor
Toner Waste Container
Size Sensor
Full Detection Sensor
Upper Limit Sensor
Paper Remaining (Tray 3)
Sensor (Tray 1)
NP Sensor
Paper Remaining (Tray 3)
Sensor (Tray 2) Paper Path Sensor
Paper Remaining Sensor (Tray 3)
(Tray 3) Upper Limit Sensor
(Tray 4)
Paper Remaining Sensor
(Tray 4) NP Sensor
(Tray 4)
Paper Path Sensor
(Tray 4)
Release Cover Open Sensor
Ver. 5.0
34 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1.9. Clutches and Switches
ADF Inverting Roller Clutch2
ADF Inverting Roller Clutch1
ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch
ADF Registration Roller Clutch1
ADF Registration Roller Clutch2
ADF Exit Roller Clutch ADF Pinch Solenoid
ADF Inverting Roller Solenoid
Paper Exit Transportation Separator Solenoid
Roller Solenoid ADU Registration Clutch
Fuser Cleaning Web Paper Feed Roller Clutch
Roller Solenoid (Sheet Bypass)
Paper Exit Solenoid Pickup Roller Solenoid
(Sheet Bypass)
Interlock Switch
Intermediate Roller Clutch
Power Switch ADU Exit Roller Clutch
Front Door Switch Pickup Roller Solenoid (Tray 1)
Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Tray 1)
Main Power Switch Pickup Roller Solenoid (Tray 2)
Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Tray2)
ADU Paper Feed Roller Clutch Pickup Roller Solenoid
(Tray 3)
Paper Feed Roller Clutch
(Tray 3)
Pickup Roller Solenoid
(Tray 4)
Paper Feed Roller Clutch
(Tray 4)
Intermediate Roller Clutch
1.10. PC Boards
Inverter PCB ADF PCB
CCD PCB
Inverter PCB PNL1 PCB
MJR PCB
PNL3 PCB PNL2 PCB
DCB PCB Centronics I/F
SC PCB
DRV PCB FXB PCB
LED PCB
LVPS (DP-4510/6010 only)
ACD PCB
SPC PCB
NFL PCB
LVPS for Finisher
APF PCB RLB PCB
Ver. 5.0
35 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2 Disassembly Instructions
2.1. General Disassembly
Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.
i-ADF Scanner Unit

2.2.3. 2.2.4.
Control Panel Unit LSU

2.2.5. 2.2.12.
Paper Exit Transportation Sheet Bypass Unit

2.2.15. 2.2.14.
Fuser Unit Drive Unit

2.2.11. 2.2.17.
ADU Paper Feed Module

2.2.9. 2.2.13.
Bias Charge Unit 3000-Sheet Tray (LCT)

2.2.10. 2.2.19.
Drum Unit Hopper Unit
2.2.8. 2.2.6.
Developer Unit System Console
2.2.7. 2.2.18.
Filters Toner Waste Container PC Boards

2.2.1. 2.2.2. 2.2.16.
Ver. 5.0 36 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2. Disassembly Instructions
2.2.1. Filters
(1) Turn the Power Switches to the OFF position.
(2) Disconnect the AC Power Cord (4911).
(3) Open the Right Cover.
(4) Remove 3 Screws (H8).
(5) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (117).
(6) Remove the Ozone Filter 1 (4204).
(7) Remove the Dust Filter Cover (4217).
(8) Remove the Dust Filter (4218).
Ver. 5.0 37 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(9) Remove the Ozone Filter 2 Cover (106).
<Following steps (11)~(15) are not applied for

USA and Canada>

(12) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (110).
Ver. 5.0 38 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(14) Remove 2 Screws (21).
(15) Pull the Rear Frame 2 (3910) and remove the
Ozone Filter 4 (4226).
Note:
To prevent Rear Frame 2 from warping, do not pull
hard on it.
Ver. 5.0 39 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.2. Toner Waste Container
(3) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (117).
(4) Remove the Toner Waste Container (4108).
Ver. 5.0 40 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.3. Inverting-Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF) Unit
(1) Lift up the Original Tray Assembly.
(2) Clean the Exit Roller (814).
(3) Open the ADF Cover.
(4) Clean the Pickup Roller (511), Paper Feed

Roller (508), Separation Roller (610) and
Registration Roller 1 (817) with a soft cloth,
saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
(5) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).
Ver. 5.0 41 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(6) Remove the Paper Feed Roller Shaft (505)
Assembly in the arrow direction.
(7) Remove the Paper Feed Roller (508).
(8) Move the Pickup Bracket.

(9) Remove 2 Snap Rings (H7).
(10) Remove the Pickup Roller Shaft (510).

(11) Remove the Pickup Roller (511).
Ver. 5.0 42 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(12) Remove 3 Screws (J9).
(13) Remove the Lower Opening and Shutting
Guide 1 (601).
(14) Remove the Separation Roller Assembly.
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Snap Ring is
installed properly as illustrated.
Ver. 5.0 43 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(16) Remove the Separation Roller Shaft (607).
(17) Remove the Separation Roller (610).
Note:
When reassembling the Separation Roller, make
sure that the Yellow Tooler's Die on the side of the
roller is positioned as illustrated (facing the Front
Frame).
(18) Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide 2

Assembly.
(19) Clean the Inverting Roller (809) with a soft
cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
(20) Open the ADF Unit.

(22) Remove the ADF Front Cover (418).
(23) Close the ADF Unit.
Note:
Release 3 Latch Hooks to remove the ADF Front
Cover.
Ver. 5.0 44 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(24) Remove 1 Screw (J2).
(25) Loosen 3 Screws (H8).
(27) Remove the ADF Rear Cover (627).
(28) Remove 1 Screw (21).

(29) Remove the Front ADF Cover Bracket (529).
(30) Release the ADF Cover Arm (624).

(31) Remove the ADF Cover (502) Assembly.
Note:
When reinstalling the ADF Cover Assembly, make
sure that the Vibration Guide Sheet 1 and 2 are
reinstalled properly as illustrated.
Ver. 5.0 45 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(33) Remove the Registration Guide 2 (721).
(34) Clean the Registration Roller 2 (818).
(35) Remove the Snap Ring (G6).

(36) Remove the D8 Bearing (822).
(37) Remove 2 Snap Rings (G6).

(38) Remove the Clutch 1 (801).
(39) Remove the D8 Bearing (822).
Ver. 5.0 46 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(40) Remove the Registration Roller 2 (818).
(41) Remove 2 Registration Guide Sheets 1 (1119)

and 2 Registration Guide Sheets 2 (1120).
Caution:
Do not remove the 3 indicated Screws.
Note:
When reinstalling the Registration Guide Sheet 1
and 2, make sure that the Sheets are placed on
the marks as illustrated.
Mark
Adhesive Double Registration

Coated Tape Guide Sheet
Ver. 5.0 47 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(42) Open the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide
Assembly.
(44) Nudge the Inverting Guide Assembly towards
the right side to open it.

(46) Remove the Inverting Guide Assembly.

(48) Remove the Lower Exit Guide (716).
(49) Clean the Transport Roller (816).
Ver. 5.0 48 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.4. Scanner Unit
2.2.4.1. Scanner Lamp, CCD Assembly
(1) Move the Scanning Lamp to the position where
it can be replaced. (See Sect. 5.1.7. F8-00.)
(3) Remove the Right Platen Cover (112).
(4) Remove the Glass Assembly (120).
(5) Remove 2 Lamp Holding Plates (1204).

(6) Release the Harness from the Clamp.
Ver. 5.0 49 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
<Turn the Inverter PC Board Case upside down>
(8) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the Inverter PC

Board (1209).
(9) Remove 2 Screws (F10).

(10) Remove the Inverter PC Board (1209).
(11) Remove the Scanning Lamp (1228).
Note:
Ensure that the Scanning Lamp Harness is
reinstalled properly as illustrated.
Ver. 5.0 50 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(13) Remove the CCD Cover (1213).
(14) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the CCD PC Board

(CN850 and CN851).
Important:
Before proceeding, make a note of the position of
the alignment pointer. If the CCD is not reinstalled
at the same position, it will affect the copy quality.
(15) Remove 2 Screws (1M).

(16) Remove the CCD Unit (1234).
Ver. 5.0 51 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(18) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the Sensors.
(19) Remove 2 Multi Beam Sensors (1309).

(21) Disconnect the Harness on the Sensor.
(22) Remove the Multi Beam Sensor (1309).
(23) Clean the Mirror 1 (1202) and Mirror 2 (1214).
Ver. 5.0 52 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.4.2. Scanning Motor
(2) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (110).

(4) Remove the Harness Clamp 2 (3501).
(5) Disconnect the ADF Harness.

(7) Remove 2 Screws (P4).
(8) Remove the ADF Unit.
Ver. 5.0 53 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(10) Remove the Left Platen Cover (111).
(12) Remove the Right Platen Cover (112).
(13) Remove 2 Screws (N6).

(15) Remove the Rear Platen Cover (113).
(16) Disconnect the Harness.

(18) Remove the Scanning Motor (1325).
Ver. 5.0 54 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.5. Control Panel Unit
(1) Open the Front Cover.
(2) Swing the Hopper Unit in the direction of the

arrow as illustrated.
(3) Remove the Battery Holder.

(5) Remove the Lower Control Panel Cover (101).
Ver. 5.0 55 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(6) Turn the Control Panel Unit upside down.
(7) Disconnect 4 Harnesses on the PNL1 PC Board

(CN220, CN221, CN222 and CN224).
(9) Disconnect 4 Harnesses on the PNL1 PC Board

(CN223, CN225, CN229 and CN230).

(11) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (8503).
Ver. 5.0 56 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(12) Disconnect the Harness on the PNL2 PC Board
(CN251).
(15) Disconnect the Harness on the INV PC Board

(CN2).
(17) Remove the INV PC Board (329).

(19) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Upper
Control Panel Cover (322).
(20) Remove 1 Screw (F10).

Ver. 5.0 57 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(26) Remove the LCD Module (328).
(27) Remove the Touch Panel (327).
Note:
Reinstall the Battery Holder after reassembling the
Lower Control Panel Cover.
Ver. 5.0 58 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.6. Hopper Unit
(1) Open the Front Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(2) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side.
(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Rotate the Toner Bottle counter-clockwise and
remove it.
(4) Seal the Toner Bottle with the Cap.
(5) Clean any toner residue from the Lower Hopper

Cover (1411).

(7) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Motor
Cover (1413).
Ver. 5.0 59 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8) Disconnect the Harness on the Hopper Motor.

(10) Remove the Hopper Motor (1414).
Ver. 5.0 60 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.7. Developer Unit
(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(4) Remove the Connector Cover (3930).

(6) Pull the Developer Release Lever (3823) out
and turn it clockwise.
(7) Remove the Developer Unit (1632).
(8) Remove the Developer Exchange Knob
(1405).
(9) Remove the old Splash Prevention Sheet

(1602).
Note:
When attaching the new Sheet, make sure that it is
aligned on the left side edge as illustrated.
Ver. 5.0 61 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Developer Cover (1601).
<Removing the old Developer and Toner>
(11) Install the Developer Exchange Knob (1405).

(12) Turn the Developer Unit upside down over a
suitable container and dump the used Developer
and Toner by rotating the Knob.
(13) Remove the Duct Cover (1620).
(14) Clean the Duct Cover (1620) with a soft cloth,

saturated with water.
Ver. 5.0 62 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(15) Clean the Developer Unit (1632) with a dry soft
cloth.
Caution:
Clean the Developer and Toner residue from the
encircled areas thoroughly as shown in the
illustrations.
If not properly cleaned, problems related to static
charge may occur.
If E3-13 occurs, clean contamination on the Bias

Terminal.
Ver. 5.0 63 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.8. Drum Unit
(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Pull the Developer Release Lever (3823) out
and turn it clockwise.
(4) Turn the Lifting Lever (2327) counter-clockwise.
(5) Loosen 1 Screw and remove the Drum Unit.
Note:
When handling the Drum Unit, hold by the Handle
as illustrated.
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.

(7) Remove the Corona Unit (1851).
(See steps (20 ~ 23), for cleaning instructions)
Caution:
The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent
optical exposure problems, do not expose the
OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if
it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).
(8) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Frame

Cover (1805).
Ver. 5.0 64 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(10) Remove the Front Fixation Plate (1822).
(11) Turn the Front Drum Bushing (1820)

counter-clockwise and remove it.

(13) Remove the Rear Fixation Plate (1844).
(14) Turn the Rear Drum Bushing (1842) clockwise

and remove it.
Ver. 5.0 65 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(15) Remove the OPC Drum (1811).
(16) Remove the Blade Pressure Spring (1807).

(18) Remove the Cleaning Blade (1847) Assembly.
Note:
When reinstalling the Cleaning Blade Assembly,
make sure that the Hooks are properly attached.
Ver. 5.0 66 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(19) Release 4 Latch Hooks and remove the Front
and Rear Cleaning Felt (1849, 1848)
Assemblies.
(20) Remove 1 Screw (L9).
(21) Turn the Corona Unit upside down.

(22) Push-in the Grid Base (1910) to unlatch and
remove the Corona Grid (1919).
(23) Clean the Corona Grid (1919) with a soft cloth,

saturated with isopropyl alcohol
Ver. 5.0 67 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(24) Remove the Front and Rear Block Sheets
(1911 and 1920).
(25) Remove the Corona Wire (1915) and the

Tension Spring (1914).
(26) Remove the Cleaning Base 3 (1918).
(27) Clean the Corona Case (1906) with a soft cloth

or a cotton swab, saturated with isopropyl
alcohol.
Ver. 5.0 68 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.9. Auto Duplex Unit (ADU)
(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Turn the Lifting Lever (2327) counter-clockwise.
(4) Pull the ADU Unit out.
(5) Clean the Exit Rollers A and B and C (2520,

2521, 2522).

(7) Remove the Intermediate Paper Guide (2404).
Ver. 5.0 69 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8) Clean the Intermediate Roller (2403).
(9) Clean the Registration Roller (2430).
(10) Pull out the 1st Paper Tray.

(12) Remove the Right Lock Plate (3810).

(14) Remove the Left Lock Plate (3812).
Ver. 5.0 70 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(15) Remove the ADU Unit (2351).

(17) Remove the Lifting Lever (2327).
(19) Remove the Registration Release Knob
(2328).
(21) Remove the Inner Cover (2332).
(22) Remove 2 Registration Guide Springs (2409)

and 2 Front Registration Springs (2413).
(23) Remove the Upper Registration Guide (2402).

(26) Remove the Clutch (2602).
Note:
Ensure the wire terminal is secured on the gear
frame to prevent shorting of the clutch harness.
Ver. 5.0 71 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(27) Remove the Registration Gear (2344).
(28) Remove 2 Snap Rings (K9).
(29) Remove the 2 Bearings (822).

(31) Remove 2 E-Rings (J7).

(32) Remove the Intermediate Roller Gear (2621).
(33) Remove 2 Bearings (2603).
(35) Open the Under Registration Guide (2416).

(37) Remove the Under Registration Guide (2416).
Ver. 5.0 72 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(38) Remove the Registration Roller (2430).
(39) Remove the Intermediate Roller (2403).
Ver. 5.0 73 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.10. Corona Unit 2
(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Pull out the ADU Unit. (See Sect. 2.2.9.)
(4) Remove the Corona Unit 2 (2352).
(5) Remove the Front and Rear Block Sheets

(2307, 2303).
(6) Remove the Tension Spring (2339).

(7) Remove the Corona Wire 1 (2335).
(8) Remove the Tension Spring (1914).
(9) Remove the Corona Wire 2 (2334).

Ver. 5.0 74 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(13) Pull out the LED PC Board (2343).
(14) Remove the LED Knob (2319).
Ver. 5.0 75 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.11. Fuser Unit
(See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(3) Open the Upper Exit Cover.
(4) Push the Release Lever (8136) down in order to

free the Exit Guide 7 (8126).
(5) Remove 2 Screws (N3).

(6) Remove the Fuser Cover (121).
(7a) Disconnect 4 Harnesses. (For DP-4510/4520/

4530/6010/6020/6030)
(7b) Disconnect 5 Harnesses. (For DP-3510/3520/
3530)
(9) Remove the Fuser Unit (2035).
Ver. 5.0 76 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(10) Release the Harnesses from Hooks.

(12) Remove the Solenoid (2012) Assembly.
(13) Remove 1 Screw (K2).

(14) Remove the Solenoid (2012).
(15) Remove 2 Screws (K1).

(16) Remove the Cleaning Web Unit.
Ver. 5.0 77 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(18) Remove the Rear Cleaning Web Frame (2002).
(19) Remove the Cleaning Web Roller (2007) (Red).

(20) Remove the Cleaning Web (2003) (White).
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Cleaning
Web is spread out.

(22) Remove the Ground Plate 3 (2214).
(24) Remove the Lower Paper Exit Guide (2213).
(25) Remove 2 Lower Separator Springs (2210).

(26) Remove 4 Lower Separators (2228).
Ver. 5.0 78 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
<For DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030>
Follow steps (27) ~ (32) below.
[For DP-3510/4510/6010, skip to steps (33) ~ (36)]

(28) Remove the Upper Paper Exit Guide (2223).

(30) Remove the Upper Separator Bracket (2120).
(31) Remove 5 Tension Springs (2219).

(32) Remove 5 Upper Separators (2227).
<For DP-3510/4510/6010>
Follow steps (33) ~ (36) below.

(34) Remove the Upper Paper Exit Guide (2223).
Ver. 5.0 79 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(35) Remove 5 Tension Springs (2219).
(36) Remove 5 Upper Separators (2227).

(39) Remove the Rear Fuser Cover (2031).
(41) Remove 2 Fuser Lamps (2027, 2028).
Note:
1. Do not touch the glass portion of the Fuser
Lamps with bare hands. Grease from finger
prints will shorten its life cycle, use isopropyl
alcohol to clean finger prints.
2. When reinstalling, install the longer harness
toward the rear side.
Ver. 5.0 80 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(42) Release the Harness from Hooks.
(44) Loosen 1 Screw inside of the Jam Release Knob
by turning clockwise.
(45) Remove the Jam Release Knob (2022).
Note:
The Jam Release Knob and Screw are
assembled.

(47) Remove the Front Fuser Cover (2021).

(51) Remove the Thermostat Base (2034).

(53) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (2019).
Ver. 5.0 81 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(54) Remove 1 Screw (B2).
(55) Remove the Upper Front Guide (2102).
(57) Remove the Lower Front Guide (2113).

(60) Remove the Upper Fuser Bracket (2115).
(61) Remove the Fuser Roller (2105).
(62) Remove the Fuser Roller Gear (2108), 2 Fuser

Roller Bearings (2107) and 2 Insulation
Bushings (2106).
Note:
Before removing, note the position and/or direction
of the Gear, Bearings and the Bushings for proper
reinstallation.
Ver. 5.0 82 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(63) Remove the Pressure Roller (2205).
(64) Remove 2 Pressure Roller Bearings (2204).
Note:
Before removing, note the position and/or direction
of the Pressure Roller Bearings for proper
reinstallation.
Ver. 5.0 83 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.12. LSU
(1) Open the Sheet Bypass.
(4) Remove the LSU Cover (115).
(5) Remove the Right Platen Cover.

(See Sect. 2.2.4.)
(7) Remove the LSU Shield Bracket (4009).
(8) Disconnect 3 Harnesses.

(9) Remove the Glass Assembly (120).
(See Sect. 2.2.4.)
Important:
Before proceeding, make a note of the position of
the alignment pointer. If the LSU is not reinstalled
at the same position, it will affect the scanning
quality.
Ver. 5.0 84 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(10) Remove 3 Screws (L1).
(11) Remove the LSU (4030).
(12) Turn the LSU upside down.

(13) Clean the LSU Glass with a soft cloth, saturated
with isopropyl alcohol.
Ver. 5.0 85 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.13. Paper Feed Module
(1) Open the Right Cover (2908).
(2) Clean the Intermediate Rollers (3005, 3010)
with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.
(4) Remove the Right Cover (2908).

(5) Push the Pin and remove the Right Cover
(2908).
(6) Pull out the 1st and 2nd Paper Trays.

Ver. 5.0 86 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(9) Remove the 1st Paper Feed Module.

(11) Remove the Front Feed Guide (3122).
(12) Remove the Bushing 2 (208) and One Way

Clutch (3205).
(13) Lift the Reverse Roller (3219) Assembly and

remove the Feed Roller (3204).
Ver. 5.0 87 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Latches and
the Notches are aligned as illustrated.

(17) Remove the Reverse Roller (3219).
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that the Gears are
aligned and that the Snap Ring is reinstalled
properly as illustrated.
Ver. 5.0 88 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(20) Remove the 2nd Paper Feed Module.
Note:
Follow the instructions for steps (10)~(17) of the
1st Paper Feed Module.
(21) Remove the Snap Ring (G6).

(22) Remove the 3 Intermediate Roller (3005, 3010)
Assemblies.
(23) Remove the Bearing (2603).

(24) Remove the E-RIng (K5).
(25) Remove the Coupling Roller (3001).
Ver. 5.0 89 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.14. Sheet Bypass Unit
(1) Remove the LSU Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.12.)
(2) Clean the Front and Rear Pickup Rollers
(4603, 4611).
(3) Pull out the ADU (2351). (See Sect. 2.2.9.)

Note:
Ref. No. 2351 does not include all individual parts.

(5) Remove the Sheet Bypass.

(7) Remove the Upper Sheet Bypass Guide
(4605).

(9) Remove 2 Stoppers (4601).
(10) Remove 2 Spacers (4602).
(11) Remove the Front Pickup Roller (4611) (White)
and the Rear Pickup Roller (4603) (Black).
Ver. 5.0 90 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(13) Remove the Feed Cover (4638) Assembly.

(16) Remove the Feed Roller (4612).
Ver. 5.0 91 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.15. Paper Exit Transportation
(1) Open the Lower Exit Cover (8011).
(3) Remove the Exit Cover 3 (8003).

(5) Open the Paper Exit Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.11.)
(7) Remove the Plate Assembly.
(8) Clean the Pressure Roller (8311) and Exit

Roller 3 (8312) with a soft cloth, saturated with
isopropyl alcohol.
Note:
Ensure that the Front Cover and the Paper Exit
Cover are opened before reinstalling the Plate
Assembly back into the machine.
Ver. 5.0 92 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.16. PC Boards
(1) Remove the Rear Upper Plate.
(See Sect. 2.2.4.2.)
(2) Disconnect All Harnesses on the DRV PC
Board.

(4) Remove the DRV PC Board (8601).

(6) Remove the SC Cover Bracket (3303).
(7) Disconnect All Harnesses on the SC PC Board.
Ver. 5.0 93 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(9) Remove the SC PC Board (8401).
(10) Remove 2 Screws.

(11) Remove the PRT PC Board (8402).

(13) Remove 1 Screw (M5).
(14) Remove the Rear Lower Cover (108).
(15) Remove the Toner Waste Container.

(See Sect. 2.2.2.)
(16) Disconnect All Harnesses on the SPC PC
Board.
Ver. 5.0 94 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(18) Remove the SPC PC Board (8501).

(20) Remove NFL PC Board (8603) Assembly.
(21) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the NFL PC Board

(CN132 and CN133).

(24) Remove the Finisher Bracket (3508).
Ver. 5.0 95 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(26) Remove the Paper Exit Motor (8127) Assembly.

(29) Pull out 1st Paper Tray.
(31) Remove the LVPS Cover (203).

(33) Pull out the LVPS Assembly.
Ver. 5.0 96 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(34) Disconnect the All Harnesses on the DC PC
Board (CN141, CN142, CN143, CN144 and
CN145).
(36) Remove the DC PC Board (8701).

(38) Remove the Heat Sink (3311).

(40) Remove the LVPS (8702).
(41) Disconnect 3 Harnesses on the ACD PC Board

(CN101, CN105 and CN106).
Ver. 5.0 97 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(43) Pull out the ACD PC Board (8704) Assembly.
(44) Disconnect the Harness on the ACD PC Board
(CN102).
(45) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the ACD PC Board

(CN103 and CN104).
(47) Remove the ACD PC Board (8704).
Ver. 5.0 98 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.17. Drive Unit
(See Sect. 2.2.2.)
(2) Remove the Rear Upper Plate.
(See Sect. 2.2.4.2.)
(3) Remove the Rear Lower Plate and SC Cover
Bracket. (See Sect. 2.2.16.)
(4) Disconnect All Harnesses on the SC PC Board.
(See Sect. 2.2.16.)
(5) Loosen 5 Screws (21).
(6) Remove the SC Bracket (3306).
(7) Release the Harnesses from 2 Clamps.
(8) Loosen 2 Screws (21).

(9) Remove the SC Support Bracket (3305).
Ver. 5.0 99 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(12) Remove the Fan (4219) Assembly.

(14) Remove the Fan (4221) Assembly.

(16) Remove the Rear Cover (9301).

(18) Remove the Rear Frame 2 (3910).
Ver. 5.0 100 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(20) Move the Hopper Unit. (See Sect. 2.2.5.)
(21) Pull out the ADU (2351) and Drum Unit (1852).
Note:
Ref. No. 2351 and 1852 do not include all
individual parts.
(22) Remove the Fuser Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.11.)

(24) Pull out Fuser Unit (2035).

(26) Remove the Flange Cap (2701).
(27) Remove the Fly Wheel (2702).
(28) Remove the Drum Drive Gear (2703).
Ver. 5.0 101 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(29) Remove the Pin (2743).

(31) Move the Harness Bracket (3525).
(32) Disconnect the Harness on the Toner Waste

Sensor.
(33) Disconnect the Harness on the HVPS (CN101).
(34) Lift up the Toner Waste Pipe 2 (4111).
Ver. 5.0 102 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(36) Remove the HVPS Bracket (3611).

(38) Remove the HVPS (8705).

(40) Remove the Belt Cover (2824).
(41) Release the F Belt (2820).
Ver. 5.0 103 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(44) Remove the Fan Assembly.

(46) Release the Harnesses from 7 Clamps.

(48) Remove the Drive Unit.
(49) Remove E-Ring (L2).
Ver. 5.0 104 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(50) Remove the Drum Drive Shaft (2704).
(51) Remove 4 E-Rings (J7 and K5), 2 Snap Rings

(G6), 2 Pins (2840) and 6 Gears (2806 x 2,
2808, 2833, 2834 and 2835).

(53) Remove the Drum Drive Plate (2709).

(55) Remove the Drum Motor (2708).
Ver. 5.0 105 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(56) Disconnect the Harness and release it from the
Clamp.
(57) Remove 2 Screws (M3).
(58) Remove the DC Brower (4220).
Ver. 5.0 106 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.18. System Console
2.2.18.1. 3rd/4th Paper Feed Module
(1) Open the Release Cover (9324).
(2) Clean the Intermediate Roller (3010).
(3) Remove 1 Screw (H8).

(4) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (9319)
(6) Push the Right Cover Shaft (2914) and remove

Release Cover (9324).
Ver. 5.0 107 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(9) Remove 3rd Paper Feed Module.
Note:
Follow the instructions for steps (10)~(17) of the
1st Paper Feed Module.
(10) Remove the 4th Paper Feed Module, by

following the steps for the 3rd Paper Feed
Module.
(11) Remove 2 Intermediate Rollers (3010), by
following the steps for the ones in the Main Unit.
Ver. 5.0 108 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.18.2. Drive Motor, Lift Motor 2, CST PC Board
(2) Remove the Rear Cover (9301).
(3) Disconnect the Harness on the System Console

Drive Motor.
(6) Remove the Drive Motor (9410).
(7) Release the Harness from 2 Clamps.

(8) Disconnect the Harness on the CST PC Board
(CN602).

(10) Remove the Timing Belt (9401) and the Motor
Bracket (9426) Assembly.
Ver. 5.0 109 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(13) Remove 2 Lift Motor 2 (4023) Assemblies.

(16) Remove the Lift Motor 2 (4023)
(17) Disconnect all Harnesses on the CST PC

Board.
(19) Release 5 Locking Supports (9419) on the

CST PC Board.
(20) Remove the APF PC Board (8707).
Ver. 5.0 110 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.2.19. 3000-Sheet Tray (LCT)
(2) Remove the Front Guide (9142).
(3) Clean the Feed Roller (9129).

(5) Remove the Feed Roller (9129).

(7) Remove the Top Cover (8801).
Ver. 5.0 111 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(9) Remove the Guide Bracket (9112).

(12) Remove the Reinforcement Bracket (9101).
(14) Disconnect All Harnesses on the LCT PC

Board.
(16) Release 5 Card Spacers (8903) on the LCT PC
Board.
(17) Remove the LCT PC Board (8408).
Ver. 5.0 112 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2.3. Screw Identification Template
Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only
Ref. No. Part No. Figure Remark
XYN3+J8FJ Screw
16 Screw (See Note)
XYN3+J8
XTB3+8JFJ Screw
19
XTB3+8J Screw (See Note)
XTB3+8FFJ Screw
20
XTB3+8F Screw (See Note)
XTB3+6FFJ Screw
21
XYN3+F8FJ Screw
23
XYN3+F8 Screw (See Note)
XYN4+F8FJ Screw
24
XTB4+8FFJ Screw
25 Screw (See Note)
XTB4+8F
XYN4+F6FJ Screw
35
XYN3+F6FJ Screw
36
XTB4+10FFJ Screw
51
XTB3+12GFJ Screw
6A Screw (See Note)
XTB3+12G
XTW3+8SFJ Screw
6L
DZPB000014 Screw (See Note)
XTB4+6FFJ Screw
1M
XYN3+F5FJ Screw
3F
XTW+6SFJ Screw
3P
Ver. 5.0 113 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only
XYN3+F4FJ Screw
5M
XYC3+FF8FJ Screw
B2
XTW3+8SFJ-TP Screw
C8
XTW3+8SFC Screw (See Note)
XTN3+10GFJ Screw
F9
XTN3+10G Screw (See Note)
XTB3+8GFJ Screw
F10
XTB3+8G Screw (See Note)
G6 FFPFJ0039B Snap Ring
XYA3+EF6FJ Screw
G7 Screw (See Note)
XYA3+EF6
XTB26+8JFJ Screw
H4
XTB26+8J Screw (See Note)
H5 XTB4+10GFN Silver Screw
H6 FFPFJ0033B Snap Ring
H7 FFPFJ0041B Snap Ring
FFPFA01632 Shoulder Screw

H9
FFPFA01631 Shoulder Screw (See Note)
J2 XTT4+8HFN Silver Screw
XTB4+10GFJ Screw
J3
XTB4+8HFJ Screw
J4
XTB4+8H Screw (See Note)
Ver. 5.0 114 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only
XTB3+10GFJ Screw
J5
J6 XUC3VM E-Ring
J7 XUC4VM E-Ring
J8 XUC7VM E-Ring
XTB3+6GFJ Screw
J9
FFPFA01071 Black Shoulder Screw

K1
FFPFA0107B Black Shoulder Screw (See Note)
XSN3+W8FJ-TP Screw
K2
XSN3+W8FC Screw (See Note)
XTW3+12QFJ Screw
K3
Screw (See Note)
XTW3+12Q
XYN4+F16FJ Screw
K4
K5 XUC5VM E-Ring
K6 XUC6VM E-Ring

K7

K8
K9 FFPFJ0043B Snap Ring
XYN4+F12FJ Screw
L1 Screw (See Note)
XYN4+F12
Ver. 5.0 115 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only
L2 XUC9VM E-Ring
XYN26+F6FJ Screw
L3 XYN26+F6 Screw (See Note)
XTN4+34GFJ Screw
L4 Screw (See Note)
XTN4+34G
FFPFA01461 Screw
L5
FFPFA0146 Screw (See Note)
XYC3+FG8FJ Screw
L6
XYC3+FG8 Screw (See Note)
L7 XUC2VM E-Ring
XTB3+4FFJ Screw
L9 Screw (See Note)
XTB3+4F
M4 NS010416 Screw
XYA3+FF6FJ Screw
M5
XYA3+FF6 Screw (See Note)
XTW4+12LFJ Screw
M6
XTW4+12L Screw (See Note)
XTW3+8GFJ Screw
M7
XTW3+8G Screw (See Note)
M8 XTB26+6H Screw
M9 XTB3+8GFN Silver Screw
XSB2+6FJ Screw
N1
XSB2+6 Screw (See Note)
XTB4+6HFJ Screw
N2
XTB4+6H Screw (See Note)
Ver. 5.0 116 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only
XTB4+10FFJ Screw
N3 Screw (See Note)
XTB4+10F
XTN3+12FFJB Blue Screw

N4
XTN3+12FFUBC Blue Screw (See Note)
XTN5+10FFJ Screw
N5
XTN5+10F Screw (See Note)

N6
FFPFA01591 Screw
N7
FFPFA01471 Screw
N8

N9
FFPFA0086B Shoulder Screw (See Note)
B3X6FFJ-RP Screw
P1
B3X6TTS-RP Screw (See Note)
XTB3+6FFJ-RP Screw
P2
XTW3+8LFJ Screw
P3
XTW3+8L Screw (See Note)
P4 PF2217P319A Screw
P5 XTN3+8G Screw
XSN2+5FJ Screw
P6
XSN2+5 Screw (See Note)
P7 FFPFA0152 Screw
XTW3+8PFJ Screw
P8
XTW3+8P Screw (See Note)
Ver. 5.0 117 NOV 2003

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only
XTW4+10PFJ Screw
P9 Screw (See Note)
XTW4+10P
Q1 XYA4+FF10 Screw
XSB3+12FJ Screw
Q2
XSB3+12 Screw (See Note)
XSB2.6+4FJ Screw
Q3
XSB2.6+4 Screw (See Note)
Q4 FFPFA0068B Shoulder Screw
Q5 XTT4+8FFN Screw
DZPA000098 Shoulder Screw

Q6
DZPA000076 Screw (See Note)
Q7 XTW3+8F Screw
B4XFFJ-RP Screw
R1
B4X7TTS-RP Screw (See Note)
R8 XYN4+C6BN Screw
S6 DZPA000086 Silver Screw
Y3 XTW3+6LFJ Screw
Y18 XTB3+4GFN Screw
Ver. 5.0 118 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points
3.1. Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals and consists of machine
cleaning and parts replacement.
It is essential to perform these service activities properly and at the specified intervals
for customer satisfaction.
The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance and image quality.
- You should prepare the necessary PM kits, replacement parts, and tools for
cleaning beforehand.
- After completing the preventive maintenance service, you should discard the
used parts and packaging, in accordance with local regulations and clean
the surrounding area.
- Before servicing the equipment disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.
- Before using solvents such as IPA (Isopropyl alcohol), put on rubber gloves
and eye protection.
1 Timing
- Perform the preventive maintenance service in accordance with the chart of
preventive maintenance areas listed in the service manual.
2 Cleaning of Rollers
- Rollers should be cleaned with water and cloth.
- Use of IPA (Isopropyl alcohol) should be used sparingly.
3 Precautions for Disassembly and Adjustment

CAUTION!
Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left
Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power
Cord from the wall outlet before disassembling the machine.
- After taking the unit apart, do not attempt to operate the machine.
- When operating the machine with covers removed, be careful to avoid clothing
being caught by moving components.
- While electricity is applied, the connectors of any PC Board must not be
connected or disconnected.
- Use of a vacuum cleaner for the cleaning of the TDC sensor could cause
electrostatic damage, therefore, use a blower brush or cotton swab for the
cleaning of these parts. Before vacuuming the developer unit remove the TDC
sensor.
- When handling the drum, the precautions listed in section 3.3.
should be followed.
- Make sure to use the correct screw sizes.
- Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical
continuity.
- To re-assemble, reverse the sequence of disassembly, unless otherwise specified.
- Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating.
Ver. 5.0 119 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4 Precautions for Handling Lasers
The laser optical system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed by
a protective housing and an external cover. Therefore, the laser beam will not
stray or leak during photocopier operation.
However, when servicing the photocopier, take the following precautions:
1. Do not insert into the path of the laser, any screwdrivers or other tools that
have high reflectance properties.
2. Before servicing the photocopier, take off any watches, rings, or other metallic
objects that you may be wearing. (This is to avoid the danger of the laser
entering the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects being worn.)
Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye, please follow the
above precautions for maximum safety.
5 The Safety Interlock Switches

- The service technician may defeat the safety interlock switches by inserting a
interlock cheater into the opening of the switch cover.
- Be sure to remove the interlock cheater from the switch cover after completion
of service.
Ver. 5.0
120 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.2. Required Tools
No. Tools No. Tools

1 Soft Cloth 7 Pliers
2 Isopropyl Alcohol 8 Cotton Swab
3 Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 9 Brush
KS-660 - Conductive Grease
4 Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 10 (Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc.
URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com)
Molykote EM-50L Grease
5 Slotted Screwdriver (3/32 in) 11 (Available from Dow Corning,
URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)
6 Tweezer
3.2.1. Preventive Maintenance Method
Important
No. Part Description Comments
Action
1 Memory Data Check 1. Print the RAM DATA for reference and as a pre-caution.
2. After completing the task(s), print and compare the RAM
DATA with the previously printed one.
2 Auto Document Check & 1. Clean the Rollers and Separation Rubber with Isopropyl
Feeder (ADF) Clean Alcohol when required.
3 Scanner Unit Check & 1. Clean the Scanning Glass or White Seal Guide with
Clean Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
4 Transmitter Unit Check & 1. Remove any foreign obstacles.
Clean 2. Clean the Rollers with Isopropyl Alcohol when required.
5 Mirrors Check & 1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your hands.
Clean Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a soft cloth, saturated with
Isopropyl Alcohol.
6 Inspection Items Check 1. Check the Harnesses.
2. Check the Connectors.
3. Check the Screws. If required, replace consumable parts.
7 Gears, Rollers Shafts Check & 1. Check and grease the required Gears and Shafts.
Grease
8 Timing Belts Check & 1. Check the belts for looseness or abrasion.
Clean 2. Adjust the Idle Pulley.
Ver. 5.0 121 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.3. Preventive Maintenance Points
7 6 5 11 12 3
23
22
8 16
9 18
10
1
24
B
19
4
51
21 20
53
17
52
51
A
46 36
45 50
44 49
43 42 47
48
55 58
41 56
25 57
2 50
47
49
48
50
47
49
48
50
49 48 47
Ver. 5.0
122 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
30
31
34
28
35
33 29
26
32
27
36
37 38 39
DETAIL A
13
14
15
DETAIL B
Ver. 5.0 123 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.4. Preventive Maintenance Check List
Cleaning Replacement/Adjustment
Ref.
No. Mechanical Parts Ref. No. Cycle Cycle
Method Procedure Counter
(Sheet) (Sheet)
Main Unit
1 Ozone Filter 1 4204 - - 240K Refer to F7-02
2 Ozone Filter 2 107 - - 240K Sect 2.2.1. Total Count
3 Ozone Filter 4 4226 - - 240K
4 Dust Filter 4218 - - 240K
i-ADF Unit
5 Pickup Roller 511 120K Alcohol 240K Refer to F7-02
6 Paper Feed Roller 508 120K Alcohol 240K Sect 2.2.3. ADF PM
7 Separation Roller 610 120K Alcohol 240K Count
8 Registration Roller 1 817 120K Alcohol -
9 Registration Roller 2 818 120K Alcohol -
10 Transport Roller 816 120K Alcohol -
11 Inverting Roller 809 120K Alcohol -
12 Exit Roller 814 120K Alcohol -
Hopper Unit
13 Toner Bottle Holder 1402 480K Wet Cloth - Refer to F7-02
14 Toner Bottle Support 1407 480K Wet Cloth - Sect 2.2.6. Total Count
15 Lower Hopper Cover 1411 480K Wet Cloth -
Developer Unit
- Developer - - - 240K *4 Refer to F7-02
16 Splash Prevention 1602 - - 720K Sect 2.2.7. Process
Sheet Unit Count
17 Duct Cover 1620 240K Wet Cloth -
Drum Unit
18 OPC Drum 1811 - - 240K *4 Refer to F7-02
19 Cleaning Blade 1847 - - 240K Sect 2.2.8. OPC Drum
20 Front Cleaning Felt 1849 - - 240K Count
21 Rear Cleaning Felt 1848 - - 240K
22 Corona Wire 1915 - - 120K
(DP-3510/3520/
3530/4510/4520/
4530)
Corona Wire 240K
(DP-6010/6020/
6030)
23 Corona Case 1906 240K Wet Cloth 480K
24 Corona Grid 1919 240K Wet Cloth 480K
25 Toner Waste 4108 - - 240K *4
Container
Ver. 5.0
124 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ref.
(Sheet) (Sheet)
Fuser Unit
26 Upper Separator 2227 240K Wet Cloth 480K Refer to F7-02
27 Lower Separator 2228 240K Wet Cloth 480K Sect 2.2.11. Fuser Web
28 Thermistor Assembly 2019 - - 480K Count
29 Fuser Lamp 2027, 2028 - - 240K
30 Cleaning Web 2003 - - 240K *5
31 Cleaning Web Roller 2007 - - 1,200K
32 Fuser Roller 2105 - - 240K Refer to F7-02
33 Fuser Roller Bearing 2107 - - 720K Sect 2.2.11. Fuser Web
34 Fuser Roller Gear 2108 - - 480K Count
35 Insulation Bushing 2106 - - 240K
36 Lower Front Guide 2113 - - 1,200K
37 Pressure Roller 2205 - - 480K
Assembly
(DP-4510/4520/
4530/6010/6020/
6030)
(DP-3510/3520/
3530)
Bearing (DP-3510/
3520/3530)
Automatic Duplex Unit
40 Intermediate Roller 2403 120K Alcohol - Refer to F7-03
41 Exit Roller 2520, 2521, 120K Alcohol - Sect 2.2.9. 2-Sided
2522 Count
42 Registration Roller 2430 120K Alcohol 1,200K
43 Registration Roller 2331, 2603 120K Alcohol 1,200K
Bearing
44 Transfer Frame 2310 240K Alcohol 480K Refer to
45 Corona Wire 1 2335 120K Alcohol 240K Sect 2.2.10.
46 Corona Wire 2 2334 120K Alcohol 240K
Paper Feed Module
47 Paper Feed Roller 3204 120K Alcohol 240K Refer to F7-03
48 Reverse Roller 3219 120K Alcohol 240K Sect 2.2.13. 1st/2nd/
49 Pickup Roller 3211 120K Alcohol 240K 3rd/4th
Paper Tray
50 Intermediate Roller 3005, 3010 120K Alcohol 1,200K
Count
Sheet Bypass
52 Feed Roller 4612 120K Alcohol 240K Sect 2.2.14. Sheet
53 Pickup Roller 4603, 4611 120K Alcohol 240K Bypass
Count
Paper Exit Transportation
54 Exit Roller 2 8120 120K Alcohol - Refer to F7-02
55 Exit Roller 3 8312 120K Alcohol - Sect 2.2.15. Total Count
Ver. 5.0 125 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ref.
(Sheet) (Sheet)
3000-Sheet Large Capacity Tray
57 Feed Roller 9129 120K Alcohol 240K Sect 2.2.19. LCT Tray
58 Pickup Roller 9107 120K Alcohol 240K Count
Note:
1. Wet Cloth represents a soft cloth saturated with water.
2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module.
To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic
counter - 00 (List print).
3. Cleaning, Replacement and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended
standard paper and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used and/or ambient
conditions.
4. The value is determined under the following test conditions. Four continuous prints per job using 6%
image coverage of LT/A4 size.
5. 240K or 1 year whichever occurs first.
3.5. Resetting the P/M (Preventive Maintenance) Counter

When the machine reaches the preset P/M Cycle, it will show “Call for P/M” or “Replace The Toner Waste
Container” on the LCD Display. The PM Counter can be reset by following the procedures below.
3.5.1. “Call for P/M” (Default: 120K (DP-35xx/45xx), 240K (DP-60xx))

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4.
2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
to enter the Service Mode.
3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-70 (PM cycle) and change to the desired value.
4. Press “FUNCTION” and “C (CLEAR)” keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
3.5.2. “Call for P/M Fuser Web” (Default: 240K)

3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-73 (Fuser web) PM cycle and change to the desired value.
3.5.3. “Call for P/M ADF” (Default: Not shown)

3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-87 (ADF) PM cycle and change to the desired value.
Ver. 5.0
126 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.5.4. U14 “Replace The Toner Waste Container”
A. Blinking Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators
Upon detecting that the Toner Waste Container is full, the machine will complete the current job, and
stop operating.
A blinking Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators will appear on the display.
To continue using the machine temporarily while waiting for the Service Technician, press
"FUNCTION" and "2" keys simultaneously (up to 5,000 copies max.).
B. Steady Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators

Upon reaching the 5,000 copies, the machine stops and will not allow further operation until the
Toner Waste Container is replaced.
Replace the Toner Waste Container. Refer to Section 2.2.2.
Ver. 5.0 127 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.6. Updating the Firmware
The Quickest and Most Reliable Way of Updating the Firmware is to use the Network Firmware
Program Tool (FUP) using Ethernet LAN Port and a Crossover Cable.
The network FUP Tool version must be 3.XX or higher, and it can be found on the CD included with PCL or
PS/PCL options.
Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions and Service Notes for Option Instalation
(8.1, 8.2.) for the details.
3.6.1. Firmware Configuration
A. Hardware Configuration
This machine is controlled by three (3) CPUs which are located on the System Control (SC) PC
Board, the Panel Control (PNL) PC Board and the Scanner Printer Control (SPC) PC Board.
SC PC Board Standard
Configuration
With PCL Option
Configuration
With PS Option
Configuration
On Board (A) (B) (D)

PC F-ROM (1) (2) (5)
Program Program Program
CPU 4 MB
Ethernet Port 4 MB 4 MB 4 MB
PC
Parallel Port Slot 1 (C) 8MB (E) 8MB

(3) (6)
Program Program
(a) (a)
FRM8 PCB 4 MB 4 MB
8 MB (4) (7)
Flash Memory Font Program
Card (b) (b)
4 MB 4 MB
4 MB or 8 MB
Slot 2
FRM8 PCB
8 MB
PNL PC Board
F-ROM Panel Control Program (Display & Key In)

CPU Bitmap Data
4 MB Font Data
SPC PC Board
F-ROM
Scanner Control Program
CPU 512 KB Printer Control Program
B. SC PC Board Firmware
The standard onboard Program Memory (F-ROM) mounted on the SC PCB is 4 MB. Two (2) Optional
Expansion 8 MB Program Memory (FRM8 PCB) can be installed into SLOT 1 and SLOT 2.
The Firmware to be written into the 4 MB onboard, the 8 MB of SLOT 1 / SLOT 2 depend upon the
configuration of the Standard, PCL or PS Options.
(1) Standard
The Standard Program is only written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code (A).
(2) For PCL Option
The PCL Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code
Ver. 5.0
128 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(B). The PCL Control Program (3) and PCL Font data (4) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1.
The Firmware (3) and (4) are assigned as ROM Code (C).
When using 8 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB Program (C) can be written at once.
Using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (C) must be divided by 2 Programs for Program
4 MB (3) and Font 4 MB (4).
(3) For PS Option
The PS Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code
(D). The PS Control Program (6) and (7) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1.
Both Firmwares (6) and (7) are assigned as ROM Code (E).
When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (E) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4
MB card for the PS Control Program (6) and one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (7).
C. Panel (PNL) PC Board Firmware

The 4 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is mounted on the PNL PCB as a standard. The Programs for
Key Scan, Display Control, Energy Save Control, Bitmap Data and Font Data are saved in this Board.
The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from SC PCB.
D. SPC PC Board Firmware

The 512 KB Program Memory (F-ROM) is mounted on the SPC PCB as a standard. The Programs for
Scanner Control and Printer Control are saved in the Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial
Data from SC PCB.
E. Firmware Updating Ports

Three (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware.
(1) Ethernet LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Reliable Way)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Local Area Network (LAN). Refer to the
Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Caution (8.1.) and Service Notes (8.2.) for the details.
(2) Parallel Port (Back up)
The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Parallel Port. The Master Firmware Card
can also be created from a PC via Parallel Port. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation
Instructions, Caution (8.1.) and Service Notes (8.2.) for the details.
(3) Flash Memory Card
The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master Firmware Card. The Master Firmware
Card can be created by copying the Firmware from an existing machine's SC PCB using a 4 MB or
8 MB Flash Memory Card.
It is required 5 Flash Memory Cards to update the SC, PNL and SPC PCBs.
Ver. 5.0 129 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.6.2. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN.
The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover
cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN.
1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Network
Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only.
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool.
The installation password is "workio".
Operating Instructions:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the Network Firmware Update Tool OI on the
CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe
2) Preparing the Firmware Code

Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the
CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted
automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked.
Example:
From:
Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat
Firmware Code File: DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx.exe
DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx.exe or
DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade

Print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copier Service Mode F9-03-00).
Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password.
Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
Ver. 5.0
130 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code
Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the
C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to
upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder

\ DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx \ PNL \ SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx
\ SC_STD \ DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PCL \ DP-SFMBxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \ DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxV2xxxxx
\ DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx \ PNL \ MMK2_PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx
\ SC_STD \ SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PCL \SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx_xx
\ DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx \ PNL \ M25R_PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx
\ SC_STD \ SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PCL \SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx_xx
When you select the Parent Folder, the following

Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders
are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware
Type.
The transferring order is set up automatically.
Note:
1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing
the type of the firmware.
Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection
Tab" of the Operating Instructions.
2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
normal upon completion of the firmware update.
3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will
not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating
through the Parallel Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit.
4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination
location.
5) After the Firmeware Update is completed, enter the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed
in step (3) above.
Ver. 5.0 131 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.6.3. Updating the Firmware using a PC via the Parallel Port
1. Before starting, print the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) Lists.
2. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit (not the side of the unit) to the OFF (O) position.
3. Connect the machine to the PC with a Parallel Printer Cable.
4. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit to the ON (I) position.
5. Install the Panasonic Firmware Programming Wizard software to the PC.
(Refer to the Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions)
6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-01 (Update from parallel port).
Now the machine is ready to accept programming firmware code from the PC.
7. Start the Panasonic Firmware Program using the Wizard.
8. The firmware is copied into the machine.
9. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
10. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-06-00 (Parameter initialize).
12. Disconnect the Parallel Printer Cable from the machine.
14. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the
settings are other than factory default.
3.6.4. Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card

1. Before starting, print the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) Lists.
3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine.
6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update from master card).
7. The firmware is copied into the machine.
8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby.
9. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-06-00 (Parameter initialize).
11. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine.
13. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the
settings are other than factory default.
Note:
After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby mode.
Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.
Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9
Parameters F9-02-xx.
Caution:
If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to 3.6.8. (Firmware Emergency Recovery)
Ver. 5.0
132 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.6.5. Creating a Master Firmware Card
A. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit
1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC

The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Local
Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool.
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:
\xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe

Example:
From:
DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx.exe or
DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx.exe
To:
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Firmware Card
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the
OFF position. (See 3.6.7.)
2. Insert the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the
ON position.
5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.
B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB)
2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine.
ON position.
5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup).
6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card.
7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys
simultaneously to return to standby.
9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.
Ver. 5.0 133 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
ON position.
11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.
3.6.6. Erasing the Master Firmware Card

2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine.
ON position.
5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card).
6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts "Update Program Card?". Press "NO".
7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine.
10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.
3.6.7. Notice after installing the HDD option

After the Hard Disc Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disc Scan Function from being performed (similar
to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below
when turing OFF the Power Switches on the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disc Drive
Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position.
Ver. 5.0
134 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.6.8. Firmware Emergency Recovery
The easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to either use the Local
Firmware Update Tool software by selecting the Independent File method, or using the Master Firmware
Flash Card method (3 Flash Cards required).
Whichever method you select, it is easier to restore the machine's firmware to the Standard (AAV) Type
first as it only requires 3 files to bring the machine to initial working condition. (Install the files in this
order: SC, SPC and PNL).
After recovering, if optional PCL or PS/PCL firmware is required, use the Network Firmware Update Tool
or the Local Firmware Update Tool to update the firmware to the required level.
If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below:
1. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit).
- Before proceeding to the next step, you must prepare either the Local Firmware Update Tool or
create the Master Firmware Flash Cards (read the appropriate sections first).
- If using the Master Firmware Card, insert the Master Firmware Flash Cards in the unit.
2. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
3. When the green lamp on the front panel turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
- If using the Master Firmware Card, the unit will start updating the Firmware code files
automatically.
The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port or Master Firmware Card.
Ver. 5.0 135 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.6.9. Firmware Version
DP-3510/4510/6010
SC : DP-SFDM A A V1xxxx (a) PU (AU)

Destination Code (Fax)
AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
Destination Code (Copier)
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
(When it is divided into (a) and (b))
Firmware Version (V1xxxx)
Language Code
A : A-English, C-French & Spanish
B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese
b : English, French & Spanish
g : German, French & Italian
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B, C, D, E, F : Optional
Model Number
PNL : SFDM PNL A A V1xxxx (a) PU (AU)

AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
(When it is devided into (a) and (b))
Language Code
Firmware Type
A : Standard
Panel
Model Number
SPC : SFDM SPC A A V2xxxx

AA: Fixed
Firmware Type
A : Standard
Model Number
Ver. 5.0
136 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DP-3520/4520/6020
SC : SFD M MK2 A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
Language Code
etc.
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B, C, D, E : Optional
Model Number
PNL : MMK2 PNL A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
Language Code
B : A-English, Spanish,German,
French & Italian
etc.
Firmware Type
A : Standard
Panel
Model Number

AA: Fixed
Firmware Type
A : Standard
Model Number
Ver. 5.0 137 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DP-3530/4530/6030
SC : SFD M25R A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
Language Code
etc.
Firmware Type
A : Standard
B, C, D, E : Optional
Model Number
PNL : M25R PNL A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

AU : USA/Canada
AB : UK
PU : USA/Canada
PB : UK
Division Soft
Language Code
B : A-English, Spanish,German,
French & Italian
etc.
Firmware Type
A : Standard
Panel
Model Number

AA: Fixed
Firmware Type
A : Standard
Model Number
Ver. 5.0
138 NOV 2004
When the following items are replaced or cleaned, perform adjustments in the correct order.
3.7.
Ver. 5.0
Adjustment Toner Image
Toner PWM Copy
Drum Density LSU Density
Optics Density TDC Adj. Adj. Quality
No. Work Unit Sensor Adj. Adj. F6-49 Remark
Clean Sensor F8-09 F6-39/52 (Note 5) Check
Clean Adj. /50/51
Part Item Clean (Note 2) (Note 1)
F8-14 (Note 3, 4)
1 Installation Main 1 2 3 4
2 Cleaning Optics 1 2 3
3 Drum Unit 1 2 3 4 5
4 Toner Density 1 2 3 4
Sensor
5 Replace Exposure Lamp 1 2 3
6 Platen Glass 1 2
7 OPC Drum 1 2 3 4 5
8 Developer 1 2 3
9 OPC Drum & 1 2 3 4 5 6
Developer
10 Corona Unit 1 2
139
11 Drum Unit 1 2 3
12 Toner Density 1 2 3
Sensor
13 TDC Sensor 1 2 3 Replace Developer
14 LSU 1 2 3 4
Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure (Order)
15 SC PC Board 1 2 Input F5/F6 Parameter
1. Copy Quality Adjustment related to the Copier Service Mode F6 Codes.

Add on the QUANTUM Auto Adjustment by Digital Manual Adjustment
Compensation QUANTUM (Read Only) (Digital QUANTUM OFF)
Digital F6-17 F6-18 F6-19 F6-80 F6-82 F6-95 F6-96 F6-97

QUANTUM ON/OFF Grid Laser Bias Laser Grid Laser Grid Bias
Digital QUANTUM: ON Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --- --- ---
Digital QUANTUM: OFF --- --- --- --- --- Yes Yes Yes
2. F6-28, 29 should not be adjusted in the field. (Must be set to "0")

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
1. Copy Quality Check
1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
2) Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).
3) Press "29 QUANTUM Black Density".
4) Press "INPUT" button and enter a number
(0 → 1 or 1 → 0).
5) Press "OK" button twice.
6) Wait approximately 30 seconds.
7) The Machine starts QUANTUM Control automatically.
2. PWM Adjustment
1) It is recommended to make continuous copies (50 ~ 300 copies, depending on the machine model)
to stabilize the Bias Voltage of the Developer.
DP-35xx : 250 ~ 300 copies
DP-45xx : 150 ~ 200 copies
DP-60xx : 50 ~ 100 copies
2) Ensure that Ledger / A3 Size Paper is loaded in one of the Trays, and pull out the remaining trays
(including the bypass tray) to disable them.
4) Press the "8" and "START" keys to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment).
5) Press "17 LSU PWM Pattern 1" to print the Test Pattern.
6) Observe the position of the uppermost visible gray patch.
Sample:
4 gray patches are visible in the illustration, the value of the uppermost patch position is "+2" in
our example.
(-5)
(0)
+2
(+5)
In our sample, 4 patches

are visible.
Test Pattern
7) Press the "OK" button.

Ver. 5.0
140 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9) Press "52 LSU Unit PWM Adjust 1".
10) Press "INPUT" button and enter the value of the gray patch, as established in Step (6).
11) Press "OK" button 2 times.
12) Perform the Service Modes F8-18 and F6-39 in the same manner as steps (4) ~ (10) above.
3. Toner Density Adjustment

2) Press the "2" and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode.
3) Set the exposure to the center position.
Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode.
4) Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown
below. If it is within specification, skip to step (10).
a. Gray scale "1" should not be visible.
b. Gray scale "2" should be clearly visible.
A Not visible
. . . .
. . . . .. . . . .. 1
. . . . . (Not visible or hardly visible)
2 Clearly visible
5) Press the "RESET" key to exit the F2 Mode.

7) Enter F6-50 Mode (T/P Mode Image Density).
8) Press the "INPUT" button.
9) Enter the new content.
10) Enter a 2-digit value.
Note:
The "RESET" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value.
(+) : Lighter side
(-) : Darker side
12) Enter F2 Mode.
13) Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.
Note:
Repeat steps (3) to (10) until proper density is attained.
F6-49 : Text Mode
F6-51 : Photo Mode
14) Press "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
Ver. 5.0 141 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Contrast Adjusting
2) Press the "2" and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode.
3) Set the exposure to the center position.
4) Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown
a. Gray scale "1" should not be visible.
A Not visible
. . . ...
. . . . .. . . . . . 1 . (Not visible or hardly visible)
. .
2 Clearly visible
5) Press the "RESET" key to exit the F2 Mode.

7) Enter F6-55 Mode (T/P Mode Contrast).
8) Press the "INPUT" button.
9) Enter the new content.
10) Enter a 3-digit value.
Note:
(+) : Lighter side
(-) : Darker side
12) Enter F2 Mode.
13) Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.
Note:
F6-54 : Text Mode
F6-61 : Photo Mode
14) Press "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
5. LSU Adjustment
Refer to 3.8.
Ver. 5.0
142 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.8. Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side
When installing the System Console option or replacing the LSU, the following LSU Image Side to Side
adjustment must be performed.
The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory. If copy image is abnormal, adjust it by the following
procedure.
3.8.1. Printer Registration
1. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into the 2nd tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper
size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1).
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-04 to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value.
7. Press "STOP" key first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to
standby.
<Figure>
Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge).
For Ledger or A3, place as Portrait.
For Letter or A4, place as Landscape.
5 mm
Top (Lead edge)
Two lines are printed
5 mm 5 mm
Two lines are printed
3.8.2. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray

1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull
out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
5. Perform the Service Modes F6-10 to F6-15, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
standby.
3.8.3. LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the ADU
1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull
out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them.
4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above.
5. Perform the Service Mode F6-16, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm.
Ver. 5.0 143 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value.
standby.
3.9. QUANTUM Control in F8-14

To stabilize the initial print quality, the contents of the F8-14 function was changed beginning from June '02
production. (Starting with Serial No. FBG2Kxxxxxx)
1. Description of the Change
F8-14 Contents
Toner Density Sensor Go to Image

Current Ready
Output Gain Adj. Quality Adj.
F8-14 Contents
Toner Density Sensor Self-Adjusting Go to Image

New Ready
Output Gain Adj. (QUANTUM) 1min Quality Adj.
2. Field Installation Procedure
* For New machines, use the following procedures at installation.

* For Machines already set up, use the following procedures during PM
1. Make sure that the LAN cable is disconnected before performing F8-09
2. Make sure that paper is set in any paper tray before performing F8-09
3. After performing F8-14, please use the additional procedure manually for all machines
which were produced from Feb '02 to May '02 production.
(Serial No. range .from BBG2Kxxxxxx to EBG2Kxxxxxx)
Additional Procedure
Proceed to Turn Power Wait approx. Self-Adjusting Go to Image

Ready Ready Ready
F8-14 Switch OFF/ON 90 sec. (QUANTUM) 1 min Quality Adj.
3. QUANTUM Control Timing

Refer to the following Table.
.
Ver. 5.0
144 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
QUANTUM Control Timing

QUANTUM works in Copy, Print or Fax mode.
No Trigger QUANTUM Start Timing
1 When F8-09 is performed After performing F8-09
2 At 200, 400, 600, 800 and 1000 prints after F8-09 was Upon reaching the specified
performed number of prints *2
3 Every 1000 prints from 1001 prints after F8-09 was Upon reaching the specified
performed number of prints *2
4 When the F6-28 value is changed Upon returning to F6 initial display

Wait approximately
8 When the Power Switch is turned ON After the Power Switch is turned 30 - 90 sec for the
On QUANTUM to start *1
9 At 100 prints after the Power Switch was turned ON Upon reaching the specified
number of prints *2
10 When the Auto Off mode is cancelled After cancelling the Auto off mode
11 At 100 prints after the Auto Off mode was cancelled When reaching the counters *2
12 6 hours after the previous QUANTUM After reaching the specified

number of prints
13 At 100 prints after the 6 hours lapse from the previous Upon reaching the specified
QUANTUM number of prints *2
14 At 100 prints after canceling U13 Upon reaching the specified
number of prints *2
15 When F8-14 is performed After F8-14 is performed
<Note>
*1) Start timing of QUANTUM:
- QUANTUM starts when the machine is ready (It will not work during copy/print/fax operation)
- The start of QUANTUM may change depending on machine status
*2) Any print value numbers shown above, refers to the Total Counter
Ver. 5.0 145 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3.10. Calibrating the LCD
1. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF (O) position and leave the Power
Switch on the Left Side of the machine in the ON (I) position.
2. Ensure that the F-ROM Card with Firmware Update is not installed in the machine. If the Card is
installed in the machine, remove it.
3. Press and hold the “ENERGY SAVER “ and “FUNCTION” keys down simultaneously, then turn the
Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the ON (I) position and continue holding the keys for
approximately 30 seconds until the Display becomes stable.
The LCD Display starts blinking and shows a “+” on the upper left edge of the display.
Note:
If you do not hold the "ENERGY SAVER" and "FUNCTION" keys down long enogh, the Display may
go OFF.
4. Press the “+” on the upper left edge of the display, press the “+” on the lower right edge and press the
“+” on the center of the display. Then the display goes to stand-by.
Caution:
Prevent any damage to the LCD Display by not pressing with Sharp Edged Objects such as a Ball
Point Pen, etc.
5. Reboot the machine by cycling the power. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to
the OFF (O) then ON (I) position.
Ver. 5.0
146 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4 Troubleshooting
4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart
START
Plug the Power Cord in and turn

the Power Switches ON.
Does the unit power up No

normally?
Does the LCD display No
Yes the function correctly?
Yes Troubleshoot Improper
LCD Display
Troubleshoot any 3-digit

CODE displayed
Does the unit produce No

normal copies?
Yes Does the original document No
feed through correctly?
Yes Troubleshoot the
Document Feeder
Does the recording paper No

exit the unit?
Yes Check for recording
paper path problems.
Troubleshoot communication
problems (transmission,
reception, dialing, polling, Troubleshoot printed
information codes, or copy quality problems
diagnostic codes.)
Ver. 5.0 147 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.2. Improper LCD Display
START
Check connectors: CN52 (SC PCB)

and CN220 (PNL1 PCB).
Yes
Is LED/LCD displayed? Does the display appear normal?
No Yes No
Does CN52, pin 3 on the SC Yes

PCB measure +5 VDC?
No
Replace the LCD No
Replace the SC PCB. Module. Replace the
Touch Panel.
No Replace the Low
Is the trouble Is the trouble resolved?
resolved? Voltage Power Yes
Yes Supply Unit.
END
END
Ver. 5.0 148 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3. Printed Copy Quality Problems
4.3.1. Black Copy
Paper Travel
START
Is the Test Pattern printout in No

Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal?
Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
Is the OPC Drum/Developer No

Unit operational?
Yes Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.
No
Is the PS normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and voltages
on the PS.
2. Check the contacts between
PS and Developer Unit.
3. Replace the PS.
No
Is the SPC PCB normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and voltages
on the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the SPC PCB.
END
Ver. 5.0 149 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.2. Blank Copy
Paper Travel
START

Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.

Unit operational?
Yes
Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.
Are there any foreign particles Yes

or stains in the Charge Unit?
No 1. Clean the Charge Wire
with a soft, dry cloth.
2. Replace the Charge Unit.
No
Is the PS normal?
Yes 1. Check all connectors and
voltages on the PS.
2. Check the Spring Connector
and voltage on the PS.
3. Replace the PS.

or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path?
1. Remove the particles from the
No laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.
No
Is the SPC PCB normal?
voltages on the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the SPC PCB.
END
Ver. 5.0 150 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.3. Vertical White Lines
Paper Travel
START

Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
Is the recording paper damp?
No
Replace the recording paper.
Is the OPC/Developer Unit No

operational?
Yes
Replace the OPC/Developer Unit.

or stains blocking the Laser
Beam path? 1. Remove the particles from
No the laser beam path or clean the stains.
2. Replace the LSU.

or stains in the Corona Unit?
No 1. Clean the Corona Wire
2. Replace the Corona Unit.
Are the Fuser and Pressure No

Roller surfaces clean?
Yes
Clean or replace the rollers.
END
Ver. 5.0 151 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.4. Ghost Images
Paper Travel
AAA
A
START

Yes
Is the recording paper damp? Yes
No

operational?
Yes


Yes
END
Ver. 5.0 152 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.5. Vertical Dark Lines
Paper Travel
START

Yes

operational?
Yes

No
Is the LSU normal?
Yes
Replace the LSU.

Yes
END
Ver. 5.0 153 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.6. Horizontal Dark Lines
Paper Travel
START

Yes

operational?
Yes Replace the OPC/Developer Unit.

No
Is the LSU normal?
Yes Replace the LSU.
No
Is the HVPS normal?

voltages on the HVPS.
and voltage on the HVPS.
3. Replace the HVPS.

Yes Clean or replace the rollers.
END
Ver. 5.0 154 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.7. Dark Background
Paper Travel
START

Service Mode 3 normal? Check the Scanner mechanism.
Yes
No

Unit operational?
Yes
No
Is the LSU normal?
Yes
Replace the LSU.
No
Is the PS normal?
voltages on the PS.
and voltages on the PS.
3. Replace the PS.

Yes
END
Ver. 5.0 155 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.8. Light Print
Paper Travel
START
Is the Test Pattern printout in Yes

No
Yes
No
Replace the paper.

operational?
* Reset the Developer Unit as shown
Yes in the Illustration below.
Yes
Are there any foreign particles or
stains blocking the Laser Unit
path? 1. Remove the particles from the
laser beam path or clean the stains.
No 2. Replace the LSU.
No
Is the HVPS normal?
voltages on the HVPS.
2. Replace the HVPS.
Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller No

surfaces clean?
Yes
END
(1) Pull the Developer Release Lever (3823) out and

turn it clockwise, then turn it counter-clockwise to
reset.
(2) Ensure that the Developer unit is installed
properly by checking 2 Guide Pins are in the
right side of the oval holes.
Ver. 5.0 156 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.9. Horizontal White Lines
Paper Travel
START

Yes
No

Unit operational?
Yes

or stains in the Charge Unit?
No 1. Clean the Charge Wire
2. Replace the Charge Unit.
No
Is the PS normal?
voltages on the PS.
2. Replace the PS.

Yes
END
Ver. 5.0 157 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)
P
START
Yes
No
No
Is the Fuser Unit normal?
Yes Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)
END
Note:
Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat and/or the Thermistor turn into an open-circuit.
Ver. 5.0 158 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.11. Voids in Solid Areas
Paper Travel
START
No

Unit operational?

Yes
END
4.3.12. Black Dots
P
Paper Travel
START

Unit operational?

Yes
END
Ver. 5.0 159 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.13. Recording Paper Creases
Paper Travel
START
No

or stains in the paper path?
No Remove any obstructions and / or
clean the paper path.
Is the recording paper skewing? Yes
No Ensure the paper is set correctly in

the Paper Tray and that the Paper
Guides are properly adjusted.
Are the Fuser and Pressure Yes

Roller surfaces soiled or are
there any foreign particles or 1. Remove any foreign particles
stains in the Fuser Unit? and / or clean the stains.
No 2. Clean or replace the rollers.
3. Replace the Fuser Unit.
END
Ver. 5.0 160 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.14. Poor Printed Copy Quality
START
Is the Test Pattern printout No

in Copier F1 Mode or Fax
Service Mode 3 normal? 1. Replace the SPC PCB.
2. Replace the LSU.
Yes 3. Replace the HVPS.
4. Replace the Developer Unit.
Make a local copy.
No
Is the printed copy correct?
Yes Check the connections of

CN850/851 on the CCD PCB,
CN 55/56 on the SC PCB,
the Scanning Lamp.
Perform a receiving test

with the reference fax unit.
No
Is the received copy correct?
Yes 1. Check CN390 on the FXB PCB.
2. Check CN22/25 on MJR PCB.
3. Check the Telephone Line Cord.
4. Replace the FXB PCB.
Is a poor copy printed only No

when receiving from a
specific transmitter?
Yes Telephone line quality is poor.
The transmitting machine

may be defective.
END
Ver. 5.0 161 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.15. Document Skewing
START
o p y Mode Is the Test Pattern printout No Check the Scanner

C le
Samp in Copier F1 Mode normal? mechanism.
Yes
Is the LSU normal? No Check or replace LSU.

Yes
END
Ver. 5.0 162 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.16. Abnormal Printing
START
Is the recording paper loaded No

in the Paper Tray properly?
Yes 1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide.
2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide.
Is the recording paper size and No

thickness within specification?
Yes Replace with correct paper.
Is the Panasonic Toner No

being used?
Yes Replace with the Panasonic Toner.
Are all switches and sensors No

operating properly?
Yes Adjust, clean or replace.
Yes
Are there any foreign particles
or paper pieces in the receiver
unit? Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces
No from the receiver unit.
No
Do the rollers rotate properly?
Yes 1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches and

springs.
2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.
Is the receiving mechanism No

operating correctly?
Yes Adjust or replace any defective parts.
END
Ver. 5.0 163 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.3.17. Scanned Copy Quality Problems
START
Yes
Is the Xenon Lamp abnormal?
No
Replace the Xenon Lamp.

or paper pieces in the scanning
area? Remove the foreign particles or paper
No pieces from the scanning area.
Yes
Is the scanning area dirty?
No 1. Clean the Scanning Glass.
2. Clean Mirrors 1 and 2.
Are the Transmitting Yes

Rollers dirty?
No Clean the rollers.
Yes
Is the Scanner Block abnormal?
No 1. Check CN (SC PCB).
2. Check CN (CCD PCB).
3. Replace the CCD Assembly.
4. Replace the SC PCB.
END
Ver. 5.0 164 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.4. Troubleshooting the LAN Interface
4.4.1. Checking Network Configuration
START
Print the current Internet Parameters List
Ask the customer for the Pre-Installation

Information form filled out by the Network
Administrator.
Verify this information with the Internet No
Parameters List that you just printed. Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.
Are the Internet Parameters entered
correctly into the unit?
Yes
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet
Mask as the unit
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following

command-line utility: ipconfig /all
Does the displayed Network configuration,

match the following settings of the unit
Internet Parameters ?
No
Default Gateway IP Address:
DNS Server IP Address: Ask the Network Administrator to
Subnet Mask: verify the proper information.
Yes
From the DOS Prompt, enter the following
command-line utility: "route print"
Does the current routing table for the No

Gateway match ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to correct
the routing table on that Gateway.
Does the Default Gateway respond to the No
"ping IP" command ?
Yes Check the power switch, cables and the
current settings of unit.
Does the DNS Server respond to the
No
"ping IP" command ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
Does the unit respond to the No
"ping host name" command ?
Yes Ask the Network Administrator to check the
Default Gateway and system status.
Does the unit respond to the No
"telnet" command ?
Yes Replace the SC and/or LANB PCB
Ask the Network Administrator to verify the

POP/SMTP account and system status.
Ver. 5.0 165 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.4.2. Testing the TCP/IP Network
It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent
manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts.
In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance.
When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to
isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't
work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then
you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring.
In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole
series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers.
As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by
checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s).
In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for
troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are
Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee.
1. System Diagram Model

Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the
Network Administrator.
A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS
server is required.
Network Configuration
Domain Name: labo.pcc.com Network D
PC Client
[210.232.71.18]
js2.labo.pcc.com
WAN
SMTP/POP DNS
Server Server
sv2.labo.pcc.com sv1.labo.pcc.com
[192.168.1.2] [192.168.1.1]
Network A
[192.168.3.0] [192.168.3.254]
[192.168.1.253]
Router (R1)
Network B PC Client
"ping" [192.168.1.0] [192.168.1.4]
ec5.labo.pcc.com
Hub
PC Client
[192.168.3.4]
ec4.labo.pcc.com Network C PC Client
[192.168.4.0] [192.168.4.1]
Panasonic Device fmrt7.labo.pcc.com
[192.168.3.5]
ef1.labo.pcc.com
Ver. 5.0 166 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Checking Current Configuration
Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration.
Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the
following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP.
Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter
settings of the unit:
Default Gateway IP Address:

DNS Server IP Address:
Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid)
For Windows 98 / Me / 2000 / NT / XP

The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:
C:\>ipconfig /all
Windows NT IP Configuration
Host Name : ec4.labo.pcc.com
DNS Servers : 192.168.1.1
Node Type : Hybrid
NetBIOS Scope ID :
IP Routing Enabled. : No
WINS Proxy Enabled : No
NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS : No
Ethernet adapter IBMFE1 :

Description : IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter
Physical Address : 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8

DHCP Enabled : No
IP Address : 192.168.3.4
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway : 192.168.3.254
Primary WINS Server : 192.168.3.18
From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as
follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP
Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.pcc.com
(obtained from the Host Name).
3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity

The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client
(any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to
send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the
packet is echoed back (returned).
Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options
that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n
and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long.
-n count : The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four.
-w timeout : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
Ver. 5.0 167 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PINGing the Unit
C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.pcc.com
Pinging ef1.labo.pcc.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253

PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address)

C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254
Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data:

PINGing the SMTP/POP Server
C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.pcc.com
Pinging sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data:

If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the
destination and the following output is displayed:
C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com
Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.

Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
Ver. 5.0 168 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If the physical destination is far and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option
command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response.
e.g.
-n 10 : The number of echo requests that the command should send.
-w 2000 : Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not
responding.
C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.pcc.com -n 10 -w 2000
Pinging js2.labo.pcc.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data:

4. Tracing a Packet Route

Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to
reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each
particular router to reach the specified destination.
The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each
router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name)
is available, it will be displayed as well.
This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes:

a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you
know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the
communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point
where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with
an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out.
b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be
installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet
to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it
should be upgraded.
To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert <IP Address or Hostname>
Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server

C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.pcc.com
Tracing route to sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
over a maximum of 30 hops:
1 4 ms 2 ms 2 ms 192.168.3.254
2 4 ms 5 ms 5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
Trace complete.
Ver. 5.0 169 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. Managing Network Route Tables
In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join
the two segments needs to know only about these segments.
The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes:
Network Address Netmask Gateway Interface

192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.254
192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.253 192.168.1.253
When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the
ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID
is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network.
IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table.
Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and
sends the packet to router R1.
The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the
router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through
the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took only
a single hop.
When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on
the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it
cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating
"destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator.
Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks,
and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and
clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables, some
are shown below:
• MASK
If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter.
• Netmask
If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it
defaults to 255.255.255.255.
• Gateway
Specifies the gateway.
• METRIC
Specifies the metric / cost for the destination.
All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS.
The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.
Ver. 5.0 170 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is
properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route
print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:
C:\WINDOWS>route print
Active Routes:
Network Address Netmask Gateway Address Interface Metric

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.3.254 192.168.3.2 1
127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
192.168.3.2 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 1
192.168.3.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 1
6. Host Name Query on DNS Server

Windows XP/2000/NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working
properly. This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me.
From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:
C:\>nslookup
Default Server: sv1.labo.pcc.com
Address: 192.168.1.1
NS (Name Server) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t NS labo.pcc.com.
[sv1.labo.pcc.com.]
labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
MX (Mail Exchange) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t MX labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com. MX 10 sv2.labo.pcc.com
A (Address) Record in Domain

From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t A labo.pcc.com
[sv1.labo.pcc.com]
labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
sv1 A 192.168.1.1
sv2 A 192.168.1.2
ec5 A 192.168.1.4
ec4 A 192.168.3.4
ef1 A 192.168.3.5
(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)
Ver. 5.0 171 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command
TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb
terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works.
From Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP
Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server.
For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then,
click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials
and click on the OK button.
Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System.
Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button.
For example,
C:\WINDOWS>telnet
telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5]
220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP18xx V.xx
helo
250 Hello
mail from:test
250 Sender OK
rcpt to:fax@labo.pcc.com
250 Receipient OK
data
354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF"
[Press the Enter Key]

Panasonic Internet Fax
test
test
250 OK, Mail accept
quit
221 Closing transaction channel
Ver. 5.0 172 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.5. Error Codes (For Copier)
The self-diagnostic functions detect troubles in the important components of the copier.
When any trouble occurs, the copier stops.
4.5.1. User Error Codes (U Code)
Note:
Uxx and a message will appear on the Panel Display.
User Error Codes (U Code) Table

Code Item Check Points
U0 Key Counter 1. Card Key is not installed.
2. Key Counter Harness is disconnected.
3. Department Code is not assigned.
U1 Close Front Cover 1. Front Cover is open.
2. Front Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Front Cover Sensor is defective
4. LVPS connector is disconnected.
5. LVPS is defective.
6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
7. SPC PCB is defective.
U4 Close Finisher 1. Finisher is open.
2. Paper is in the output bin.
3. Stapler is empty.
U6 Close Right Cover 1. Right Cover is open.
2. Right Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Right Cover Sensor is defective.
U7 Close Right Cover Lower 1. Right Cover is open.
(System Console) 2. Right Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Right Cover Sensor is defective.
U9 Close Left Cover 1. Left Cover is open.
2. Left Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Left Cover Sensor is defective.
U12 Close Finisher Staple Cover 1. Close Finisher Staple Cover.
/ Upper Cover 2. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor is defective.
U13 Add Toner 1. Toner Bottle is incorrectly installed.
2. Low Toner.
3. Toner Sensor is disconnected.
4. Toner Sensor is defective.
Ver. 5.0 173 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
User Error Codes (U Code) Table
U14 Replace Toner Waste 1. Toner Waste Container is full.
Container (See Sect. 3.5.4.)
U15 No Toner Waste Container 1. Toner Waste Container is not installed.
2. Toner Waste Container Sensor is disconnected.
3. Toner Waste Container Sensor is defective.
U16 No Developer Unit 1. Developer Unit is not installed.
U18 Total Copy Limit Over 1. Department Copy Counter is full.
U20 Close ADF Cover 1. ADF Cover is open.
2. ADF is not installed correctly.
3. ADF Cover Sensor is disconnected.
4. ADF Cover Sensor is defective.
U21 Close ADF 1. ADF and ADF Cover are open.
2. ADF Sensor is disconnected.
3. ADF Sensor is defective.
U30 Close Punch Cover 1. Punch Cover is open.
2. Punch Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Punch Cover Sensor is defective.
U31 Remove Paper in Saddle 1. Paper Jam in the Saddle Unit.
Unit 2. Paper Sensor is disconnected.
3. Paper Sensor is defective.
U32 Close Saddle Unit Cover 1. Saddle Unit Cover is open.
2. Saddle Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Saddle Cover Sensor is defective.
U33 No Saddle Staple Unit 1. Staple Unit is not installed properly.
U34 Close Saddle Unit Front 1. Saddle Unit Front Cover is open.
Cover 2. Saddle Front Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Saddle Front Cover Sensor is defective.
U35 Close Saddle Unit Exit 1. Saddle Unit Exit Cover is open.
Cover 2. Saddle Exit Cover Sensor is disconnected.
3. Saddle Exit Cover Sensor is defective.
U90 Replace Battery 1. Internal battery requires replacement.
Ver. 5.0 174 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.5.2. Jam Error Codes (J Code)
DA-FS330 DA-FS355 DA-FS600 DA-FS605 J

Misfeed Indication
F on the Touch
H D C Panel Display
H H
H B
I I
G
E A
Section Jam Location

A 3rd/4th Paper Feed Unit
B Paper Transport Area
C ADU Area
D Developing Area
E Paper Inverting Unit
F ADU Area
G LCT Area
H Finisher
I Saddle Finisher
J i-ADF
• J Code Log View Mode (DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030)

The 5 most recent J Codes can be displayed on the Panel Display by pressing “Function” and “3” keys in
Standby mode.
Note:
If the machine is jammed, follow the procedure below.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to
the OFF position. (If Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the
machine to the OFF position first. After wating approximately 10 seconds, turn the Main Power
Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position.)
2. Remove the Jammed paper.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
4. Press the “Function” and “3” keys.
Ver. 5.0 175 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
• Jam Sensor Location of Printer
Fuser Unit
Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensor
Inverting Exit
Sensor Timing Sensor
Registration
Sensor
Inverting Paper
Sensor Paper Path
Sensor
ADU Entrance
Sensor
ADU Intermediate 1st Paper Path
Sensor Sensor
ADU Exit Intermediate
Sensor Roller Sensor
2nd Paper Path

Sensor
System Console
Inverting Paper Paper Path Sensor
Path Sensor
3rd Paper Path
Sensor
4th Paper Path

Sensor
• Jam Sensor Location of i-ADF

ADF Registration ADF Registration
Sensor 1 Sensor 3
ADF Registration ADF Exit

Sensor 2 ADF Selection
Sensor
Sensor
Ver. 5.0 176 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Jam Error Codes (J Code) Table

Code Contents Section
J00 The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the C
paper starts feeding. (Sheet Bypass)
J01 The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after B
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (1st Feeder Unit)
J02 The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after B
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (2nd Feeder Unit)
J03 The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after A
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (3rd Feeder Unit)
J04 The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after A
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (4th Feeder Unit)
J06 The LCT Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after G
the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (LCT Feeder Unit)
J07 The Timing Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the paper B
starts feeding from 1st Feeder Unit.
J08 The Timing Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper A, B
Feed Roller starts rotating in the 2nd/3rd/4th Feeder Unit.
J09 The Timing Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper B, G
Feed Roller starts rotating in the LCT Unit.
J11 The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the B
Paper Path Sensor is activated.
J12 The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the B
J13 The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the A
J14 The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the A
J16 The LCT Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the B, G
J17 The Timing Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Paper Path B, C
Sensor is activated.
J18 The Registration Sensor does not detect within a predetermined time after the Timing B, C
J19 The Registration Sensor does not detect within a predetermined time after the ADU C, F
J21 The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time during B
initialization.
J22 The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time during B
initialization.
J23 The 3rd Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. A
J24 The 4th Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. A
J26 The LCT Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. B, G
J27 The Timing Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. B
J28 The Intermediate Roller Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. B
J29 The 3rd/4th Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. A, B
J30 The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor C
is activated. (Sheet Bypass)
J31 The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor C
is activated. (Except Sheet Bypass)
Ver. 5.0 177 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
J33 The Registration Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode. C
J40 The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time C, D
after the Registration Sensor is activated.
J41 The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after C, D
the Sensor is activated.
J42 The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode. C, D
J43 The Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Fuser C, D
Unit Paper Exit Sensor is activated.
J44 The Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time. C, D
J45 The Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time, during non- C, D
printing mode.
J50 The Inverting Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the C, D
Inverting Roller starts turning.
J51 The Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Inverting C, D
Exit Sensor is activated.
J52 The Inverting Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after the C, D
Inverting Exit Sensor is activated.
J53 The Inverting Paper Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time, C, D, E
during non-printing mode.
J54 The Inverting Paper Path Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time, E
J55 The Inverting Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time, during C, D
non-printing mode.
J60 1. The Finisher Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined H
time after Exit Sensor is activated.
2. The Finisher Registration Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined
time after Finisher Registration Sensor is activated.
3. The Finisher Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after
Finisher Registration Sensor is activated.
4. The Finisher Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time
after Finisher Exit Sensor is activated.
5. The Finisher Registration Sensor or the Finisher Exit Sensor keeps detecting
paper.
6. The next paper was detected while the current paper is still in the Finisher.
7. The Finisher Door was opened while the paper is passing through the Finisher.
J61 The stapler is not activated correctly. H
J62 The Paper is Jammed in the Inverter. H
J63 1. The Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time in the I
Saddle.
2. The Paper Path Sensor keeps detecting paper in the Saddle.
3. Either one of the above Sensors keeps detecting paper in the Saddle during
non-printing mode.
4. The Saddle Door was opened while the paper is passing through the Finisher.
J64 The Puncher is not activated correctly. H
J70-79 (See the following table below)
J80 The Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU) Entrance Sensor does not detect paper within a D, E, F
predetermined time.
J81 The ADU Intermediate Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time F
after ADU Entrance Sensor is activated.
Ver. 5.0 178 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
J82 The ADU Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after ADU F
Middle Sensor is activated.
J83 The ADU Entrance Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has F
lapsed.
J84 The ADU Intermediate Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has F
lapsed.
J85 The ADU Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has lapsed. F
J86 The ADU Entran0ce Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has F
lapsed, during non-printing mode.
J87 The ADU Intermediate Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has F
lapsed, during non-printing mode.
J88 The ADU Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has lapsed, F
J89 One of the ADU Sensors detects paper during non-printing mode. F
J91 A Paper Tray is pulled out when feeding a paper. A, B
J92-94 (See the following table below)
J97 After passing the Registration Sensor (Roller), the Paper does not clear the sensor C, D
within a predetermined time period.
J98 The VRDY Signal is not ON after a predetermined time has lapsed. C, B
J99 No VSNC Signal within a predetermined time after VRDY Signal is activated. C
<J70~79, 92, 93 and 94 Codes>

DP-3520/ DP-3510/
3530/4520/ 4510/6010
Contents Section
4530/6020/
6030
J70 J70 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 does not detect paper within a J
predetermined time in the ADF.
J71 J71 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps detectiong paper after a J
predetermined time in the ADF.
J72 J70 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a J
predetermined time after the ADF Registration Sensor 1 is
activated.
2. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a
predetermined time after the ADF Registration Sensor 3 is
activated.
J73 J71 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 keeps detecting paper after the J
ADF Registration Sensor 1 is deactivated.
2. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 keeps detecting paper after the
ADF Registration Sensor 3 is deactivated.
J74 J71 The ADF Exit Sensor does not detect paper during 1-Sided / 2-Sided J
Scanning.
J75 J71 The ADF Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper during 1-Sided / 2-Sided J
Scanning.
J76 J71 The ADF Selection Sensor does not detect paper during 2-Sided J
Scanning.
J77 J71 The ADF Registration Sensor 3 keeps detecting paper during the J
Back Page Scanning.
Ver. 5.0 179 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DP-3520/ DP-3510/
3530/4520/ 4510/6010
Contents Section
4530/6020/
6030
J78 J71 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 3 does not detect paper after the J
Face Page is scanned, during 2-Sided Scanning.
2. The ADF Selection Sensor keeps detecting paper during 2-Sided
Scanning.
J79 J70 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps detecting paper in the ADF. J
J92 J70 The paper is not detected. J
J93 J70 The paper remained in the ADF. J
J71
J94 J71 The ADF does not go off after the predetermined time. J
4.5.3. Mechanical Error Codes (E Code)
E1: Optical Unit Error

Code Function Check Points
E1- 01 Abnormal Platen Glass 1. Home Position Sensor connector is disconnected.
scanning 2. Home Position Sensor is defective.
3. Scanner Motor connector is disconnected.
4. Scanner Motor is defective.
5. Scanning Mechanism is defective.
6. DRV PCB connector is disconnected.
7. DRV PCB is defective.
E1- 20 Laser Unit horizontal 1. LSU connector is disconnected.
synchronization 1 2. LSU is defective.
E1- 21 Laser Unit horizontal 1. LSU connector is disconnected.
synchronization 2 2. LSU is defective.
E1- 22 Polygon Motor synchronization 1. Polygon Motor connector is disconnected.
3. Polygon Motor is defective.
E1- 31 Scanning Lamp 1. Scanning Lamp connector is disconnected.
(does not turn On) 2. Scanning Lamp is defective.
5. SC PCB is defective. (Check F4 Chip Fuse)
Ver. 5.0 180 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
E2: Lift DC Motor Error

E2- 01 Lift Motor rotation 1. Level Sensor connector is disconnected.
(1st Paper Tray) 2. Level Sensor is defective.
E2- 02 Lift Motor rotation 3. Lift Mechanism is defective.
(2nd Paper Tray) 4. Lift Motor connector is disconnected.
E2- 03 Lift Motor rotation 5. Lift Motor is defective.
(3rd Paper Tray) 6. LVPS connector is disconnected.
E2- 04 Lift Motor rotation 7. LVPS is defective.
(4th Paper Tray) 8. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
10. APF PCB connector is disconnected.
11. APF PCB is defective.
12. Paper Feed Module connector is disconnected.
E2- 06 LCT ascending operation (UP) 1. LCT connector is disconnected.
E2- 07 LCT descending operation 2. Upper Limit Sensor connector is disconnected.
(DOWN) 3. Upper Limit Sensor is defective.
4. Lift Mechanism is defective.
5. Lift Motor connector is disconnected.
6. Lift Motor is defective.
7. Lower Limit Sensor connector is disconnected.
8. Lower Limit Sensor is defective.
9. LCT PCB connector is disconnected.
10. LCT PCB is defective.
E2- 10 System Console Drive Motor 1. System Console Cable is disconnected.
rotation 2. Drive Mechanism is defective.
3. Drive Motor connector is disconnected.
4. Drive Motor is defective.
5. APF PCB connector is disconnected.
6. APF PCB is defective.
E3: Development System Error

E3- 01 Toner Bottle Motor rotation 1. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor connector is
disconnected.
2. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor is defective.
3. Toner Bottle Motor connector is disconnected.
4. Toner Bottle Motor is defective.
5. Toner Bottle Motor Drive Mechanism is defective.
6. Toner Bottle is installed incorrectly.
Ver. 5.0 181 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
E3- 03 Toner Density Sensor gain 1. Sensor connector is disconnected.
2. Sensor is defective.
E3- 10 High Voltage Power Supply 1. HVPS connector is disconnected.
leak (1) - Grid Charge Voltage 2. HVPS is defective.
E3- 11 High Voltage Power Supply 3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
leak (2) - Separation Voltage 4. SPC PCB is defective.
E3- 12 High Voltage Power Supply 5. Corona Wire is abnormal. (Check for: contamination
leak (3) - Transfer Current with foreign particles, broken, not installed in the
proper position or the tension is loose)
E3- 13 High Voltage Power Supply 1. HVPS connector is disconnected.
leak (4) - Developer AC Bias 2. HVPS is defective.
5. Developer Unit Bias Terminal is contaminated with
Toner.
E3- 20 Main Motor rotation 1. Drive Mechanism is defective.
2. Main Motor connector is disconnected.
3. Main Motor is defective.
E3- 21 Dust Collection Fan Motor 1. Dust Collection Fan connector is disconnected.
rotation 2. Dust Collection Fan is defective.
E3- 23 Suction Fan rotation 1. Suction Fan connector is disconnected.
2. Suction Fan is defective.
E3- 24 Ozone Fan 2 rotation 1. Ozone Fan 2 connector is disconnected.
2. Ozone Fan 2 is defective.
Ver. 5.0 182 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
E3- 25 Drum Motor rotation 1. Drum Drive Gear is defective.
2. Drum Drive Mechanism is defective.
3. Drum Unit is defective.
4. Drum Motor connector is disconnected.
5. Drum Motor is defective.
E3- 40 Copy Density Sensor output 1. Sensor connector is disconnected.
adjustment 2. Sensor is defective.
E3- 51 Corona Wire cleaning 1. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 connector is
disconnected.
2. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 is defective.
3. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 connector is
disconnected.
4. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 is defective.
5. Cleaner Motor Drive Mechanism is defective.
6. Corona Mechanism is defective.
7. Cleaner Motor connector is disconnected.
8. Cleaner Motor is defective.
E3- 60 Toner Waste collection 1. Toner Waste pipe is clogged up.
2. Toner Waste Mechanism is defective.
(Refer to Flow Chart below)
3. Lock Detect Sensor connector is disconnected.
4. Lock Detect Sensor is defective.
Ver. 5.0 183 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
START
Make a Copy. Yes Check the "Check Points"

Does E3-60 Error still occur? again.
No
Does CN764-6 on DRV No Make the Lock Detect

PCB measure +5 VDC? Sensor OFF.
Yes (Refer to Procedure below)
END
(1) Remove the Drum Unit. (See Sect 2.2.8.)

(2) Turn the Toner Waste Screw Gear towards the
Arrow direction until you hear a click.
E4: Fuser Unit Error

E4- 01 Fuser Warm-up Temperature 1. Fuser Thermistor is dirty.
2. Thermistor position is incorrect.
3. Fuser temperature is low. (Adjust F6-31)
4. Thermistor is defective.
5. Fuser Lamp connector is disconnected.
6. Fuser Thermostat is defective.
7. Fuser Lamp is defective.
8. HTC PCB connector is disconnected.
9. HTC PCB is defective.
E4- 02 Paper Jam 1. Paper Jam in Fuser Unit.
2. Paper Exit Sensor 1 or 2 is disconnected.
3. Paper Exit Sensor 1 or 2 is defective.
E4- 10 Exhaust Fan Motor (1) rotation 1. Exhaust Fan connector is disconnected.
2. Exhaust Fan is defective.
E4- 11 Exhaust Fan Motor (2) rotation 3. LVPS connector is disconnected.
E4- 12 Exhaust Fan Motor (3) rotation 5. LPC PCB is defective.
Ver. 5.0 184 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
E5: System Error

E5- 01 Vp (+24V, printer) 1. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
E5- 05 Vp (+24V, scanner) 2. SPC PCB is defective.
E5- 11 Printer Engine Communication 1. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
abnormal 2. SPC PCB is defective.
E5- 12 Scanner Engine 3. SC PCB connector is disconnected.
Communication abnormal 4. SC PCB is defective.
E5- 17 Scanner synchronization
E5- 19 Scanner Line synchronization
E5- 22 Finisher communication 1. SPC PCB connector is disconnected.
3. IPC PCB is disconnected.
4. IPC PCB is defective.
5. Finisher Interface Cable is disconnected.
6. OP LVPS connector is disconnected.
7. OP LVPS is defective.
8. DC PCB connector is disconnected.
9. Finisher is defective.
E5- 40 Sort Memory Abnormal 1. Sort Memory defective.
2. SC PCB connector is disconnected.
3. SC PCB defective.
E5- 42 Total Counter connection 1. Total Counter connector is disconnected.
2. Total Counter is defective.
E5- 60 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1. Cooling Fan connector is disconnected.
Motor rotation 2. Cooling Fan is defective.
Ver. 5.0 185 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
E7: Optional Unit Error

E7- 20 Finisher Paper Transport Motor See Sect. 11 Finisher Options.
E7- 21 Finisher Paper Exit Motor
E7- 22 Finisher Damper Motor
E7- 23 Finisher Staple Motor
E7- 24 Finisher Staple Sift Motor
E7- 25 Finisher Paper Height Sensor
E7- 26 Finisher Backup RAM Data
E7- 27 Finisher Tray Lift Motor
E7- 28 Finisher Punch Motor
E7- 29 Finisher Punch Shift Motor
E7- 40 Finisher Saddle-Stitch
Communication
E7- 41 Finisher Saddle Positioning
Plate Motor
E7- 42 Finisher Saddle Folding Motor
E7- 43 Finisher Saddle Guide Motor
E7- 44 Finisher Saddle Alignment
Motor
E7- 45 Finisher Saddle Rear Staple
Motor
E7- 46 Finisher Saddle Front Staple
Motor
E7- 47 Finisher Saddle Push Motor
E7- 48 Finisher Swing Motor
E7- 49 Finisher Sensor Connector
E7- 50 Finisher Micro Switch
E7- 51 Finisher Delivery Motor See Sect. 11 Finisher Options.
E7- 52 Finisher Paddle Motor For DA-FS355/355A, DA-SP41 only.
E7- 53 Finisher Saddle Folding Sensor
E7- 54 Finisher Punch Communication
E7- 55 Finisher Punch Power Supply
E7- 56 Finisher Punch Registration
Sensor
E7- 57 Finisher Punch Sensor
(Horizontal Registration)
E7- 58 Finisher Punch Sensor
(Waste Full))
E7- 90 Hardware Key Abnormal 1. Incorrect Hardware Key is installed.
2. Hardware Key is defective.
Note:
These error codes will appear only when the optional accessories are installed. Refer to the appropriate
Optional Unit Service Manual.
Ver. 5.0 186 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
E13: Out of Toner

E13 Toner Sensor 1. Toner Bottle is not installed correctly.
2. Out of Toner.
3. Toner Sensor is disconnected.
4. Toner Sensor is defective.
Ver. 5.0 187 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.6. Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)
Fax Information Codes

Code Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause
012 RCV C, D The length of the received Transmitter Document Jam.
document is over 2 m.
030 XMT B Read Point Sensor does not Document is not set properly.
activate within 10 seconds after Defective Read Point Sensor.
the document starts feeding.
031 XMT C Transmitting document was longer The document may jam.
COPY than 2,000 mm (or 78.7 in). Defective Read Point Sensor.
(Super Fine: 1,000 mm (or 39.4
in), 600 dpi: 430 mm (or 16.2 in))
061 - A ADF Door is open. Cover is not firmly closed.
Connectors are not firmly connected.
200 RCV C Decoding process is not Defective FXB PCB.
completed at the end of phase C.
212 XMT A-E Interface error occurred between Modem is defective. (FXB PCB)
RCV the CPU and modem. Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)
301 XMT System fault. Software problem occurred. (SC PCB)
RCV
331 XMT C 8-minutes timer error.
(Germany only)
400 XMT B T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed Wrong number is dialed and the START
without detecting 300 bps signal. button is pushed.
Telephone line is disconnected while
dialing.
FXB PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB is
defective.
Receiver is defective. (It may only be
transmitting CED)
401 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver Your machine's ID Number is not
while transmitter is waiting for CFR programmed.
or FTT. Possible incompatibility or incorrect
Password (Password Reception,
Selective Receive).
Mailbox is full.
402 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver Receiver working in non-CCITT mode
while transmitter is waiting for only. (Possible incompatibility)
NSF/DIS.
403 RCV B Transmitter had no polling "POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) is
(Polling) function. not set at the transmitter.
Document to be transmitted is not
placed at the transmitter.
404 XMT B Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS) Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR
followed by TCF three times, but PCB, etc.)
the receiver did not respond. (CFR FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.
or FTT is usually returned) Receiver disconnects line during first
NSS (or DCS) is transmitted.
Ver. 5.0 188 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
405 XMT B Transmitter received FTT after it Line quality is poor. (TCF is damaged
transmitted TCF at 2400 bps. due to line noise)
Received RTN after Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR
communicating at 2400 bps. PCB, etc.)
FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.
406 RCV B XMT-Password mismatched. RCV- XMT, RCV password does not match.
(Password Password mismatched. Selective Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with
Comm.) RCV incomplete. the last 4 digits of Auto Dial telephone
number.
407 XMT D Transmitter received no response Receiver is defective. (No paper, paper
after it transmitted post message, jamming, etc.)
such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or Receiver ceased receiving because of
received DCN. excessive error. (Line quality is poor)
FXB PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB is
defective.
408 XMT D Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with error. (Line
transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM. quality is poor)
Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR
PCB, etc.)
409 XMT D Transmitter receives PIN after it Receiver receives data with error due to
transmitted a post message, such poor line quality, and receiving operator
as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc. requests voice contact.
Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR
PCB, etc.)
410 RCV D Received DCN while waiting for Interface or line is faulty.
post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, Transmitter is defective.
etc.)
411 RCV B Received DCN after transmitting Transmitter is not ready for polling
(Polling) NSC. communication.
Password does not match between
transmitter and receiver.
412 G3 RX B, D No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter is defective.
NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After FXB PCB is defective.
transmitting FTT)
414 RCV B No response received after Password does not match between
(Polling) transmitting 3rd NSC. transmitter and receiver.
Transmitter is defective. (No original,
document jam, etc.)
415 XMT B Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your
(Polling) message from your machine in machine does not have the polling
polling communication. transmission feature.
416 RCV D Receiver did not detect post Transmitter is defective.
command, such as EOP, MPS, Line quality is poor. (RTC signal is
EOM, etc. distorted due to line noise)
417 RCV C Receiver returned RTN in Line quality is poor. (There are
response to post message. excessive errors in received data)
Ver. 5.0 189 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
418 RCV C Receiver transmitted PIN in Line quality is poor. (There are
response to PRI-Q from excessive errors in received data)
transmitter. (Transmitting operator FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.
requests voice contact)
420 RCV B T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without There is wrong incoming call.
detecting 300 bps signal. (Non-facsimile communication)
Transmitter is defective.
421 RCV B Busy Tone is detected after Remote station disconnected the line.
sending NSF Signal. Wrong number is dialed.
422 XMT B Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC There is an incompatibility.
(or DTC) was invalid.
427 G3 B DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS The interface is incompatible.
RCV transmitted.
433 XMT B, D T.30 Protocol abnormal. Defective remote station.
RCV
434 XMT or RCV B CD (response from Modem) did Remote unit is defective.
not turn OFF within 180 sec. after FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.
receiver detected FLAG signal.
436 G3 RX C DCN received after transmitting Transmitter is defective or incompatible.
FTT. Line quality is poor.
456 RCV B Received relay transfer request or
confidential document to distribute
to an end receiving station or all
confidential mailboxes are used.
457 RELAY XMT B Remote unit does not have
CONF. XMT/ Relayed XMT or Confidential
POLL Comm. capability.
459 RCV C Failed training in Phase C. Line quality is poor. (Training signal is
distorted due to line noise)
490 RCV C Sum of error lines exceeded the Line quality is poor.
limit (Function Parameter No. 70) FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.
of 64 lines.
494 RCV C Interval between two EOLs was Transmitter is defective.
more than 10 sec. when receiver Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged
received message data. due to line noise)
495 XMT C During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected.
RCV or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective.
During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.
current.
496 XMT C CS of modem is not able to turn FXB PCB is defective.
ON.
501 XMT/ B Incompatible Modem on the
RCV(V.34) Remote unit.
502 XMT/ B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected.
RCV(V.34) or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective.
During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.
current.
Ver. 5.0 190 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
503 XMT/ B, C, D CS of modem is not able to turn FXB PCB is defective.
RCV(V.34) ON during training. Line is disconnected.
504 RCV/V.34 B Polling is rejected from the remote No polling original is set.
(Polling) station.
505 XMT/V.34 B Polling XMT is rejected. No polling original is set.
(Polling)
540 XMT ECM B No response after transmitting 3rd Incompatible interface.
CTC or DCN received.
541 XMT ECM D No response after transmitting 3rd Line is faulty.
EOR or received DCN. MJR PCB abnormal.
542 XMT ECM D No response to the 3rd RR Remote unit is abnormal.
transmitted or received DCN.
543 XMT ECM D T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without Remote unit is abnormal.
MCF.
544 XMT ECM D Stopped Transmission after EOR Line is faulty.
Transmission. MJR PCB abnormal.
550 RCV ECM C Timer between frames in phase C Defective remote station.
has elapsed.
554 RCV ECM D Transmitted ERR after receiving Faulty line.
EOR.
555 RCV ECM D Transmitted PIN after receiving Faulty line and Operator Call requested
EOR. by RX side.
570 RCV B Password or machine code did not
match during remote diagnostic
communication.
571 XMT B Remote unit did not have the
remote diagnostic function.
580 XMT B Sub-address transmission to a unit Sub-address transmission to a unit that
that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit has no Sub-address function.
155) OFF.
581 XMT B Sub-address Password Sub-address transmission to a unit that
transmission to a unit that has their has no Sub-address function.
DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF.
582 XMT B Sub-address SEP (for Polling) Sub-address transmission to a unit that
transmission to a unit that has their has no Sub-address function.
DIS bit 47 (NSF bit 130) OFF.
601 XMT ADF Door was opened during ADF
transmission.
623 XMT A No original was in the ADF. (Built- Operator removed the original from the
in dialer engaged) ADF after dialing was completed.
Original was not set properly in the ADF.
630 XMT or RCV B Redial count over. No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone
(Polling) is not detected. (Country dependent)
Busy tone is detected. (Country
dependent) T1 timer (35±5 sec) elapsed
without a signal from the receiver.
631 XMT A "STOP" key was pressed during
Auto Dialing.
Ver. 5.0 191 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
634 XMT Redial count over with no
response or busy tone was not
detected.
Note:
U.S.A. and Canadian models
will redial only once if a busy
tone is not detected.
638 XMT Power turned Off with applicable Power switched off.
data in memory or during Power failure occurred.
communication.
700 XMT PSTN Communication terminated by
RCV LAN Operator pressing the "STOP" key.
711 RCV LAN Incorrect LDAP settings. LDAP Server Name, LDAP Login
Name, LDAP Password and/or LDAP
Search Base are incorrect.
712 XMT LAN Unknown email address replied Mail Server received an incorrect email
from the Mail Server. address. (Dependent on Server's Mail
application)
714 XMT LAN LAN Interface error. The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable is not
RCV Cannot logon to the LAN. connected.
An unexpected LAN problem occurred.
715 XMT LAN TCP/IP connection timed out. Incorrect IP Address is set.
Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP
Address, SMTP Server IP Address.
716 XMT LAN Cannot logon to the LAN. Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is
set.
No email application is activated on the
Mail Server.
717 XMT LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol Mail Server’s hard disk may be full.
transmission. Mail Server is defective.
718 XMT LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size and
while receiving printing data. The resolution.
paper size selected within your Ask originator to re-send in a supported
application to print is larger than size and resolution.
the paper size loaded in the paper
tray(s).
719 RCV LAN Received data via LAN is in a Ask the originator to re-send with a
format that is not supported. supported file attachment:
* In a TIFF-F format.
* Image data conforming to A4/Letter
size.
720 POP LAN Unable to connect to the POP Incorrect POP Server address is set.
Server. POP Server is down.
721 POP LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password is
set.
722 RCV LAN Failed to obtain the Network DHCP is not available.
Parameters (such as: IP Address, (Contact the Network Administrator.)
Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP
Address, etc.) from the DHCP
server.
725 XMT LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address is set.
POP DNS Server is down.
Ver. 5.0 192 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
726 XMT LAN Received an error response from Incorrect POP Server address is set.
POP the DNS Server. Incorrect SMTP Server address is set.
727 XMT LAN Received an Error or No Remote Internet Fax Errors: Busy or
Response from the Remote Job Number Overflow for Relay XMT.
Internet Fax. (SMTP Direct XMT) (Retry is possible)
728 XMT LAN Remote Internet Fax Errors: Memory
Overflow or No Power.
(Retry is not possible)
729 XMT LAN Failed to authenticate (SMTP SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name
AUTHENTICATION) when and/or Password are incorrect.
connecting with the SMTP server. (Contact the Network Administrator.)
730 RCV LAN Unable to program the Internet Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is
parameters or the autodialer via set to Valid.
Email from a PC.
731 RCV LAN Dialer full while Relayed Dial buffer for manual number dialing
Transmission Request was (70 stations) are being used.
received.
741 XMT, Polling PSTN Unable to dial Deleted the registered station name
before dialing with Timer Controlled
Communications, etc.
800 Relay PSTN The machine was requested to
Comm. relay a document but has no Relay
Hub capability.
814 Conf. XMT PSTN The remote station does not have
Conf. Polling Relay XMT nor Confidential
Relay Communication capability.
Comm.
815 Conf. RCV PSTN Mailbox is full.
816 Conf. Polled PSTN The received Polling Password did
not match.
825 Conf. RCV PSTN Parameter settings of the remote
Conf. Polled station are not properly set.
870 MEM XMT PSTN If applicable sub-address is not Receiver side does not have correct
Multi-Copy LAN registered in the phone book of the sub-address in their phone book.
receiver side when using sub-
addressing function.
741 XMT, Polling PSTN Memory overflow occurred while
storing documents into memory.
879 Memory PSTN Memory overflow occurred during Memory overflow on the Fax side.
RCV substitute memory reception.
LAN Memory overflow. Memory overflow on the Fax side.
Mail Server sent a reset command Mail server aborted the download (Busy
while downloading the data to the with other higher priority jobs).
machine.
880 - - File Access Error.
884 - - File Access Error.
961 RCV LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.
962 XMT PSTN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.
LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.
Ver. 5.0 193 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.7. Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)
The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was
performed. The code is recorded on the Journal.
Journal Example
************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********
NO. COMM. PAGES FILE DURATION X/R IDENTIFICATION DATE TIME DIAGNOSTIC
01 OK 001 129 00:00'42 XMT 123 456 789 MMM-dd 01:55 C8649003C0000
1st digit 13th digit
- PANASONIC MACHINE
****************************** - PANASONIC MACHINE- ***** -12345678901234567890- *******
1st Digit: Manufacturer Code

-: Not used/defined
Fax Diagnostic Codes

Definition
Data Manufacturer
Code
0 -
1 Casio
2 Canon
3 Sanyo
4 Sharp
5 Tamura
6 Toshiba
7 NEC
8 Oki
9 Hitachi
A Xerox
B Fujitsu
C Matsushita
D Mitsubishi
E Murata
F Ricoh
Ver. 5.0 194 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2nd Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
ID (TSI, CSI, CIG) RTN DCN STOP Button
0 - - - -
1 Received - - -
2 - Received - -
3 Received Received - -
4 - - Received -
5 Received - Received -
6 - Received Received -
7 Received Received Received -
8 - - - Pressed
9 Received - - Pressed
A - Received - Pressed
B Received Received - Pressed
C - - Received Pressed
D Received - Received Pressed
E - Received Received Pressed
F Received Received Received Pressed
3rd Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
Resolution (dpi) Paper Width
0 - A4
1 S-Fine A4
2 400 x 400 A4
3 300 x 300 A4
4 - B4
5 S-Fine B4
6 400 x 400 B4
7 300 x 300 B4
8 600 x 600 A4
9 600 x 600 B4
A - -
B 600 x 600 A3
C - A3
D S-Fine A3
E 400 x 400 A3
F 300 x 300 A3
Ver. 5.0 195 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
Scanning Rate Resolution
0 20 ms/line Std
1 5 ms/line Std
2 10 ms/line Std
3 - Std
4 40 ms/line Std
5 - Std
6 - Std
7 0 ms/line Std
8 20 ms/line Fine
9 5 ms/line Fine
A 10 ms/line Fine
B - Fine
C 40 ms/line Fine
D - Fine
E - Fine
F 0 ms/line Fine
5th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Memory/
Deferred Comm. Dialing/RCV
Non-Memory
0 - Manual Non-Memory
Communication
1 Used Manual Non-Memory
Communication
2 - Auto Dialing Non-Memory
3 Used Auto Dialing Non-Memory
4 - Auto RCV Non-Memory
5 Used Auto RCV Non-Memory
6 - Remote RCV Non-Memory
7 Used Remote RCV Non-Memory
8 - Manual Memory
Communication
9 Used Manual Memory
Communication
A - Auto Dialing Memory
B Used Auto Dialing Memory
C - Auto RCV Memory
D Used Auto RCV Memory
E - Remote RCV Memory
F Used Remote RCV Memory
Ver. 5.0 196 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Password
Polling XMT/RCV Selective Comm.
Comm.
0 - RCV Off Off
1 Yes RCV Off Off
2 - XMT Off Off
3 Yes XMT Off Off
4 - RCV On Off
5 Yes RCV On Off
6 - XMT On Off
7 Yes XMT On Off
8 - RCV Off On
9 Yes RCV Off On
A - XMT Off On
B Yes XMT Off On
C - RCV On On
D Yes RCV On On
E - XMT On On
F Yes XMT On On
7th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Sub-Address Confidential Turnaround
Relayed Comm.
Comm. Comm. Polling
0 - - - -
1 Yes - - -
2 - Yes - -
3 Yes Yes - -
4 - - Yes -
5 Yes - Yes -
6 - Yes Yes -
7 Yes Yes Yes -
8 - - - Yes
9 Yes - - Yes
A - Yes - Yes
B Yes Yes - Yes
C - - Yes Yes
D Yes - Yes Yes
E - Yes Yes Yes
F Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ver. 5.0 197 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Advanced Cover Sheet
Comm. XMT
0 - -
1 Report XMT -
2 Check & Call -
3 - -
4 Memory Transfer -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 - Yes
9 Report XMT Yes
A Check & Call Yes
B - Yes
C Memory Transfer Yes
D - Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes
9th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Standard/ Non-
Short Protocol
Standard
0 - Standard
1 - Standard
2 - Standard
3 - Standard
4 - Standard
5 - Standard
6 - Standard
7 - Standard
8 - Non-Standard
9 B Non-Standard
A - Non-Standard
B D Non-Standard
C - Non-Standard
D B Non-Standard
E - Non-Standard
F D Non-Standard
Ver. 5.0 198 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
10th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
Coding ECM
0 MH -
1 MR -
2 MMR -
3 JBIG -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 MH Yes
9 MR Yes
A MMR Yes
B JBIG Yes
C - Yes
D - Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes
11th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Symbol Rate
V.34
(V.34)
0 - -
1 - -
2 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 2400 sr Yes
9 - Yes
A 2800 sr Yes
B 3000 sr Yes
C 3200 sr Yes
D 3429 sr Yes
E - Yes
F - Yes
Ver. 5.0 199 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
12th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data Modem Speed
Modem Speed
(V.34)
0 2400 bps -
1 4800 bps 2400 bps
2 7200 bps 4800 bps
3 9600 bps 7200 bps
4 TC 7200 bps 9600 bps
5 TC 9600 bps 12000 bps
6 12000 bps 14400 bps
7 14400 bps 16800 bps
8 - 19200 bps
9 - 21600 bps
A - 24000 bps
B - 26400 bps
C - 28800 bps
D - 31200 bps
E - 33600 bps
F - -
13th Digit
-: Not used/defined

Definition
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Ver. 5.0 200 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.8. Troubleshooting (For Printer)
4.8.1. Checking the Basics
This section explains how to solve problems including error messages or unexpected printing results.
If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure
what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below:
• Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly
• Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct
• Ensure that the Unit is turned On
• Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit
• No error message is displayed on the Unit
• Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box
4.8.2. Document Does Not Print Properly

Problem Possible Solution(s)
Character is not printing in the • Check and specify the paper size and orientation settings in the printer
correct positions or the driver to coincide with the application.
characters near the edges of the • Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device.
page are missing. • Increase the Page Margins in the application. The Panasonic Device
requires minimum margins of ¼ inches (5 mm) on all sides.
The font type is incorrect • Check if the selected font is installed in the PC.
• Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font in
the Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
• Select ”Always use True Type fonts” from the Font tab of the Printer
Driver Properties dialog box.
The character is not smooth. • Select an outline font instead of a bit map font.
Fine line print cannot be • Select 600 dpi resolution.
obtained.
Poor photograph print quality. • Select 600 dpi resolution.
Different character or symbol • Check if the Panasonic Printing System (PCL) printer driver is selected.
from the document is printed.
The printer does not print • Insufficient Printer Page Memory in the Panasonic Device, install an
anything or prints irregular Expansion D-RAM Card or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the
images from the middle of the Quality tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
1st page.
Printing is exceedingly slow. • Select the Spool settings "Start printing after first page is spooled "
from the Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
• Select 300 dpi resolution.
Ver. 5.0 201 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4.8.3. Error Message Appears on the PC
Error Message Possible Solution(s)
Network Print DLL Error. • Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On" and the 10Base-T/
100Base-TX cable is properly connected.
• Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port)
Network Port is Busy. • The Panasonic Device may be processing someone’s print job,
please wait and try again later.
• The Panasonic Device is either Transmitting or Receiving an email.
Cannot print because an error is • Verify and specify the paper size or orientation to coincide with the
found in the current printer application and the printer driver settings.
setting.
4.8.4. Error Message Appears on the Unit

Error Message Possible Solution(s)
Cannot complete print job • The available Sort Memory in the Panasonic Device may not be
Image memory overflow enough.
Either install an optional Sort Memory or change the
resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box.
Cannot complete • The print settings may not be matched for the system.
Confirm print condition Change the printing settings in the Printer Driver Properties
dialog box.
i.e. Multi-sized printing.
Cannot print • Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver properties
System error dialog box.
4.8.5. System Error (CD Drive Related Error During Installation)

Problem Possible Solution(s)
Cannot read the drive. • Insert the CD into the drive and click “Retry”.
Ver. 5.0 202 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5 Service Modes
5.1. Service Modes (For Copier)
These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier and a
means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components.
Caution:
The factory default parameters are preset (country dependent) for optimum performance and in
compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed.
Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become
inoperable.
5.1.1. Service Mode Procedure
1. To select the Service Mode
The Service Mode is selected when "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" keys and "3" key
on the keypad are simultaneously pressed, then F1 will appear in the display.
2. To exit the Service Mode

The Service Mode is reset when the "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys are pressed simultaneously.
5.1.2. Copier Service Mode Functions
Service Modes (For Copier)

Service
Item Function
Mode
F1 Self Test 00 CCD Test This test is used for checking the CCD.
01 LCD/LED Test This test is used for checking the LCD
and LEDs.
02 Page Memory Test This test is used for checking the Page
Memory.
03 Print Test Pattern 1 Prints the pattern for setting the Paper
position alignment.
04 Print Test Pattern 2 Prints the Slant pattern for setting the
Paper position alignment.
05 Print Test Pattern 3 Prints the Grid pattern for setting the
06 Print Test Pattern 4 Prints the pattern for setting the Duplex
F2 Single Copy Test One sheet is copied when the Start key
is pressed.
F3 Continuous Copy Test Multi copies are made when the Start
key is pressed.
F4 Input / Output Status Test The functioning of Input / Output items
(selected item numbers) is checked.
F5 Function Parameters Various function settings (selected by
code numbers) can be changed.
F6 Adjust Parameters Various function settings (selected by
code numbers) can be adjusted.
F7 Electronic Counters Electronic Counters for Maintenance
F8 Service Adjustment Perform pseudo-operation of an item
(selected by code numbers)
F9 Unit Maintenance Fax Function Parameters
Ver. 5.0
203 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F5 / F6 Information List (Sample)
**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
F5-00 Country version USA/CAN F5-50 Auto contrast adjust. Yes

F5-01 Frequency desired 60Hz F5-51 Multi size rotation No
F5-02 . . . . . F5-52 Auto orig.size detect. No
F5-03 LSU startup speed Full F5-53 2-sided auto shift No
F5-04 LSU off timer 5 Sec. F5-54 Margin reduction No
F5-05 . . . . . F5-55 Margin value default 10mm
F5-06 . . . . . F5-56 Edge value default 5mm
F5-07 Language default F5-57 Book value default 20mm
F5-08 . . . . . F5-58 Ope.toner waste alarm
F5-09 Fuser lamp control off F5-59 Ope.add toner alarm Stop
F5-10 . . . . . F5-60 Auto Tray selection Yes

F5-11 . . . . . F5-61 Original lead edge viod Off
F5-12 Printer fan extension None F5-62 . . . . .
F5-13 . . . . . F5-63 U13 clear Any keys
F5-14 Paper size tray1(cop.) LETTER F5-64 . . . . .
F5-15 Paper size tray2(cop.) Auto F5-65 . . . . .
F5-16 Paper size tray3(sys1) INVOICE F5-66 Interleaving default Blank
F5-17 Paper size tray4(sys2) None F5-67 Page insertion default Blank
F5-18 Paper size L(LCT) LETTER F5-68 Cover mode default F,Blank
F5-19 . . . . . F5-69 Reduce N in 1 space No
F5-20 ADF Auto F5-70 PM cycle

F5-21 Finisher Auto F5-71 . . . . .
F5-22 System console Auto F5-72 Disable at web PM Continue
**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.02
F6-00 Adjust 100% read(s/s) 0 F6-50 T/P mode image density 0

F6-01 Adjust 100% read(l/t) 0 F6-51 P mode image density 0
F6-02 100% selection 0 F6-52 LSU unit PWM adjust 1 0
F6-03 Original registration 0 F6-53 CCD read position adj. 0
F6-04 Printer registration 0 F6-54 T mode contrast 0
F6-05 Main motor speed 0 F6-55 T/P mode contrast 0
F6-06 Polygon motor speed 0 F6-56 P mode contrast 0
F6-07 Registration void 6 F6-57 Detouch DC Vol 1-sided 0
F6-08 Trail edge read timing 0 F6-58 Detouch AC Vol 1-sided 0
F6-09 Trail edge print timing -6 F6-59 Detouch DC Vol 2-sided 0
F6-10 F6-60
F6-11 F6-61
F6-12 F6-62
F6-13 F6-63
F6-14 F6-64
F6-15 F6-65
F6-16 F6-66
F6-17 F6-67
F6-18 F6-68
F6-19 F6-69
F6-20 F6-70
F6-21 F6-71
F6-22 F6-72
Ver. 5.0 204 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Machine Setup Information List (Sample)

**********- MACHINE SETUP INFORMATION -****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
1.MACHINE INFORMATION
MACHINE NAME : DP-6030
MAC ADDRESS : 080023006FA1
SERIAL NUMBER :
2.FIRMWARE VERSION
SC : BAV001xxPU
SC BOOT : M30
PNL : AAT00001PU
SPC : 60cpm T40000
FINISHER : 0702
FAX MODEM :
PDL FONT1 : CAV00001b
SC2 : CAV00008aPU
3.MEMORY CAPACITY
PAGE MEMORY : 32 MB
SORT MEMORY : 32 MB
FAX MEMRY : 3 MB
4.OPTION
DOCUMENT FEEDER (iADF) : Yes
3rd PAPER FEED MODULE : Yes
4th PAPER FEED MODULE : Yes
LCT : Yes
FINISHER : FS605
PUNCH UNIT : Yes
FAX BOARD : Yes
NETWORK SCANNER : Yes
PCL PRINTER : Yes
PS PRINTER : Yes
IPX/SPX : Yes
EMAIL : Yes
DDS : Yes
HDD : Yes
5.ERROR LOG
TOTAL PRINT COUNT : 2082
NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:11 J27 XX-00000008
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:31 J41 XX-00000140
(See Remarks)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remarks:
XX-00000140
Page Count
00 : Printer Error
02 : Scanner Error
Ver. 5.0
205 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F7 Total Counter List (Sample)
**********-F7 TOTAL COUNTER LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
F7-01 Key operator ID code : 0000
F7-02 Maintenance count

Total count : 295
PM Count : 295
Scanner PM Count : 61
ADF Count : 26
OPC Drum count : 295

Process unit count : 295
ADF PM count : 50
Fuser web count : 295
Developer count : 295
Corona cleaning count : 295
Ave. print/drum rise up : 0
Total opc rotation time : 0
Ave. sec/drum rise up : 0
F7-03 Paper feed count

Sheet bypass count : 147
1st Paper tray count : 90
2nd Paper tray count : 0
3rd Paper tray count : 0
4th Paper tray count : 0
LCT tray count : 0
2-sided count : 28
A4(LT)count : 284
A4R(LTR) count : 73
A3(LDG) count : 19
B4(LGL) count : 0
F7-04 Scanner count

ADF count : 26
ADF read count : 26
Scanner count : 61
Scanner read count : 18
Ver. 5.0 206 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.1.3. F4 Mode: Input/Output Status Test
Set the machine to service mode and press "4" key on the Keypad.
↓
Press the "START" key.
↓
Enter the number to activate the test then press "START" key.
↓
Press "STOP" key to cancel the test.
↓
When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted.
↓
Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.
1. Input Check
F4 Mode (Input Check)

Message Display
No. Function Condition Remarks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
000 Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Intermediate Roller Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Fuser Unit Paper Exit Paper is detected. 0
Sensor
Inverting Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Timing Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Registration Sensor Paper is detected. 0
001 Size Sensor 3 Sensor is activated. 1
(Sheet Bypass)
Size Sensor 2 Sensor is activated. 1
(Sheet Bypass, Inside)
(Sheet Bypass, Outside)
NP Sensor Paper is detected. 1
(Sheet Bypass)
ADU Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 0
ADU Intermediate Sensor Paper is detected. 0
ADU Paper Feed Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Ver. 5.0
207 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
002 Upper Limit Sensor Upper Limit is detected. 1
(2nd Paper Tray)
NP Sensor Paper is not detected. 1
(2nd Paper Tray)
Paper Remaining Sensor 3 Sensor is activated. 1
(2nd Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
003 Toner Bottle Home Home position is 0
Position Sensor detected.
Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0
(1st Paper Tray)
Upper Limit Sensor Upper Limit is detected. 1
(1st Paper Tray)
(1st Paper Tray)
(1st Paper Tray)
(1st Paper Tray)
(1st Paper Tray)
(2nd Paper Tray)
004 Right Cover Open/Close Cover is open. 1
Sensor
High Voltage Leak Normal. 1
Detection
(Bias)
Detection
(Separation Corona)
Detection
(Transfer Corona)
Detection
(Charge Corona)
Developer Unit Detecting Developer Unit is not 1
Sensor detected.
Ver. 5.0 208 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
005 Charge Corona Cleaning Cleaner is not detected. 0
End Detect Sensor
Charge Corona Cleaning Cleaner is detected. 1
Home position Sensor
Inverting Cover Sensor Cover is open. 1
Paper Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Inverting Paper Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Inverting Sensor Paper is detected. 0
006 Dust Fan Lock Signal Normal. 0
Toner Waste Container Full Toner Waste Container 1
Detection Sensor is full.
007 Exhaust Fan 2 Lock Signal Normal. 0
Exhaust Fan 1 Lock Signal Normal. 0
Toner Waste Container Toner Waste Container 0
Detection Sensor is detected.
Suction Fan Lock Signal Normal. 0
008 Power Supply Fan Lock Normal. 0
Signal
Ozone Fan 2 Lock Signal Normal. 0
Exhaust Fan 3 Lock Signal Normal. 0
009 Cover Open/Close Sensor Cover is open. 1
(System Console)
(4th Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
(4th Paper Tray)
Drive Motor Stop Signal Drive Motor is stopped. 1
(System Console)
Ver. 5.0
209 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
010 Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 1
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
(3rd Paper Tray)
System Console Detection System Console is 1
Sensor connected.
011 Upper Limit Sensor Upper Limit is detected. 1
(LCT)
(LCT)
Attach / Un-attach Sensor LCT is detached. 1
LCT Tray Lower Limit Lower Limit is detected. 1
LCT Door Open Detection Door is closed. 0
Sensor
LCT Detection Sensor LCT is detected. 1
(LCT)
012 Paper Remaining Sensor 3 Sensor is activated. 1
(LCT)
(LCT)
(LCT)
013 Upper Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 1 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Paper Tray Sensor Paper is detected. 1 Finisher (FS605)
Front Stapler Home Home position is 1 Only.
Rear Stapler Home Home position is 1
Lower Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Middle Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0
014 Paper Path Cover Switch Cover is open. 1 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Paper Entry Cover Sensor Cover is open. 0 Finisher (FS605)
Front Cover Sensor Cover is open. 0 Only.
Exit Cover Sensor Cover is open. 0
Front Cover Switch Cover is open. 1
Paper Entry Cover Switch Cover is open. 1
Front Stapler Sensor Stapler is empty. 0
Rear Stapler Sensor Stapler is empty. 0
Ver. 5.0 210 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
015 Stapler Home Position Home position is 1
Sensor detected.
Entrance Paper Path Paper is detected. 0
Sensor
Buffer Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Exit Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Buffer Entrance Sensor Paper is detected. 0
016 Stapler Tray Sensor Paper is detected. 0
2nd Tray Sensor Paper is detected. 0
1st Tray Sensor Paper is detected. 0
Stapler Sensor Stapler is detected. 1
Stapler Cartridge Sensor Stapler Cartridge is 0
detected.
Stapler Unit Sensor Stapler Unit is detected. 0
017 Punch Upper Cover Cover is open. 1
Sensor
Punch Front Cover Sensor Cover is open. 1
Punch Move Home Home position is 0
Punch Home Position Home position is 1
Sensor detected.
Punch Unit Sensor Punch Unit is detected. 0
018 Rocking Guide Open Guide is open. 1
Sensor
Shutter Open Sensor Shutter is open. 1
Tray Unit Home Position Home position is 1
Sensor detected.
Collation Home Position Home position is 0
Sensor detected.
Stapler Home Position Home position is 0
Sensor detected.
Push Switch 2 Switch is ON. 1
Push Switch 3 Switch is ON. 1
019 Rocking Guide Close Guide is closed. 1 2-Bin Finisher
Sensor (FS600),
Shutter Close Sensor Shutter is closed. 1 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Front Door Sensor Front Door is open. 0 Finisher (FS605) and
1-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Tray Danger Area Sensor Tray Danger Area 0
Finisher (FS335).
Upper Limit Detection Upper Limit 1
Sensor
Saddle Unit Sensor Saddle Unit is detected. 1
Front Door Open Sensor Front Door is open. 0
Joint Detect Sensor Finisher Unit is detected. 1
Ver. 5.0
211 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Message Display
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
020 Size Sensor B Original detected on the 1 B A
B position.
Platen
Size Sensor A Original detected on the 1 Z
A position. Y
X
Size Sensor Z Original detected on the 1
Front Side
Z position.
Size Sensor Y Original detected on the 1
Y position.
Size Sensor X Original detected on the 1
X position.
021 ADF/Platen Cover Angle ADF/Platen Cover is 1
Sensor open more than 30°
angle.
ADF/Platen Cover Open ADF/Platen Cover is 1
Sensor open.
Home Position Sensor Home position is 1
detected.
+24V Line Error Detecting +24V Line is OFF. 1
Signal
022- Not Used
029
030 ADF B1 Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF B2 Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF B3 Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF Inverting Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF Paper Exit Detection Original is detected. 1
Sensor
ADF Cover Open Cover is open. 1
Detection Sensor
ADF Detection Sensor ADF is not detected. 1
031 ADF Original Sensor Original is detected. 1
ADF Original Width Sensor Sensor is activated. 1
1
ADF Original Width Sensor Sensor is activated. 1
2
ADF Original Length Sensor is activated. 1
Sensor 1
ADF Original Length Sensor is activated. 1
Sensor 2
032- Not Used
039
Ver. 5.0 212 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Output Check
Press the "START" key to start and press the "STOP" key to reset.
F4 Mode (Output Check)

No. Item Function Remark
040- Not Used
049
050 Main Motor Activate the Main Motor after
pressing Start key.
051 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation In When CN719-3 signal level changes
Forward Direction to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the
forward direction.
052 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation In When CN719-6 signal level changes
Reverse Direction to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the
reverse direction.
053 Suction Fan / Dust Fan When CN758-11 is 24V, Suction Fan
rotates.
When CN758-6 is 24V, Dust Fan
rotates.
054 Not Used
055 Ozone Fan 2 When CN758-5 is 24V, Ozone Fan 2
rotates.
056 Exhaust Fan 1/2/3 When CN757-5 is 24V, Exhaust Fan
1 rotates.
When CN759-5 is 24V, Exhaust Fan
2 rotates.
When CN759-6 is 24V, Exhaust Fan
3 rotates.
057 Power Supply Fan When CN758-12 is 24V, Power
Supply Fan rotates.
058 Not Used
059 Separator Solenoid When CN764-2 signal level changes
to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates.
060 Mg Roller Clutch When CN764-4 signal level changes
to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.
061 Registration Clutch When CN716-6 signal level changes 1 minute
062- Not Used
064
065 Paper Feed Roller Clutch When CN712-2 signal level changes 1 minute
(1st Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.
066 Paper Feed Solenoid When CN712-4 signal level changes 2 seconds
(1st Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates.
067 Lift Motor When CN713-2 signal level changes
(1st Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the
ascending direction.
068 Intermediate Roller Clutch When CN714-4 signal level changes 1 minute
069 Not Used
(2nd Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.
Ver. 5.0
213 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(2nd Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates.
(2nd Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the
073- Not Used
074
(3rd Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.
(3rd Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates.
(3rd Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the
078 Clutch When CN608-5 signal level changes 1 minute
(System Console) to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.
079 Drive Motor When CN602-8 signal level changes
(System Console) to 0V from +5V, motor rotates.
(4th Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.
(4th Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates.
(4th Paper Tray) to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the
083- Not Used
084
(Sheet Bypass) to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.
(Sheet Bypass) to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates.
087- Not Used
090
(LCT) to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates.
092 LCT Paper Tray Lift (Up) Motor rotates in the ascending
direction.
(together with upper limit control)
093 LCT Paper Tray Lift (Down) Motor rotates in the descending
direction.
(together with lower limit control)
094 Paper Feed Motor Motor rotates.
(LCT)
095- Not Used
099
100 ADU Paper Exit Clutch When CN714-2 signal level changes 1 minute
101 ADU Paper Feed Clutch When CN716-4 signal level changes 1 minute
Ver. 5.0 214 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
102 Inverting Motor Rotating In Inverting motor rotates in the forward
Forward Direction direction.
103 Inverting Motor Rotating In Inverting motor rotates in the reverse
Reverse Direction direction.
104 Paper Guide Solenoid ON When CN763-10 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, clutch
turns ON for Straight Paper Exit.
105 Paper Guide Solenoid OFF When CN763-12 signal level
changes to 0V from +24V, clutch
turns OFF for Inverting Paper Exit.
106 Roller Solenoid ON When CN763-7 signal level changes
to 0V from +24V, clutch turns ON for
the Inverting Roller OFF.
107 Roller Solenoid OFF When CN763-9 signal level changes
to 0V from +24V, clutch turns OFF for
the Inverting Roller ON.
108 Saddle Paper Feed Unit Test Feed Motor turns ON. 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605) Only.
109 Tray Elevator Unit Test 1 Tray moves to Upward direction. 2-Bin Finisher (FS600),
110 Tray Elevator Unit Test 2 Tray moves to Home Position. 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605) and
2-Bin Finisher (FS330).
111 Paper Feed Unit Test Feed Motor turns ON.
112 Paper Exit Unit Test Feed Motor turns ON. 2-Bin Finisher (FS600),
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
1-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS335).
113 Collation Unit Test Collation Plates turns ON.
114 Stapler Unit Test Stapler turns ON.
115 Stapler Unit Move Test Stapler Unit moves. 2-Bin Finisher (FS600) and
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605).
116 Rocking Unit Test Guide turns ON. 2-Bin Finisher (FS600),
117 Shutter Unit Open Test Shutter unit is opened. 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
2-Bin Finisher (FS330).
118 Not Used
119 Shutter Unit Close Test Shutter unit is closed. 2-Bin Finisher (FS600) and
2-Bin Saddle-Stitch
Finisher (FS605).
120 Lamp When CN756-8 signal level changes
to 0V from +24V, Lamp operates for
4 seconds.
121- Not Used
159
160 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating ADF paper feed motor rotates at
(67% of rotating speed) 67% of rotating speed.
Ver. 5.0
215 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
163 ADF Transport Motor Rotating ADF transport motor rotates at 67%
(67% of rotating speed) of rotating speed.
166 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch When CN655-2 signal level changes
to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for
3 seconds.
167 ADF Registration Roller 1 Clutch When CN656-4 signal level changes
3 seconds.
168 ADF Registration Roller 2 Clutch When CN656-2 signal level changes
3 seconds.
169 ADF Inverting Roller 1 Clutch When CN659-6 signal level changes
3 seconds.
170 ADF Inverting Roller 2 Clutch When CN659-7 signal level changes
3 seconds.
171 ADF Speed Down Clutch When CN659-5 signal level changes
3 seconds.
172 ADF Solenoid When CN660-7 signal level changes
to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates
for 200ms.
173 ADF Inverting Solenoid When CN660-5 signal level changes
for 200ms.
174 ADF Pinch Roller Solenoid When CN660-2 signal level changes
for 1 second.
175 ADF Stamp Solenoid When CN658-2 signal level changes
for 1 second.
Ver. 5.0 216 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.1.4. F5 Mode: Function Parameters (For Copier)
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "5" key on the Keypad.
↓
↓
Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display.
↓
If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons.
↓
Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button.
↓
↓
↓
Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).
F5 Mode
No. Item Function Default Setting
00 Country Version 0 : Japan Country Dependent
1 : USA/CAN
2 : Europe
3 : Other
01 Frequency Desired 0 : Auto 2 (for USA / Canada)
1 : 50 Hz
2 : 60Hz 1 (for Europe)
02 Not Used
03 LSU Startup Speed 0 : Low 1
1 : Full
04 LSU Off Timer 1 : 5 sec. 3
2 : 10 sec.
3 : 15 sec.
4 : 20 sec.
6 : 30 sec.
8 : 40 sec.
10 : 50 sec.
12 : 60 sec.
05- Not Used
06
Ver. 5.0
217 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F5 Mode
07 Language Default 0 : English (American) 0 (for USA / Canada)
1 : French
3 : German 13 (for Europe)
4 : Swedish
5 : Italian
6 : Dutch
7 : Portugal
8 : Spanish
9 : Norway
10 : Danish
11 : Finnish
13 : English
17 : Polish
18 : Hungary
19 : Japanese
20 : Czech
21 : Greek
08 Not Used
09 Fuser Lamp Control 0 : Off 0 (for USA / Canada)
1 : Auto 1 (for Europe)
10-11 Not Used
12 Printer Fan Extension 0 : None 5
2 : 2 min
5 : 5 min
13 Paper Out Red Indicator 0 : Off 1
1 : On
14 Paper Size Tray 1 (Copier) 0 : None 13 (for USA / Canada)
3 : A4
5 : B5 3 (for Europe)
13 : LETTER
15 Paper Size Tray 2 (Copier) 0 : None 17
1 : A3
2 : B4
3 : A4
4 : A4R
5 : B5
6 : B5R
7 : A5
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
16 : INVOICE
17 : Auto
Ver. 5.0 218 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F5 Mode
16 Paper Size Tray 3 (Sys1) 0 : None 0
1 : A3
2 : B4
3 : A4
4 : A4R
5 : B5
6 : B5R
7 : A5
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
15 : INVOICE
17 Paper Size Tray 4 (Sys2) Same as F5-16 Same as F5-16
18 Paper Size L (LCT) 3 : A4 13 (for USA / Canada)
5 : B5
12 : LEGAL 3 (for Europe)
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
19 Not Used
20 ADF 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
21 Finisher 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
22 System Console 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
23 LCT 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
24 QUANTUM TDC Adj. Level 0 : No 1 (From July)
1 : Low
2 : Medium
3 : High
25 Digital QUANTUM 0 : Off 1
1 : On
26 2-Sided Unit 0 : No 1
1 : Auto
27 Output Bin Copy 0 : Upper 0
(For DA-FS600/605 only) 1 : Bottom
28 Output Bin Printer same as F5-27 1
(For DA-FS600/605 only)
29 Output Bin FAX/EMAIL same as F5-27 1
(For DA-FS600/605 only)
30- Not Used
31
32 SADF Mode 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
33 Not Used
34 Multi Size Feed Default 0 : Off 0
1 : On
Ver. 5.0
219 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F5 Mode
35 Not Used
36 Display DD key 0 : No 0 (for USA / Canada)
1 : Yes 1 (for Europe)
37 Corona Wire Cleaning 0 : 1000 2
1 : 3000
2 : 10000
3:0
38 2-Sided Mode Default 0 : No 0
1 : 1 to 2
2 : 2 to 2
3 : B to 2
39 Staple Position Setting 0 : Landscape 1
1 : Portrait
2 : Center
40 Double Count 0 : No 1
1 : LDR
2 : LDR/ LGL
(for USA / Canada)
0 : No
1 : A3
2 : A3, B4
(for Other Destinations)
41 Count Up Timing 0 : At feed 1
1 : At exit
42 KEY/DEPT. Counter 0 : No 0
1 : Key Cnt.
2 : DEPT
3 : Card
43 Key Counter Timing Same as F5-41 0
44 Insert Paper Count 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
45 Dept. Code Re-entry Again 0 : Yes 0
1 : No
46 Hole Punch Type 0 : 2 hole 1 (for USA / Canada)
1 : 3 hole 2 (for Europe)
2 : 4 hole
47 TH Sensor (Tr. DT) 0 : No 1
1 : Mid
2 : Large
48 TH Sensor (DEV) 0 : No 1
1 : Mid
2 : Large
49 Auto Contrast Algorithm 0 : Tip dist 0
1 : Histgram
50 Auto Contrast Adjust. 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
51 Dept. Counter (COPY) 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
52 Dept. Counter (FAX) 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
Ver. 5.0 220 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F5 Mode
53 2-Sided Auto Shift 0 : No 0
1 : Auto sft
54 Margin Reduction 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
55 Margin Value Default 0 : 5 mm 1
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
56 Edge Value Default 0 : 5 mm 0
1 : 10 mm
2 : 15 mm
3 : 20 mm
57 Book Value Default 0 : 15 mm 1
1 : 20 mm
2 : 25 mm
3 : 30 mm
58 Toner Waste Container Full 0 : Stop 2
Alarm 1:3K
2:5K
3:8K
4 : 10 K
59 Add Toner Alarm 0 : Stop 0
1 : Continue
60 Auto Tray Selection 0 : No 1
1 : Yes
61- Not Used
62
63 U13 Clear 0 : Any keys 0
1 : Func + 1
64 Dept. Counter (SCANNER) 0 : Yes 0
1 : No
65 Dept. Counter (PRINTER) 0 : Yes 0
1 : No
66 Interleaving Default 0 : Blank 0
1 : Copy
67 Page Insertion Default 0 : Blank 0
1 : Copy
68 Cover Mode Default 0 : F, Blank 0
1 : F, Copy
2 : FB, Blank
3 : FB, Copy
69 Reduce N in 1 Space 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
Ver. 5.0
221 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F5 Mode
70 PM (Preventive Maintenance) 0 : No 12 (DP-35xx/45xx)
Cycle 1 : 1.5 K
2 : 2.5 K 15 (DP-60xx)
3: 5K
4 : 10 K
5 : 15 K
6 : 20 K
7 : 30 K
8 : 40 K
9 : 60 K
10 : 80 K
11 : 90 K
12 : 120 K
13 : 150 K (DP-60xx)
14 : 200 K (DP-60xx)
15 : 240 K (DP-60xx)
71 Not Used
72 Disable At Web PM 0 : Continue 1
1 : Stop
73 PM (Fuser Web) 0 : 120 K 1
1 : 240 K
74 Fuser Web Feeding 0 : 1/10 1
1 : 1/20
2 : 1/30
75- Not Used
76
77 Text Error Diffusion 0 : Errordif 0
1 : Multilvl
78 A4/LTR Size Select 0 : No 0
1 : Yes
79 Not Used
80 Paper Size Priority 1 : A3 13 (for USA / Canada)
2 : B4 3 (for Europe)
3 : A4
4 : A4R
5 : B5
6 : B5R
8 : A5
9 : 8 x 13
10 : 8.5 x 13
11 : LEDGER
12 : LEGAL
13 : LETTER
14 : LETTER R
15 : INVOICE
81 B4/FLS Size Selection 0 : B4 0
1 : 8 x 13
2 : 8.5 x 13
82 Manual Skyshot Mode 0 : Off 0
1 : M1, On
2 : M2, On
3 : M1, M2, On
Ver. 5.0 222 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F5 Mode
83 Digital Skyshot Mode 0 : No 1
1 : Freeshp
2 : Parallel
84 Paper Tray Priority 0:L>S>C>B 0
1 : C >S > L > B
2:L>C>S>B
85 Side Void Setting (ADF) 0 : None 0
1 : Yes
86 Not Used
87 PM Cycle (ADF) 0 : No 0
3 : 120 K
4 : 240 K
88 Not Used
89 LAN Speed/Duplex 0 : Auto 0
1 : 10 Half
2 : 10 Full
3 : 100 Half
4 : 100 Full
90 Beep Sound In Touch Panel 0 : Off 1
1 : Soft
2 : Loud
91 M1, Size Set the default size for Manual Skyshot 70 x 160
92 M2, Size Mode, M1 and M2. 95 x 220
93- Not Used
94
95 Paper Size (FA) 0 : Japan 1 (for USA / Canada)
(Factory use only) 1 : USA/CAN 2 (for Europe)
2 : Europe
3 : Other
96 Bypass Detection 0 : Japan 1 (for USA / Canada)
2 : Europe
3 : Other
97 Bp tray B4/FLS/LGL (FA) 0 : B4 3 (for USA / Canada)
(Factory use only) 1 : 8 x 13 0 (for Europe)
2 : 8.5 x 13
3 : LEGAL
98 Tray2 Detection 0 : Japan 1 (for USA / Canada)
2 : Europe
99 Tray2 B4/FLS/LGL (FA) 0 : B4 3 (for USA / Canada)
(Factory use only) 1 : 8 x 13 0 (for Europe)
2 : 8.5 x 13
3 : LEGAL
Ver. 5.0
223 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.1.5. F6 Mode: Adjust Parameters (For Copier)
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).
Note:
The Factory Setting is different in each model.
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
00 Adjust 100% read (s/s) Adjustment of ratio for vertical position when -9 - +9 0.1%
scan is made.
01 Adjust read mag. (l/t) Adjustment of ratio for parallel position when -9 - +9 0.1%
scan is made.
02 100% selection Adjustment from 99.1% to 100.9% -9 - +9 0.1%
03 Original registration Adjustment of platen original registration -30 - +30
detection timing. 0.2mm
04 Printer registration Delay time is adjusted from registration roller -50 - +50
clutch ON. 0.5mm
05 Main motor speed Adjustment of Main Motor speed. -10 - +10
0.1%
06 Polygon motor speed Adjustment Polygon Motor speed. -99 - +99
0.1%
07 Registration void Registration void should be adjusted. 0 - +99
0.5mm
08 Trail edge read timing Adjustment of trail edge void. -9 - 0
0.5mm
09 Trail edge print timing Adjustment of trail edge void. -9 - +15
0.5mm
10 Side adjust (Bypass) Adjustment of LSU side-side (Sheet Bypass). -8 - +7
0.5mm
11 Side adjust (Tray 1) Adjustment of LSU side-side (1st Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm
12 Side adjust (Tray 2) Adjustment of LSU side-side (2nd Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm
13 Side adjust (Tray 3) Adjustment of LSU side-side (3rd Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm
Ver. 5.0 224 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
14 Side adjust (Tray 4) Adjustment of LSU side-side (4th Tray). -8 - +7
0.5mm
15 Side adjust (LCT) Adjustment of LSU side-side (LCT). -8 - +7
0.5mm
16 Side adjust (ADU) Adjustment of LSU side-side (ADU). -8 - +7
0.5mm
17 Grid standard voltage Adjustment of Grid standard voltage. -92 - +61
3.27V
18 Laser standard power Laser power compensation adjustment. -56 - +25
19 Bias standard vol.DC Adjustment of bias standard voltage. -77 - 76
3.92V
20 Print Contrast Adjust Halftone adjustment, Print density -7 - +7
for Photo Mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
21 TDC gain voltage Adjustment of toner density sensor gain -86 - +40
voltage. 0.033V
22 (Factory use only) QUANTUM parameter 1
23 (Factory use only) QUANTUM parameter 2
24 Bias standard vol. AC AC Bias standard voltage adjustment -10 - +10
(Factory use only) 20V
25 Bias Duty Ratio Bias duty ratio adjustment -5 - +5 1%
(Factory use only)
26 TDC judgment level Adjustment of toner supply starting judgement -26 - +26
voltage level. 19.5mV
27 Bias Frequency AC Bias frequency adjustment -2 - +2
(Factory use only) 1KHz
28 Quantum white density Adjustment of standard white density level. -99 - +99
(Should not be adjusted in the field, and must
be set to "0")
29 Quantum black density Adjustment of standard black density level. -99 - +99
(Should not be adjusted in the field, and must
be set to "0")
30 Laser power adj. 2 level Laser power compensation adjustment in 2 -56 - +25
value mode.
31 Fuser temperature Adjustment of fuser temperature. -15 - +15
0.833°C
32 Fuser temperature. edge Temperature compensation for edges -15 - +15
0.833°C
33 TDC max. read only Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control Read only
34 TDC min. read only Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control Read only
35 TDC ave. read only Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control Read only
36 Paper Loop (Tray1, cop) Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 1 -99 - +99
37 Toner Save Mode level adjust Adjustment of threshold level. -255 - +255
38 ID standard voltage Adjustment of judgement standard voltage. -35 - +35
39 LSU unit PWM adjust 2 Adjustment of PWM value of LSU. -99 - +99
40 T corona current 1sided Adjustment of transfer corona current. -10 - +10
5.22uA
Ver. 5.0
225 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
41 Paper Loop (Bypass) Individual Fine Adjustment for Sheet Bypass -99 - +99
42 Paper Loop (Tray 2, cop) Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 2 -99 - +99
43 Paper loop (2-sided) Adjustment for the length of the loop formed -99 - +99
before the copier timing roller.
44 Laser duty adj. FAX -99 - +99
45 Paper feeding. LCT Adjustment of LCT paper feed. -50 - +50
46 Laser duty adj. PRINTER -99 - +99
47 T corona current 2-sided Adjustment of transfer corona current. -10 - +10
5.22uA
48 QUANTUM TDC adjust Adjustment of QUANTUM TDC -3 - +3
49 T mode image density Image density adjustment for Text mode. -99 - +99
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
50 T/P mode image density Image density adjustment for Text/ Photo -99 - +99
mode.
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
51 P mode image density Image density adjustment for Photo mode. -99 - +99
(-) : Darker.
(+) : Lighter.
52 LSU unit PWM adjust 1 Adjustment of PWM value of LSU. -99 - +99
53 CCD read position adj. Adjustment of CCD read position. -42 - +44
0.2mm
54 T mode contrast -127 - +127
55 T/P mode contrast -127 - +127
56 P mode contrast -127 - +127
57 Sep. DC Volt. 1-Sided Compensation of Detach DC voltage for 1 -20 - +30
sided copy. 10V
58 Sep. AC Volt. 1-Sided Compensation of Detach AC voltage for 1 -6 - +8
sided copy. 100V
59 Sep. DC Volt. 2-Sided Compensation of Detach DC voltage for 2 -20 - +30
sided copy. 10V
60 Sep. AC Volt. 2-Sided Compensation of Detach AC voltage for 2 -6 - +8
sided copy. 100V
61 Continuous print TDC 0 - +8
62 TDC gain voltage adjust Adjustment of toner density sensor gain -10 - +10
voltage. 0.033V
63 Lead edge read point 0 - +9
0.5mm
64 Side edge read point 0 - +9
0.5mm
65 Bk density reference Reference voltage for Toner Density Sensor. -127 - +127
66 Bk density output Compensate value for Toner Density Sensor -127 - +127
output.
67 ADF image density Compensation of ADF image density. -99 - +99
68 Paper Loop (Tray 3, SYS) Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 3 -99 - +99
69 Stamp position adjust Adjustment of verification stamp position. -50 - +50
0.3mm
Ver. 5.0 226 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F6 Mode
Setting
No. Item Remarks
Range
70-74 Not Used
75 Adj. read AD enable Adjustment of read timing. -2 - +2
(Factory use only)
76 Adj. read LSI sampling Adjustment of read timing. 0 - +3
(Factory use only)
77 Adj. read LVDS clock Adjustment of read timing. 0 - +3
(Factory use only)
78 Paper Loop (Tray4, SYS) Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 4 -99 - +99
79 MTF (Modulation Transfer Adjustment of Scanning Sharpness by digital -2 - +2
Function) adjustment image processing for Text /Photo Copy Mode.
80 QUANTUM Exposure Volt. Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control -56 - +25
81 QUANTUM Bias Volt.DC Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control -77 - +76
3.92V
82 QUANTUM Charge Voltage Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control -92 - +61
3.27V
83 Temperature sensor Value Value of Temperature sensor. 0 - 255
84 Humidity sensor value Value of Humidity sensor. 0 - 255
85 (Factory use only)
86 ADF reverse stop position Adjustment of ADF reverse stop position. -99 - +99
0.3mm
87 ADF exhaust stop position Adjustment of ADF exit stop position -99 - +99
0.3mm
88 ADF feed regist. 1-sided Adjustment of ADF pick up for 1-sided. -99 - +99
0.3mm
89 ADF feed regist. 2-sided Adjustment of ADF pick up for 2-sided. -99 - +99
0.3mm
90 ADF read position Main scan Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read -99 - +99
start position. 0.05mm
91 Original read edge ADF Adjustment of original detection timing. -99 - +99
0.3mm
92 Original trail ADF Adjustment of trail edge detection timing. -127 - 127
0.3mm
93 ADF 100% image. 1-sided Adjustment of magnification for 1-sided. -9 - +9
0.1%
94 ADF 100% image. 2-sided Adjustment of magnification for 2-sided. -9 - +9
0.1%
95 Exposure Voltage Adjustment of LSU Laser Power. -56 - +25
(QUANTUM is OFF)
96 Charge Voltage Adjustment of Charge Voltage. -95 - +61
(QUANTUM is OFF) 3.27V
97 Bias Volt.DC Adjustment of Bias Voltage. -77 - +76
(QUANTUM is OFF) 3.92V
98 Paper Loop (LCT) Individual Fine Adjustment for LCT. -99 - +99
99 F5/F6 initialization Initialize F5/F6 parameter settings.
Ver. 5.0
227 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.1.6. F7 Mode: Electronic Counter
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
F7 Mode
Service
Item Remarks
Mode
F7 Electronic 00 List Print
Counters 01 Key Operator ID Code Key Operator’s identification code for
access to the counter mode.
02 Maintenance 00 Total Count Total count for all copies / prints.
Count 01 PM Count Preventive Maintenance count.
02 Scanner PM Count PM count for scanner readings.
03 ADF Count PM count of originals fed through the
ADF.
04 Not Used
05 OPC Drum Count PM count of recording paper fed
through the OPC Drum.
06 Process Unit Count PM count of recording paper fed
through the Process Unit.
07 ADF PM Count PM count of recording paper fed
through the Automatic Duplex Unit.
08 Fuser Web Count PM Count for Fuser Web.
09 Developer Count PM Count for Developer.
10 Corona Cleaning Count for Corona Cleaner.
Count
11 Avg. Print/Drum Rise Average Print Count for OPC Drum.
Up
12 Total OPC Rotation Rotation Time for OPC Drum.
Time
13 Avg. Min / Drum Rise Average Rotation Time for OPC Drum.
Up
Ver. 5.0 228 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F7 Mode
Service
Item Remarks
Mode
F7 Electronic 03 Paper Feed 00 Sheet Bypass Count Total count of paper fed from the sheet
Counters Count bypass.
01 1st Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 1st
paper tray.
02 2nd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 2nd
paper tray.
03 3rd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 3rd
paper tray.
04 4th Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 4th
paper tray.
05 LCT Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the LCT.
06 2-sided Count Total count of 2-sided Print.
07 A4 / Letter Count Total count of A4 / Letter Print.
08 A4-R / Letter-R Count Total count of A4-R / Letter-R Print.
09 A3 / Ledger Count Total count of A3 / Ledger Print.
10 B4 / Legal Count Total count of B4 / Legal Print.
04 Scanner 00 ADF Count Total count of originals fed through the
Count ADF.
01 ADF Read Count Total count of originals scanned through
the ADF.
02 Scanner Count Total count of scanning operations.
03 Scanner Read Count Total count of scanner readings.
05 Copy Count 00 Copy Print Count Total count of copies printed.
01 Copy Scan Count Total count of copies scanned.
06 PC Count 00 PC Print Count Total count printed from PC.
01 PC Scan Count Total count scanned to PC.
07 Fax Count 00 Fax Transmit Count Total count of Fax transmitted.
01 Fax Receive Count Total count of Fax received.
02 Fax Print Count Total count of Fax printed.
08 Clear All Counts All counters are cleared.
Ver. 5.0
229 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.1.7. F8 Mode: Service Adjustment
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
F8 Mode
No. Item Remarks
00 Exposure Lamp replacement When replacing the exposure lamp.
Procedure:
a) Press the Start key to move the exposure lamp to
the position (approx. 250 mm from the optics
home position) where it can be replaced.
b) To return the optical system to the home position,
press the CLEAR key.*
01-05 Not Used
06 Error Log Print/View a) Each time the arrow button is pressed, the
machine errors or paper jam codes stored in
memory are displayed, beginning with the oldest
code.
Note:
Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed.
07 Error Log Clear a) Press the Reset key.
A Message "Error code can be cleared with the
Start key" is displayed on the LCD.*
b) Press the Start key.
08 (Factory use only) Lock operation for Scanner Unit.
09 Toner Density adjustment Adjustment operation of Toner Density.
10 Drum Charge adjustment Adjustment operation of Drum Charge.
11-12 Not Used
13 (Factory use only) Adjustment operation of Black Density sensor.
14 Black Density gain Adjustment operation of Black Density sensor gain.
15 QUANTUM Pattern Print out the QUANTUM Test Pattern.
16 Not Used
17 LSU PWM Pattern 1 Print out the Test Pattern 1.
(Factory use only)
(Factory use only)
Ver. 5.0 230 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F8 Mode
No. Item Remarks
19 Move mirror to lock a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the
locked position for transporting the copier.
b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will
not accept any numerical key input.
Note:
The locking operation is automatically reset when
the Power switch is turned ON again.
20 TDC sensor output adj. Adjustment of TDC sensor.
21 Not Used
(Factory use only)
(Factory use only)
24-46 Not Used
47 ADF continuous test Press START key to begin.
48 Platen cont. Test Press START key to begin.
49-54 Not Used
Ver. 5.0
231 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.1.8. F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
F9 Mode
Service
Item Remarks
Mode
F9 Unit 00 Fax Service Mode
Maintenance 01 Service Alert Tel # Displays the contact number when a
machine malfunction occurs.
02 Firmware 00 SC Displays the firmware version for SC.
Version 01 SC boot Displays the firmware version for SC
Boot.
02 PNL Displays the firmware version for PNL.
03 SPC Displays the firmware version for SPC.
04 Finisher Displays the firmware version for
finisher.
05 FAX Modem Displays the firmware version for FAX
option 1.
06 Not Used
07 SC2 Displays the firmware version for Slot 1.
03 Print 00 F5/F6 Parameters Prints the memory contents of the F5
Device Info. and F6 modes.
01 Machine Information Prints the machine setup information list.
02 System Addr. Info. Prints the system memory setting.
03 RAM Addr. Info. Prints the RAM data dump list.
04 RAM Edit 00 Relative Address Setting of Relative address.
Mode 01 Real Address Setting of Real address.
05 Serial Number Registration of Serial Number for
Maintenance.
Clears by Shipment Set.
Ver. 5.0 232 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
F9 Mode
Service
Item Remarks
Mode
F9 Unit 06 RAM 00 Parameter Initialize Resets the Fax and Function
Maintenance Initialize parameters to default values.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF
and back to the ON position to enable
the parameter settings.
01 All Job Clear Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
02 Not Used
03 Shipment Set Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data,
Parameter Initialize & Resets the
Counters (Fax).
04 LBP Fuser Reset Clears the LBP fuser error.
05 Dept. Counter Clear
07 Firmware 00 Update from master Updates the firmware in the machine
Update card with the Master Firmware Card.
01 Update from parallel Updates the firmware in the machine
port with the Parallel Port.
08 Program 00 Main Onboard F-ROM 4MB
Backup 01 Option 1 all Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 8MB
(Refer to 02 Option 1 a Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
Sect. 3.6.)
03 Option 1 b Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
04 Option 2 all Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 8MB
05 Option 2 a Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a)
06 Option 2 b Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b)
09 Update Program Card Creates a Master Firmware Card using
the Firmware Update Kit. A 4MB or 8MB
Flash Memory Card will be required
depending upon the model.
10 Program 00 From card to slot 1 Configuration for Program copy.
Copy 01 From card to slot 2
02 From slot 1 to card
03 From slot 1 to slot 2
04 From slot 2 to card
05 From slot 2 to slot 1
11 Parameter Backup Backup the Parameter.
12 Parameter Restore Restore the Parameter.
13 Page Memory Size Displays the page memory size (MB).
14 Sort Memory Size Displays the sort memory size (MB).
Ver. 5.0
233 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2. Service Modes (For Facsimile)
Caution:
The factory default parameters are preset (country dependent) for optimum performance and in
compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed.
Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become
inoperable.
5.2.1. Fax Service Mode Procedure
1. To select the Service Mode

The Service Mode is selected when "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" keys and "3" key
on the keypad are simultaneously pressed, then F1 will appear in the display.
Press "9" and "START" keys to enter F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance.

Select "00 FAX Service Mode" on the Touch Panel display to enter Facsimile Service Mode.
2. To exit the Service Mode

The Service Mode is reset when the "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys are pressed simultaneously.
5.2.2. FAX Service Mode Table

The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and
determining the condition of the unit.
No. Service Mode Description

00 Not Used
01 Function Parameter Setting Allows changes to the function parameters (the home
position, etc.).
02 RAM Edit Mode Factory use only.
03 Print Parameter List / Report Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer
Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and Toner Order
Form.
04 Modem Tests Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the
modem.
05 Not Used
06 RAM Initialize Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function
parameters.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON
position to enable the parameter settings.
07 Not Used
08 Check & Call Allows input of information for Service Alert Report,
Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form.
09 System Maintenance Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter
Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the
PC to the Flash Card and Sending a Received File during a
fatal printer error.
Ver. 5.0 234 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.3. Fax Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)
Use the following procedure to change the function parameters.
Select the "01 Function Param. Setting" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
↓
↓
↓
Touch the "OK" button 3 times.
↓
Function Parameter Table

No. Parameter Selections Function
000 MON/TEL DIAL 1 = Monitor Selects whether the machine starts to TX
2 = TEL/DIAL automatically during On-Hook dialing.
Monitor : Start to TX after pressing START
TEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically
001 ALARM STATUS 1 = OFF Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status.
2 = Timer (6 sec.) OFF : Alarm is disabled.
3 = Constant Timer : Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds.
Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is
pressed or the error is cleared/
corrected.
002 STOP COMM. 1 = Off Selects whether the machine prompts to print the
JRNL 2 = On COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to
INC and STOP is pressed during communication.
003 CONTINUOUS 1 = Off Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is
POLL 2 = Stn (Tx only) enabled.
3 = Hub (Rx only) Stn : Place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen,
then press the assigned Program Key to store
or add the documents into a polled file. (See
Note 1)
Hub : When the polling command is initiated, the
machine will continuously poll originals from
the remote stations until it is interrupted by
pressing "STOP".
004 NUMERIC ID 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to
SET 2 = On (accepts) set or change the Numeric ID.
Ver. 5.0
235 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
005 DESTINATION 000 : Austria Sets the Destination Code after installing the Fax
CODE 001 : U.K. Communication Board (DA-FG600).
002 : Canada
003 : Denmark Note:
004 : Taiwan It is not necessary to set the parameter for the
005 : Finland following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware
006 : Germany is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware.
007 : Netherlands PB : UK
008 : Italy PF : France
009 : Spanish
PG : Switzerland
010 : Hong Kong
PK : China
011 : Australia
012 : Switzerland PM : Germany
013 : Norway PT : Taiwan
015 : Portuguese PU : USA
016 : Ireland PEU : UK
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : U.S.A.
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
025 : Japan
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea
038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa
049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
006 ID DISPLAY 1 = Number (Numeric ID) Selects the priority of displaying the ID.
2 = Chara (Character ID)
007 JRNL COLUMN 1 = Station Selects the contents of the ID to display on the
2 = RCV’D ID Journal.
008 MONITOR 1 = Off Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for
2 = On monitoring fax signals.
(FOR SERVICE USE ONLY)
009 DC LOOP 1 = Off (Normal) Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back
2 = On (Off Hook) communication test.
010 TX LEVEL 00 = 0 dBm Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~ dBm steps. (Refer to Chapter 4.3.)
15 = -15 dBm
011 RX LEVEL 1 = -43 dBm Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48
2 = -38 dBm dBm.
3 = -33 dBm
4 = -48 dBm
Ver. 5.0 236 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
012 DTMF LEVEL 00 = 0 dBm Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1
~ dBm steps.
15 = -15 dBm
013 G3 RX EQL 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode,
2 = 4dB 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
014 G3 TX EQL 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission
2 = 4dB mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB.
3 = 8dB
4 = 12dB
015 Not Used
~
016
017 TX START 1 = 2400 bps Selects the transmission modem start speed, 14400/
2 = 4800 bps 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.
3 = 7200 bps Note:
4 = 9600 bps This parameter is applicable only when
5 = TC7200 communicating with regular G3 machines. When
6 = TC9600 communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
7 = 12000 bps use Parameter No. 32.
8 = 14400 bps
018 RX START 1 = 2400 bps Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/
2 = 4800 bps 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps.
3 = 7200 bps Note:
4 = 9600 bps This parameter is applicable only when
5 = TC7200 communicating with regular G3 machines. When
6 = TC9600 communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines,
7 = 12000 bps use Parameter No. 33.
8 = 14400 bps
019 ITU-T V.34 1 = Off Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select.
2 = On Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On,
3 = Select when entering Phone Book Dialing Numbers
or Manual Number Dialing.
020 ITU-T ECM 1 = Off (Invalid) Select the ECM mode.
2 = On (Valid)
021 EP TONE 1 = Off (without EP Tone) Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on V.29
2 = On (with EP Tone) mode.
(Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)
On : Add
Off : Do not add
022 SIGNAL 1 = 100 ms Selects the time interval between the receiving
INTERVAL 2 = 200 ms signal and the transmitting signal.
3 = 500 ms
023 TCF CHECK 1 = Normal (Short) Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short
2 = Long
024 CED 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T) Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz
FREQUENCY 2 = 2100 Hz
025 COMM. START- 1 = First Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT
UP 2 = Second and Polling).
Ver. 5.0
237 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
026 NON- 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects own mode (Panafax mode).
STANDARD 2 = On (Valid)
027 SHORT 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode.
PROTOCOL B 2 = On (Valid)
028 SHORT 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it
PROTOCOL D 2 = On (Valid) allows the machine to automatically store the
modem speed for each Auto Dial Number.
029 REMOTE 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts Remote
DIAGNOSTICS 2 = On (accepts) Diagnostics from the service station.
030 CED & 300 BPS 1 = 75 ms Selects the pause interval between the CED and the
2 = 1 sec 300 bps signal.
031 RTC = EOLx12 1 = Off (EOLx6) Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12.
2 = On (EOLx12)
032 V34 TX START 2400-33600bps Selects the transmission modem start speed for V.34
communication, 33600-2400 bps.
033 V34 RX START 2400-33600bps Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34
communication, 33600-2400 bps.
034 V34 TX 2400-3429sr Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/
SYMBOL RATE 3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.
Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
035 V34 RX 2400-3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3429/
SYMBOL RATE 3200/3000/2800/2400 sr.
Press “V” or “/\ “ to select the symbol rate.
036 Not Used
037 PROTOCOL 1 = Off (not displayed) Selects whether to display the modem speed during
DISPLAY 2 = On (displayed) communication.
(Press the Job Status Key to display)
038 Not Used
039 FLASH TIME 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash
~ key.
100 = 1000 ms
040 FLASH TIME 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash
(PSTN) ~ key.
100 = 1000 ms (For Germany, Austria and Czech)
041 PAUSE TIME 1 = 1 sec. Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for
~ dialing through a switchboard or for international
10 = 10 sec. calls.
042 Not Used
043 REDIAL 0 = no waiting Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1
INTERVAL ~ minute steps.
15 = 15 minutes
044 REDIAL COUNT 0 = no redial Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step
~ intervals.
15 = 15 times Note:
In order to comply with the requirements TBR21
0 ~ 9 (For Australia Only) in the EC countries, do not select 15 times.
045 RING DETECT 1 = 1 ring Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in 1
COUNT ~ ring step intervals.
9 = 9 rings
Ver. 5.0 238 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
046 ON-HOOK TIME 0 = 0 sec. Selects the on-hook time between sequential
~ communication calls in 1 second step intervals.
90 = 90 sec.
047 RESPONSE 1 = 1 sec. Selects the waiting interval for the response after
WAIT ~ completing the dialing.
90 = 90 sec.
20 ~ 150 sec.
(For France Only)
048 Not Used
~
049
050 RING DETECT 1 = Normal Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line
MODE 2 = Rough signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the
unit may detect the ringing signals.
051 Not Used
052 PULSE RATE 1 = 10 pps Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.
2 = 20 pps
053 Not Used
~
054
055 BUSY TONE 1 = Off Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone.
CHECK 2 = On
056 DIAL TONE 1 = Off Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing
CHECK 2 = On the telephone number.
(Except for USA
and Canada)
057 DC LOOP 1 = Off Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during
CHECK 2 = On communication.
(Except for USA
and Canada)
058 COMM.JRNL 1 = Off (without image) Selects whether the machine prints the COMM.
+IMAGE 2 = On (with image) Journal with image.
059 CONFIDENTIAL1 = Off (does not print out) Selects whether the machine prints the Confidential
RCV REPORT 2 = On (prints out) RCV Report.
060 VERSION Indicates the Host software
version.
061 TX/RX//PRT/ 1 = Fax Transmit Count Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and
CPY COUNTER 2 = Fax Receive Count copied document count.
3 = Total Count
4 = Copy Print Count
062 PRINT 1 = Off Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List,
COUNTER 2 = On the counter information that is displayed in the
Function Parameter No. 61.
063 Not Used
~
067
Ver. 5.0
239 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
068 NYSE FAX 1 = Off Selects whether the machine will forward the
FORWARD 2 = On incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station.
(USA and Note:
Canada Only) Once this parameter is activated, Fax Forwarding
via Fax Parameter 054 is automatically disabled,
an Access Code of "0000" is automatically
assigned and Fax Parameter 038 has a new
setting added called "NYSE".
069 NYSE LOCAL 1 = INC Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes
PRINT 2 = ON (Always) after FAX Forwarding.
(USA and INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails.
Canada Only) ON : Always prints.
070 LINE ERROR 1 = 128 lines 1. Selects the line disconnect condition during
2 = 256 lines reception. If the number of line errors exceed this
3 = 512 lines setting, the unit will disconnect the line.
4 = 1024 lines 2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/
5 = 2048 lines PIN.
6 = Off (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "LINES")
(will not disconnect line) (See Note 1)
071 TOTAL ERROR 1 = 5% Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/
2 = 10% PIN.
3 = 15% (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
4 = 20% (See Note 2)
072 CONTINUOUS 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6 or
ERROR 2 = 3 lines/STD 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total error
3 = 6 lines/STD exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit RTN/PIN.
4 = 12 lines/STD (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".)
073 ERROR 1 = Lines Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate.
DETECT 2 = Rate
074 RTN RECEIVE 1 = Disconnect Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or
2 = Continue continue when "RTN" is received.
075 CODING 1 = MH (MH only) Selects the coding scheme.
2 = MR (MH or MR)
3 = MMR
(MH or MR or MMR)
4 = JBIG
076 BATCH TX 1 = Off Selects whether the batch transmission is available.
(USA and 2 = On
Canada Only)
077 RX JAM 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the maximum length of a received
LENGTH 2=2m document that can be printed.
078 Not Used
~
079
080 ORIGINAL -99 Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
LEAD EDGE ~ ON position and the scanning start position.
ADF +99
081 ORIGINAL -127 Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor
TRAIL ADF ~ OFF position and the scanning end position.
+127
082 JAM LENGTH 1=1m Selects the maximum length of the original that can
2=2m be scanned.
Ver. 5.0 240 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
083 Not Used
084 LINE AS NO 1 = Ring (ring) Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the
PAPER 2 = Busy (keep line busy) remote station when the recording paper runs out or
the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.
085 Not Used
086 REDUCTION 1 = Off Selects whether the resolution is preset to Fine,
FINE 2 = On when sending with reduction B4→A4.
087 DARKER LEVEL 0 = Lightest Contrast Selects the contrast level.
088 NORMAL ~ 0← →15
LEVEL 15 = Darkest Contrast Lightest← →Darkest
089 LIGHTER
LEVEL
090 Not Used
~
091
092 SMOOTHING 1 = Off Selects whether the smoothing function is available.
2 = On
093 Not Used
~
101
102 ORIGINAL -30 Adjustment of original registration detection timing.
REGISTRATION ~
+30
103 TRAIL EDGE -9 Adjustment of trail edge void.
READ TIMING ~
0
104 Not Used
~
109
110 MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC Address.
111 Not Used
112 INSERT EMAIL 1 = Off Selects whether the Text Template (email message)
TXT 2 = On is programmable and added on all email sent in the
message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40
characters Programmed in the User Parameters.)
Note:
After enabling this feature, aside from entering
the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be
activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will
take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed
Numbers.
113 Not Used
~
114
115 TIME ZONE 1 = Scroll Selects the setting method for Time Zone.
2 = Direct Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll through
the Time Zone Table.
Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone directly,
(*) key to be used as a switch between +/-.
Ver. 5.0
241 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
116 OVERWRITE 1 = Yes Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included
WARNING 2 = No on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when
programming the Auto Dialer via email.
117 Not Used
~
121
122 LDAP 1 = Off When LDAP is used, specialize characters may be
2 = On displayed as different characters.
Available from May production.
123 Not Used
~
174
175 FAX/EMAIL 0 = Address Book Selects the FAX/EMAIL Default.
Default 1 = Mode Set
176 Not Used
~
199
Note 1: Continuous Polling (Station Mode)

This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory.
To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station". The last
Program Key will be assigned with the "Store 4 Poll" Key name automatically and cannot be
changed.
To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen and
then press the Program Key to store or add the document(s) into a polled file.
(Note: If a regular polled file is stored in memory, the Program Key for Continuous Polling will not
be accepted.)
Note 2: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN
Setting
Signal
1:128 2:256 3:512 4:1024 5:2048 6:Off
MCF/PIP 0-31 0-63 0-127 0-255 0-511 Always
RTP/PIP 32-63 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 -
RTN/PIN 64-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 1024-2047 -
Note 3: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN
Setting
Signal
1:5% 2:10% 3:15% 4:20%
MCF/PIP 0-2 0-4 0-7 0-9
RTP/PIP 3-4 5-9 8-14 10-19
RTN/PIN 5- 10- 15- 20-
Note 4: The default setting of parameters depends on the country’s specifications or regulations.
Print the Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.
Ver. 5.0 242 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.4. Fax Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports and Test Results)
From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All
Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.
5.2.4.1. Function Parameter List
A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure.
Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the "01 Function Parameter List" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "YES” button to print Function Parameter List.
↓
↓
Ver. 5.0
243 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Function Parameter List (Sample)
************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01
000 MON/TEL DIAL:[Monitor] Monitor 050 RING DET MODE:[Normal] Normal

001 ALARM STATUS:[Timer] Timer 051 ----------
002 STOP COMM.JRNL:[On] On 052 PULSE RATE:[10pps] 10pps
003 CONTINUOS POLL:[Off] Off 053 ----------
004 NUMERIC ID SET:[On] On 054 ----------
005 DESTINATION CODE:[999]999 055 BUSY TONE CHECK:[On] On
006 IDDISPLAY:[Chara] Chara 056 ----------
007 JNL COLUMN:[Station] Station 057 ----------
008 MONITOR:[Off] Off 058 COMM. JRNL +IMAGE:[On] On
009 DC LOOP:[Off] Off 059 CONF.RCV REPORT:[On] On
010 TX LEVEL:[-9dBm] -9dBm 060 VERSION: AAV11502AU

011 RX LEVEL:[-43dBm] -43dBm 061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000080/000168/000003/000000
012 DTMF LEVEL:[-5dBm] -5dBm 062 PRINT COUNTER:[Off] Off
013 G3 RX EQL:[0dB] 0dB 063 ----------
014 G3 TX EQL:[0dB] 0dB 064 ----------
015 --------- 065 ----------
016 --------- 066 ----------
017 TX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps 067 ----------
018 RX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps 068 NYSE FAX FORWARD:[Off] Off
019 ITU-T V.34:[On] On 069 NYSE LOCAL PRINT:[Inc] Inc
020 ITU-T ECM:[On] On 070 LINE ERROR:[128] 128

021 EP TONE:[Off] Off 071 TOTAL ERROR:[ 10] 10
022 SIG. INTERVAL:[500ms] 500ms 072 CONTI. ERROR:[Off] Off
023 TCF CHECK:[Normal] Normal 073 ERROR DETECT:[Rate] Rate
024 CED FREQ.:[2100Hz] 2100Hz 074 RTN RECEIVE:[Discon] Discon
025 COMM. START-UP:[1'st] 1'st 075 CODING:[JBIG] JBIG
026 NON-STANDARD:[On] On 076 BATCH TX:[On] On
027 SHORT PROTOCOL B:[On] On 077 RX JAM LENGTH:[2 m] 2 m
028 SHORT PROTOCOL D:[On] On 078 ----------
029 REMOTE DIAG.:[On] On 079 ----------
030 CED & 300bps:[75ms] 75ms 080 DOC TOP FEED:[0.0mm] 0.0mm
031 RTC=EQL x 12:[Off] Off 081 DOC END FEED:[0.0mm] 0.0mm
032 V34TX START:[33600bps] 33600bps 082 JAM LENGTH:[ 2 m] 2 m
033 V34RX START:[33600bps] 33600bps 083 ----------
034 V34 TX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr 084 LINE AS NOPAPER:[Ring] Ring
035 V34 RX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr 085 ----------
036 --------- 086 REDUCTION FINE:[On] On
037 PROTOCOL DISPLAY:[Off] Off 087 DARKER LEVEL:[2] 2
038 --------- 088 NORMAL LEVEL:[8] 8
039 FLASH TIME:[500] 500ms 089 LIGHTER LEVEL:[4] 4
040 --------- 090 ----------

041 PAUSE TIME:[3sec] 3sec 091 ----------
042 --------- 092 SMOOTHING:[On] On
043 REDIAL INTERVAL:[3min] 3min 093 ----------
044 REDIAL COUNT:[5] 5 094 ----------
045 RING DET. COUNT:[2] 2 095 ----------
046 ON-HOOK TIME:[5sec] 5sec 096 ----------
047 RESPONSE WAIT:[55sec] 55sec 097 ----------
048 --------- 098 ----------
049 --------- 099 ----------
Note:The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect.
-PANASONIC DP-6030-
******************************** -PANASONIC DP-6030 - ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********
Note:
1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the country’s regulations.
2. “ * ” mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.
Ver. 5.0 244 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.4.2. Page Memory Test
A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory (IC120 and IC121 on the SC PCB) and printer
mechanism using the following procedure.
↓
Select the "03 Page Memory Test" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "YES" button to print a test pattern.
↓
↓
SC BOOT : M30 TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000123/000456/000789/000333

PNL : AAT00001PU MEMORY SIZE: (2MB)
SPC : 60cpm T40000 MAC ADDRESS: 08002300AB5F
FINISHER : 0702 SHIPMENT SET
FAX MODEM :
PDL FONT1 : CAV00001b
SC2 : CAV00008aPU
Ver. 5.0
245 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.4.3. Printer Report
All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure.
↓
Select the "04 Printer Report" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "YES" button to print a Printer Report.
↓
↓
**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02********
LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016
CUSTOMER ID : 1234567890123456
FIRMWARE VERSION
SC : BAV00008PU
SC BOOT : M30
PNL : AAT00001PU
SPC : 60cpm T40000
TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000475

RECEIVE COUNTER : 000398
COPY COUNTER : 000083
PRINT COUNTER : 000016
NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016
02.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 J02 00-00000016
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-PANASONIC -
***** DP-6030 *******************-PANAFAX -*******-12345678901234567890-**************
Ver. 5.0 246 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.4.4. All Document Files
Print the document files from the Flash Memory.
↓
Select the "05 All Document Files" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "YES" button to print All Document Files.
↓
↓
Ver. 5.0
247 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.4.5. Protocol Trace
Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication.
↓
Select the "06 Protocol Trace" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "YES" button to print a Protocol Trace Report.
↓
↓
*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******
STATUS : OK
MODE : ECM-TX (STANDARD)
SPEED : 9600bps 0MS/L
REMOTE CAPA. : DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12
LOCAL CAPA. : TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B
39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30
DCS 00 C6 F8 44
COMMAND LOG.
REMOTE : NSF CSI DIS CFR
LOCAL : TSI DCS PIX PPS-EOP
------------------------------------------------------------------
REMOTE : MCF
LOCAL : DCN
-PANASONIC -
****************************-PANASONIC DP-6010-*************-12345678901234567890-***************
Ver. 5.0 248 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.4.6. Toner Order Form
The Toner Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure.
↓
Select the "07 Toner Order Form" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Touch the "YES" button to print a Toner Order Form.
↓
↓
Ver. 5.0
249 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
*************************************
> TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM <
*************************************
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer
Panasonic Corp. (2)
by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)

by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address

=========================
Ship to: Bill to:
Attention: Attention:
Phone No.: Phone No.:
Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required):
Toner Bottle No.: (6) Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/ /
Print your name and title Signature & Date
Explanation of Contents
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”
(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits
(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits
(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits
(5) Customer ID Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
(6) Toner Bottle No. DQ-TU24D : DP-3510/4510
DQ-TU241G : DP-3520/3530/4520/4530
DQ-TU35D : DP-6010
DQ-TU351G : DP-6020/6030
The order number(s) may differ depending on the Model and the
Destination.
Ver. 5.0 250 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.5. Fax Service Mode 4 (Modem Test)
5.2.5.1. Binary Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.
Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display.

↓
Select the "01 Binary Signal" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE" button.
↓
↓
Binary Signal Table

Number Signals
1 V21 300bps
2 V27ter 2400bps
3 V27ter 4800bps
4 V29 7200bps
5 V29 9600bps
6 V17 TC7200bps
7 V17 TC9600bps
8 V33 12000bps
9 V33 14400bps
Ver. 5.0
251 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.5.2. Tonal Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure.

↓
Select the "02 Tonal Signal" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
↓
↓
Tonal Signal Table

Number Signals
1 462 Hz
2 1080 Hz
3 1100 Hz
4 1300 Hz
5 1650 Hz
6 1850 Hz
7 2100 Hz
Ver. 5.0 252 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.5.3. DTMF Signal
This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output.
The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure.

↓
Select the "03 DTM Single Tone" or "DTMF Dual Tone" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
↓
↓
DTMF Single Tone Table

Number DTMF Signal Tones
1 697 Hz
2 770 Hz
3 852 Hz
4 941 Hz
5 1209 Hz
6 1336 Hz
7 1477 Hz
8 1633 Hz
DTMF Dual Tone Table
Number DTMF Dual Tones
0 941 Hz + 1336 Hz
1 697 Hz + 1209 Hz
2 697 Hz + 1336 Hz
3 697 Hz + 1477 Hz
4 770 Hz + 1209 Hz
5 770 Hz + 1336 Hz
6 770 Hz + 1477 Hz
7 852 Hz + 1209 Hz
8 852 Hz + 1336 Hz
9 852 Hz + 1477 Hz
* 941 Hz + 1209 Hz
# 941 Hz + 1477 Hz
Ver. 5.0
253 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.5.4. Binary Signal (V.34)
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the
following procedure. (V.34)

↓
Select the "05 V34 MODEM" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
↓
↓
Binary Signal Table

Number Signals Number Signals Number Signals
01 V34 2400 sr 2400 bps 22 V34 3000 sr 9600 bps 43 V34 3429 sr 4800 bps
14 V34 2800 sr 14400 bps 35 V34 3200 sr 14400 bps 56 ANSam
15 V34 2800 sr 16800 bps 36 V34 3200 sr 16800 bps 57 CM
16 V34 2800 sr 19200 bps 37 V34 3200 sr 19200 bps 58 JM
17 V34 2800 sr 21600 bps 38 V34 3200 sr 21600 bps 59 INFO0c & TONEB
18 V34 2800 sr 24000 bps 39 V34 3200 sr 24000 bps 60 INFO0c & TONEA
19 V34 2800 sr 26400 bps 40 V34 3200 sr 26400 bps 61 PPh & AC & ALT
20 V34 3000 sr 4800 bps 41 V34 3200 sr 28800 bps
21 V34 3000 sr 7200 bps 42 V34 3200 sr 31200 bps
Ver. 5.0 254 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.6. Fax Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)
Initializes RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values.
Note:
This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed.
Select the "06 RAM initialize" on the Touch Panel display.

↓
↓
Touch the "YES" button to initialize RAM.
↓
↓
RAM Initialization Table

No. Initialize Mode Description
01 Parameter Initialize Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default
values.
Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the
ON position to enable the parameter settings.
02 Journal Clear Clears the Journal contents.
03 Auto Dial Clear Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books.
04 Program Dial Clear Clears the Program keys.
05 LOGO/ID/PSWD Clear Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password.
06 LBP Error Log Clear Clears the Printer Error Log.
07 Shipment Set Deletes all setting information, except parameter number
80 and 81, then set default values.
08 Flash Memory Clear Deletes all information in the Flash Memory.
09 All Job Clear Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
Ver. 5.0
255 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.7. FAX Service Mode 8 (Check & Call)
5.2.7.1. Overview
This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the machine maintenance to
their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by
alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows:
1. The machine’s printer error information is stored in the Printer Report.
2. The printer report can be manually printed when required.
3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-
registered telephone number or email address.
4. When the unit detects Low Toner or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically
transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.
Select the "08 Check & Call" on the Touch Panel display.
↓
(i.e. 01 Service Alert Fax #, input the telephone No. or for an email address, press the "FAX/EMAIL"
Mode key and input the email address.)
↓
Touch the "OK" button.
↓
↓
5.2.7.2. Printer Reports

• Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted
1. Manual Print
The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.2.4.3.)
2. Automatic Transmission/Printout
a. Service Alert Report
When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service
Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. However, the unit will not
transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log.
b. Maintenance Alert Report
When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report
to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Refer to the Error Code Table.
Note:
To activate the Maintenance Alert Report Transmission, register the both numbers
“01 Service Alert Fax #” & ”02 Maint Alert Fax #”.
c. Call Counter Report (DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030)
When the printer counter reaches the pre-set number, the unit can automatically transmit the Call
Counter Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address.
Note:
The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory
transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).
Ver. 5.0 256 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Error Tx
Log Remarks
Code Report
Ex-xx O S Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.3.)
E13 O Out of Toner.
Jxx O Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.2.)
Uxx Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.1.)
U13 O M Low Toner.
Note:
TX (Transmission) Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report
Ver. 5.0
257 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.7.3. SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT
*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ********
****************************
> SERVICE ALERT REPORT <
****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013
(5) SERIAL NUMBER : 01234567890
(1) CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC : BAV00008PU
PNL : AAT00001PU
SPC : 6-cpm T40000
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:
CURRENT PM CYCLE CURRENT
F7-02 Total Count : 13 240000 2-Sided Count : 0
PM COUNT : 13 (------) A4/LETTER Count : 3
Scanner PM Count : 9 (------) A4-R/LETTER-R Count : 10
ADF Count : 1 ------ A3/LEDGER Count : 0
OPC Drum Count : 13 ------ B4/LEGAL Count : 0
Process Unit Count : 13 (------)
ADF PM Count : 1 F7-04 ADF Count : 1
Fuser Web Count : 240986 ADF Read Count : 1
Developer Count : 13 Scanner Count : 9
Corona Cleaning Count : 13 Scanner Read Count : 9
Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up : 1.00
Total OPC Rotation Time : 0.03 F7-05 Copy Print Count : 3
Avg. Sec/Drum Rise Up : 0.01 Copy Scan Count : 4
F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count : 0 F7-06 PC Print Count : 0

1st Paper Tray Count : 3 PC Scan Count : 6
2nd Paper Tray Count : 10
3rd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-07 FAX Transmit Count : 0
4th Paper Tray Count : 0 FAX Receive Count : 0
LCT Tray Count : 0 FAX Print Count : 0
(4) PRINT ERROR:
NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-LOGO PANASONIC -
***** DP-6030 *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
(1) Customer ID
(2) Firmware Version
(3) Counter Information
(4) Print Error Last 30 records (Latest on top)
(5) Serial Number DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030 Only
Ver. 5.0 258 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.7.4. MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT
****************************
> MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT <
****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1)
(5) SERIAL NUMBER : 01234567890
CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY (2)
FIRMWARE VERSION (3)

SC : BAV00008PU
PNL : AAT00001PU
SPC : 6-cpm T40000
TRANSMIT COUNTER : 000244 (4)

RECEIVE COUNTER : 000082
COPY COUNTER : 000000
PRINT COUNTER : 000000
-LOGO PANASONIC -
************************************ -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-***********
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER”

(4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters
Ver. 5.0
259 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.7.5. TONER ORDER FORM
*************************************
> TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM <
*************************************
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1)
To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer
Panasonic Corp. (2)
by Phone: 1 201 111 5555 (3)

by Fax: 1 201 111 4444 (4)
Thank you for your order.
Customer Name and Address

=========================
Ship to: Bill to:
Attention: Attention:
Phone No.: Phone No.:
Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) P.O. No.(if required):
Toner Bottle No.: (6) Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
/ /
Print your name and title Signature & Date
(1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) “The toner supply in your machine is running low”
(2) Dealer Name Up to 25 digits
(3) Toner Order Tel # Up to 36 digits
(4) Toner Order Fax # Up to 36 digits
(6) Toner Bottle No. DQ-TU24D : DP-3510/4510
DQ-TU241G : DP-3520/3530/4520/4530
DQ-TU35D : DP-6010
DQ-TU351G : DP-6020/6030
The order number(s) may differ depending on the Model and the
Destination.
Ver. 5.0 260 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.7.6. CALL COUNTER REPORT (DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030)
*****************************************************************
> SCHEDULED REPORT - CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE-SET VALUE <
*****************************************************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013
(5) SERIAL NUMBER : 01234567890
(1) CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY
(2) FIRMWARE VERSION
SC : BAV00008PU
PNL : AAT00001PU
SPC : 60cpm T400000
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:
CURRENT PM CYCLE CURRENT
F7-02 Total Count : 13 240000 2-Sided Count : 0
PM COUNT : 13 (------) A4/LETTER Count : 3
Scanner PM Count : 9 (------) A4-R/LETTER-R Count : 10
ADF Count : 1 ------ A3/LEDGER Count : 0
OPC Drum Count : 13 ------ B4/LEGAL Count : 0
Process Unit Count : 13 (------)
ADF PM Count : 1 F7-04 ADF Count : 1
Fuser Web Count : 240986 ADF Read Count : 1
Developer Count : 13 Scanner Count : 9
Corona Cleaning Count : 13 Scanner Read Count : 9
Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up : 1.00
Total OPC Rotation Time : 0.03 F7-05 Copy Print Count : 3
Avg. Sec/Drum Rise Up : 0.01 Copy Scan Count : 4
F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count : 0 F7-06 PC Print Count : 0

1st Paper Tray Count : 3 PC Scan Count : 6
2nd Paper Tray Count : 10
3rd Paper Tray Count : 0 F7-07 FAX Transmit Count : 0
4th Paper Tray Count : 0 FAX Receive Count : 0
LCT Tray Count : 0 FAX Print Count : 0
(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value : 14000
PRINT ERROR:
NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 |
02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-LOGO PANASONIC -
***** DP-6030 *********************** -CHARACTER ID - ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
(1) Customer ID
(3) Counter Information
(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value
Ver. 5.0
261 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5.2.8. Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance)
5.2.8.1. Overview
This Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance.
Select the "09 System maintenance" on the Touch Panel display.

↓
Select the "01 Send RCV’D File". The display changes to the Fax Mode.
↓
Select the desired Fax number.
↓
Press "START" key to send the Fax.
After the transmission, the machine returns to the Stand-by Mode.
Note:
If the File is NOT in the machine, it is not functioned.
↓
System Maintenance Table

No. Maintenance Mode Description
01 SEND RCV'D FILE Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine
during a fatal printer error.
Ver. 5.0 262 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6 System Description
6.1. Copy Process
(-DC)
Charger
Discharge Lamp
Photo Electric
Laser Exposure Conversion Original
Cleaning
Developer Toner
(AC) Separation Transfer (+DC)
Exit Fusing Paper Feed
ADU
Primary Charge: Image Exposure: Developing:

Latent Charge Doctor Blade
Illumination Image Gap = 0.6~
Charge Corona 0.7 mm
Drum Toner
Aluminum Latent
Layer Charge Magnetic
Drum Surface Image
Image
Roller
Approximately-750V DC Bias: -550 V
Transfer/Separation Fusing: Cleaning:
Latent Image
Heat Roller Fuser Lamp
Cleaning
Blade Drum
Paper
Paper Pressure
Transfer Roller
Charge
Separation
Charge (AC) (+DC)
Discharge Lamp:
Discharge
Lamp
Ver. 5.0 263 NOV 2004

DP-3510/4510/6010
DP-3520/4520/6020
6.2. Precautions with Consumables
(1) Photoreceptor Drum
Do not touch the surface (with your hands or anything else).
Stand the drum with the drum gear facing upward during storage.
- Be careful not to smear the surface with saliva, water, oil, etc.
- Do not store in places where the temperature is high.
- Do not store it in strong light (such as direct sunlight or on the window).
- Do not expose it to chemical gas or vapor.
- Do not store the drum unit with the photoreceptor drum installed without covering
it with clean paper.
(2) Toner Developer

1) Do not mix different types of toner and developer.
- The machines are designed to use exclusive toner and developer for specific
models. Be careful not to use toner and developer from other models.
2) Do not mix foreign materials.
Be careful not to contaminate toner and developer with foreign materials. If
you spill toner or developer on a table or floor when adding toner or developer
in the developer unit, discard what was spilled. Such supplies may damage the
drum as well as cause other image problems.
3) Do not place into other containers.
Toner and developer must not be placed into other containers, as some
containers may change the characteristics of the supplies. Vinyl chloride
potentially changes the characteristics of supplies due to migrating
plasticizers.
4) Precautions during storage and transportation
- Toner and developer additives are sensitive to temperature and humidity (high
temperature or humidity in particular).
- Store toner and developer in a dark and cool location (lower than 95 ˚F/35 ˚C)
and out of direct sunlight.
- Be careful not to expose toner and developer to rain or direct sunlight during
transportation. When delivered by truck the temperature inside must not
exceed 104 ˚F/40 ˚C. (Under the sun in summer, the inside temperature
can typically be 140 ˚F/60 ˚C or higher in a closed vehicle compartment.)
- In cold climate, store in a low humidity environment condition.
Do not store supplies near heaters.
Ver. 5.0 264 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5) Safety and hygiene

Due to its properties, Toner can be easily wind blown.
Toner on skin does not cause any health risk. However inhalation is undesirable
even if the powder is simply dust. Therefore, be careful not to inhale toner.
- Handle the toner carefully when changing cartridges. Developer should also
be handled carefully when poured into the developer unit.
If you inhale toner by mistake, rinse your mouth out with water.
Toner on the skin should be washed off with soapy water.
- Toner stuck on clothing must be removed while in a dry state with a vacuum
cleaner, brush or by beating, then by washing with soapy water.
Wiping off with benzine, alcohol, or thinner is not recommended as it may
partially melt the components of toner resulting in a stain and spot.
- Toner spills must be removed with a vacuum cleaner, and then wiped with a
cloth which has been dampened with a neutral detergent.
- If exposed to flames toner and developer will burn. Keep these supplies away
from open flames.
- Any used consumable (photoreceptor, developer and toner) should be recycled.
- Wear rubber gloves, eye protection etc. before handling any solvents such as
IPA.
Ver. 5.0 265 NOV 2004

DP-3510/4510/6010
DP-3520/4520/6020
6.3. New Digital Image Control Qualitative Reasoning Based Adaptive
Controller (New Digital QUANTUM)
To improve the copy quality, a new Toner Density Controller (New Digital QUANTUM System) was
developed.
The most important aim was to stabilize the Toner Density under various office environments.
As a result, the current QUANTUM System was improved with additional Sensors, Parameters and
Software.
The following diagram illustrates this New System.
Printer with the New QUANTUM System
Laser Power
New Laser Unit
Digital Toner
QUANTUM Grid Voltage (1)
Density
(Feedback of QUANTUM) Control
Grid Voltage Timer/
Counter
Drum (2)(3)(4)
White
Black
Image Density
Sensors
Toner Density
Bias Voltage Output
Separation Voltage Transfer Current

Electronic Pattern
Transfer Humidity (5) Humidity Sensor
Image Temperature (5)
Control Temperature Sensor
Halftone Black
Control Point
High Density
1.3
Image Density (ID)
Ideal Curve
Middle Density
0.35
0 255
Printer Density Data
Ver. 5.0 266 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The newly controlled features and intervals are as follows.
1. Grid Voltage Feedback for Image Density Control

QUANTUM uses the Copy Density information, interpreted by the Image Density Sensors, to
control the Grid Voltage (1) [600 - 900 V] along with the Toner Density (±0.9%) and conveys it
to the Toner Density Controller as a feedback signal.
2. Long Run Operation Compensation

Under Long Run Operation Environment, the Toner Density is also controlled with the Long
Run Operation Compensation Parameter activated by the Timer / Counter (2) every 1k-sheet
interval.
3. Developer Compensation
The Toner Density is also controlled with Developer Compensation Parameter activated by
the Timer / Counter (3) when reaching the 150k, 180k and 210k-sheet count.
4. Initialization
The Developer Parameter is initialized by the Timer / Counter (4) when the machine is non
operational for over one hour.
5. Humidity and Temperature Compensation

Humidity and Temperature factors are also compensated with the Sensors (5) and the TDC
Controller Compensation Software by stabilizing the Toner Density under the various High
Temperature and High Humidity environments.
Ver. 5.0 267 NOV 2004

DP-3510/4510/6010
DP-3520/4520/6020
6.4. Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF)
The i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds documents into the unit, one
original at a time. When duplex mode is selected, this feature enables two-sided faxing or copying of
the original(s).
Its main features are:
1. Place originals Face-Up
2. Correct Order Stacking (Collation Mode)
3. Paper Feed Mechanism with Pre-Feed Roller
The following is the ADF / i-ADF Mechanical operation description.
6.4.1. Automatic Document Feeder Operation
1. Initialization
The ADF begins its operation by turning on the Feed Motor for a specified time, lowering the Pickup
Roller to re-set the Original Stopper to its standby position.
2. Original Setting and Size Sensors

Place the original(s) face up on the ADF until the leading edge stops against the Original Stopper
(513).
Adjust the Original Guides (403, 406) to center the original on the ADF. The Original Stopper (513)
prevents originals from skewing and multiple feeding. The Original Detection Sensor (401) detects the
presence of documents on the ADF when the original(s) actuate Original Sensor Actuator (521) on the
ADF Cover. The two Sensors mounted on the SNS PC Board which is installed in the Original Tray are
actuated by the Original Guides (403, 406), their position determines the original's width and the
Original Length Sensor 1 (401) and Length Sensor 2 (401) detect the length of the original.
3. Feeding and Separation

When the Start button is pressed, the ADF Motor 1 (925) starts to rotate and drive the Pickup Roller
(511). The 1st original is fed into the Paper Feed Roller (508) and the Separation Roller (610) with the
Torque Limiter Assembly preventing multiple feeding.
4. Transmission and Ejection

The original is fed into the Registration Roller 1 (817) and when the original actuates the Registration
Sensor 2 (401), the Paper Feed Roller (508) stops rotating. The Registration Sensor 2 (401) detects
the scanning position and the Registration Roller 2 (818) and Transport Roller (816) transport the
original while scanning. The Stamp Head (724) stamps an [X] mark on the front of the original after the
document is successfully transmitted or stored. It consists of the Stamp Head (724) and Stamp
Solenoid (726). The Exit Roller (814) feeds and ejects the original out of the ADF. If there are additional
originals on the ADF, the next one is fed into the feeder.
5. Final Operation
After ejecting the last original from the ADF, the Clutch reverses the direction of rotation raising the
Original Stopper (513) to its standby position.
6.4.2. i-ADF Operation

The i-ADF automatically inverts 2-sided original(s) for faxing or copying of the second side. This
feature enables your machine to perform duplex faxing or copying.
An i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) functions like the ADF with the main exception being
the original eject path after scanning. The following is the description of the main differences.
1. Switching from the ADF Mode to the i-ADF Mode

After passing through the Read Point, the path of the original is switched over by the Selection Guide 1
(815), to the Exit Roller (814) or to the Inverting Roller (809). For single-sided scanning, the Selection
Ver. 5.0 268 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Guide 1 (815) is rotated clockwise by the Selection Solenoid (621) guiding the original to the Exit Roller
(814). For double-side scanning, the Selection Guide 1 (815) is rotated counter-clockwise by the
Selection Solenoid (621) guiding the original to the Inverting Roller (809). The Selection Guide 1 (815)
moves only once, in the direction according to whether a single or double-side scanning is selected
(Copier or Fax) before the Start button is pressed.
It will remain in this position until a different operation is performed (i.e. if the last operation was 2-sided
scanning, a single-side scanning is performed).
2. Scanning the Front and the Back Side of an Original

The scanning of the Front and Back side of a 2-sided original is accomplished by means of the
Selection Guide 1 (815) and Selection Guide 2 (713).
After the Front side of the original is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1
(815), through the Selection Guide 2 (713) that was rotated counter-clockwise by the Selection
Solenoid (621) and is carried beyond the Inverting Roller (809) and upper Pinch Rollers (626) into the
Sub Tray. The original is carried for a specified period of time after the trailing edge of the original
triggers the Selection Sensor (401) and stops within 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers. Then, the
Selection Guide 2 (713) is rotated clockwise by the Pinch Roller Solenoid Assembly (615) and the
reverse rotation of the ADF Motor 1 (925) pulls the original back around the Registration Roller 1 (817)
and proceeds to scan the Back side of the original.
3. Eject by Reverse Rotation

After the Back is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1 (815), through the
Selection Guide 2 (713) and is carried beyond the Inverting Roller (809) and lower Pinch Rollers (626),
into the Sub Tray (416), again stopping 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers.
The Selection Guide 2 (713) is rotated clockwise by the Pinch Roller Solenoid Assembly (621) and the
reverse rotation of the ADF Motor 1 (925) pulls the original back around the Registration Roller 1 (817),
however, this time the original is routed to the Exit Roller (814) and exits into the ADF Base.
4. Sub Tray
The Inverting ADF system includes a Sub Tray (416), which supports the originals during the ejection
mode of the double-side scanning operation.
r)
m (Ledge
2)
Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF)

m (FLS1.
210 mm (INVOICE)
(A3)
(B4)
(A4-R)
(B5-R)
431.8 m
420 mm
364 mm
Original Tray
330.2 m
(A5)
Separation Roller
297 mm
Separation Paper Feed Roller

257 mm
m
215.9 m
Roller Original Stopper Original Guide

Registration Sensor 1
Pick Up Roller
Registration Sensor 3
Original Detection Sensor
Registration Roller 1
Inverting Guide Sheet
Anti Drive Registration Roller
(Pinch Roller) Anti Drive Exit Roller
(Pinch Roller)
Inverting Roller Sub Tray
Anti Drive Exit Roller

(Pinch Roller)
Exit Roller
Anti Drive Registration Exit Sensor Selection Guide 2

Roller 2 (Pinch Roller) Selection Guide 1
Read Point
Registration Roller 2 Anti Drive Transport Roller (Pinch Roller)
Registration Sensor 2 Transport Roller
Selection Sensor
Ver. 5.0 269 NOV 2004

DP-3510/4510/6010
DP-3520/4520/6020
6.5. Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
Signal Name Function

+12V +12 VDC Power Supply
+24VD +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VM +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VO1 +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VO2 +24 VDC Power Supply
+24VS +24 VDC Power Supply
+3.3V +3.3 VDC Power Supply
+5VD +5 VDC Power Supply
+5VL +5 VDC Power Supply
+5VP +5 VDC Power Supply
ACL AC Power Supply
ACLD AC Power Supply (Though Front Door SW)
ACLRLB AC Power Supply
ACN AC Power Supply
ACND AC Power Supply (Though Front Door SW)
ACNRLB AC Power Supply
ACSW Fuser Relay
ADCLK FIFO Clock
ADFRRSN1 Registration Sensor 1 Signal
ADUCRRSN ADU Intermediate Sensor Signal
ADUINSN ADU Sensor Signal
ADURRSN ADU Registration Sensor Signal
ADXSN Inverting Path Sensor Detection Signal
AFDIN FIFO Data Out
AFDOUT FIFO Data In
AFENB FIFO Enable
AFLD FIFO Load
AFLTH FIFO Latch
AMMCLK ADF Main Motor Clock
APMCLK ADF Paper Feed Motor Clock
ARRCNT Registration Roller Clutch Control Signal
ARRSN2 Registration Sensor 2 Signal
ARST System Reset Signal
ARVCL1 Inverting Clutch 1 Control Signal
ARVCL2 Inverting Clutch 2 Control Signal
ATA0 HDD Address Bus
ATAINT HDD Interrupt Signal
ATCS0 Primary HDD Select Signal
ATCS1 Secondary HDD Select Signal
ATD0 HDD Data Bus
Ver. 5.0 270 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
ATD1 HDD Data Bus
ATD10 HDD Data Bus
ATD11 HDD Data Bus
ATD12 HDD Data Bus
ATD13 HDD Data Bus
ATD14 HDD Data Bus
ATD15 HDD Data Bus
ATD2 HDD Data Bus
ATD3 HDD Data Bus
ATD4 HDD Data Bus
ATD5 HDD Data Bus
ATD6 HDD Data Bus
ATD7 HDD Data Bus
ATD8 HDD Data Bus
ATD9 HDD Data Bus
ATDASP Device Active Signal
ATDMAACK DMA ACK Signal
ATDMAREQ DMA Request Signal
ATIO16 HDD 16 bits Transfer Control Signal
ATIORD HDD Data Read Signal
ATIORDY HDD Data Ready Signal
ATIOWR HDD Data Write Signal
ATRST Reset Signal
BLKCLP AFE Black Level Clamp Switch Signal
BMA Toner Bottle Motor A Clock
BMAB Toner Bottle Motor AB Clock
BMB Toner Bottle Motor B Clock
BMBB Toner Bottle Motor BB Clock
BPSN Toner Bottle Position Sensor Signal
CDSN1 Density Sensor 1 Signal
CDSN2 Density Sensor 2 Signal
CHPSN1 Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 Signal
CHPSN2 Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 Signal
CLIPIN AFE Sample Hold Clamp Signal
CLMM1 Corona Wire Cleaner Motor Control Signal
CLMM2 Corona Wire Cleaner Motor Control Signal
CPPSN1 Paper Path Sensor 1 Signal
CPPSN2 Paper Path Sensor 2 Signal
CRRSN1 Paper Path Sensor Signal
CSEL Cable Select Signal
CT Total Counter
DDFL Dust Fan Lock Detection Signal
DDFM Dust Fan Control Signal
DFCLK Driver FIFO Load
DFDIN Driver FIFO Data In
DFENB Driver FIFO Enable
DFLD Driver FIFO Clock
Ver. 5.0 271 NOV 2004

DP-3510/4510/6010
DP-3520/4520/6020
DFLTH Driver FIFO Latch
DFOUT Driver FIFO Data Out
DFRST Driver FIFO Data Reset
DMBRAKE OPC Drum Motor Brake
DMCLK Drum Motor Clock
DMCLK OPC Drum Motor Clock
DMLD OPC Drum Motor Lock Detection Signal
DMPS OPC Drum Motor Start/Stop
DOSN Door Open Sensor Detection Signal
DXCL1 ADU Clutch 1 Control Signal
DXSLCNT1 Inverting Solenoid Control 1 Signal
DXSLCNT2 Inverting Solenoid Control 2 Signal
DXSN Inverting Path Sensor Detection Signal
ELPCNT Discharge Lamp
EXDOSN2 Paper Exit Door Sensor Detection Signal
EXFL1 Exit Fan 1 Lock Detection Signal
EXFM1 Exit Fan 1 Control Signal
EXSN Paper Exit Sensor Detection Signal
FULP1 AC Power Supply
GND Ground
GOPSW1 Developer Missing Detection
GREFCNT Grid Reference PWM
HEATL AC Power Supply
HFCL Sheet Bypass Clutch Control Signal
HFSOL Sheet Bypass Solenoid Control Signal
HPESN Sheet Bypass Sensor Detection Signal
HPSN Scanner Home Position Sensor Signal
HSSN1 Sheet Bypass Sensor 1 Signal
HSYNC Horizontal Synchronous Signal
HUMSN Temp Humidity Sensor Signal
HVBACCLK Bias AC Clock
HVBACCNT Bias AC ON/OFF%% PWM
HVBDCCNT Bias DC ON/OFF%% PWM
HVCNT Charge Corona ON/OFF%% PWM
HVDACCNT Separation AC ON/OFF%% PWM
HVDDCCNT Separation DC ON/OFF%% PWM
HVLKB Bias Leak Detection
HVLKC High Voltage Leak Detection
HVLKD Separation Leak Detection
Ver. 5.0 272 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
HVLKT Bias Transfer Leak Detection
HVTCNT Bias Transfer ON/OFF%% PWM
IICSCL IIC Transmission Clock
IICSDA IIC Transmission Signal
IPRXD Finisher IPC Reception
IPTXD Finisher IPC Transmission
KCS Counter Detect Signal
KCT Key Counter
KCTCNT Card Counter
KYE Connector Key
L1 (R) Line Signal
L2 (T) Line Signal
LAZENB Laser Enable
LAZERA Laser Compulsion Lighting A
LAZERB Laser Compulsion Lighting B
LAZREF Laser Reference
LBSN1 Upper Limit Sensor Signal
LBSN1 Upper Limit Sensor-1
LBSN2 Upper Limit Sensor-2
LCCFDIN LCC FIFO Data In
LCDOSN Door Open Sensor Detection Signal
LCLUM1 Lift Motor Control Signal 1
LCLUM2 Lift Motor Control Signal 2
LCMA Motor A Signal
LCMAB Motor AB Signal
LCMB Motor B Signal
LCMBB Motor BB Signal
LCRRSN Paper Path Sensor Signal
LCSDSN Set Sensor Signal
LCSOL Paper Feed Solenoid-1 Control Signal
LLBSN Upper Limit Sensor Signal
LLUM 1st Tray Lift Up Motor Control Signal
LMA Scan Motor A Signal
LMAB Scan Motor AB Signal
LMB Scan Motor B Signal
LMBB Scan Motor BB Signal
LMCLK Scanner Motor Clock
LOPSN Connection Detect Sensor Signal
LPCNT Scanner Lamp Control Clock
LPCNT Scanner Lamp Control Signal
LPESN Paper Sensor Detection Signal
LPESN Paper Sensor-1
LPEWSN1 Paper Remaining Sensor 1 Signal
LPFCL Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal
LPFCL ADU Clutch 2 Control Signal
Ver. 5.0 273 NOV 2004

DP-3510/4510/6010
DP-3520/4520/6020
LPPSN Paper Path Sensor Signal
LPUSOL Paper Feed Solenoid Control Signal
LUM1 2nd Tray Lift Up Motor Control Signal
LUM1-1 +24 VDC Power Supply
LUM1-2 LUM1 Control Signal
LUM2-1 +24 VDC Power Supply
LUM2-2 LUM2 Control Signal
MAGCL Magnetic Roller Clutch Control Signal
MMA ADF Main Motor A Signal
MMAB ADF Main Motor AB Signal
MMB ADF Main Motor B Signal
MMBB ADF Main Motor BB Signal
MMCLK Main Motor Clock
MMFR Main Motor CW/CCW
MMLD Main Motor Lock Detection Signal
MMPS Main Motor Start/Stop
N.C. Not Used
nACK ACK Signal
nADFSES ADF Document Detect
nATT Attention Signal
nAUTFD Auto Feed Signal
nCTON Ring Detection Signal
nDUACK ADU Printer ACK Signal
nDUPRNT ADU Print Request Signal
nERROR Error Signal
nFAXRST FAX Board Reset Signal
nGARST CCD PCB Reset Signal
nHKOF External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal
nLD1 Laser 1 Control Signal (-)
nLD2 Laser 2 Control Signal (-)
nLPOW1 Not Used
nLPOW2 Not Used
nPACK Printer ACK Signal
nPCIRING FAX Wake Up Signal
nPNLRST Panel Reset Signal
nPRDY Printer Ready Signal
nPRGDWN F-ROM Rewrite
nPRST SPC Reset Signal</p>0: Reset
nPVSYNC Print Registration
nSACK Scan ACK Signal
nSELIN Select Input Signal
nSENTIM Scanner LSYNC Signal
nSLPKY Sleep Key
nSREQ Scanner Request Signal
nSTROB Strobe Signal
nSTRX Sorter Reception (-)
nSTTX Sorter Transmission Signal (-)
Ver. 5.0 274 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
nSYNC Horizontal Synchronous Signal
nVRDY VSYNC Reset Signal
nVREQ Print ACK Request Signal
OE AFE Digital Data Bus Enable
OPSN ADF Cover Open Detection Signal
OQFCLK OQ FIFO Clock
OQFDIN OQ FIFO Data In
OQFDOUT OQ FIFO Data Out
OQFENB OQ FIFO Enable
OQFLD OQ FIFO Load
OQFLTH OQ FIFO Latch
OQMCLK OQ Motor FIFO Clock
OQMCLK Drive Motor Clock
OQMCT Drive Motor Control
OQMLK Drive Motor Lock Signal
OQRRCL Registration Clutch Control Signal
ORGSN Original Sensor Signal
ORGSN Original Sensor Detection Signal
ORSIZ1 Original Size Sensor Signal 0
OZFL2 Ozone Fan Lock Detection Signal
OZFM2 Ozone Fan Control Signal
P12CNT Exit Fan Control Signal
PASN Platen Cover Open Sensor Signal
pBDA Print BDA Signal
pBDB Print BDB Signal
pBUSY Busy Signal
PCCL Intermediate Clutch Control Signal
pCMLD Line Switching Relay Drive Signal
PCRSN Intermediate Sensor Detection Signal
PCSN Platen Cover Angle Sensor Signal
PCSSOL1 Paper Tray Solenoid Control Signal
PCSSOL2 Paper Tray Solenoid Control Signal
PD1 Data Signal
PD2 Data Signal
PD3 Data Signal
PD4 Data Signal
PD5 Data Signal
PD6 Data Signal
PD7 Data Signal
PD8 Data Signal
PDIAG Diagnostic Bus Signal
pERROR No Paper Signal
PESN1 Paper Sensor Detection Signal
Ver. 5.0 275 NOV 2004

DP-3510/4510/6010
DP-3520/4520/6020
PESN1 Paper Sensor-1
PESN2 Paper Sensor-2
PEWSSN1 Paper Remaining Sensor 1 Signal
PFCL1 Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal
PFCL1 Paper Feed Clutch-1 Control Signal
PFCL2 Paper Feed Clutch-2 Control Signal
PFCLCNT Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal
PFOSN1 Paper Exit Sensor 1 Detection Signal
PFOSN2 Paper Exit Sensor 2 Detection Signal
PFSIZSN1 Paper Size Sensor 1 Signal
PGND Ground
pINIT Initiation
pLD1 Laser 1 Control Signal (+)
pLD2 Laser 2 Control Signal (+)
PMA Paper Feed Motor A Signal
PMAB Paper Feed Motor AB Signal
PMB Paper Feed Motor B Signal
PMBB Paper Feed Motor BB Signal
PMCLK Polygon Motor Clock
PMCNT Polygon Motor Control Signal
PMLOCK Polygon Motor Lock Signal
PNLDO1 Panel F-ROM Rewrite Serial Data
PNLSCLK1 Panel F-ROM Rewrite Serial Clock
POWSW POW SW
pPRXD Reception Data Signal
PPSOLCNT Pinch Solenoid Control Signal
pPTXD Transmission Data Signal
PR1SN Registration Sensor 1 Signal
pSELECT Paper Select Signal
pSPKOT Line Signal%% Dial Tone
pSTRX Sorter Reception Signal (+)
pSTTX Sorter Transmission Signal (+)
PTG CCD Shift GATE Signal
PTL Pre Transfer Lamp
PUSOL1 Paper Feed Solenoid Control Signal
PUSOL1 Paper Feed Solenoid-1 Control Signal
PUSOL2 Paper Feed Solenoid-2 Control Signal
PVCNT Printer 24V Control
PWFL PS Fan Lock Detection Signal
PWFM PS Fan Control Signal
QDOSN Door Open Sensor Detection Signal
RR1CLCNT Registration Roller 1 Clutch Control Signal
RR2CLCNT Registration Roller 2 Clutch Control Signal
Ver. 5.0 276 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
RR2SN Registration Sensor 2 Signal
RR3SN Registration Sensor 3 Signal
RRCL Registration Clutch Control Signal
RRSN Registration Sensor Signal
RVCLK Inverting Motor Clock
RVEXSN Inverting Exit Sensor Detection Signal
RVJAMSN Inverting JAM Sensor Detection Signal
RVMA Inverting Motor A Signal
RVMAB Inverting Motor AB Signal
RVMB Inverting Motor B Signal
RVMBB Inverting Motor BB Signal
RVSN Inverting Sensor Detection Signal
RVSSOL1 Inverting Solenoid Control Signal
RVSSOL2 Inverting Solenoid Control Signal
SB1CLCNT Inverting Clutch 1 Control Signal
SB2CLCNT Inverting Clutch 2 Control Signal
SCFL Suction Fan Lock Detection Signal
SCFM Suction Fan Control Signal
SDCLCNT Slow Down Clutch Control Signal
SEPSOL Separation Solenoid Control Signal
SH A Sample Hold Signal A
SH B Sample Hold Signal B
SIZE1SN Original Size Sensor 1 Detection Signal
SPCRXD SPC Reception Data Signal
SPCTXD SPC Transmission Data Signal
SPPSN System Paper Path Sensor Signal
SSA1 Fuser Lamp 1 Control Signal
STRVP Control Signal
STSLCNT Stamp Solenoid Control Signal
SVCNT Scanner 24V Control
TDREF Toner Density Sensor Reference
TDSNIN Toner Density Sensor Signal
TED Toner Detect Sensor Signal
TENPSN Temp Humidity Sensor Signal
TFBOXSN Toner Waste Container Sensor Detection Signal
TFSN Toner Waste Sensor Signal
THI1 Fuser Thermistor 1
THI2 Fuser Thermistor 2
TMGSN Timing Sensor Detection Signal
TRBLSW1 Toner Waste Collect Signal
VCDS Density Sensor ON
Vcnt Inverter Control Signal
Ver. 5.0 277 NOV 2004

DP-3510/4510/6010
DP-3520/4520/6020
VTED Toner Detect Sensor ON
WEBSOL Web Solenoid Control Signal
ZCIN Zero Cross
ZNSN1a Paper Remaining Sensor a Signal (Upper)
ZNSN1b Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal (Upper)
ZNSN1c Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal (Upper)
ZNSN2a Paper Remaining Sensor a Signal (Lower)
ZNSN2b Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal (Lower)
ZNSN2c Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal (Lower)
ZNSNa Paper Remaining Sensor a
ZNSNb Paper Remaining Sensor b
ZNSNc Paper Remaining Sensor c
Ver. 5.0 278 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7 Installation
7.1. Precautions During Set Up
Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm
and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process.
Machine performance and the copy quality is subject to and dependant on environmental conditions.
To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions:
1. For safe operation and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions:
• High temperature, high humidity, low temperature or low humidity

• Sudden changes in temperature or humidity
• Exposed to direct sunlight
• Dusty environment
• Poorly ventilated location
• Exposed to chemical gases (such as ammonia gas)
• Exposed to strong vibration
• Exposed to direct air current (ex. Air conditioner vent)
2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows:

DP-3510/3520/3530 : 283 lb (128.5 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed
DP-4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030 : 290 lb (131.5 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed
3. The maximum power consumption is 1.5 kW. Depending on the product destination, the wall outlet
must be rated for 120 VAC or 220-240 VAC accordingly. It must also be protected for at least 15 amps
for 120 VAC, or 10 amps for 220-240 VAC. If you are in doubt about a power source, ensure that a
qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any other devices to the wall outlet designated
for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord)
4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to gas or water pipe)
5. This machine has ventilation openings on the side and rear, which must remain unobstructed for safe
operation. The machine should be located at least 3.9 inches (100 mm) from the wall. Obstructing the
ventilation openings could present a fire hazard.
Using the space requirements shown on page 2, ensures that the machine has the ventilation it
requires and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.
Ver. 5.0
279 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Space Requirements With Options
Copier + Exit Tray
3.9 in 3.9 in (100 mm)
(100 mm)
23.6"(600 mm)
29.8"(758 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm) 12.7 in 10.4 in (265 mm)
(322 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)

54.6 in
(1387 mm)
Copier + Finisher
3.9 in (100 mm)
11.8 in 29.5 in (750 mm)
(300 mm)
23.6 in (600 mm)
29.8 in (758 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm) 10.4 in (265 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)

83.3 in
(2115 mm)
Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT

3.9 in (100 mm) 11.4 in (290 mm) 11 in (280 mm)
11.8 in 29.5 in (750 mm)
(300 mm)
29.8 in (758 mm)
23.6 in (600 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
19.9 in (505 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)

95.3 in
(2420 mm)
Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT + (LT-R_LGL Adapter)

3.9 in (100 mm)
29.5 in (750 mm) 17.3 in (440 mm)11 in (280 mm)
11.8 in (300 mm)
29.8 in (758 mm)
23.6 in (600 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)
57.6 in
(1463 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)

19.9 in (505 mm)
3.9 in (100 mm)
101.2 in
(2570 mm)
Ver. 5.0 280 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7.2. Unpacking
Visually check the condition and contents of the the packing for completeness or any shipping damage
before installation.
Remove all tapes used to secure the Scanner, Fuser and Process Units during shipment.
Caution:
Depending on your machine's model, it may weight approximately up to 290 lb (131.5 kg) with the i-ADF
pre-installed. To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to
lift or move the machine.
Contents List
No. Qty. Description Part No. Remarks
1 1 Main Unit -----
2 1 Operating Instructions See Note
Includes Operating
3 1 Panasonic-DMS CD See Note
Instructions
4 --- AC Power Cord See Note
DZSM000566 For DP-3510/4510/6010
5 1 Installation Instructions DZSM000750 For DP-3520/4520/6020
PJQRC0043Z For DP-3530/4530/6030
Note:
1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
5 1
2
3
Ver. 5.0
281 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7.3. Installation Procedure
Note:
1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing Stands or other Optional Kits.
2. The following machine illustrations, depicts a DP-6030 with a standard configuration.
3. The scanner is held in place by a Shipping Blue Screw to prevent damage during transit.
Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the scanner.
4. The machine is shipped from the factory with the Pressure Roller / OPC Drum locked in the opened
position to avoid the possibility of damaging the Pressure Rollers / OPC Drum.
Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the Pressure Roller / OPC Drum.
7.3.1. Installation Procedure

(1) Open the 4 Handle Covers and swing the
Handles upward then pullout to lock them in
place.
Note:
To release the Handles, lift the Release Latch
upwards and push the Handles toward the
Release
Latch machine.
(2) Lift and place the machine on a suitable

Stand / Console, aligning with 3 Guide-Pins.
Stand (USA/Canada only)
DA-D351 / D352 : DP-3510/3520/3530/
4510/4520/4530/6010/
6020/6030
System Console
DA-DS601 / DS602 : DP-3510/3520/4510/
4520/6010/6020
DA-DS603 / DS604 : DP-3530/4530/6030
(3) Remove Tape.

(4) Remove 1 Blue Screw to unlock the Scanner.
(3)
(4)
Ver. 5.0 282 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5) Tape the Blue Screw removed in step (4) into
the 2nd Paper Tray as illustrated.

(7) Swing the Hopper open (180°).
(8) Remove the Protective Tape from the Battery.
(9) To unlock the Pressure Roller, turn the screw

with a Straight Edge Screwdriver clockwise
until you hear a click.
Ver. 5.0
283 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(10) Pullout and remove the OPC Shipping Metal
(10) Bracket to unlock the OPC Drum.
(11) Store the OPC Shipping Metal Bracket

removed in step (10) into the 2nd Paper Tray as
(11) illustrated.
(12) Remove 1 Screw.

(13) Remove the Developer Harness Cover (Clear)
and disconnect the Harness.
(14) Turn the Release Lever Clockwise (90°).
(15) Remove the Developer Unit.
(14)
(15)
(13) (12)

(16) Developer Cover.
(17) Shake the bottle of developer thoroughly
(approx. 30 seconds).
(18) Pour the appropriate developer evenly into the
developer unit. Make sure to empty the bottle.
(19) Reinstall the Upper Developer Cover.
Note:
When reinstalling, ensure that 3 Latch Hooks are
hooked correctly.
(20) Reinstall the Developer Unit.

(21) Reconnect the Harness, reinstall the Developer
Harness Cover and turn the Release Lever
counter-clockwise.
Ver. 5.0 284 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(22) Shake a new Toner Bottle 10 to 15 times to
loosen the contents.
(23) Remove the Cap from the Toner Bottle.
(24) Insert the Toner Bottle into the Hopper Unit. Align
the Key of the Toner Bottle with the Key
Alignment Channel of the hopper unit. Insert the
Bottle as far as it will go and turn the Toner Bottle
clockwise until it locks in place. (Arrows on the
Bottle and the Hopper are aligned)
Toner Bottle (25) Swing the Toner Bottle / Hopper closed (180°).
Hopper
(26) Close the Front Cover.
(27) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
Note:
Perform the following adjustments after the
machine has warmed up and displays:
Ready To Copy
Set Originals
<For Other Destinations (not USA and Canada),

follow the steps (28) ~ (34) below>
(28) Install the Exit Tray Assembly to the Upper Exit

Cover.
(28)
(32) (29) Open the Upper Exit Cover.

(30)
(30) Remove 1 Screw to free the Upper Exit Cover
Stopper.
(31) Install the Stop Plate and secure it with 1 Screw
as illustrated.
(32) Install the Stop Plate 2 and secure it with
1 Screw as illustrated.
(33) Secure the Upper Exit Cover Stopper with 1
Screw (removed in step (29) above).
(31) (34) Close the Upper Exit Cover.
Ver. 5.0
285 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7.3.2. Toner Density Control (TDC) Adjustment
1. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to
enter the Service Mode.
2. Press the "8" key to enter the F8 Mode.
3. Press the "START" key.
4. Press the "0”, "9" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F8 Mode code "09".
5. Press the "START" key to begin the Automatic TDC sensor gain adjustment.
Note:
Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops
(approximately 7 minutes).
Then, wait for approximately 30 sec. again for QUANTUM to start automatically.
Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the QUANTUM adjustment cycle stops
(approximately 1-2 minutes). Refer to the Sequence Chart below.
7.3.3. Black Density Sensor Output Gain Adjustment

1. Press the "1", "4" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F8 Mode code "14".
2. Press the "START" key for Automatic Black density sensor output gain adjustment.
Note:
Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops.
Refer to the Sequence Chart below.
3. Press the "STOP" key.
5. Write the contents of F6-21, 26 and 65 on the memory sheet (included inside the 2nd Paper Tray).
6. Press the "STOP" key.
7. Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
F8-09 (Installation & Developer Replace) F8-14 (Installation & OPC Replace)
TDC Adjust Wait QUANTUM Gain Adjust Wait QUANTUM
7 min 30 sec 1-2 min 30 sec-1 min 30 sec 1-2 min
Automatically Automatically
7.3.4. Set the Date and Time

1. Press the "FUNCTION" key.
2. Touch the button.
(DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020) : "GENERAL FUNCTIONS" button
(DP-3530/4530/6030) : "GENERAL SETTINGS" button
3. Select the "04 Key Operator Mode".
4. "Input Identification Code" (default is 0000).
5. Touch the "OK" button.
6. Touch the button to advance to:
(DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020) : 05/08 Display Screen of General Settings
(DP-3530/4530/6030) : 05/09 Display Screen of General Settings
7. Select the "20 Date Time Setting".
8. Touch the "CHANGE" button to input the new Date and Time. (MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm) [24-hour format].
9. After setting the new information, touch "OK" button on the Display Panel.
10. Press the "RESET" key, to exit the General Functions mode.
Ver. 5.0 286 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7.4. Adjustment
7.4.1. Exposure (Standard Adjustment)
Before making any adjustments, confirm that the following contents (F6-17, 18 and 19) are set to "0".
DO NOT adjust these codes in the field.
F6-17 : Standard Grid Voltage

F6-18 : Standard Laser Power
F6-19 : Std Bias DC Voltage
1. Press the "FUNCTION”, “ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and “3” keys simultaneously in that order to
2. Press the "2" and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode.
3. Set the exposure to the center position.
4. Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown
a. Gray scale "A" should not be visible.
A Not visible
. . . . . .
. . . . .. . . . . . 1 . (Not visible or hardly visible)
. .
2 Clearly visible
5. Press the "RESET" key to exit the F2 Mode.

7. Enter F6-50 Mode (T/P Mode Image Density).
8. Press the "INPUT" button.
9. Enter the new content.
10. Enter a 2-digit value.
Note:
(+) : Lighter side
(-) : Darker side
11. Press "OK" button twice.
12. Enter F2 Mode.
13. Make a copy to confirm the adjustment.
Note:
F6-49 : Text Mode
F6-51 : Photo Mode
14. Press "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
Ver. 5.0
287 NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8 Options and Supplies
8.1. Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL-IPX/SPX or PS-IPX/SPX
Option Installation (For DP-3530/4530/6030)
To use PCL-IPX/SPX (DA-PC602) or PS-IPX/SPX (DA-MC602) option individually or in combination with
other options, changing to Type B or Type D SC firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD
included with the options.
Note:
The DA-EM600 must be installed for the printer controllers above to function. The only time a DA-EM600
is needed is if you are installing the Postscript (PS) or PCL option. There will never be a need for 2 of
these, even if there are other options, such as fax, added.
Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly
identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read and follow the Installation Instructions for
the appropriate option.
The firmware for SC, SPC and PNL must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the firmware
with the latest version as a set by referring to the following table.
Firmware Version Table (For DP-3530/4530/6030)

Standard Firmware PCL Firmware PostScript Firmware
(SC = Type A) (SC = Type B) (SC = Type D)
SC SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx-xx SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx-xx SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx-xx
PNL M25R_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx ← ←
SPC SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxx ← ←
Slot 1 FROM PCB Not Required Required Required
Ver. 5.0 288 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions
1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)

\xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD)
Setup:

Example:
From:
To:


Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder

\ DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx \ PNL \ M25R_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx
\ SC_STD \ SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx-xx
\ SC_PCL \ SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx-xx
\ SC_PS \ SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx-xx
\ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAAV4xxxxx
When you select the Parent Folder, the

following Firmware Type window
appears. Proper Sub File Folders are
selected automatically by selecting the
Firmware Type.
The transferring order is set up
automatically.
Ver. 5.0 289 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
location.
2. Updating through the Parallel Port (Alternate Method)

If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the Parallel Port.

Setup:

Example:
From:
To:

Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the Parallel
Port.
If the unit does not boot up, follow the procedure below:
a. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit.).
b. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
c. When the unit's front panel green lamp turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button, it is now
ready to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port.
Connect the Parallel Cable between the Unit and PC.
Ver. 5.0 290 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Start the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in
the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the
display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
You must process each firmware file separately in this manner and sequence.
Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File
\ DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx \ SC_STD \ SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx-xx SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx-xx.bin
\ SC_PCL \ SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx-xx SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx_xx.bin
SFD_M25RCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin
SFD_M25RCxVxxxxxb.bin
\ SC_PS \ SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx-xx SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx_xx.bin
SFD_M25RExVxxxxxa_xx.bin
SFD_M25RExVxxxxxb.bin
\ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAAV4xxxxx SFDM_SPCAAV4xxxxx.bin
\ PNL \ M25R_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx M25R_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx.bin

Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files
Type.
Note:
1. Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of
the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode
after boot up, to continue the firmware update.
2.While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to
3. Please refer to the service manual for additional details.
location.
Ver. 5.0 291 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.2. Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL-IPX/SPX or PS-IPX/SPX
Option Installation (For DP-3520/4520/6020)
To use PCL-IPX/SPX (DA-PC601) or PS-IPX/SPX (DA-MC601) option individually or in combination with
other options, changing to Type B or Type D SC firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD
Note:
Firmware Version Table

SC SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx-xx SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxx-xx SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx-xx
PNL MMK2_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx ← ←
Ver. 5.0 292 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Setup:

Example:
From:
To:


Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Transferring Order
\ DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx \ PNL \ MMK2_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx 1
\ SC_STD \ SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx-xx 2
\ SC_PCL \ SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxx-xx 2
\ SC_PS \ SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx-xx 2
\ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx 3

Type.
Ver. 5.0 293 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
location.


Setup:

Example:
From:
To:

Port.
Ver. 5.0 294 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Transferring
Order
\ DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx \ SC_STD \ SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx- SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1
xx
\ SC_PCL \ SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxx- SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1
xx SFDM_MK2CxVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2
SFDM_MK2CxVxxxxxb.bin 1-3
\ SC_PS \ SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx-xx SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1
SFDM_MK2ExVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2
SFDM_MK2ExVxxxxxb.bin 1-3
\ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 2
\ PNL \ MMK2_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx MMk2_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx.bin 3
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type
window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by
selecting the Firmware Type.
Note:
location.
Ver. 5.0 295 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.3. Service Notes for "Firmware Update" for PCL or PS Option Installation
(For DP-3510/4510/6010)
To use PCL (DA-PC600/601) or PS (DA-MC600/601) option individually or in combination with other
options, changing to Type B or Type D SC firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD
Note:
Firmware Version Table

PNL SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx ← ←
SC DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx-xx DP-SFDMBxVxxxxx-xx DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx-xx
Ver. 5.0 296 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Setup:

Example:
From:
To:


Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Transferring Order
\ DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx \ PNL \ SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx 1
\ SC_STD \ DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx-xx 2
\ SC_PCL \ DP-SFDMBxVxxxxx-xx 2
\ SC_PS \ DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx-xx 2
\ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx 3

Type.
Ver. 5.0 297 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
location.


Setup:

Example:
From:
To:

Port.
Ver. 5.0 298 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Transferring
Order
\ DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx \ PNL \ SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx.bin 1
\ SC_STD \ DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx-xx DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 2
\ SC_PCL \ DP-SFDMBxVxxxxx-xx DP-SFDMBxVxxxxx_xx.bin 2-1
DP-SFDMCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin 2-2
DP-SFDMCxVxxxxxb.bin 2-3
\ SC_PS \ DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx-xx DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx_xx.bin 2-1
DP-SFDMExVxxxxxa_xx.bin 2-2
DP-SFDMExVxxxxxb.bin 2-3
\ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 3
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type
window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by
selecting the Firmware Type.
Note:
location.
Ver. 5.0 299 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.4. Installing the Printer Controller Module for GDI-IPX/SPX (DA-GC601)
(Not Available in the USA/Canada)
8.4.1. Contents
Qty. Description Part No. Remarks

1 Hardware Key ----- GDI KEY
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000751
Note:
1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination.
8.4.2. Installation
CAUTION!
Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the
machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning
installation.
(1) Loosen 5 Screws.

(2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)
(1) Main
Power
(2) SW
(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three

available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on
the SC PC Board.
Note:
The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to
KEY the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as
illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the
connector if facing the wrong way.
(4) Proceed with the installation of other options.

If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and
reinstall remaining Covers.
(3)
the ON position.
(6) Install the Printer Driver and NetWare
SetupWizard into the PC with the Operating
Instructions by following the prompts of the
Installation Wizard.
Ver. 5.0 300 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.5. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-PC602)
8.5.1. Contents

1 Hardware Key ----- PCL KEY
1 Software CD See Note Includes Operating Instructions
1 ----- For USA and Canada only
License Agreement
1 ----- For Other Destinations
1 Installation Instructions PJQRC0036Z This document
Note:
8.5.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed
into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program
Expansion Board (DA-EM600).
2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
(1) Main
Power
(2) SW
Ver. 5.0 301 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
the SC PC Board.
Note:

(3)
the ON position.
(6) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL
Option firmware. Refer to the "Service Notes".
(7) Install the PCL6 Printer Driver and NetWare
Note:
1. For USA and Canada only, this option can also be used for DP-3510/4510/6010 without IPX/SPX.
2. The Firmware included on the CD-ROM with this option is intended for DP-3530/4530/6030, it cannot
be used for DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020. Please use the DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/
6020 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.
Ver. 5.0 302 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.6. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-PC601)
8.6.1. Contents

DZRQ000288 or
1 Software CD Includes Operating Instructions
DZRQ000289
1 DZSH000112 For USA and Canada only
License Agreement
1 DZSH000113 For Other Destinations
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000752 This document
Note:
8.6.2. Installation
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
(1) Main
Power
(2) SW
Ver. 5.0 303 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
the SC PC Board.
Note:

(3)
the ON position.
(7) Install the PCL6 Printer Driver and NetWare
Note:
be used for DP-3510/4510/6010. Please use the DP-3510/4510/6010 firmware provided separately by
the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.
Ver. 5.0 304 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.7. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6 (DA-PC600)
8.7.1. Contents

DZRQ000059 or
DZRQ000062
License Agreement
Note:
8.7.2. Installation
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
(1) Main
Power
(2) SW
Ver. 5.0 305 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
the SC PC Board.
Note:

(3)
the ON position.
(7) Install the PCL6 Software into the PC with the
Operating Instructions by following the prompts
of the Installation Wizard.
Ver. 5.0 306 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.8. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6-IPX/SPX
(DA-MC602)
8.8.1. Contents

1 Hardware Key ----- PS KEY
1 Software CD See Note Includes Operating Instructions
1 Adobe Postscript 3 Label -----
1 ----- For USA and Canada only
License Agreement
1 ----- For Other Destinations
1 License Agreement ----- For USA and Canada only
1 (For Adobe PostScript Driver) ----- For Other Destinations
Note:
8.8.2. Installation
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
(1) Main
Power
(2) SW
Ver. 5.0 307 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
the SC PC Board.
KEY Note:
the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as

(3) If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and
the ON position.
(6) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS/PCL

(7) Install the PS/PCL6 Printer Driver and NetWare
(8) Attach the Adobe Postscript 3 Label to the Front
Cover as illustrated.
Note:
be used for DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020. Please use the DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/
6020 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.
Ver. 5.0 308 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.9. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6-IPX/SPX
(DA-MC601)
8.9.1. Contents

DZRQ000292 or
DZRQ000293
1 Adobe Postscript 3 Label DZNK004647
License Agreement
Note:
8.9.2. Installation
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
(1) Main
Power
(2) SW
Ver. 5.0 309 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
the SC PC Board.
KEY Note:

the ON position.

(7) Install the PS/PCL6 Printer Driver and NetWare
Note:
be used for DP-3510/4510/6010. Please use the DP-3510/4510/6010 firmware provided separately by
the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.
Ver. 5.0 310 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.10. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC600)
8.10.1. Contents

DZRQ000123 or
DZRQ000124
1 Adobe Postscript 3 Label DZNK004647
License Agreement
Note:
8.10.2. Installation
CAUTION!
installation.
(1)
(1) Main
Power
(2) SW
Ver. 5.0 311 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
the SC PC Board.
KEY Note:

the ON position.

(7) Install the PS/PCL6 Software into the PC with
the Operating Instructions by following the
prompts of the Installation Wizard.
Ver. 5.0 312 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.11. Installing the Network Scanner Module (DA-NS600)
8.11.1. Contents

1 Hardware Key ----- NWS KEY
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
Main
Power
(2) (1) SW

the SC PC Board.
Note:
KEY The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to

(3) reinstall remaining Covers.
the ON position.
(6) Install the Panasonic-DMS Software into the PC
with the Operating Instructions by following the
Ver. 5.0 313 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.12. Installing the Network Scanner Module for DDS (DA-NS601)
8.12.1. Contents

1 Hardware Key ----- DDS KEY
Note:
1. This option is intended to be used with the Document Distribution System (DA-WR10)
for DP-3520/4520/6020.
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
Main
Power
(2) (1) SW

the SC PC Board.
Note:
KEY The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to

(3) reinstall remaining Covers.
the ON position.
(6) Install the Document Distribution System
software (DA-WR10) into the PC by following
the prompts of the Installation Wizard.
Ver. 5.0 314 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
1. The Network Scanner (DA-NS600) cannot be installed together with this option. If the Network
Scanner (DA-NS600) is already installed, remove it first.
2. If the Firmware version installed on the machine is SC:SFDM_MK2AxV30700,
PNL:MMK2_PNLAxV30000, SPC:SFDM_SPCAxV30100 or older, it must be updated for this option
by referring to the Service Notes.
Please use the DP-3520/4520/6020 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or
Download it from the technical support Web site.
Ver. 5.0 315 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.13. Installing the Internet Fax / E-Mail Module (DA-NF600)
8.13.1. Contents

1 Hardware Key ----- IFX KEY
1 See Note
(For Facsimile and Internet Fax)
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
Main
Power
(2) (1) SW
Ver. 5.0 316 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
the SC PC Board.
Note:

KEY reinstall remaining Covers.
the ON position.
(6) Update the firmware of the unit.
Refer to the "Service Notes”.
(3) (7) Execute Parameter Initialize by following the
steps below.
a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE
(LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in
that order to enter the Service Mode.
b) Press the “9” and “START” keys to enter the
F9 Mode
c) Press “00 FAX Service Mode”
d) Press “06 RAM Initialize”
e) Press "01 Parameter Initialize" and the "Yes"
button
f) Press the "STOP" key
g) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR)
keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
h) Turn the Power Switch on the Left side of the
machine to the OFF and back to the ON
(8) Install the Internet Fax/Email Software into the
PC with the Operating Instructions by following
the prompts of the Installation Wizard.
Ver. 5.0 317 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Perform the following steps if the Optional Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) is also installed.
<Changing from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book>

An additional 800 stations (1,000 total) are available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD60) is
installed. If you wish to use the 1,000 Fax Address Book, please follow the steps below to change the
address book setting of the machine.
Caution:
• The registered address book data will be deleted when the address book setting is changed.
If your machine already has registered stations in the Fax Address Book, please make a backup first
before changing the address book setting.
• Before changing the Fax Address Book setting, printout the Address Book information or copy the Data
using the Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software. After executing the setting change, re-
enter the printed Address Book information or copy and paste the Data from the 200 to the 1,000
station Address Book file. (See the Operating Instructions for Document Management System and
Printer)
Changing the Fax Address Book Setting

Execute the Auto Dial Clear and activate the 1,000 station Address Book by following the steps below.
a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order
b) Press the "9" and "START" keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
c) Press "00 FAX Service Mode"
d) Press "06 RAM Initialize"
e) Press "03 Auto Dial Clear" and the "Yes" button for "Initialize?". Then press "Yes" button for "Address
Book 1,000 stations?". Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays "In Progress", then the unit
will return to stand-by.
<Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data>
The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (copy and paste)
to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE).
Note:
1. The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address
Book.
When installing the Panasonic-DMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-35xx/
45xx/60xx.
- The "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book.
- The "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book.
2. The model module of the Address Book Editor (NAE) can be confirmed by the following method.
a) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP
Utilities and select Network Device Locator.
b) The Network Device Locator screen is displayed, DO NOT select any device and in the menu bar,
click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
c) The Network Address Book Editor screen displays; click "Cancel" if the Start UP screen also
appears.
d) Select "Help" -> "Supported Models..." from the main menu to open the Supported Models List.
e) Confirm whether your machine is listed. If it is not listed, click "Update" to access the web site and
download the latest model module and then install it.
Ver. 5.0 318 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Using the Network Address Book Editor to Copy and Paste the Address Book Data
1. An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax
Address Book is activated on the DP-35xx/45xx/60xx. Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data
from the unit as follows:
Utilities.
b) Click on Network Device Locator.
c) In the Network Device Locator screen, select your desired device.
d) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor.
e) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx" screen appears, under the Address Book
Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book.
f) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on File\Save
As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station).
g) Then click the OK button.
2. Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described
above.
3. Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as
above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx (Fax1000)".
Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station).
4. Open the 200 Fax data file of step 1 and the 1,000 Fax data file of step 3. Copy the 200 Fax data and
paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer
to Help.)
5. Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar.
Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.
Ver. 5.0 319 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.14. Installing the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600)
8.14.1. Contents

Important: Read Note 4 below,
1 FXB PC Board See Note
before installing this PCB.
1 MJR PC Board Assembly See Note
1 MJR Harness See Note
1 Speaker Assembly See Note
1 Speaker Harness 2 (Extension) See Note
1 SDRM Bracket See Note
1 Stamp Assembly See Note
1 Stamp Solenoid See Note
1 Telephone Line Cable See Note
1 Type Approval Label See Note
1 Line Label See Note
10 Screw (Short) See Note
1 Screw (Long) See Note

1 Operating Instructions (For Facsimile) See Note
Note:
1. If also installing the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600), it must be installed first.
Install the Hardware by following the steps below.
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
Main
Power
(2) (1) SW
Ver. 5.0 320 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
(5) Open the Front Door.

(6) Open the Left Cover.
(7) Remove 3 Silver Screws.
(8) (8) Remove the Left Rear Cover.
(9) Remove the upper protective tab on the Left
Rear Cover for the LINE connection.
(9) If installing an External Telephone, remove the
Lower protective tab as well.
(10) Attach the Line Label to the Left Rear Cover as
(10) (7) illustrated.
(11) Remove 2 Protective Films.
(11)
(12) Route the Speaker Harness through the speaker

hole in the frame and install the Speaker
Assembly.
(13) Secure with 2 Screws (Short).
(12) (14) Connect the Speaker Harness 2 (Extension) to
the Speaker Harness.
(13)
Ver. 5.0 321 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(15) Connect one end of the MJR Harness and
Speaker Harness 2 to the MJR PC Board
Assembly Connectors (CN22 and CN25).
(16) Install the MJR PC Board Assembly from the

rear of the machine by inserting the Hooks into
the slots on the frame.
(17) Secure the MJR PC Board Assembly with 5
(16) Screws (Short).
(17)
(18) Remove 1 Screw from the SC PC Board.

(19) Install the SDRAM Bracket into the machine and
secure it with 1 Screw removed in Step (18).
(19) (18)
(20) Route the Harnesses and pass through the

frame in the rear of the unit as illustrated.
(21) Secure the Harnesses to the 2 Harness Clamps.
(22) Secure the Harness to the Harness Clamp.
(22)
(20)
(21)
Ver. 5.0 322 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
<If you already installed HDD Unit Option, follow
the step below, otherwise, skip to Step (24)>
(23)
(23) Secure the Harness to the 1 Harness Clamp.
(24) Plug the G3 Fax PC Board (FXB) into the SC

PC Board with on Board Connector.
(25) Secure the G3 Fax PC Board with 3 Screws
(Short).
(26) Connect the Harness to 3 Connectors on the
(24)
(26) FXB PC Board (CN391, CN392 and CN393).
(25)
(28) Open the ADF Cover.

(28)
(31) (29) Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting guide 2
Assembly.
(30) Lift the Original Tray Assembly.
(29)
(31) Lower the Inverting Guide 4 Assembly.
(30)

(32) (33) (33) Remove the Inverting Guide 3 Assembly.
Ver. 5.0 323 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(34)
(35) (35) Remove the Lower Exit Guide.
(36) Connect the Stamp Harness to Stamp Solenoid.

(36) (37) Secure the Stamp Solenoid with 1 Screw (Long).
(37)
(38) Reinstall the Lower Exit Guide removed in Step

(39) (38) (35).
(39) Install the Stamp Assembly.
(40) Reinstall the all parts removed in above steps
and close the ADF Covers.
(41) Attach the TA Label (specified destination) to the

Lower Rear Cover as illustrated.
TA Label
Ver. 5.0 324 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(42) Connect one end of the Telephone Line Cable to
the LINE Jack on the left side of the machine,
LINE and the other to the RJ-11C Jack on the wall.
the ON position.
(44) It is not necessary to set the parameter for the Note:

following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware For other destinations, set the Function Parameter
is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware. #005 (Destination Code).
PB : UK 000 : Austria
PF : France 001 : U.K.
PG : Switzerland 002 : Canada
PK : China 003 : Denmark
PM : Germany 004 : Taiwan
PT : Taiwan 005 : Finland
006 : Germany
PU : USA
007 : Netherlands
PEU : UK
008 : Italy
009 : Spanish
010 : Hong Kong
011 : Australia
012 : Switzerland
013 : Norway
015 : Portuguese
016 : Ireland
017 : Belgium
018 : Sweden
019 : Turkey
020 : U.S.A.
021 : France
022 : New Zealand
025 : Japan
030 : Czech
031 : Russia
032 : Greece
033 : Hungary
034 : Indonesia
035 : South Korea
038 : Malaysia
039 : China
045 : Thailand
048 : South Africa
049 : Singapore
050 : Universal
Ver. 5.0 325 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(45) Execute Parameter Initialize by following the
steps below.
(LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously
in that order to enter the Service Mode.
b) Press the “9” and “START” keys to enter the
F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance).
c) Press "00 FAX Service Mode".
d) Press "06 RAM Initialize".
e) Press "01 Parameter Initialize" and the "Yes"
button.
f) Press the "STOP" key.
g) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR).
keys simultaneously to exit the Service
Mode.
h) Turn the Power Switch on the Left side of the
machine to the OFF and back to the ON
(46) Verify the position of the stamp on the
document. If it is not within the desired location
at the bottom of the document, you can adjust its
position by following the steps below.
(LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously
in that order to enter the Service Mode.
b) Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the
F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters).
c) Press "69 Stamp position adjust".
d) Press "INPUT" button and enter a number
(-50 to 50).
Note:
A positive number moves the stamp
position closer to the trail edge of the
document, conversely, a negative number
moves it in the opposite direction.
To change the current sign to either +/-,
press the "RESET" key.
(Default setting = 0; 0.3 mm/step)
e) Press "OK" button twice.
f) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR).
keys simultaneously to exit the Service
Mode.
Ver. 5.0 326 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Perform the following steps if the Optional Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) is also installed.

Caution:
Printer)

Note:
Book.
45xx/60xx.
appears.
Ver. 5.0 327 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Utilities.
above.
to Help.)
Ver. 5.0 328 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.15. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60)
8.15.1. Contents

1 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) See Note
1 DC PCB Assembly DZHP007347
1 HDD Bracket DZJE001046
1 HDD2 Harness DZFP001109 Power Supply Cable
1 HD Harness DZFP001293 Flat Cable
1 DC12 Harness DZFP001184 3 Connectors
1 Clamp DZJK000077
4 Silver Screw (Short) See Note
5 Screw (Long) See Note

Note:
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
Main
Power
(2) (1) SW

(3) (4) Remove the Upper Rear Cover and Lower Rear
Cover.
(4)
Ver. 5.0 329 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(6) Remove the Frame.
(5)
(6)

(9) Remove the Right Rear Cover.
(7)
(9)
(8)
(10)
Note:
Connect the HD Harness to the HDD as illustrated.
UL Tape
HDD Key (Black)
To
SC
PCB
Shield
Ver. 5.0 330 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(11) Install the HDD into the HDD Bracket.
(12) (13) (12) Secure the HDD Bracket with 4 Silver Screws
(Short).
(11)
(13) Connect one end of the HDD2 Harness and HD
Harness to the HDD.
Key
(12)
(11)
(14) Install the HDD Assembly.

(15) Secure the HDD Assembly with 2 Screws
(14) (Long).
(15)
Note:
Route the HDD2 Harness (Power Supply Cable)
through the cutout in the frame and secure it with
the Harness Clamp as illustrated.
(16) Connect the HD Harness to CN59 on the SC PC

UL Tape (Black) Board as illustrated.
(17) Remove the Screw from the frame, and secure
the HD Harness Clamp with this Screw as
illustrated.
Note:
(16) Ensure that the clamp is around the shielded
(17)
portion of the Harness, and not around the UL
Tape (Black).
(18) Install the DC PCB Assembly.

Note:
If the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600) is
installed, disconnect the CN392 Harness on the
(20) FX PCB. Route the Harness over the DC PCB
(18)
Bracket and secure it with the Clamp. Reconnect
(19) the Harness to CN392 on the FX PCB.
(19) Secure the DC PCB Assembly with 3 Screws

(Long).
(20) Connect the HDD2 Harness (Power Supply
Cable) to CN143 on the DCB PC Board.
Ver. 5.0 331 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(21) Connect the DC12 Harness to CN141 and
CN142 on the DC PC Board.
(21) (22) Secure the DC12 Harness with 4 Clamps.
(22)
(22)
(23) Connect the DC12 Harness to the LVPS.

(24) Reinstall the Toner Waste Container.
(25) Reinstall all Covers.
the ON position.
(27) Update the firmware of the unit.
(23) Refer to the "Service Notes".
CAUTION!
After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disk Scan Function from being performed
(similar to Windows OS when the power is abruptly interrupted), it is important to follow the step
sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switches on the machine.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first.
2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard
Disk Drive Unit.
3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position.
(This interrupts all the power to the machine)
4. Unplug the AC Power Cord.
Ver. 5.0 332 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Perform the following steps if the Optional Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600) or the Internet
Fax/E-Mail Module (DA-NF600) is also installed

Caution:
Printer)

Note:
Book.
45xx/60xx.
appears.
Ver. 5.0 333 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Utilities.
above.
to Help.)
Ver. 5.0 334 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.16. Installing the Accounting Software (DA-WA10)
8.16.1. Contents

1 Accounting Software CD See Note Includes Operating Instructions
License Agreement
Note:
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) is installed into
the machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions for the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60).
2. Install the Accounting Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the
3. Set the Key/Dept. Counter function by following the steps below.
1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in
that order to enter the Service Mode.
2) Press the "5" key to enter the F5 Mode (Function Parameters).
3) Press the "START" key.
4) Press the "4", "2" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F5-42 "KEY/DEPT Counter".
5) Press the "DEPT." and "OK" buttons to activate the Key/Dept. Counter function.
6) Press the "STOP" key.
Note:
The factory default setting for the Key Operator ID Code is "0000", to ensure security it is
recommended to change this code
To change it:
• While in the Service Mode, press "7" to enter the F7 Mode (Electronic Counter).
• Press the "START" key.
• Select "01 Key Operator ID Code".
• Press "CHANGE" button, and input a 4-digit code.
• Press "OK" button to set it and "OK" again to exit F7 Mode.
7) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
4. Set the Key/Dept. Code by following the steps below.

1) Press the "FUNCTION" key, "General Settings", "04 Key Operator Mode" and input the 4
Digit Code to enter the Key Operator Mode.
2) Press "14 Dept. Counter Mode" and set the Dept. Counter Codes (up to 300).
3) Press the "STOP" key to return to the stand-by mode.
Ver. 5.0 335 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.17. Installing the DD Server Software (DA-WS20)
8.17.1. Contents

1 DD Server Software CD See Note Includes Operating Instructions
License Agreement
1 DD Server Operating Instructions DZSD001791
Note:
Install the DD Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the
Ver. 5.0 336 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.18. Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board (DA-EM600)
8.18.1. Contents

1 Expansion F-ROM Board DZEC102137
2 PC Board Support NH-7
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
Main
Power
(2) (1) SW
(3) Install 2 PC Board Supporters for the Slot 1 on

the SC PC Board.
(4) Install the Program Expansion Board into Slot
1 (CN62) on the SC PC Board and secure with
the Supporters.
Note:
The Program Extension F-ROM Board must
(3) always be installed into Slot 1 (CN62) for the PCL
or PCL/PS Printer Option to function.

(4)
the ON position.
Ver. 5.0 337 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.19. Installing the Sorting Image Memory 16/64/128 MB
(DA-SM16B/64B/28B)
8.19.1. Contents

DZEC102306 16 MB
1 Image Memory DZEC101919 64 MB
DZEC102307 128 MB
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.

(1)
Main
Power
(2) (1) SW
(3) Insert the SDRM PC Board into the Socket on

the SC PC Board as illustrated.
Note:
Make sure to insert the SDRM PC Board at a
20 - 30° angle into the memory socket, and then
lock it down.

(3) turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
the ON position.
Ver. 5.0 338 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.20. Installing the Expansion Flash Memory Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048)
8.20.1. Contents

UE-410047 4 MB
1 Image Memory
UE-410048 8 MB
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
(1) Remove 1 Silver Screw.

(2) Remove the Flash Memory Cover.
(3) Insert the Expansion Flash Memory Card as

illustrated.
(4) Reinstall the Right Rear Cover.

the ON position.
Ver. 5.0 339 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.21. Installing the System Console 1 (DA-DS603) / Console 2 (DA-DS604)
8.21.1. Contents

1 System Console See Note
Included inside the
1 Screw (M3 x 6) See Note
Paper Tray.
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.

place.
Note:
To release the handles, lift the release latch
upwards and push the handles toward the
Release
Latch machine.
(2) Lift and place the machine on the System

Console (DA-DS603/DS604) aligning with
3 Guide-Pins.
Caution:
The machine weights approximately 290 lb
(131.5 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed. To prevent
injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel
and the proper equipment to lift or move the
machine.
(3) Secure with 1 Screw on the left.
(3)
Ver. 5.0 340 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Pull out the 3rd Tray Rear.
(5) Secure with 2 Large Screws attached in the
(4) System Console as illustrated.
(5)
<Replace Gear for Adjusting the Speed>
The factory setting is for DP-3530 / 4530.

If you are installing onto DP-6030, adjust the speed
by following the steps below.
(2) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.
(2)
(1)
(3) Remove 2 Snap-Rings.
(3)
(4) Remove the Belt, 2 Gears and 2 Plastic

(Plastic Washers)
Washers.
(5) Turn both Gears over and reinstall 2 Gears,
2 Plastic Washers and the Belt.
Note:
When reinstalling the gears, mount the Plastic
Washers onto the gears first before inserting them
into the shaft.
(6) Make sure the Gear Combination to Match the

DP-6030: 6 Ribs outside Speed.
(7) Reinstall the Lower Rear Cover.
Ver. 5.0 341 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
(Plastic Washers) The Gear Combination Shown on the Left is for
DP-3530 / 4530 as default setting.
DP-3530 / 4530: 3 Ribs outside
Note:
After the machine is installed, be sure to lock the 2
Casters in front. If necessary, adjust the Leveler
behind the right front caster for more stability.
(8) Connect the System Console Cable to the

Machine.
(8) Note:
Refer to the 3000-Sheet Tray Installation
Instructions if it is installed.
the ON position.
8.21.3. Side-to-Side Adjustment of the LSU Image

2. Press the “6” key to enter the F6 Mode.
3. Press the “START” key.
4. Press the “1”, “3” and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F6 Mode code “13” for the Side-to-Side
adjustment of the 3rd Tray (-8 to 7).
adjustment of the 4th Tray (-8 to 7).
6. Press the “STOP” key.
7. Press the “FUNCTION” and “C” (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
8. Make a copy to verify your adjustment, repeat the steps above if further adjustment is required.
Ver. 5.0 342 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.22. Installing the System Console 1 (DA-DS601) / Console 2 (DA-DS602)
8.22.1. Contents

1 System Console See Note
Included inside the
1 Screw (M3 x 6) XTB3+6F
Paper Tray.
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.

place.
Note:
To release the handles, lift the release latch
upwards and push the handles toward the
Release
Latch machine.
(2) Lift and place the machine on the System

Console (DA-DS601/DS602) aligning with
3 Guide-Pins.
Caution:
The machine weights approximately 290 lb
(131.5 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed. To prevent
injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel
and the proper equipment to lift or move the
machine.
(3) Secure with 1 Screw (XTB3+6F) on the left.
(3)
Ver. 5.0 343 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Pull out the 3rd Tray Rear.
(5) Secure with 2 Large Screws attached in the
(4) System Console as illustrated.
(5)
<Replace Gear for Adjusting the Speed>
The factory setting is for DP-3510 / 3520 / 4510 /

4520.
If you are installing onto DP-6010 / 6020, adjust the
speed by following the steps below.
(2)
(1)
(3) Remove 2 Snap-Rings.
(3)
(4) Remove the Belt, 2 Gears and 2 Plastic

(Plastic Washers)
Washers.
(5) Turn both Gears over and reinstall 2 Gears,
2 Plastic Washers and the Belt.
Note:
When reinstalling the gears, mount the Plastic
Washers onto the gears first before inserting them
into the shaft.
(6) Make sure the Gear Combination to Match the

DP-6010 / 6020: 6 Ribs outside Speed.
(7) Reinstall the Lower Rear Cover.
Ver. 5.0 344 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
(Plastic Washers) The Gear Combination Shown on the Left is for
DP-3510 / 3520 / 4510 / 4520 as default setting.
DP-3510 / 3520 / 4510 / 4520: 3 Ribs outside
Note:
After the machine is installed, be sure to lock the 2
Casters in front. If necessary, adjust the Leveler
behind the right front caster for more stability.
(8) Connect the System Console Cable to the

Machine.
(8) Note:
Refer to the 3000-Sheet Tray Installation
Instructions if it is installed.
the ON position.

adjustment of the 3rd Tray (-8 to 7).
adjustment of the 4th Tray (-8 to 7).
Ver. 5.0 345 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.23. Installing the 3000-Sheet Tray (DA-MA301)
8.23.1. Contents

1 3000-Sheet Tray (LCT) See Note
1 Paper Guide DZJF000543
1 Rail Assy DZJA001049
1 Harnes Clamp PLWS4
2 Silver Screw (M4 x 10) See Note

Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
(1) Remove the Protective Cover by releasing
3 Latch Hooks.
(1)
(2) Break off 4 protective tabs with the Phillips type

Screw Driver on the Right Upper and Bottom
Covers.
Ver. 5.0 346 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3) Install the Paper Guide.
(3) (4) Secure the Paper Guide with 2 Silver Screws
(M4 x 10).
(4)
(5) Install the Rail Assembly.

(6) (6) Secure the Rail Assembly with 2 Screws
(M4 x 10).
(5)
(7) Install the LCT on the Rail Assembly.

Note:
Make sure 2 Latches fit into 2 Guide Pins of the
Rail Assembly in Front and Rear.
(8) Secure the LCT with 2 Screws (M4 x 8) in Front

and Rear.
(8)
(9) Adjust the LCT level with 2 Adjusters.

Note:
Make sure the gaps “A” and “B” are the same.
(9) (9)
A
B
(9)
Ver. 5.0 347 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(10) Connect the LCT Cable to the machine.
(11) Connect the System Console Cable to the LCT.
(11) (12) Install the Harness Clamp (PLWS4) on the Rear
Cover.
(13) Secure the System Console Cable with the
Harness Clamp.
(13) (14) turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the
(12)
the ON position.
(15) Make a copy and verify that the Image is

centered. If the Image is not centered, proceed
to step (16) and perform the Side to Side
adjustment.
(16) Loosen 2 screws and adjust the Rail Assembly
to the front and rear accordingly as
illustrated.
When finished, verify the image and repeat the

(16) (16) adjustment if necessary.

adjustment of the LCT (-8 to 7).
Ver. 5.0 348 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.24. Installing the Letter / Legal Size Adapter for 3000-Sheet Tray (DA-TK31)
8.24.1. Contents

2 Paper Guide DZJA001020
1 Rear Guide Plate B DZJA001116
1 Front Guide Plate B DZJA001117
1 Upper Support Plate DZJA001118
1 Lower Support Plate DZJA001119
1 Paper Table DZJA001120
1 Door (Large) DZJE000988
1 Paper Size Label, Legal DZNK004085
1 Paper Size Label, Letter-R DZNK004084
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
Note:
Make sure that the Paper Table is at the bottom Position.
(1) (1)
(2) Remove the Top Cover.
(2)
(4) Remove the Front Cover.
(4)
(3)
(3)
(5) Remove 1 Screw.

(5) (6) (6) Remove the Door (Small).
Ver. 5.0 349 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7) Remove the Door Lock Lever by lifting the Latch.
Door Lock (8) Install the Door Lock Lever onto the Door
(7)
Lever
(Large).
Latch

(9) (10) Remove Front and Rear Guide Plate A.
(10)
(11) Install the Lower Support Plate.

(12) (12) Secure with 4 Screws.
(11)
(13) Install the Guide Plate A onto the Paper Guides

on both side as illustrated.
(14) (14) Secure the Guide Plate A with 2 Screws.
(13)
Paper Guide
Ver. 5.0 350 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
A4 (15) Reinstall Front and Rear Guide Plate A into the

B4
desired paper size slot.
(16) Secure the Plates with 2 Screws.
Note:
Insert the Paper Guide into the lower desired
Legal Letter paper size slot of the Base Unit first, then hook to
the upper slot in the Mechanical Assembly.
(16)
(16)
(15)
(15)
Legal
B4
Letter
A4
(17) Install the Legal Tray.

<3>
(18) Secure the Paper Table with 3 Screws as
<1>
illustrated.
<2>
(17)
(19) Install the Front and Rear Guide Plate B.

(20) Secure the Guide Plates B with 2 Screws.
(19)
(20)
(19)
(20)
Ver. 5.0 351 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(22)
(21) Install the Upper Support Plate by sliding it on
(22)
the Guide Screw holes as illustrated.
(22) Secure the Plates with 4 Screws.
(21)
(22)
(24) (23) Install the Door (Large) onto the Mounting Pins.
(23) (24) Secure with 1 Screw.
(25) Place a sheet of paper and close the Door

(Large).
(26) Turn the Power Switches On.
(27) After the Tray comes up, turn the Power
Switches Off.

(29) Remove the Sensor Assy from the Letter
Position.
(29)
(28)
Ver. 5.0 352 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
<For Letter-R Setting>
(30) Reinstall the Sensor Assy at the Letter-R

position.
(31) Secure with 1 Screw.
(30)
(31)
(34) <For Legal Setting>
Legal (32) Open the Door (Large).

(33) Remove the Harness from the bottom Clamp.
(33)
Letter-R (34) Reinstall the Sensor Assy at the Legal position.
(35) Secure with 1 Screw.
(35) Letter
(36) Reinstall the Top Cover.

(36)
(37) Reinstall the Front Cover.
(38) Attach the Paper Size Label as illustrated.
Note:
See Installation Instructions of the LCT for
adjusting LCT label.
(38) Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
(37) the ON position.
Ver. 5.0 353 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.25. Installing the Exit Tray (DA-XT600)
8.25.1. Contents

1 Exit Tray Assembly DZHP006490
1 Exit Roller E Assembly DZHP007040 For USA and Canada only
1 Exit Roller Gear 1 (Black) DZLF000639
(DP-35xx)
1 Stop Plate DZJL000333
1 Stop Plate 2 DZJL000334
2 Screw See Note
1 E-Ring See Note
(DP-35xx)
CAUTION!
installation.
Note:
(3) For USA and Canada, follow the steps below.
For Other Destinations, skip to the step (14).

(2) (4) Remove the Exit Guide 3 Assembly.
(4)

(5)
(6)
Ver. 5.0 354 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8) Remove the Exit Roller U Assembly.
(7)
(7)
(8)
Note:
For DP-35xx, follow the Steps below.
(9) For DP-45xx/60xx, skip to step (11).
(9) Remove the E-Ring and Exit Roller Gear 1

(White).
(10) Install the Exit Roller Gear 1 (Black) and E-Ring
included with this kit.
(10)
(11) Install the Exit Roller E Assembly included with

(11)
this kit and secure it with 2 Screws.
(12) Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly and Exit
(11) Guide 3 Assembly.
(13) Close the Upper Exit Cover.
(14) Install the Exit Tray Assembly to the Upper Exit

Cover.
(14)
Ver. 5.0 355 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(16) Remove 1 Screw to free the Upper Exit Cover
Stopper.
(16) (18)
(17) Install the Stop Plate and secure it with 1 Screw
as illustrated.
(18) Install the Stop Plate 2 and secure it with
1 Screw as illustrated.
(19) Secure the Upper Exit Cover Stopper with 1
Screw (removed in step (16) above).
(17)
the ON position.
Ver. 5.0 356 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.26. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600)
8.26.1. Contents

1 2 Bin Finisher See Note
2 Tray 4G1-0772-000
1 Inlet Guide 4F1-2122-000
1 Latch Plate 4G1-5204-000
1 Harness Cover (Longer) 4A1-8442-000
1 Harness Cover (Shorter) 4A1-3703-000
1 Base Plate 4B1-0933-000
1 Face Plate Button 4A1-8441-000
1 Guide Rail 4G1-5202-000
1 Connecting Plate 4B1-0934-000
Except for USA and
1 Exit Roller U Assembly DZHP007141
Canada
4 Black Screw (M4 x 6) See Note

1 IPC PC Board 4G1-5215-000
1 Label DZNK004315
Note:
3. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600), read these entire
instructions.
Ver. 5.0 357 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
CAUTION!
installation.
1. Selecting the Site

3.9" 3.9"
(100mm) (100mm)
Make sure that there will be adequate space for the
work (i.e., removal of paper).
3.9" Make sure also that the Finisher will be placed on the
57.6 " (100mm)
(1463 mm) same floor surface as its host machine
(i.e., at the same height, slope).
3.9"
83.3 " (100mm)
(2115 mm)
2. Removing the Packaging Materials
Note:
The Machine is protected during shipment with
Tapes and Spacers against vibration and shock.
When the site has been selected, move the

Machine to the appropriate site, and remove all
Packaging Materials as illustrated below. Although
the Finisher is equipped with Casters, it moves
only in a straight line.
(1) Take the Accessory Box out of the Package.
Caution:
Do not remove the 4 Styrofoam Pads attached to
the Finisher. The absence of these Pads can
cause deformation of the Rail Mount.
(2) Without removing the Pads, lift the Finisher, and

stand it on the floor.
(Be sure to work in a group of two.)
Ver. 5.0 358 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3) Remove the Pads from the Top Cover.
(4) Lift the Front Caster slightly, and remove the
Pad. Repeat the same procedure and lift the
Rear Caster slightly and remove the Pad.
Caution:
The Finisher is equipped with Casters, and tends
to roll easily. Be sure to work in a group of two, and
Tag exercise caution not to drop the finisher or getting
hurt. Moreover, be sure to pay attention when
shifting the Finisher to avoid deforming the Rail
Base.
(5) Open the Covers and remove all tapes and

packing materials.
(6) Close the Covers.
Caution:
The removed Tapes and Packaging Material will
be required when transporting the Machine for
relocation or repairs; it is a good idea to store them
for future use.
3. Preparing for the Installation of the Finisher

Tray Assembly
Caution:
Before connecting the Finisher to its Host
Machine, mount the Trays and other parts to the
Finisher first.
(1) Install 2 Trays to the Finisher. Starting with the

bottom Tray, and then install the upper Tray next.
(2) As shown, fit the bosses on the Tray into the

holes in the Horizontal Frames, and lower it. Be
sure that the bosses on both sides of the Tray
slide into the holes in the Vertical Tray, leaving
no gap.
Ver. 5.0 359 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3) Secure the bottom of the Tray (both sides) using
the 2 Black Screws (M4x6) that were included
with the finisher.
(3)
(4) Mount the upper Tray in the same way.
(5) Connect the Sensor Cable to the Sensor

Connector found in the left bottom corner of each
Tray.
Sensor Cable
(6) Mount the Harness Covers to each Tray Unit.

Starting with the bottom Harness Cover
(Shorter).
Note:
Insert the bottom Hook into the top hole and snap
it into place.
Harness Cover
Ver. 5.0 360 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Preparing the Host Machine for Installation
(1) Loosen the 2 Screws and remove the SPC

Cover.
(Refer to Section 2.2.2. the Service Manual)
(1)
(3) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board onto SPC PC

(3)
Board, Connector CN727.
(4) Reinstall the SPC Cover and Toner Waste
Container.
Note:
Gently and securely insert the IPC PC Board as
illustrated.
Note:
(7) The following steps (5)~(15) are not applicable for
USA and Canada.

(8)

(10) Remove the Exit Guide 1 Assembly.
(9) (9)
(10)
Ver. 5.0 361 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(11)
(12) Remove the Exit Roller E Assembly.
(11)
(12)
(13) Secure the Exit Roller U Assembly with 2

Screws.
(13) (14) Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly and Exit
(16) Insert the bottom 2 Silver Screws (M4 x 12) first

(18) and tighten them 1/2 way.
(17) Place the Latch Plate on top of these Silver
Screws (M4 x 12).
(18)
(18) Install the upper 2 Silver Screws (M4 x 12), and
then tighten all the 4 screws.
Note:
If the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) is also being
(16) (17)
installed, before continuing to the next step, install
(16) the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) first.
(19) Install the Inlet Guide.

(19)
(20) Secure it with 2 Silver Screws (M3 x 10).
(20)
(20)
Ver. 5.0 362 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(21) Install the Guide Rail to the back of the machine
as illustrated.
(22) Secure it with 3 Screws (M4 x 8).
(22)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(23) Remove 2 Black Shipping Screws.
(24) Break off the bottom 2 Protective Tabs.
(25) Install the Base Plate.

(26) Secure the Base Plate with 2 Screws (M4 x 25).
(26)
(25)
Ver. 5.0 363 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. Connecting to the Host Machine
(1) Bring the Finisher closer to its Host Machine so

that the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher and the
Delivery Assembly of the Host Machine match in
height; then, connect the two with care.
If the connection is correct, the Guide Pin of the
Latch Plate will fit, and there will be no gap
between the two. If there is a gap either at the
front or the rear, adjust the height position of the
Finisher.
Caution:
Be sure to install both Finisher and the Host
Machine on a flat floor surface. A difference in
height can lead to faulty movement of paper.
(2) As illustrated, install the Face Plate Button in the

Face Plate Button round hole of the Right Guide Assembly of the
Finisher. However, do NOT install it if you are
also installing the Punch Unit.
(3) Install the Connecting Plate.

(4) Install these 2 Screws (M4 x 8) first.
(5) Install these remaining 2 Screws (M4 x 8).
Note:
Make sure that the Guide Rail is kept horizontally
(5) on the Floor.
(5)
(4) (3)
(6) Connect the Finisher and its Host Machine with

the Interface Cable.
(6)
Ver. 5.0 364 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
<Punch Unit is NOT installed>

6. Adjusting the Height / Slope
Alignment
Caution:
Lines The floor of the site can at times cause a
difference in height between the Finisher and the
Host Machine or cause the Finisher to tilt,
requiring adjustment. If this is the case, adjust the
difference/slope as follows; if installation of a
Punch Unit is planned, see its Installation
Procedure.
(1) Check the height and the slope of the Finisher

A and its Host Machine; if adjustment is needed,
be sure to correct the height before adjusting the
slope.
(4)
B (2) If there is a difference in Height between the
upper surface of the Right Guide Assembly of
the Finisher and the Alignment Lines on the Left
Platen Cover of the Host Machine: Align the
<Punch Unit is installed>
Alignment
Lines the Finisher to the Alignment Lines on the Left
Platen Cover of the Host Machine.
(3) Adjust the Finisher level with 4 Adjusters.

Note:
Make sure the Gaps “A” and “B” are the same.
(4) Attach the Label as illustrated.
(4)
B
(5) Open the Finisher Front Cover, and remove the

Screw used to hold the Wrench in place from
behind the Front Cover; then, detach the
Wrench.
Wrench Screw
Ver. 5.0 365 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(6) Disconnect the Finisher from its Host Machine.
(7) Remove 2 Screws, and open the Lower Front
(7) Cover.
(7)
(8) Remove the Screws and then, detach each Foot

(8) Cover.
(8) (8)
(8)
(9) To correct the height, loosen the Fixing Screws

Adjusting Bolt (Black) on the Front and Rear Casters on the
pickup side of the Finisher.
(10) To increase the height of the Finisher, turn the
Adjusting Bolt clockwise as illustrated; turn the
Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both
Front and Rear Casters.)
Fixing Screws
(Black)
Ver. 5.0 366 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(11) To decrease the height of the Finisher, turn the
Adjusting Bolt counter-clockwise as illustrated;
turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this
for both Front and Rear Casters.)
(12) To correct any slope, loosen the fixing Screw
(Black) on both Front and Rear Casters on the
delivery side of the Finisher.
Adjusting Bolt
(13) To decrease the gap between the Finisher and
the Host Machine, turn the Adjusting Bolt
clockwise. Turn the Adjusting Bolt as required.
(Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters.)
(14) To increase the gap between the Finisher and
counter-clockwise; turn the Adjusting Bolt as
Fixing Screws required. (Perform this for both Front and Rear
(Black) Casters.)
(15) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine, and
check to see that the difference in height and the
slope are within the indicated tolerances;
otherwise, make the adjustments once again.
(16) When done, disconnect the Finisher from the
Host Machine, and tighten the fixing Screws
(Black) on the Casters.
(17) To prevent loosening of the Adjusting Bolts

Adjusting Bolt during relocation of the Machine, turn the
Adjusting Bolts about 90º in the direction of the
arrow; be sure not to over-tighten them, as such
can lead to displacement.
the ON position.
90
Ver. 5.0 367 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.27. Installing the 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605)
8.27.1. Contents

1 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher See Note
2 Tray 4G1-0772-000
1 Inlet Guide 4F1-2122-000
1 Latch Plate 4G1-5204-000
1 Harness Cover (Longer) 4A1-8442-000
1 Harness Cover (Shorter) 4A1-3703-000
1 Base Plate 4B1-0933-000
1 Face Plate Button 4A1-8441-000
1 Guide Rail 4G1-5202-000
1 Connecting Plate 4B1-0934-000
Except for USA and
Canada

1 IPC PC Board 4G1-5215-000
1 Label DZNK004315
Note:
3. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605), read these
entire instructions.
Ver. 5.0 368 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
CAUTION!
installation.
1. Selecting the Site

3.9" 3.9"
(100mm) (100mm)
work (i.e., removal of paper).
3.9" Make sure also that the Finisher will be placed on the
57.6 " (100mm)
(i.e., at the same height, slope).
3.9"
83.3 " (100mm)
(2115 mm)
2. Removing the Packaging Material
Note:
The Machine is protected during shipment with
Tapes and Spacers against vibration and shock.
When the site has been selected, move the

Machine to the appropriate site, and remove all
Packaging Materials as illustrated below. Although
the Finisher is equipped with Casters, it moves
only in a straight line.
(1) Take the Accessory Box out of the Package.
Caution:
Do not remove the 4 Styrofoam Pads attached to
the Finisher. The absence of these Pads can
cause deformation of the Rail Mount.
(2) Without removing the Pads, lift the Finisher, and

stand it on the floor.
(Be sure to work in a group of two.)
Ver. 5.0 369 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3) Remove the Pads from the Top Cover.
(4) Lift the Front Caster slightly, and remove the
Pad. Repeat the same procedure and lift the
Rear Caster slightly and remove the Pad.
Caution:
The Finisher is equipped with Casters, and tends
to roll easily. Be sure to work in a group of two, and
Tag exercise caution not to drop the finisher or getting
hurt. Moreover, be sure to pay attention when
shifting the Finisher to avoid deforming the Rail
Base.
(5) Open the Covers and remove all tapes and

packing materials.
(6) Close the Covers.
Caution:
The removed Tapes and Packaging Material will
be required when transporting the Machine for
relocation or repairs; it is a good idea to store them
for future use.
3. Removing the Folding Roller Releasing Plate
(1) Remove the 4 Screws, and detach the Right

Lower Cover.
(1)
Right Lower (1)
Cover
(2) Remove the shipping screw, and detach the

Screw Releasing Plate (Front) releasing plate (front).
Ver. 5.0 370 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3) Remove the shipping screw, and detach the
Releasing Plate (Rear) Screw
releasing plate (rear).
Caution:
It is a good idea to store the removed Releasing
Plate and the shipping screws for future use.
(4) Reinstall the Right Lower Cover.
4. Removing the Stitcher Fixing Member

Front Lower Cover
(1) Open the Front Lower Cover.
(2) Pullout the Stitcher Assembly.

Saddle Stitch Assembly
(3) Remove 1 Screw, and remove the Fixing

Fixing Member Screw
Member from the Right Side.
Caution:
It is good idea to store the removed screws and
Fixing Member for future use.
(4) Slide the Stitcher Assembly back in.

(5) Close the Front Lower Cover.
Ver. 5.0 371 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. Preparing for the Installation of the Finisher
Tray Assembly
Caution:
Before connecting the Finisher to its Host
Machine, mount the Trays and other parts to the
Finisher first.
(1) Install 2 Trays to the Finisher. Starting with the

bottom Tray, and then install the upper Tray next.
(2) As shown, fit the bosses on the Tray into the

holes in the Horizontal Frames, and lower it. Be
sure that the bosses on both sides of the Tray
slide into the holes in the Vertical Tray, leaving
no gap.
(3) Secure the bottom of the Tray (both sides) using

the 2 Black Screws (M4x6) that were included
with the finisher.
(3)
(4) Mount the upper Tray in the same way.
Ver. 5.0 372 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5) Connect the Sensor Cable to the Sensor
Connector found in the left bottom corner of each
Tray.
Sensor Cable
(6) Mount the Harness Covers to each Tray Unit.

Starting with the bottom Harness Cover
(Shorter).
Note:
Insert the bottom Hook into the top hole and snap
it into place.
Harness Cover

Cover.
(Refer to Section 2.2.2. the Service Manual)
(1)
(3) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board onto SPC PC

(3)
Board, Connector CN727.
(4) Reinstall the SPC Cover and Toner Waste
Container.
Note:
illustrated.
Ver. 5.0 373 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
(7) The following steps (5)~(15) are not applicable for
USA and Canada.

(8)

(9) (9)
(10)

(11)
(12) Remove the Exit Roller E Assembly.
(11)
(12)

Screws.
Ver. 5.0 374 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(16) Insert the bottom 2 Silver Screws (M4 x 12) first
(18) and tighten them 1/2 way.
Screws (M4 x 12).
(18)
then tighten all the 4 screws.
Note:
If the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) is also being
(16) (17)
installed, before continuing to the next step, install
(16) the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) first.
(19) Install the Inlet Guide.

(19)
(20) Secure it with 2 Silver Screws (M3 x 10).
(20)
(20)
(21) Install the Guide Rail to the back of the machine

as illustrated.
(22) Secure it with 3 Screws (M4 x 8).
(22)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(23) Remove 2 Black Shipping Screws.
Ver. 5.0 375 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(24) Break off the bottom 2 Protective Tabs.
(25) Install the Base Plate.

(26) Secure the Base Plate with 2 Screws (M4 x 25).
(26)
(25)
7. Connecting to the Host Machine
(1) Bring the Finisher closer to its Host Machine so

that the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher and the
Delivery Assembly of the Host Machine match in
height; then, connect the two with care.
If the connection is correct, the Guide Pin of the
Latch Plate will fit, and there will be no gap
between the two. If there is a gap either at the
front or the rear, adjust the height position of the
Finisher.
Caution:
Be sure to install both Finisher and the Host
Machine on a flat floor surface. A difference in
height can lead to faulty movement of paper.
(2) As illustrated, install the Face Plate Button in the

Face Plate Button round hole of the Right Guide Assembly of the
Finisher. However, do NOT install it if you are
also installing the Punch Unit.
Ver. 5.0 376 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3) Install the Connecting Plate.
(4) Install these 2 Screws (M4 x 8) first.
(5) Install these remaining 2 Screws (M4 x 8).
Note:
Make sure that the Guide Rail is kept horizontally
(5) on the Floor.
(5)
(4) (3)
(6) Connect the Finisher and its Host Machine with

(6)
Ver. 5.0 377 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
<Punch Unit is NOT installed>

8. Adjusting the Height / Slope
Alignment
Caution:
Lines The floor of the site can at times cause a
difference in height between the Finisher and the
Host Machine or cause the Finisher to tilt,
requiring adjustment. If this is the case, adjust the
difference/slope as follows; if installation of a
Punch Unit is planned, see its Installation
Procedure.
(1) Check the height and the slope of the Finisher

A and its Host Machine; if adjustment is needed,
be sure to correct the height before adjusting the
slope.
(4)
B (2) If there is a difference in Height between the
the Finisher and the Alignment Lines on the Left
Platen Cover of the Host Machine: Align the
<Punch Unit is installed>
Alignment
Lines the Finisher to the Alignment Lines on the Left
Platen Cover of the Host Machine.
(3) Adjust the Finisher level with 4 Adjusters.

Note:
Make sure the Gaps “A” and “B” are the same.
(4)
B
(5) Open the Finisher Front Cover, and remove the

Screw used to hold the Wrench in place from
behind the Front Cover; then, detach the
Wrench.
Wrench Screw
Ver. 5.0 378 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(6) Disconnect the Finisher from its Host Machine
and remove the Screws; then, detach each Foot
Cover.
(6)
(6)
(6)
(7) Remove 2 Screws, and remove the Lower Rear

Cover.
(7)
(7)
(8) Open the Lower Front Cover.
(8)
(9) To correct the height, loosen the Fixing Screws

Adjusting Bolt (Black) on the Front and Rear Casters on the
pickup side of the Finisher.
(10) To increase the height of the Finisher, turn the
Adjusting Bolt clockwise as illustrated; turn the
Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both
Front and Rear Casters.)
Fixing Screws
(Black)
Ver. 5.0 379 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(11) To decrease the height of the Finisher, turn the
Adjusting Bolt counter-clockwise as illustrated;
turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this
for both Front and Rear Casters.)
(12) To correct any slope, loosen the fixing Screw
(Black) on both Front and Rear Casters on the
delivery side of the Finisher.
Adjusting Bolt
(13) To decrease the gap between the Finisher and
clockwise. Turn the Adjusting Bolt as required.
(Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters.)
(14) To increase the gap between the Finisher and
counter-clockwise; turn the Adjusting Bolt as
Fixing Screws required. (Perform this for both Front and Rear
(Black) Casters.)
(15) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine, and
check to see that the difference in height and the
slope are within the indicated tolerances;
otherwise, make the adjustments once again.
(16) When done, disconnect the Finisher from the
Host Machine, and tighten the fixing Screws
(Black) on the Casters.
(17) To prevent loosening of the adjusting bolts during

Adjusting Bolt relocation of the machine, turn the adjusting
bolts about 90º in the direction of the arrow; be
sure not to over-tighten them, as such can lead
to displacement.
the ON position.
90
9. Adjusting the Position for Saddle Stitcher
After installing the Finisher, perform the Saddle

Stitcher Operation for each paper size. If paper is not
stitched in the middle, follow the procedure below.
(1) Adjust the Fold position with the User preset

mode.
(Refer to the Operating Instructions for copier.)
(2) Perform the Saddle Stitcher Operation once

again for each paper size. Make sure that the
paper is stitched in the middle. If not, repeat the
procedures again.
Ver. 5.0 380 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.28. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP31)
8.28.1. Contents

1 Punch Unit See Note
1 Punch Lower Cover 4A1-8409-000
1 Punch Relay Harness FF3-4067-000
1 Upper Cover Guide 4A1-8408-000
1 Guide Plate (Long) 4B1-0949-000
1 Jam Removal Instructions Label FB5-5924-000
2 Shoulder Screw (Silver) See Note
2 Stepped Mounting Screw (Silver) See Note

Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
Preparing the Host Machine for Installation
(1) Remove the bottom 3 Screws, and remove

(1)
Guide Plate (Short).
Guide Plate (Short)
Ver. 5.0 381 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(2) Install the Guide Plate (Long) and secure it with
(2)
3 Screws.
Guide Plate (Long)
Removing the Punch Fixing Plate
(1) Remove the 2 Screws from the Punch Fixing

Punch
Fixing Plate Plates found on the Punch Unit; then, detach the
Punch Fixing Plates (both front and rear).
Note:
It is a good idea to store the removed Punch Fixing
Plate and shipping Screws for future use.
(1)
Connecting to the Finisher
(1) Make sure that the copier is unplugged and

Finisher is disconnected.
(2) Install the Stepped Mounting Screws as
illustrated.
Stepped Mounting Screws
(3) Remove the 4 Screws as illustrated, and detach

Finisher Side
the Connector Cover 1 and Connector Cover 2.
Connector Cover 2 Connector Cover 1
(3)
(3)
Ver. 5.0 382 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Securely connect one end of the Punch Relay
Punch Driver PCB Harness to J3 and J4 of the Punch Driver PC
Board.
Note:
J3 Loose connections can result in malfunction. If the
Punch Unit malfunctions after installation, try
disconnecting and then re-connecting the
J4 Connector.
Punch Relay Harness
(5) Hook the Punch Unit on the Mounting Screw

which was installed in step (2).
(6) Secure the Punch Unit to the Finisher in place

using Shoulder Screws as illustrated.
Shoulder Screws
(7) Secure the Punch Lower Cover to the Finisher

Punch Lower as illustrated with 1 Silver Screw (M4 x 12) at the
Cover top and 1 Black Screw (M4 x 6) at the bottom.
(7) Silver M4 x 12
(7) Black M4 x 6
Ver. 5.0 383 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8) Firmly connect the other end of the Punch Relay
Harness to Connector J21 and J23 on the
J21 Finisher Controller PC Board.
Note:
Loose connections can result in malfunction. If the
Punch Unit malfunctions after installation, try
J23 disconnecting and re-connecting the Connector.
Finisher Controller Punch Relay

PCB Harness
(9) Install the Connector Cover 1 you removed

Connector previously to the Rear Cover of the Finisher.
Cover 1
Note:
The Connector Cover 2 removed from the Rear
Cover of the Finisher will no longer be needed
when the Punch Unit is installed;
nevertheless, it may be a good idea to store it for
future use.
1. Secure the Connector Cover 1 with 2 Screws.
2. Open the Punch Unit.
(9)
(10) Jam Removal Instructions Label has already

Upper Cover
been installed on the Punch Unit.
If other language is required, please attach the
required language sticker on it.
Jam
Removal
Instructions
Label
(11) Install the Upper Cover Grip as illustrated with 1

Upper Cover Silver Screw (M4 x 12).
Note:
If the Face Plate Button was installed to the
Finisher's Right Guide, the Guide Pin of the Upper
Cover Guide will not slide into the Right Guide
Upper Cover when the Upper Cover is closed. Be sure to
Guide remove the Face Plate Button if it was installed.
(11)
the ON position.
Note:
See the Finisher's Installation Instructions for adjusting the height. If the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600) or
the 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605) is being installed at the same time as the Punch Unit and
you were asked to follow these instructions first before continuing with the Finisher installation. Return to
the step of the Finisher installation where you stopped and proceed installing the Finisher.
Ver. 5.0 384 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.29. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS330)
8.29.1. Contents

1 2 Bin Finisher See Note
1 Upper Tray GP01-3415
Assembled
1 Guide Bar GH03-3103
1 Lower Tray GP01-3403
1 Stand DZJA001230
1 Front Cover DZJE001064
1 Rear Cover DZJE001065
1 Front Magnet Catch Plate DZJA001226
1 Rear Magnet Catch Plate DZJA001227
1 Switch Bracket DZJA001225
1 Locking Clamp GS01-6503
Except for USA and
Canada
Note:
3. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS330), read these entire
instructions.
CAUTION!
installation.
1. Selecting the Installation Site

3.9 in 3.9 in
(100 mm) (100 mm)
work (i.e. removal of paper, etc.).
3.9 in Make sure also that the Finisher will be placed on the
57.6 in (100 mm)
(i.e. at the same height, slope, etc.).
3.9 in
63.0 in (100 mm)
(1600 mm)
Ver. 5.0 385 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Unpacking
Note:
This finisher is protected with packing materials
such as tapes and spacers against vibration and
shocks caused during transportation. Be sure to
remove them before using the finisher.
Caution:
The finisher weights approximately 35 lb (16 kg).
To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of
personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move
the finisher.
Move the finisher next to the left side of the
machine and remove the packing materials using
the following procedure.
(1) Take the Stapler, Finisher, and accessories out of
the package.
(2) Remove the tapes securing the Stapler, Finisher,
Accessory Cover, etc. along with the packing
materials.
Note:
The removed tapes and packing materials will be
needed when transporting the finisher for
relocation or repair; it is a good idea to store them
away for future use.

(3)
Note:
For USA and Canada, skip to step (15).

(2) (3) Remove 3 Screws.
(4)
If the Exit Guide 3 Assembly has the Rollers (7),

(5)
follow steps (5) ~ (7) to remove.
(5) [If not, skip to step (8)]
(5) Remove 2 Stopper Plates.

(6) Remove 2 Shafts.
(7) (7) Remove 2 Rollers.
(6)
(6)
(7)
Ver. 5.0 386 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8)
(9)

(10)
(11) Remove and replace the Exit Roller E Assembly
with the Exit Roller U Assembly.
(10)
(11)

Screws.
(15) Place the Front Magnet Catch Plate.

(16) Insert the lower 1 Screw (M3 x 10) and tighten it
1/2 way.
(18) (17) Install the upper 1 Screw (M3 x 10), and then
(20) tighten both screws.
(18) Place the Rear Magnet Catch Plate.
(15)
(19) Insert the lower 1 Screw (M3 x 10) and tighten it
1/2 way.
(19) (17)
(20) Install the upper 1 Screw (M3 x 10), and then
(16) tighten both screws.
Ver. 5.0 387 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(21) Secure the Switch Bracket with 2 Screws
(M3 x 10).
Note:
Adjustment of the Bracket position is performed at
the end of the installation (See step 6 - 3).
(21)
(22) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Phillips

type Screw Driver as illustrated.
(23) (23) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Nipper.
(22)
4. Attaching to the Host Machine
Caution:
(3) Be sure install both the Finisher and Host Machine
on a level floor. A stepped or slanted floor can
result in improper paper feed.
(1)
(1) Fit the hooks of the Stand into the mounting
holes on the side panel of the Host Machine.
(3)
(2) (2) Secure the Stand with 2 Screws (M4 x 30).
(3) Slide the Rails of the Stand to the left as
(2)
illustrated.
(4) Place the Finisher on the Rails.
Finisher
Rail
Ver. 5.0 388 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5) Hook the Bosses of the Finisher to the Rails as
illustrated and secure the Finisher with 2 Screws
(one on each side) (M4 x 8).
Finisher
(6) Install the Front and Rear Covers as illustrated.

(7) Secure the Covers with 2 Screws (M4 x 10).
(7)
(6)
(7)
(6)
Upper Tray (8) Install the Upper and Lower Trays.
Finisher
Lower Tray
(9) Install the Locking Clamp.

(11) (10) Place the Interface Cable into the Locking Clamp
and connect it to the Host Machine.
(10) (11) Slide the Finisher towards the Host Machine.
Note:
Ensure that the Magnet Catch Plates are aligned
with the Magnets of the Finisher.
(9)
Ver. 5.0 389 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. Height and Perpendicular Position Adjustment
(1) Turn the Adjusters to adjust the height or the

perpendicular position of the Finisher to the
machine. (Gaps “A” and “B” should be identical)
A
the ON position.
B
6. Punch Hole Position Adjustment
Before proceeding with this adjustment, make sure

that the Copier’s side to side registration is adjusted
properly.
(1) Loosen the 2 Screws of the Finisher.

(2) Adjust it to the front or rear accordingly.
Note:
(1) Verify that the punch holes are center aligned by
(2)
folding a test copy in half. If the holes are not
center aligned, repeat the steps above.
(3) Loosen 2 Screws and adjust the Switch Bracket
position so that it center aligns into the rear cut-
out (between “A” and “B”).
A
B (3)
Ver. 5.0 390 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.30. Installing the 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS355A)
8.30.1. Contents

1 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher See Note
1 Stapler PF4117K226A
1 Delivery Tray PF4117K225A
1 Stand PF4117K604A
Except for USA and
Canada
1 Exit Roller Gear 1 (White) FFPMF1069 Except for USA and
Canada
1 E-Ring See Note Used for DP-45xx
1 Latch Plate PF4117K101A
1 IPC PC Board PF4117P003
2 Spacer PF4117K254 Used for DP-45xx
1 Label DZNK004315
Note:
3. Before you begin the installation of your 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS355A), read
these entire instructions.
CAUTION!
installation.
1. Selecting the Installation Site
3.9 in 3.9 in
(100 mm) (100 mm)
work (i.e. removal of paper, etc.).
3.9 in Make sure also that the Finisher will be placed on the
57.6 in (100 mm)
(i.e. at the same height, slope, etc.).
3.9 in
74.2 in (100 mm)
(1885 mm)
Ver. 5.0 391 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Unpacking
Note:
This finisher is protected with packing materials
such as tapes and spacers against vibration and
remove them before using the finisher.
Caution:
The finisher weights approximately 60 lb (27 kg).
To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of
personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move
the finisher.
Move the finisher next to the left side of the
machine and remove the packing materials using
the following procedure.
(1) Take the Stapler, Finisher, and accessories out of
the package.
(2) Remove the tapes securing the Stapler, Finisher,
Accessory Cover, etc. along with the packing
materials.
Note:
The removed tapes and packing materials will be
needed when transporting the finisher for
relocation or repair; it is a good idea to store them
away for future use.
3. Preparing the Host Machine for Finisher

Installation

Cover.
(Refer to Section 2.2.2. in the Service Manual)
(1)
(3) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board onto the SPC

(3)
PC Board, connector CN727.
(4) Reinstall the SPC Cover and the Toner Waste
Container.
Note:
illustrated.
Ver. 5.0 392 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
(5) For DP-35xx, skip to step (21).
(6) For DP-45xx, follow the Steps below.


(8) Push the Release Lever down in order to free the
(8) Exit Guide 7.
(7)

(9) (10) Remove the Fuser Cover.
(9)
(10)
(11) Disconnect the 4 Harnesses.

(11) (12) Remove 1 Screw.
(13) Remove the Fuser Unit.
(13)
(11)
(12)
Ver. 5.0 393 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(14) Loosen 1 Screw as illustrated.
Fuser Unit
(Front View) (15) Install the Spacer.
(16) Secure 1 Screw loosened in the step (14).
(14)
(16)
(15)
Fuser Unit (17) Loosen 1 Screw as illustrated.

(Rear View) (18) Install the Spacer.
(17)
(19) Secure 1 Screw loosened in the step (17).
(19)
(20) Reinstall the Fuser Unit and all remaining parts.
(18)
Note:
(23) For USA and Canada, skip to step (36).

(22)
(24)
If the Exit Guide 3 Assembly has the Rollers (27),

(25)
follow steps (25) ~ (27) to remove.
(25) [If not, skip to step (28)]
(25) Remove 2 Stopper Plates.

(26) Remove 2 Shafts.
(27) (27) Remove 2 Rollers.
(26)
(26)
(27)
Ver. 5.0 394 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(28) (28)
(29)

(30)
(31) Remove and replace the Exit Roller E Assembly
with the Exit Roller U Assembly.
(30)
(31)
Note:
For DP-35xx, skip to step (34).
(30) For DP-45xx, follow the Steps below.
(32) Remove the E-Ring and Exit Roller Gear 1

(Black).
(33) Install the Exit Roller Gear 1 (White) and E-Ring
included with this kit.
(29)

Screws.
Ver. 5.0 395 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(37) Insert the lower 2 Silver Screws (M3 x 10) first
into the 3rd Holes from top and tighten them 1/2
way.
(39)
Screws (M3 x 10).
then tighten all 4 Screws.
(37) (38) Note:
(39) Before connecting the Finisher to its Host
(37) Machine, be sure to attach the Latch Plate to the
Host Machine.
(40) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Phillips
type Screw Driver as illustrated.
(*)
(41) (41) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Nipper.
(40)
4. Attaching to the Host Machine
Caution:
Be sure install both the Finisher and Host Machine
on a level floor. A stepped or slanted floor can
result in improper paper feed.
(1) Fit the hooks of the Stand into the mounting

holes on the side panel of the Host Machine,
(1) then secure the Stand with Silver Screws
(M4 x 30).
(2) Slide the Slider of the Stand outward, loosen the
Screws securing the Bracket, then secure the
Slider.
Bracket
Slider
Screw
Ver. 5.0 396 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3) Place the Finisher on the Slider of the Stand, and
Finisher loosely secure it with 2 Screws (M4 x 6).
Slider
Screws
Caution:
When mounting the Finisher in place, be sure to
insert the lower tabs of the Finisher into the holes
Finisher on top of the Slider. Ensure that there is no gap
between the Finisher and the Stand. The gap
No Gap
would indicate the Finisher is overlapping.
Remove and mount the Finisher correctly.
Stand
(4) Align the positioning lines of the Finisher and the

Stand by moving the Finisher back and forth, and
tighten 2 Screws when they are aligned.
Finisher
Screws
Positioning
Line
Ver. 5.0 397 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5) Place the Bracket in its original position, then
secure it with Screws. Slide the Finisher toward
Finisher the Host Machine and connect it to the Host
Machine.
(6)
Bracket
Screw
(7) Attach the Delivery Tray with Screws (M4 x 6) as

Finisher illustrated.
Screws
Delivery Tray
Screws
(8) Open the Front Cover of the Finisher, then insert

Front Cover the Stapler along the Guide Rails.
Stapler
(9) Close the Front Cover of the Finisher.

(10) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine with
Caution:
Before connecting the Interface Cable, make sure
(10) to turn OFF the Host Machine and unplug the AC
Power Cord from the wall outlet to avoid shock
hazards.
Ver. 5.0 398 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(11) Turn the Adjusters to adjust the height or the
perpendicular position of the Finisher to the
machine. (Gaps “A” and “B” should be identical).
Adjuster the ON position.
Adjuster
Ver. 5.0 399 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.31. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP41)
8.31.1. Contents

1 Punch Unit See Note
1 Punch Relay Harness (Orange) YA1020K374B
1 Punch Relay Harness (Violet) YA1020K375A
1 Jam Removal Label YA1020P828A
1 Punch Dust Label YA1020P208A
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
1. Removing the Packing Material
Note:
This machine is protected with packing material
such as tape and spacers against vibration and
remove them before using the machine.
(1) Take the Punch Unit and accessories out of the

package.
(2) Remove the tape securing the Covers and Front
Door.
2. Making Preparations for Installing the Finisher

Front Door Screw
Side
(1) Turn off the Host Machine and disconnect the

Interface Cable of the Finisher from the Host
Machine.
Jam (2) Release the Latch of the Finisher, and move the
Release
Dial Finisher outward from the host machine.
(3) Open the Front Door. Holding the tab with your
Tab fingers, remove the Jam Clear Dial.
(4) Remove the 2 Screws.
Screw
Ver. 5.0 400 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5) Raise the lugs under the Latch Release Lever
Latch Release Front Cover
Lever
and remove the Latch Release Lever.
(6) Remove the 3 Screws, open the Jam Access
Door and detach the Front Cover.
(7) Close the Jam Access Door.
Screws
Jam
Access
Cover
Screw
(8) Remove the 2 Screws on the paper supply side

of the Finisher.
Rear Cover
Screws
(9) Remove one screw on the paper ejection side of

the Finisher to detach the Rear Cover.
Rear Cover
Screw
Ver. 5.0 401 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Upper-Right Cover Assembly (10) Remove the 2 Screws at the front of the Finisher.
Screws
(11) Remove the 2 Screws on the back of the

Upper-Right Cover
Finisher to detach the Upper-Right Cover
Assembly.
Screws
Upper-Right Cover
3. Attaching to the Finisher
(1) Open the lugs of the removed Upper-Right

Cover Assembly outward to remove the Upper-
Right Cover.
Lug
Ver. 5.0 402 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(2) Place the Punch Unit on the paper supply
section of the Finisher as shown below.
Punch Base Cover
Latch
Positioning Pin
(3) Secure the Punch Unit to the Finisher with the 2

Original Screws (White, M4 X 6) and 1 Enclosed
Screw (Screw with Threaded Washer Held, M4 x
6).
Screw
Screw with Threaded

Star Washer
Screw
Ver. 5.0 403 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Open the Upper Cover, fit the lugs of the Upper-
Upper-Right Cover
Right Cover in the square holes in the Punch
Unit to attach the Upper-Right Cover to the
Punch Unit.
(5) Close the Upper Cover.
Upper Cover
Punch Unit
Screws (6) Secure the Upper-Right Cover to the Finisher

with the Original 2 Screws (White, M4 x 6).
Upper-Right
Cover
Upper-Right Cover (7) Paste the jam removal instruction label written in
your language in the Label Frame on the Upper-
Right Cover.
Jam Access
Label
Ver. 5.0 404 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8) Connect one end of the Punch Relay Harness
(Orange) to J1004 on the Punch Controller
Circuit Board and connect one end of the Punch
Relay Harness (Violet) to J1003 on same circuit
Punch
Controller board.
Circuit Board
J1004
Punch Relay
Harness
J1003 (Orange)
Punch Relay
Harness (Violet)
(9) Connect the other end of the Punch Relay

Harness (Orange) to CN14 on the Finisher
Controller Circuit Board and connect the other
end of the Punch Relay Harness (Violet) to
Punch Relay
Harness CN12 on the same Circuit Board.
(Orange) CN14
CN12
Punch Relay
Harness (Violet)
Finisher
Controller
Circuit Board
Ver. 5.0 405 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(10) Place the Punch Relay Harnesses into a
Harness Clamps and Harness Guides.
Punch Relay
Harness
(Violet)
Punch Relay
Harness
(Orange)
Harness
Clamp
Finisher
Controller
Circuit
Board
Harness
Guide
(11) Attach the Front Cover, Latch Release Lever,

Jam Clear Dial, and Rear Cover.
Note:
When attaching the Front Cover, attach it as the
Side Side Guide is set inside the Front Cover. See the
Guide figure left.
If the Front Cover is attached with the Side Guide
Front Cover
being set outside, up and down operation of
Ejection Tray may malfunction.
(12) Loosen the 2 Screws securing the Finisher and

Finisher Frame.
Screws
Ver. 5.0 406 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(13) Slowly move the Finisher close to the Host
Finisher
Machine and adjust the Finisher back and forth
so that the notch of the Latch Plate aligns with
the protrusion of the Punch Base Cover.
Host Machine (14) Attach the Finisher to the Host Machine and
connect the Interface Cable of the Finisher to the
Host Machine.
Latch Plate Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
the ON position.
Align
Punch Base
Cover
Ver. 5.0 407 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.32. Installing the Power Supply for Finisher (DA-PW600)
8.32.1. Contents

1 Power Supply for Finisher See Note
1 LVSC Harness DZFP001286
1 Screw XTB3+6F
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
(3) Pull out 1st Paper Tray.

(5) Remove the LVPS Cover.
(5)
(4) (3)
(6) Remove the LVCS Harness.
(6)
Ver. 5.0 408 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7) Release the 2 Harnesses from the Harness
Clamp. Secure the 2 Harnesses without turn.
(9) (7)
(8) Insert the Power Supply for Finisher to the Main
Machine.
(9) Connect 2 Harnesses to CN65 and CN66 on the
(8) Power Supply for Finisher.
(11) (10) Disconnect the Dummy Connector.
(11) Connect the LVSC Harness and the LVPS
Harness.
(10)
(12) Secure the Power Supply for Finisher with

1 Screw.
(13) Secure the Harness to the Harness Clamp.
(14) Reinstall the LVPS Cover.
(13) (15) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and
the ON position.
(12)
Ver. 5.0 409 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.33. Installing the Key Counter Harness Kit (DZTY000128)
8.33.1. Contents
Note:
The Key Counter is sold separately.

1 Harness, KCTU DZFP001387
1 Cover, Connector DZMC000783
CAUTION!
installation.

(2) Remove the Upper Rear Cover.

(5) Remove the Right Rear Cover.
(3)
(4)
(6) Route the KCTU Harness through the hole in

the Frame as illustrated.
(7) Secure the KCTU Harness to the 2 Harness
(6) Clamps.
(7)
Ver. 5.0 410 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8) Secure the KCTU Harness to the 4 Harness
Clamps.
(9) Connect the KCTU Harness to CN765 on the

DRV PC Board.
(9)
(10) Remove the Protective Tab on the Right Rear

(10) Cover.
(11) Reinstall the Right Rear Cover and Upper Rear
Cover.
the ON position.
Note:
As a safety measure, if the Key Counter is not being
installed, cover up the aperture with the Connector
Cover and secure it with 2 Screws.
Note:
After the Key Counter installation, ensure that the harness and the connector are not exposed.
Ver. 5.0 411 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.34. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater (DZTQ000041)
(Supplied as a Service Part)
8.34.1. Contents

2 Heater FFPXK43H00
1 Heater Assembly DZHP008182
1 Heater Switch Assembly DZHP008195
2 Connector Holder Bracket DZJE001048
1 RLB PC Board DZEC102536
1 RLB Harness DZFP001118 4 Connectors
1 DHT Harness DZFP001188 3 Connectors (Long)
1 DF2 Harness DZFP001393 3 Connectors (Short)
1 Heater SW Label DZNK004269
10 Screw XTB3+6F
1 Installation Instructions DZSM000563
Note:
CAUTION!
installation.
(4)
(3)
(2) (3) Remove the Left Platen Cover.
(5) (4) Remove the Glass Assembly.
(2) (5) Remove 3 Screws.
(7) (6) Remove the Left Side Rear Cover.
(5)
(6) (8) Open the Front Cover.
(5)
(7) (10) (10) Remove the Left Side Front Cover.
(12)
(13)
(13) Remove the Fuser Cover.
Ver. 5.0 412 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(14) Pull out the 1st Paper Tray.
(17)
(16) Remove the LVPS Cover.
(18)
(17) Turn the Lifting Lever counter-clockwise.
(18) Pull the ADU Unit out.
(16)
(15) (14)

(20) Disconnect the Cooling Fan 1 Harness and
remove the Interlock Cover.
(20) (21) Disconnect the HT Harness.
(19)
(21)

(22) (23) Remove the Lower Control Panel Cover.
(24) (23) (22)
(24) Turn the Control Panel Unit upside down.
(22)
(25) Secure the DF2 Harness to the existing

(25) 2 Harness Clamps.
Note:
Route the right side of the harness over the center
(25) bracket as illustrated.
(26) Connect the DF2 Harness to DHT Harness.
(26)
Ver. 5.0 413 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(27) Insert the right side of the DF2 Harness into the
Connector Holder Bracket.
(28) Secure the Connector Holder Bracket with
1 Screw.
(28)
(27)
(Right Side)
(29) Connect the Heater to DF2 Harness.

(30) Carefully move the Scanner towards the center
(29)
to give you access to the screw hole.
(31) (31) Secure the Heater with 1 Screw.
(32) Insert the left side of the DF2 Harness into the
Connector Holder Bracket.
Note:
Observe the direction of the bracket in the
illustration, before inserting the connector.
(33)
(32)
(33) Secure the Connector Holder Bracket with
1 Screw.
(Left Side)
(34) Connect the Heater to DF2 Harness.

(34)
(35) Secure the Heater with 1 Screw.
(36) Secure the Harness with 1 Harness Clamp.
(36)
(35)
Ver. 5.0 414 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(37) Secure the DF2 Harness with 4 Harness
(37)
Clamps.
(38) Secure the DHT Harness with 5 Harness

Clamps.
(38)
(39) Secure the DHT Harness with 4 Harness

Clamps.
(40) Route the DHT Harness through the hole in the
frame as illustrated.
(39)
(40)
(41) Open the Lower Exit Cover.

(43) Remove 1 Snap Ring.
(41) (44) Remove the Lower Exit Cover.
(42)
(43)
(44)
Ver. 5.0 415 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(46) Remove the Exit Cover 3.
(46) <If the System Console option is installed,

perform steps (45) ~ (46) below>
(45) (48) Remove the Left Cover.
(48)
(47)

(50)
(51) Remove the Paper Exit Assembly.
Inverting
Paper Note:
Sensor Exercise care not to damage the Inverting Paper
(49) Sensor.
(49)
(51)

(54) Remove the Exit Guide.
(54)
(53)
(53)

(56) Partially slide out the EL Bracket Assembly.
(56)
(55)
Ver. 5.0 416 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(57) Install the RLB PC Board.
(59)
(58) Secure the RLB PC Board with 4 Screws.
(59) Connect the RLB Harness to the RLB PC Board
(60) (CN171 and CN172).
(57) (60) Connect the DHT Harness to the RLB PC Board
(58) (CN173).
(60)
(58)
(61) Slide the EL Bracket Assembly into the machine.

(62) Secure the EL Bracket Assembly with 2 Screws.
(61)
(62)
(63) Secure the RLB Harness with 4 Harness

(64) Clamps.
(63)
(64) Route the RLB Harness through the hole in the
frame as illustrated.

(65) <If the System Console option is installed,

perform steps (61) ~ (62) below>
(68) Remove the Rear Cover of System Console.
(66)
(65)
(68) (67)
Ver. 5.0 417 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(70) Remove the NFL PC Board Assembly.
(70)
(69)
(69)
(71) Connect the RLB Harness to CN134 on NFL PC

Board.
Used for Japanese
models only.
(71)
(72) With the 1st Paper Tray pulled out, install the
Heater Assembly as illustrated.
(72)
(73) Secure the Heater Assembly with 1 Screw.
(74) Connect the Heater Assembly to DHT Harness.
(73)
(74)
(75) Connect the Harness to Heater Switch

Assembly.
(75)
Ver. 5.0 418 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(76) Install the Heater Switch Assembly.
(78) (77) Secure the Heater Switch Assembly with
1 Screw.
(78) Secure the Harness with 2 Harness Clamps.
(78)
(76) (77)

(80) Remove the Blind Plate.
(81) Affix the Heater SW Label as illustrated.
(79)
If finished, reassemble the machine and
reinstall all Covers.
(81) Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to
(80) the ON position.
Ver. 5.0 419 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8.35. Replacing the OPC Drum
(2) Move the Hopper Unit.
(3) Turn the Developer Unit Lever clockwise (90°).

(4) Turn the ADU Lever counter-clockwise (90°).
(5) Loosen 1 Screw.

(6) Remove the Drum Unit
Note:
When handling the Drum Unit, hold the Handle.
Ver. 5.0 420 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7) Remove 1 Screw.
Remove the Bias Charge Unit.
(8) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Frame

Cover.
Note:
When reinstalling, make sure that 2 Hooks are
fixed properly.

(10) Remove the Front Fixation Plate.
(11) Turn the Front Support Metal counter-clockwise

and remove it.
Caution:
Ver. 5.0 421 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(13) Remove the Rear Fixation Plate.
(14) Turn the Rear Support Metal clockwise and

remove it.
(15) Remove the OPC Drum.

(16) Install New OPC Drum by reverse steps.
Caution:
Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the
OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare
hands.
Caution:
Ver. 5.0 422 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9 General Network Information
9.1. Network Protocol
9.1.1. OSI Reference Mode
Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most
commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first
released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining
and describing the various processes underlying networking communications.
The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware)
layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the
opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software)
in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and
Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that
describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.
Layer Name Function Protocol
7 Application SMB
SMTP
FTP
6 Presentation DNS
HTTP
Telnet
NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc... etc...
5 Session
TDI
4 Transport TCP/IP
TCP, UDP
IPX/SPX
Net BEUI
Apple Talk
3 Network IP, IPX, etc... IP Address etc...
etc...
ODI Driver, NDIS Driver
2 Datalink PPP... Router Ethernet

MAC Address Token Ring
NIC FDDI
SW Hub ATM
1 Physical Repeater
Hub RS-232C, X21... etc...
OSI Reference Model and Network Terms
Ver. 5.0 423 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.1.2. Protocol
One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or
Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to
input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is
supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for
communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone.
TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX
operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an
RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the
Internet at http://www.ietf.org/.
The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol
suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.
Layer OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base Function
7 Application Application This layer embraces functions of the OSI
6 Presentation Session, Presentation and Application
layers. Protocols at this layer provide
5 Session network services.
4 Transport Transport Compares to OSI Transport layer.
Enables peer communication between
hosts on the internetwork.
3 Network Internet Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network
layer. Protocols move data between
devices on networks.
2 Data Link Network Corresponds to the bottom two layers of
Interface the OSI model. This correspondence
enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist
with existing Data Link and Physical layer
1 Physical standards. This layer is concerned with all
aspects of transmitting and receiving data
on the network.
Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model
9.1.3. Cable
For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several
cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used.
Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 Ω.
Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet.
Category Purpose
1 Voice grade telephone line
2 ISDN
3 10Base-T Token Ring (4M)
4 Token Ring (16M)
5 100Base-TX, ATM (155M)
Ver. 5.0 424 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.2. Layer Functions and Technology
9.2.1. MAC (Media Access Control)
The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network.
These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the
left end identify the manufacturer’s code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner. For
Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from each
station should be unique.
XXXXXX XXXXXX
Unique value
Manufacturer ID
PCC : 080023
9.2.2. Network Control

CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the
network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and
the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection. The
General sequence is as follows:
Wait for the next available timing to send,

Send out a frame,
Perform collision sensing simultaneously,
Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary.
(Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident)
802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format

Most significant bit Least significant bit
Pre-amble Destination MAC address Source MAC address Data type Data FCS
8 byte 6 byte 6 byte 2 byte 46 1500 byte 4 byte
Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast)
If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node, it
must be passed to the upper layer.
Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node
immediately.
Token Passing
Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs
to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit. When
the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network.
The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor
station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor
station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station
announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active
upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the
beaconing process continues every seven seconds.
Ver. 5.0 425 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data
frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended
recipient of the frame.
When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer,
updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring.When the computer
that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission,
takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring.
Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission.

Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission.
Token Frame Format

Start De-limiter (SFD) P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED)
1 byte 1 byte
P: priority
S: Status
0 = Token Frame
1 = Data Frame
R: Reserved
Data Frame Format
SFD Access Frame Destination Source Data FCS ED Frame
1 byte Control control MAC MAC 4 byte 1 byte Status
1 byte 1 byte 6 or 2 byte 6 or 2 byte 1 byte
Data: Max 4429 byte (4M)
Max 17779 (16M)
There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the
token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can
confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.
Ver. 5.0 426 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.2.3. Ethernet
Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The
original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks
can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star
physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe
10Base-T)
Speed (bps) Topology Cable Type Max Length

10Base-5 10M Bus Yellow cable 500 m (1640 ft)
10Base-T 10M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft)
100Base-TX 100M Star Twisted Pair (Cat. 5) 200 m (656 ft)
802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type
Max length (x 100m)

10 BASE 5
Logical speed BASE : baseband (digital)

(Mbps) BROAD: broadband (analog)
10 BASE - T
TP Twisted Pair
hyphen "-" means type of cable
no "-" means max length
Ethernet Configuration
Ver. 5.0 427 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
TX (+) TX (+)
1 1 1 1
TX (-)
2 2 2 TX (-) 2
RX (+)
3 3 3 RX (+) 3
RX (-)
6 6 6 RX (-) 6
Straight Cable Crossed Cable
Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration

All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly.
The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.
"1" "0"
0V
-2.05 V
Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from
further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables.
If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent. The
node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for collision
detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the end of
transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period.
There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion
due to the star topology.
9.2.4. Repeater
The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at
the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal,
passing all network traffic in all directions.
They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3
rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the
segments being populated.
Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are
called multiport repeaters.
9.2.5. NIC (Network Interface Card)

NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network
interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.
Ver. 5.0 428 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.3. Network Layer
9.3.1. IP Address
An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is
separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need
a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember.
The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class
C addresses.
Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first
octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number.
Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that
make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID.
Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make
up the host ID.
There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than
223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes.
Class A : First octet reserved for the network address

Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address
Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address
Class A 0
Class B 1 0
Class C 1 1 0
Network address represented as
Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP
addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below:
Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255

Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255
Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255
Ver. 5.0 429 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.3.2. Subnet Mask
A subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.
IP
192.168.32.1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
192 168 32 1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
255 255 255 0
IP
Subnet Mask
Network
Address 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
192.168.32.0
Network Address Configuration
Global IP
Address
190.0.0.0 Third
255.255.0.0 190.0.3.1 190.0.3.2 190.0.3.3 Floor
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router Second
190.0.2.1 190.0.2.2 190.0.2.3 Floor
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Ground
Floor
190.0.1.1 190.0.1.2 190.0.1.3
Note 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Upper: IP address
Lower: Subnet mask
Class B Subnet Outline
For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned.
1. Host address is set to all “0”

2. Host address is set to all “1”
Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations.
3. All 4 octets are set to all “1”
IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified.
Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network.
4. All 4 octets are set to all “0”
Reserved for default route for non-destination address
5. Most significant bit starting with “127”
Reserved for loop back address
Ver. 5.0 430 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.3.3. Internet Protocol
The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides
datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams.
It performs the following typical functions:

1. Identifies the IP address
2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram
3. Routing of the IP address
4 byte
Version Internet Type Of Service Total Length

Header Length
ID Flags Fragment Offset
Time To Live Protocol Header Checksum
Source Address
Destination Address
Option + Padding (size varies)
Data
IP Datagram
Terms Detail
Version Currently version 4
Internet Header IP Header field length
Length
Type Of Service Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for
precedence)
ID Identification frame number for upper layer communication
Flags Packet disassembly information
Fragment Offset Offset from most significant bit
Time To Live Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router
Protocol Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h)
Header Checksum Checksum is used for error checking on the header data
Source Address Sender’s IP Address
Destination Address Destination’s IP Address
Option When implemented
Padding Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit
Ver. 5.0 431 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.3.4. Router
Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network
segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination
network address and a destination device address.
Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they
also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by
identifying its header information.
These are the typical functions:
1. Routing
This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table.
2. Packet Filtering
This performs the access and security control for specified routing.
access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23
192.168.32/24 192.168.33/24
Router B
PC-A PC-B PC-C PC-D

192.168.32.1/24 192.168.32.2/24 192.168.33.1/24 192.168.33.2/24
OK OK
permission denied
permission denied
Packet Filtering Sample
3. Address Conversion
NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to
single private IP Address.
4. IP Masquerade:
This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address.
At the same time the port number is automatically assigned.
Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX
(Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known
manufacturer.
5. Designated Reply
These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically.
Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well
known techniques to keep a live connection.
Ver. 5.0 432 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.4. Transport Layer
9.4.1. TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds
to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end
communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for
the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer.
The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.

IP Datagram
TCP segment
IP Header TCP Header Application Data
(20 byte) (20 byte) (vary)
TCP Segment in IP Datagram

Source Port (2 byte) Destination Port (2 byte)
Sequence Number (4 byte)
Acknowledgment Number (4 byte)
Header Length Reserved Control Flag
(4 bit) (6 bit) (6 bit) Window (6 byte)
Checksum (2 byte) Urgent Pointer (2 byte)
Option PAD
Data (Segment)
TCP Segment Outline
TCP Header Monitoring Sample
Ver. 5.0 433 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Client SYN, Se
quential
No.=453 Increments No. sequentially
8970
71
K N o .=45389
ACK, A C 24000
n ti a l N o.=19194
que
SYN, Se
ACK, AC Server
K No.=1
9197240
01
Panasonic
Device
TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart
The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial
sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec.
The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The
ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each
packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.
Ver. 5.0 434 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.5. Upper Layer
9.5.1. DNS (Domain Name System)
The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to
client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain
name structure, to access network resources.
Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most
specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain
Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below:
Panasonic.com
Mail.panasonic.com
ifax.panasonic.com
can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device.
Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names
(i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be
connected to an actual device.
This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to
establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of
the listed Domain Name.
Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline.
• The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code.
• Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available.
• Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots.
• Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots.
• Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)
DNS Server (root)
DNS Server (jp)

3
5
2
4 DNS Server (co.jp)
6 7
1
10
8
DNS Server
(panasonic.com) 9
Panasonic DNS Server Mail Server
(panafax.co.jp) mlsv.panafax.co.jp
Device domain
DNS Name Resolution Sample
The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the
need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be
delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it.
There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.
Ver. 5.0 435 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below:
1. Query the local DNS Server.
2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company.
3. The “Com” root DNS Server sends the query to the “jp” root DNS Server.
4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available.
5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name.
6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.
All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not
always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP
address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To
Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary
Name Server.
9.5.2. Primary Name Server

A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the
copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone, it
retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.
9.5.3. Secondary Name Server

A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the
original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then
the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers
in a domain improves performance.
Ver. 5.0 436 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.5.4. SOA (Start of Authority) Record
Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's
primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as
follows:
IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL>
An example of the syntax is shown below:

;
; File: db.127.0.0 file
; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS.
; SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the
; default parameters for information this DNS is
; authorized for:
;
@ IN SOA nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
951213 ; serial number
43200 ; refresh every 12 hours
7200 ; retry after 2 hours
1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks
172800) ; default ttl is 2 days
;
IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
;
SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file
The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for
the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have
a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis
must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line.
The following list explains the other parameters:
* Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file.
* Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be
expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e.
hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp instead of hostmaster@rdmg.pcc.co.jp).
* Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone
file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file.
* Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for
changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer.
* Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer
fails.
* Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the
expiration time passes, the old zone information is deleted.
* TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is
sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual
resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.
Ver. 5.0 437 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.5.5. A (Address) Record
The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machine’s name
and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.
; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy
; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais
; zone ' rdmg.pcc.co.jp' last serial 720
; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy
$ORIGIN pcc.co.jp.
rdmg IN SOA nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. (
721 10800 3600 604800 86400 )
IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp.
IN MX 10 mlsv2.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
$ORIGIN rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
ifax-gz03 IN A 172.21.94.216
qmc-cco1 IN A 133.185.254.212
ifaxos01 IN A 172.21.97.26
ifpdyna IN A 202.244.202.29
A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file
9.5.6. PTR (Pointer) Record

Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names.
DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup.
They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and
then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in
reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below:
<ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>
IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
;
PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file.
9.5.7. CNAME (Canonical Name) Record

The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one
name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below:
<alias name> CNAME <host name>
Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are
useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME
record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.
Ver. 5.0 438 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.5.8. NS (Name Server) Record
The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server
record is shown below:
<domain> IN NS <nameserver host>
An example of a name server record follows below:
@ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp
The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name
server.
9.5.9. MX (Mail Exchange) Record
The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you
list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail
server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed
to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first
preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on.
If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at
your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below:
<domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host>
For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.
9.5.10. Reverse Lookup

This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall
within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA
domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four
octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the
domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the
natural grouping of hosts in a network.
9.5.11. Forwarding
A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of
forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries
to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are
tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not
wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would
involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The
workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the
appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the
timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the
query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central
machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage
of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile
commands.
There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary
zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache or zones will be answered, and
anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list.
For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly &
Associates, Inc.
Ver. 5.0 439 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.6. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel.
The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request,
the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP
may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-
SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP
in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a
MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an
OK reply.
The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver
can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that
recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several
recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating
with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK
reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http://
www.imc. org/rfc821
Internet
SMTP Server
PC DNS Server POP Server PC

SMTP
POP 3
Internet Mail Sending and Receiving
9.6.1. Mail Header Sample

Received: from nwr35
by labo.pcc.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157 Delivery route
for <freeport@labo.pcc.com>; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST)
Message-Id: <199908200604.PAA09157@mlsv2.labo.pcc.com> Message ID
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
From: "Panasonic" <ifax98-us@labo.pcc.com>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: freeport@labo.pcc.com
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+" Content-Type
X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572
Ver. 5.0 440 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.7. ITU T.37 and RFC2305
9.7.1. Mode of Operation
The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses
approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet
standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations.
Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes.

Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to
this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended
that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be
capable of transmitting in Simple Mode.
Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not
required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this
recommendation.
9.7.2. Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table
Sender
Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S file
Provide notice in case of local transmission problem
Required
Provide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME
compliant
Strongly Include Message-ID
Recommended Use Base 64 encoding for image data
Use other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are
Optional supported by the receiver
Provide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications
Receiver
Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place
MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than
display
Required
Be capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files
within a single message
Provide notice in case of reception or processing problems
Optional Use other TIFF Profiles
Ver. 5.0 441 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Offramp Gateway (when implemented)
Be SMTP compliant
Provide delivery failure notification
Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address
Required Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile
transmission
Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile
terminals
Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification
Use DSN for delivery failure notification
Strongly
Recommended Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple
users
Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3
Optional facsimile terminal
Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient
9.7.3. Definitions and Abbreviations
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force

RFC Request For Comment
MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions
POP3 Post Office Protocol version 3
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
DSN Delivery Status Notification
MDN Message Disposition Notification
TIFF Tagged Image File Format
IFD TIFF Image File Directory
Offramp Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/
gateway G4 facsimile terminals
Mailstore Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by
receiver
Notice Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a
manner to be determined by the device
RFC reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/

File Format for Internet Fax RFC2301
Tag Image File Format (TIFF) Image/TIFF MIME Sub-type RFC2302
Registration
Minimal PSTN address format in Internet Mail RFC2303
Minimal FAX address format in Internet Mail RFC2304
A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail RFC2305
Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for Facsimile RFC2306
Ver. 5.0 442 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.7.4. File Format for Internet Fax
Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also
compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax
devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding
methods.
S (MH)
B/W Color
C (JPEG)
J F
(JBIG) (MMR, MR)
L (JPEG) M (MRC)
MRC: Mixed Raster Content

A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods.
Class Color Coding Method Remarks

S B/W MH Internet Fax minimal set
F B/W MMR, MR Internet Fax full mode
J B/W JBIG Internet Fax mixed mode
C Color JPEG (lossy) Color minimal set
L Color JPEG (lossless, One bit per color, palletized color image, continuous
grayscale) tone color and grayscale images
M Color Mixed Raster Multiple coders and resolution within a page
Content
Ver. 5.0 443 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.7.5. Minimal Set
The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to
assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged.
The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white
facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations.
Baseline Fields Values

Bits Per Sample 1
Compression 3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4
Fill Order Least significant bit first
Image Width 1728 (A-4)
Image Length N: total number of scan lines in image
New Sub File Type 2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document
Page Number N, m: page number n followed by total page count m
Photometric Interpretation 0: pixel value 1 means black
Resolution Unit 2: inch
Rows Per Strip Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip
Samples Per Pixel 1
Strip Byte Counts Number of byte in TIFF strip
Strip Offsets Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip
X Resolution 204, 200 (pixels/inch)
Y Resolution 98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch)
Extensions Fields
T4 Options 0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned; 4: MH coding, EOLs
byte aligned
9.7.6. Addressing
A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an
extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to
PSTN-based services.
(1) Offramp FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com
Global-phone
Domain
Service selector
(2) Sub address FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org

Sub address Domain
Selector
Global-phone
Service selector
(3) Others VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com
Global-phone Domain
Service selector
Ver. 5.0 444 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Note:
For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words
“MUST”, “MUST NOT”, “REQUIRED”, “SHALL”, “SHALL NOT”, “SHOULD”, “SHOULD NOT”,
“RECOMMENDED”, “MAY”, and “OPTIONAL” in this document are to be interpreted as described in
RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119
1. MUST
This word, or the terms “REQUIRED” or “SHALL”, means that the definition is an absolute requirement
of the specification.
2. MUST NOT
This phrase, or the phrase “SHALL NOT”, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the
specification.
3. SHOULD
These words, or the adjective “RECOMMENDED”, means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and
carefully weighed before choosing a different course.
4. SHOULD NOT
This phrase, or the phrase “NOT RECOMMENDED” means that there may exist valid reasons in
particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full
implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior
described with this label.
9.7.7. Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data
Header
First IFD Offset
Value Offset IFD (Page 0) Next IFD Offset
Long Values Strip Offset
Image Data
(Page 0)
Value Offset IFD (Page 1) Next IFD Offset

Long Values Strip Offset
Image Data
(Page 1)
IFD (Page 2)
File Structure
Ver. 5.0 445 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Message Header Contents
9.7.8. Delivery Failure

In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the
format of a DSN.
9.7.9. Image File Format

The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for
creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with
the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306.
The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
Ver. 5.0 446 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.8. Communication Protocols
The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport,
document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security.
Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:
SMTP Command & Reply Procedure
your Panasonic Device SMTP Server

(ef1.labo.pcc.com) (sv2.labo.pcc.com)
TCP 3 Way
Handshake &
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
Opening Session
[5 minutes] 220 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service ready
HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com
250 ef1.labo.pcc.com
SMTP Command
MAIL FROM: <xxx@sv2.labo.pcc.com>
250 OK
[5 minutes]
RCPT TO: <yyy@sv2.labo.pcc.com>
[5 minutes] 250 OK
DATA
250 Start mail out; end with <CR/LF> . <CR/LF>

[2 minutes]
DATA BLOCK 1
DATA BLOCK
[3 minutes] DATA BLOCK 2
[3 minutes]
DATA BLOCK n
CR/LF . CR/LF
250 OK
[10 minutes]
QUIT
Closing
221 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing

transmission channel
Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP:
1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or
2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message.
A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily
reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code.
The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.
Ver. 5.0 447 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.8.1. Opening and Closing
At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts
are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the
transmission channel for opening and closing:
HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF>

QUIT:<CRLF>
In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as
saying, “Hello, I am <domain>”.
9.8.2. Mail (MAIL)

This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
mailboxes.
9.8.3. RECIPIENT (RCPT)

This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by
multiple uses of this command.
9.8.4. Data (DATA)

The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes
the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of
the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the
character sequence “<CRLF>.<CRLF>”. This is the end of mail data indication.
9.8.5. Send
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more
terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.
9.8.6. Reset (RSET)

This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients,
and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK
reply.
9.8.7. Verify (VRFY)

This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full
name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.
9.8.8. Quit (QUIT)

This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.
9.8.9. Reply Codes from SMTP Server

SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data
stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a
user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The
receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated
by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the
sender-SMTP in response to the commands.
Ver. 5.0 448 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.8.10. NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES
211 System status or system help reply

220 <domain> Service ready
221 <domain> Service closing transmission channel
250 Requested mail action okay# completed
251 User not local; will forward to <forward-path>
354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>
421 <domain> Service not available: closing transmission channel
[This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down]
450 Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox busy]
451 Requested action aborted: local error in processing
452 Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
500 Syntax error# command unrecognized
[This may include errors such as command line too long]
501 Syntax error in parameters or arguments
502 Command not implemented
503 Bad sequence of commands
504 Command parameter not implemented
550 Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable
[E.g.# mailbox not found# no access]
551 User not local; please try <forward-path>
552 Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation
553 Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed
[E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect]
554 Transaction failed
Ver. 5.0 449 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.9. POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)
9.9.1. Introduction
On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport
system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order
to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously
running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an
IP-style network for long amounts of time.
The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a
mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a
workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it.
For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939
9.9.2. Basic Operation
Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host
wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the
connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange
commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted.
Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more
arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable
ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords
are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long.
Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional
information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long,
including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("-
ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case.
Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after
sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF
pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet
(decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination
octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response.
Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line
response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than
CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately
follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing
".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response.
A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has
been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state.
In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the
server @acquires resources associated with the client’s mail drop, and the session enters the
TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the
client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server
releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP
connection is then closed.
A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by

responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the
session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method
for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server
which is unwilling or unable to process the command.
Ver. 5.0 450 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes’
duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto
logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should
close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.
9.9.3. POP3 Command Summary
Minimal POP3 Commands:
USER name valid in AUTHORIZATION state

PASS string
QUIT
STAT valid in the TRANSACTION state

LIST [msg]
RETR [msg]
DELE [msg]
NOOP
RSET
QUIT
Optional POP3 Commands:
APOP name digest valid in AUTHORIZATION state
TOP [msg] valid in the TRANSACTION state

UIDL [msg]
POP3 Replies:
+OK
-ERR
Note:
With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any
command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this
reply.
From: To:
Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log
Ver. 5.0 451 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure
your Panasonic Device POP 3 Server
(ef1.labo.pcc.com) (sv2.labo.pcc.com)
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)

TCP 3 way
handshake & +OK POP Server ready
Opening Session <1896.697170952@labo.pcc.com>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
STAT
+OK 2 126040
TRANSACTION
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
UPDATE
TCP 3 way Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110)

handshake & +OK POP Server ready
Opening Session <1898.697170952@labo.pcc.com>
USER s50055
+OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION PASS !xxxx
+OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets).
TOP 1 1
+OK 69762 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 1
+OK 69752 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 1
+OK Message 1 has been deleted.
TRANSACTION TOP 2 1
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
PETR 2
+OK 1 56288 octets
Text DATA
Text DATA
Text DATA :end with .(period)
DELE 2
+OK Message 2 has been deleted.
QUIT
+OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
UPDATE Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
Ver. 5.0 452 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC
Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of
eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as
an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble.
One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC.
Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network
PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail.
Command Sample Purpose

Ping Ping 192.168.1.30 Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.1.30)
Ipconfig /all Ipconfig /all Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS
server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address,
WINS etc)
For Windows 95/98/Me, please type “winipcfg” instead of
Ipconfig/all
Tracert Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target
destination
(192.168.2.245)
Netstat Netstat Netstat -nr Active connection list
Active route for your subnet.
All special assigned IP addresses are also shown
Net view Net view Checking for the current file sharing Host Name
Nslookup Nslookup Checking for the DNS server IP address.
This command is available for Windows NT only.
Note:
Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.
Ver. 5.0 453 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)
START
Is the LAN connected Yes

to an ISP
No No Is this a Dialup
connection ?
No Is static IP address Yes
available ?
Not supported
Yes
DHCP Client? Is there a MX and A Record
Is G3 Gateway entry for your Panasonic
Yes Device in the DNS table ? No
function being used ?
Yes
No Yes Not supported
Is POP account Is POP account
Yes available ? available ?
No No
Is there a MX and A Record
entry for your Panasonic No Yes
Device in the DNS table ?
Not supported
Yes
Set network parameters Set network parameters Set network parameters for
for POP receiving for SMTP receiving POP receiving and set G3
Gateway parameters for
your Panasonic Device
If not ready If not ready If not ready
Ask the Network Check the host name by Ask the Network
Administrator to setup using the DOS Administrator to setup a
a new POP account. command-line "ping" new POP account.
and "nslookup". Check the host name by
using the DOS
command-line "ping"
and "nslookup".
Important Notice:
The customer who supposed to operate G3 Gateway function for Panasonic models,
the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware
how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may
ask Security Policy Manager to allow relay message by changing
configuration of Massage Transfer Agent like Sendmail. Otherwise the system will
deny any relay operation.
Ver. 5.0 454 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature
DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts.
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself
dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP
address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and
executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the
addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a
host using BOOTP.
DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters
from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts.
DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation.

In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client.
In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the
client explicitly relinquishes the address).
In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used
simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these
mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator.
"DHCP client"
A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network
address.
"DHCP server"
A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients.
Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use.
Message Use
DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers.
DHCPOFFER Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration
parameters.
DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server
and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of
previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease
on a particular network address.
DHCPACK Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network
address.
DHCPNAK Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client
has moved to new subnet) or client's lease as expired
DHCPDECLINE Client to server indicating network address and in use.
DHCPRELEASE Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease.
DHCPINFORM Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has
externally configured network address.
Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use
Ver. 5.0 455 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when allocating a new network address.
Server Client Server
(not selected) (selected)
Begins initialization
Determines DHCPDISCOVER DHCPDISCOVER Determines

configuration configuration
DHCPOFFER DHCPOFFER
Collects replies
Selects configuration
DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST Commits configuration
DHCPACK
Initialization complete
Graceful shutdown
DHCPRELEASE Discards lease
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers

when allocating a new network address
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers
when reusing a previously allocated network address.
Server Client Server
Begins initialization
Locates DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST Locates

configuration configuration
DHCPACK DHCPACK
Initialization complete
Subsequent
DHCPACKS ignored
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when
reusing a previously allocated network address
Ver. 5.0 456 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must
be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message.
Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.
INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZE/
REBOOT DHCPNAK/
DHCPACK -/Send DHCPDISCOVER
(not accepted)/
Restart
Send DHCPDECLINE
DHCPNAK, Lease expired/
-/Send DHCPREQUES Halt network
DHCPNAK/
Discard offer SELECTING
DHCPOFFER/
REBOOTING Collect replies
Select offer/
send DHCPREQUEST
REQUESTING REBINDING DHCPNAK/

Halt network
DHCPOFFER/
Discard
DHCPACK/
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set
DHCPACK/ Record lease, set /timers T1,T2
Record lease, set /timers T1,T2
timers T1, T2
T2 expires/
Broadcast
DHCPREQUEST
BOUND
T1 expires/ DHCPACK/
Send DHCPREQUEST Record lease, set
to leasing server timers T1, T2
T1 expires/
Send RENEWING
DHCPREQUEST
to leasing server
The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its
network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server
that originally issued the client's network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and
attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which
the client's lease will expire.
To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.
State-transition diagram for DHCP clients
More detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from following URL.
http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.
Ver. 5.0 457 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature
The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet
Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents
(MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality
such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined.
(1) Delivery confirmation (required)

(2) Additional document features (optional)
In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be
separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery
agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two
different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively.
Your Panasonic device supports MDN.
Delivery Status Notification (DSN)

A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed
delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support
DSNs. Panasonic Iternet FAX does not request DSN while sending.
fail
SMTP Server SMTP Server
DSN
DSN returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurred.
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN)

A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after
successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without
display) of the message, or the recipient's refusal to provide MDNs.
SMTP Server SMTP Server

MDN
Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed properly.
The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to
keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message
transmissions.
Ver. 5.0 458 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from Options menu of Outlook Express.
MDN request
MDN notify
Additional Document Capabilities

Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum
subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values
supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles
defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF
profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.
MDN Response
Read Receipt
Capabilities
(1) MDN Request
Internet FAX (3) SMTP Server SMTP Server (2) Internet FAX
Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging Process
(1) Request
If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message
Disposition Notification when sending the message itself.
Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address using the following formula.
Ver. 5.0 459 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
MDN Request Sample
Mime-Version: 1.0
X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500
Message-Id: <200202060018.12345@core.mega.edu>
From: "Panasonic Internet FAX" <fax@core.mega.edu>
Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: fax@huge.com
Disposition-Notification-To: <fax@core.mega.edu>
Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
(2) Recipient's MDN Response

Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the
Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response
after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as
convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with
address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.
MDN Response Sample
Mime-Version: 1.0
MESSAGE X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic
HEADER Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500
Message-Id: <20020206154203470001.BE948.fax@huge.com>
From: <fax@huge.com>
Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX
To: fax@core.mega.edu
In-Reply-To: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
References: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"
********** Read Receipt **********

BODY
TEXT
This message was opened by
'fax@huge.com'
dd Mmm yyyy 15:42
******************************************
ATTACHED Final-Recipient: rfc822;fax@huge.com

FILE Original-Message-ID: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com>
Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched
Media-Accept-Features:
(& (type="image/tiff")
(color=Binary)
(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
(MRC-mode=0)
(ua-media=stationery)
(paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal])
(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
(| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
(& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) )
(& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )
Ver. 5.0 460 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3) Processing Confirmation
The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected
several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue.
To see more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.
Ver. 5.0 461 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature
The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring
the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP).
This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide
read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is
intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP.
X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall
namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global
directory structure.
It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that “http” & “html” are used to define & implement
the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they
can use a web browser to peruse the global Web.
From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at
directory services.
9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP)

- Extended Feature
The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called
APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires
that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. Challenge-
Response Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while
retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5.
Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific
password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a
sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to
check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the
risk of password capture is greatly enhanced.
An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay
protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP
command provides this functionality.
A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For
example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3
server, the syntax of the timestamp might be:
<process-ID.clock@hostname>
where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process's PID, clock is the decimal value of the system
clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is
running.
Ver. 5.0 462 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Client Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110)
Challenge Response
<1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp> +OK POP3 server ready <1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>
Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD

<1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>PASSWD APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb
Possible Responses:
+OK
+OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets) -ERR permission denied
Produces a 16 octet digest value of
c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb STAT
+OK 1
Continue to follow the POP3 procedure
APOP overview
The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name''
parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter
is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including angle-
brackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and
server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the
secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter
itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters.
When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct,
the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state.
Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state.
Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.
Ver. 5.0 463 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth)
- Extended Feature
SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the
Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service
extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server,
perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent
protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To
use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for
optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.
Client Server
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25)
220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready
EHLO jgm.example.com
250-smtp.example.com
250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5
AUTH CRAM-MD5
334
PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA
ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
235 Authentication successful
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure
SMTP AUTH overview
The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the
requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and
identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the
requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504
reply.
Challenge Response
334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
Produces a Challenge BASE64 decoded string
<CByLEDBhSCgnhMZ+N23F6w@elwood.innosoft>
Genrates Digest parameter

Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message
USER Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of:
Fred 9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e
BASE64 encoded string
ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are
specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a
334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line
Ver. 5.0 464 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a
line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a
501 reply.
If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the
server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more
specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully
complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply.
The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp".
Error Codes
The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described.
432: A password transition is needed
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected
Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication
mechanism.
538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only
be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted.
454: Temporary authentication failure
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server
failure.
530: Authentication required
This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or
QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.
Ver. 5.0 465 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT - Extended Feature
Direct Internet Fax XMT uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) to transfer mail reliably and efficiently.
An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as
SMTP mail relay by employing SMTP server.
Direct Internet Fax XMT allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly without using an
SMTP Server. For this feature to work reliably, configure the IP Address to remain unchanged (static), ask
the Network Administrator to reserve the IP Address. The Subnet Mask and Gateway must be configured
as well. The Domain Name of the machine and other record information must be properly registered on the
DNS Server.
For the Direct Internet Fax XMT to function properly, the DHCP Parameter No. 22 setting must be disabled
in the General Settings (For Key Operator).
Furthermore, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the
corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely unwilling to open the firewall for
other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats.
This makes Direct Internet Fax XMT attractive because it can operate throughout the organization's
Intranet.
Several new service extensions were assigned.

(1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG"
(2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command
Sender Recipient
Establish TCP connection
TCP Port No. 25
220
EHLO
Checks for Capability
250 Response of CONNEG Capability contents sample
250-<june@panasonic.com> recipient ok
MAIL FROM:<pcc@panasonic.com> 250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal)
250- (MRC-mode=0)
250 250- (color=Binary)
250- (|(&(dpi=204)
250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) )
RCPT TO:<june@panasonic.com> CONNEG 250- (&(dpi=200)
Request for Capability 250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) )
250 Capacity Exchange 250- (&(dpi=400)
250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) )
250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR])
Continue to follow the SMTP procedure 250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG)
250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85)
250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) )
250- (size-x<=2150/254)
250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) )
Direct Internet Fax XMT Overview 250 (ua-media=stationery) )
Ver. 5.0 466 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
10 Schematic Diagram
10.1. General Circuit Diagram
*1 : Factory use only *4: For DP-4510/4520/6010/6020
*2 : Depending on the spec. of each destination *5: For DP-3510/3520 only
*3 : Japan spec. only *6: Not Used
CNADF 1
GND GND
7 1 2
ORSIZ1 AMMCLK AMMCLK
SPC
1 1 8 2 3 1
ORSIZ2
CN728 (TEST) *1 APMCLK APMCLK PMA
CN650
ORIGINAL 2 2 9 3 4 2 11
8P ARVCL1 ARVCL1 24VO1
SIZE 3 ORSIZ3 3 CN706 CN701 10 4 5 3 9
SENSOR 1 +5V ARVCL2 ARVCL2 PMAB PAPER
CN729 (TEST) *1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
4 4 11 5 6 4 7
PM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 GND 5 7P 12
ARRCNT
6
ARRCNT
5
PMB FEED
D11 PAPER FEED PAPER FEED 7 5
CN661
+24VM ARRSN2 24VO1
ORSIZ4 +24VM ARRSN2 MOTOR
CN705
ORIGINAL
1 6
PAPER FEED L 1 1 1 SOLENOID CLUTCH L 1 1 1 13 7 8 6 3
+5V CT 2 LPFCL C PFCL1 ADXSN ADXSN PMBB
SIZE 2 7 CLUTCH C 2 2 2 2 2 14 8 9 7 1
CN704
GND +24VM +24VM +24VM ADFRRSN1 ADFRRSN1 MMA
SENSOR 2 3 8 PAPER FEED 1 3 3 1 1 ADU 1 3 3 15 9 10 8 11
DFDOUT
RVEXSN
L
PFOSN1
L L
P12CNT
ORSIZ5 ARST ARST
MMCLK
DXCL2 CT C D3 24VO1
DMCLK
S D3 2 PUSOL1
DFENB
SVCNT
PVCNT
S
DFRST
LMCLK
RVCLK
SOLENOID 4 LPUSOL CLUTCH
DFCLK
LPCNT
DFLTH
DFDIN
1 9 2 10 11 ADF
PGND
PGND
4 2 2 4 4 16 9 9
DFLD
24VM
24VM
ORIGINAL
+24V
CN714
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V +5V +24VM 1 +5V ADFSN MMAB
+5V
+5V
SIZE 2 10 17 10
PAPER 1 5 5 3
L INTERMEDIATE PAPER 5 5 17 12 7 MAIN
SENSOR 3 3 GND
11 PATH 2 6
+5V
6 4
PCCL
2
CT C CLUTCH PATH
1
2 +5V 6 6 1
AFDOUT 11
AFDOUT
1 11
MMB
5 MM MOTOR
CN651
CT 24VO1
+5V SENSOR 3 7 LCRRSN
+24VM
SENSOR 3 CT CRRSN1 AFENB AFENB
12
SCANNER
HOME
1
HPSN
12
LLBSN
7 5
HFCL
1
CT C L SHEET 7
LBSN1
7 2
AFLTH
12
AFLTH
2
MMBB
3
2 13 UPPER 1 8 8 6 2 BYPASS 1 8 8 3 13 3 13 1
POSITON CT GND GND CLUTCH UPPER GND AFCLK AFCLK
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14 LIMIT 9 9 2 9 4 14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SENSOR 3 2 LIMIT 9 4 14
SENSOR CT GNG 3 CT GND AFLD AFLD
CN766 CN752 3 10 10 D3 ZH SENSOR 10 10 5 15 5
CN710
+5V +5V +24VM +5V AFDIN AFDIN 24VO1
1 1 1 1 11 11 1 1 1 1 11 11 6 16 6 1 SLOW
*4 1 1 2 L
CN712
SHEET
2 2
HSSN3
2 2 1
24VO1 PAPER LPESN PTL
2 2
PTL *4 PAPER 2
PESN1 +5V GND
18 1
SDCLCNT
2
CT C DOWN CLUTCH
BYPASS 2 12 12 2 11 12 12 18 5
CNMM1
SENSOR SENSOR
CN760
CT GND 24VM 24VO1 CT GND +24VM ADU CT GND 13 24VO1 24VO1
SENSOR 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 2 3 13 13 3 2 1 3 13 19 2 3 1
CN659
+5V PGND PGND 14 +5V DXCL1 CT C L CLUTCH 14 24VO1 INVERTING
to ADF
5 4 2 3 14 12 2 20 3 L
CN717
1 2 1 4 1 14 1 C
to DRV
SHEET HSSN2 PGND PAPER LPEWSN1 +24VM REGIST- PAPER PEWSSN1 PGND SB1CLCNT CT CLUTCH 1
BYPASS 2 7 5 4 2 15 5 3 1 2 15 P18FX 21 4 6 2
CN753
CN662
CT +5V SENSOR 1 CT GND CT C L RATION SENSOR 1
3 CT
GND RRCL GND GND PGND 24VO1
SENSOR 2 3 9 6 5 3 16 6 13 2 CLUTCH 16 1 5 4
CN721
1 1 22 1
+5V +5V +5V +5V +5V CDSN2 DENSITY +5V INVERTING
1 6 7 D3 6 1 17 7 4 1 17 2 2 2 23 6 8 C L
SHEET HSSN1 24VM
*5 CLMM1
CORONA WIRE 7
5VP PAPER LPEWSN2 +5V
2 ADU PAPER 1
PEWSSN2 VCDS SENSOR +5V 7 SB2CLCNT CT CLUTCH 2
BYPASS 8 8 1 2 18 24 7 2
CN716
2 10 2 3
SENSOR 1 3
CT GND
10 9
MAIN
9
24VM
1
2
1
2
CLMM2
2
M CLEANER MOTOR 8
ORGSN SENSOR 2
3
CT GND
19
8
9
14
5
ADUINSN CT
3
SENSOR SENSOR 2
3 CT GND
18
19
3
4
CDSN1
4
3
4 25 +5VP
8 STAMP
4
DRIVE 8 PGND GND
1 9
GND +5V
20 10
ADURRSN +5V
20 26
ORGSN
9 1
24VO1 (Included w/ G3 Fax
CN762
10 3 3 3 CLEANER 1 15 1 ADU 1 1
MOTOR PGND GND CT PAPER LPEWSN3 GND PAPER PEWSSN3 GOPSW1 GND STSLCNT S L Option)
CN658
7 4 4 2 2 POSITON 10 SENSOR 3 2 21 11 6
GND
2 REGISTRATION SENSOR 3 2 21 1 1 27 10 2 2
CHPSN1 SENSOR 1 CT GND CT SENSOR CT GND +24VM GND GND
6
GND
5 5 3 1 CN754 3 22 12 16 3 3 22 2 2 2 G5 28 G6 11 3 3
CN720
+5V CHPSN2 +5V TDREF TONER EXSN EXIT
CN61
4
3
2
1
6 4 23 13 7 3 3 1 12 4 2
LAN I/F
5 6 3 CLEANER 1ST PAPER TRAY SENSORS 1 ADU 2ND PAPER TRAY

MM 4
MMPS
7 7
+5V
5 2 POSITON 24 14 17
+5V
2 INTERMEDIATE SENSORS 4
TDSNIN
4 3
DENSITY
SENSOR
13 5
+5V CT
1
SENSOR
CNMM2
24VO2
24VO2
CT CT 3 GND
PGND
PGND
MMCLK +5V 1 SENSOR 2 ADUCRRSN SENSOR GND ADF SIZE SENSORS
3 8 8 6 15 8 1 1 5 5 4 1
CN713
+24VM RRSN 3 GND GND 24VO1
2
MMFR
9 D11 1 16 18 1 SIZE 2
PFSIZSN1
2 6 6 3 2 1 1 PINCH
2 L
8P
1
MMLD
10 (DP-6010/6020 Only) M LLUM
2 17 9
GND
2 REGISTRATION SENSOR 1
1
CT
3
+5V
3
SIZE
2
SIZE1SN
3 2
PPSOLCNT
2 S SOLENOID
SENSOR CT
CN660
GND CT 3 SENSOR1 +5V
CN709
GND
CN761
28 1ST TRAY LIFT UP MOTOR 18 19 4 4 1 4 3
3
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY

GND SIZE PFSIZSN2 +24VM GND
1 2 11 10 2 5 5 1 1 3 5 4
+5V RVMA ADU SENSORS SENSOR 2 CT +5V PGND SIZE SIZE2SN DXSLCNT1 D3
2 4 1 1 20 1 6 6 2 2 2 6 5 1
24VM 24VM CT INVERTING
PR CON
+5V HVCNT SENSOR2 +5V 24VO1 L

7 GND 3 3 1 2
CN652
3 6 10 2 2 28P 6
CNDM1
12 7 7
OPC RVMAB 3 HVLKC DXSLCNT2 S SOLENOID
24VM
INVERTING GND
HVPS
GND CN707 SIZE
CN211
8 PFSIZSN3
4 8 9 13 3 3
RM CN727 (IPC) 8 4 4 3 8 7 3
CN724
nSELIN DRUM RVMB 2 SIZE
PGND BMBB SENSOR 3 CT +5V GREFCNT SIZE3SN
5
nAUTFD
10
MOTOR
8
PGND
14 4
24VM
4 MOTOR 1
+24VM
6 1 9 9 5
HVBACCLK
5
SENSOR3
2
CT +5V
9
24VO1
6 7 15 5 5 CN708 2 5 10 6 6 1 10 1 1 REGISTRATION
nERROR 12
CNHV
BM L
CN656
GND RVMBB 6 CT BMB HVBDCCNT GND RR2CLCNT CT C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6 6 3 D11 7 7 2 CLUTCH 2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7 4 11
10
9
14 16 3 2
CN711
pSELECT +5V RVSSOL1 BMAB +24VM HVBACCNT SIZE SIZE4SN 24VO1
4 8 8 REGISTRATION
OQMCLK
LCCFDIN
5 7
GND
12
OQFENB
8
OQFDOUT
16 1 3 3 1
+5V
17 1 L
OQFCLK
2
OQFLTH
OQFDIN
DM DMPS TONER 2ND
M SENSOR4 CT
OQFLD
nINIT 24VM L INVERTING +24VM LUM1 HVLKB +5V RR1CLCNT CT C
CN719
9 18 4 18 8 2 S 5 2 TRAY 2 9 9 1 13 4 2 CLUTCH 1
BOTTLE
nSTRX
pSTRX
SOLENOID
nSTTX
pSTTX
IPRXD
IPTXD
pERROR DMCLK RVSSOL2 BMA LIFT UP HVTCNT
10 GND
GND
GND
10 20 3 19 9 3 6 1 MOTOR 10 10 14
Centronics I/F
1
GND DMBRAKE
10
PCSSOL1 G2 7
TED MOTOR
11
HVLKT
11
PAPER 24VO1
11 22 2
DMLD
20
24VM
1
L PAPER TRAY VTED
2 TONER HVDACCNT FEED L CT
1 1
C
CN58
pBUSY TENPSN PFCLCNT
CN655
8
9
11
12
2
3
4
7
12 1 11 2 8 3 DETECT 4 12 12 2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
24 21 SOLENOID 2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
S 4
TEMP !
CN722
nACK PCSSOL2 GND D3 1 GND HVDDCCNT CLUTCH
SENSOR
CN657
9 13
CN763
13 26 22 12 3 CNB CNA HUMIDITY
3 3 13 3 1
1
GND
1 13
GND
3 FINISHER 10
+5V
1 TONER 2
HUMSN
2 14
HVLKD
14 3
GND
4 2
GND GND PAPER BPSN SENSOR +5V DOOR OPSN
SYSTEM CONSOLE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR BOTTLE
PRINTER
2 3 14 2 EXIT 11 2 1 1 15 2 5 3
PFOSN2 CT CT POSITION SENSOR 1 CT
PD8 SENSOR 2 GND +5V
15 1 (Option) 12
3
PD7
5
RVEXSN (Option) 3 SENSOR 6
6
16 CT
5
36 4 7 D11
1
3 INVERTING
PD6 +5V GND +5V GND
9 17 2 1 1 ADF SENSORS
CT 1 EXIT
5 SHEET 3 5 5 1 1 1 3
CN211
TIMING
STRVP
IICSDA CT HPESN GND REGISTRATION
SW1 RR1SN
CN210
PD5 +5V +5V
PGND
SENSOR
CN718
6 11 1 1 18 BYPASS 2 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2
CN653
3
Dehumidifier
7
PD4
PD3
13 2
IICSCL
GND
2 19
GND
GND
3
INVERTING SW4 Heater ! CNSW1 G1
G4
GND
G3 SENSOR 1
HFSOL
+5V
3 3 3
TMGSN
4 QDOSN
3
CT 3 SENSOR INVERTING
SENSOR
2
CT
DXSN
+5V
3 3
+5V
GND
1 SENSOR 1
CN703
3 3 20 2 4 1
L +24VM 2 2
CN54
8 15 2 2 1 DOOR 4 4 3
CN654
CT SENSOR (Option) (Option) ORIGINAL
2A
PD2 GND RVSN S GND
2B
1A
ORGSN
1B
9 17 4 4 21 1 1 1 1 5 GND 5 2 OPEN 3 5 5 2
PD1 GND CT SENSOR REGISTRATION RR2SN 5VP SENSOR
22 RVJAMSN GND
CN715
5 5 3 1
CNN
10 19 INVERTING SHEET BYPASS 6 6 2 6 6
1
2
1
2
3
CNL
GND GND CNDCC 23 +5V
+5V SENSOR 2 CT +5V
11 21 6 6 2 JAM SOLENOID 7 1 1 1 7 CT
nSTROB SPCRXD +5V CT SENSOR +5V D3 INTERMEDIATE GND
12 23 7 7 24 1 8 2 2 8 PNL GND
SWN1
SWN2
3
SWL1
SWL2
ADF
REGISTRATION
ACND
CT 3 G6 G5
ACN
ACLD
GND SPCTXD PCRSN SENSOR RR3SN
ACL
+5VD
GND
13 25 8 8 9 3 2 9
2
1
GND
CNLVC SENSOR 3 CT +5V
14 27 CN65 10 SPPSN 1 1 SYSTEM 1 10
ACL D3
1 1 1 11 GND 2 CONSOLE 1 1
CN64
2 11
CN102
1
2
1
2
1
2
DRV
CN251
CN290
PRDY GND CT 3 SENSOR
MANUFACTURE'S SPECIFIED PARTS BE USED FOR
1 1 2
THE CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN THE PARTS WITH
CN132 CN101 CN108 LOW VOLTAGE 12 3 2

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SEPARATION 2
VRDY ACN
LVS2
THE PARTS WITH ! MARK ON THIS SCHEMATIC
2 2 SOLENOID 2 3 3
PACK CN142 24VM
2 3 POWER SUPPLY 2 GND
SW3
WHEN SERVICING IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ONLY
3 3 1 1 4 4
L
RLB ACNRLB (Option, except N.A.)
CN171
ATT SEPSOL S ACL +5VL
CN104
CN134
CN133
4 4 2 1 1
2 1 1 3 1
(Option) POWSW
DIAGRAM INCORPORATE SPECIAL FEATURES
DUACK GND
PH
24VM +3.3V
5 5 3 1 2 2 2 2 1 1
L MAGNETIC
LSU
BD_A CT 2 MAGCL ACLRLB ACN GND
ACD ! GND
CN551
6 6 C ROLLER 2 2 1 3 CN66 3 3 2 2
CNDCC
4 +24V 4
(Option)
NFL
CN57
CN141
BD_B HSYNC pLD1

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
CLUTCH
CN552
1
2
1
7 7 3 5 CT CT 12 4 4 3 3 1
CN222
CNTH
PNL2
8
VREQ
8 GND
6
TRBLSW1
CN172 CN173 11 5
SH_A
5 4
nLD1
4 1 1
CN231 *6 2 2
1 1 1
GND
+5V
SACK GND CNGSW AC DRIVER 2 THI2 SH_B pLD2
CN726
THI 3
2
9 9 2 2 6 5 5 2 2
1
2
3
CN53
CN702
2 7 10 6
PVSYNC 1 THI1 LAZERA nLD2
10 10 5 TONER WASTE COLLECT COIL CN105 1 7 7 6 6 4 4
CN764
8
OHTL
9
OHTN
1
OHTL
OHTN
THERMISTOR
INLET
DUPRNT GND ACSW LAZERB
11 11 CN143 8 8 5
2
5
3
9 8
1
2
SENTIM
CN723
CN131
CN227 *3
12 12 +24V 9 LAZREF 9 6
15
10
N E L 7 6
5
13
8
10
4
3
2
1
HEATL
FULP3
FULP1
+5V LAZENB
! MARK OF THE SCHEMATIC.
SREQ TFSN
CN550
CN106
13 13
! 6 10 10 7
GND
7
GND
12V
+5V
CNHT6
11 3 TONER 4 1
PRST SSA1
14 14 2 WASTE 5 5 8 8
5
4
2
3
1
12 N E L 2
CNHT2
PRGDWN +5V CT SSA2 +24VM
CNHT1
SENSOR
CNHTC
15 15 1 4 3 9 9
2
1
2
1
13 6
4
3
2
1
1
GND GND SSA3
CN725
PGND
IMPORTANT FOR SAFETY
3
16 16 CNHD1 14 TONER 7 3 2 10 10
HDD 3 1
CN230
For LCT or APF
TFBOXSN WASTE ZCIN
CN250
BLACK
WHITE
11 11
HDD (Option) 15
16
+5V
2
CT 1 CONTAINER
SENSOR
E
8
9
GND
2
1
3
4
PMLOCK
3
2
12 12
CN228 *1
T3 PMCNT
10 5 4 13 13
2
1
CNHT3
GND PMCLK
CNSHD1 T1 T2 T5
ACL CN5 1 1 6 5 14 14
GND
CN141
15
2
1
2
1
CN103
1 1 2 2 15
CN1
CN3
CNOM
Thermo 1
+24V
F 2 2 3 3 PHN 16 16
HDD 40P
! 3
ACN
3
LVS1 4
5
+24V
+3.3V
4
5
1
2
24V
1
2 1
17
18
17
18
CNHT5
DC
nLPOW1
CNHT4
F Lamp3
LOW VOLTAGE
F Lamp1
CN60 CN59 3 3 2 19 19
! +5VD +24V
2
1
2
1
PCI 62 *2 POWER SUPPLY 1 CN2 CN4 4 4 3 1 1 20 20
PNL1
+5VP +5VP
Thermo 2
5 5 4 2 2 21 21
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
nLPOW2 +5V
CN143
6 6 5 3 3 22 22
! +5V
+5VP
CN51
+5VP
+5VP
+5VP
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CN145 7 7 6 4 4 23 23
1
2
3
4
GND GND
1 DRHT 8 8 24
1
2
3
4
7 5 5 24
GND
PGND
PGND
PNLRD
+24V
2 9 9 8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F1b
6 6
F1a
CSS I/F *1
CN66 *1
GND
CNDCC
PNLSD
CN220
3 10 10 9
CN142 7 7
CN52
GND nPNLRST
SW2
4 1 11 11 10 8 8
1
2
3
4
CN755 *3
5 2 LPHT2 LPHT1 CN144 12

GND
12 11 9
nLPOW2
9
Drawing Name
General Circuit
+3.3V nSLPKYE
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3 13 13 12 10 10 1 1
+3.3V nLPOW1
7
Power Cord
F2b
+5VP
4 14 14 13 11 11
F2a
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VD
+24V
2 2
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
nFCBRST
8 CN80
24VD
15
+24V
5 15 12 12 3 3
Diagram
PNLSCLK
1
2
79
80
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6 CNSCC 13 13 4 4
PNLLDO 14
1 14 5 5
nPCIRING
PNL3
79
80
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
15 15
1
2
1
2
3
4
CN142 6 6
CN280
CN229
CN390 CN750 CN751 CN141 7 7
CN221
8 8
CN767
FXB ! CN756 D11 CN758 CN768 CN759
8
7 CN765 CN757
2
1
nADFSES
GND
1
2
9
10
9
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
18
GND 14
GND 13
12
11
10
9
12
11
10
9
16
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
11 11
CN392 CN391 CN393
24VM
24VM
WEBSOL
PFOSN1
PGND
24VM
+5V
+5V
EXFL3
EXFM2
PGND
GND
GND
EXDOSN2
ELPCNT
+5V
EXFL2
EXFM3
GND
DOSN
CT
PWFL
12 12
24VS
DDFM
PGND
PGND
LMBB
LMAB
SCFL
DDFL
PGND
24VS
PGND
OZFL2
OZFM2
LMB
LMA
PASN
PCSN
LPCNT
PWFM
SCFM
+5V
PGND
+5V
24VS
PGND
EXFM1
KCTCNT
EXFL1
13 13
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
CNKCT24VM
2
GND
KCS
KCT
CN226 *1
+5V
14 14
CCD
nCTON
nHKOF
3
pCNLD
AGND
3
2
1
15 15
+5Vp
+24V
GND
4
2
1
11
L2
L1
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
7
5
3
1
1
2
3
! 5
CT
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
6
CT
2
1
2
1
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
ADF ADF CN851 7
M
INVERTER
EXP LAMP CN850

DP-3510/3520/3530
4510/4520/4530
6010/6020/6030
CN22 CN25 OPEN ANGLE

1
2
3
1
2
3
T 8
ELP
S
SENSOR SENSOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
4
Key
pSPKOT
DOOR PAPER PAPER

3 3
FM FM FM FM SENSOR EXIT EXIT
FM FM FM
GND
Counter
nSLSYNCB
L C
2 1 DOOR SENSOR
3
2
1
SCAN
MJR
nGACLK
pGACLK
nRESET
BLKCLP
pTXCLK
nTXCLK
SENSOR (Option)
!
pMCLK
nMCLK
pSCLK
nSCLK
nSEN1
nSEN2
1
CNSPC
CLPIN
2
AGND
AGND
AGND
FAN3 FAN2 FAN1
nSHD
pSHD
+3.3V
+3.3V
MOTOR WEB TOTAL
Model
PS SUCTION DUST OZONE
pTX2
nTX2
pTX1
nTX1
pTX0
nTX0
+12V
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
ITG
SDI
OE
1
2
FAN FAN FAN FAN SOLENOID COUNTER CN223

G5 CN224 CN225
CN21
CN20
CN22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
14
15
16
17
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
HARDWARE
D11-8
D11-8
D11-8
CN56 CN55
+24V
GND
CN63 *3
Vcnt
SLOT 1
SLOT 2
F
FROM
CARD
SORT
KEY I/F
X2
Y1
X1
Y2
!
MEM
FRM
FRM
CN62
CN64
CN65
CN69
CN68
CN67
1
2
3
SC
SPKR
1 CN1
LINE
TEL
Touch
CN2
G3 FAX LCD X 2
3 Panel
(Option) *2
INV
Ver. 5.0 467 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
memo
Ver. 5.0 468 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11 Finisher Options
11.1. DA-FS600, DA-FS605, DA-SP31
11.1.1. Introduction
11.1.1.1. Features
1. Large Tray Capacity.
Normally, the Finisher holds a stack of sheets 5.78" (147 mm) in height in its two bins (small-size
paper: equivalent to 1000 sheets) / 2.91" (74 mm) in height (large-size paper: equivalent to 500 sheets)
2. Handles Wide Variety of Paper Thickness.

The Finisher is capable of handling papers between 17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2).
3. Job Offset Function.

The Finisher has a job offset function for sorting non-stapled stacks of copies.
4. Four Types of Auto Stapling.

The Finisher offers a choice of four stapling modes (1-point stapling at rear, diagonal stapling in front,
diagonal stapling at rear, and 2-point stapling).
5. Buffer Roller.
The use of a buffer roller enables the finisher to accept copies without interruption from the Copier
even during stapling or offset operation.
6. Saddle Stitch Function.

The Finisher can staple along the center of paper and fold it in two (up to 15 sheets).
7. Punch Function (Option).

The Punch Unit enables the Finisher to punch the binder sheets before they are ejected. (The Punch
Unit is capable of handling plain papers between 17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2). The Punch Unit cannot
handle special papers, postcards, transparencies, etc.)
Ver. 5.0 469 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.1.2. DA-600, DA-FS605 and DA-SP31 Specifications
1. Finisher Unit
Item Description
Stacking Method Trays 1 and 2: by lifting tray
Stacking Face-down
Orientation Face-up
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R
Stacking Size
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R, FLS
Paper Weight 17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2)
Bins Trays 1 and 2
Modes Non-Sort : Trays 1 and 2
Sort : Trays 1 and 2
Staple : Trays 1 and 2
Stacking Non staple sort Small-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 57.8 in (147 mm) high (1000 sheets)*2
Capacity
Large-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 2.91 in (74 mm) high (500 sheets)
Staple sort Small-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 4.33 in (110 mm) high/30 sets
(750 sheets)*2
Large-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 2.91 in (74 mm) high/30 sets
(500 sheets)
Size Mixing Size mixing : 1.73 in (44 mm) or less (300 sheets)*4
Stapling : 0.86 in (22 mm) or less (150 sheets/30 sets)*4
Stacking Mixing Face-down / Face-up
Notes:
*1: Sizes are approximate when using blank 21 lb (80 g/m2) paper.
*2: Misalignment may occur if more than 750 of small-size sheets are stacked.
*3: The accuracy of the stack height is ± 7 mm.
*4: Matching is not guaranteed.
Item Description
Stapling By rotating cam
Stapling PositionSee Fig. 1-001.
Stapling Small-size 50 sheets Equivalent of 21 lb (80 g/m2) paper Including two
Capacity Large-size 30 sheets sheets of thick stock (covers).
Staple Supply Special staple cartridge (5000 staples)
Replacement FQ-SS66 : For DA-FS605 (Saddle Stitch)
Staples FQ-SS50 : For DA-FS600 / 605
Staple Detection Provided
Manual Stapling Not available
Stapling Size 1-point diagonal Front A3, B4, A4, A4-R, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R
stapling Rear A3, B4, A4, LDR, LTR, B5
1-point Rear A4-R, LTR-R, LGL
2-point A3, B4, A4, LDR, LTR, B5
Paper Detection Provided
Control Panel Not available
Display Not available
Ver. 5.0 470 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Item Description
Dimensions 669 (744.5) x 661 x 1050 mm (W (with Punch Unit attached) x D x H; including saddle
stitch unit)
Weight 2 Bin Finisher : 76 lb / 34.5 kg
2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher : 115.7 lb / 52.5 kg
Punch Unit (option) : 11.7 lb / 5.3 kg
Power Supply Supplied by the copier machine (24 VDC)
Maximum Power 170 W or less
Consumption
Reference:
The term “small-size” stands for A4, A5-R, B5, LTR, INV-R, while the term “large-size” stands for A3,
B4, A4-R, LTR-R, LDR, LGL, FLS, B5-R.
Stapling Position (Finisher Unit)

1- Point Stapling (Rear) 1- Point Diagonal Stapling; Front) 1- Point Diagonal Stapling; Rear)
30 30
4.4±2 mm
4.4±2 mm
5±2 mm
Specified Paper 4.4±2 mm Specified Paper

width -6±2 mm width -6 ± 2 mm
2- Point Stapling
A3 and A4 B4 and B5 LDR and LTR

5±2mm
5±2mm
5±2mm
82.7±4 mm 62.7±4 mm 73.7±4 mm
202.7±4 mm 182.7±4 mm 193.7±4 mm
Fig. 1-001
Ver. 5.0 471 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Saddle Stitch Unit
Item Description
Stacking Method Center binding (double folding)
Folding Position See Fig. 1-002
Paper Size A3, B4, A4-R, LDR, LTR-R
W/binding: 1 sheet (including single cover page)
Capacity
W/out binding: 2 to 15 sheets
Copy Weight 17 - 21 in (64 - 80 g/m2) (cover page up to 35.5 in (133 g/m2))*1
Stacking 10 sets (stack of 11 to 15 sheets)
Capacity 15 sets (stack of 6 to 10 sheets)
25 sets (stack of 5 sheets or less)
Stapling position 2 points (Center distribution; fixed interval)
Staple
2000 staples
accommodation
Stapling Staple supply Special cartridge
Staples Special staples (FQ-SS50)
Staple detection Provided
Manual stapling Not available
Folding method Roller contact
Folding mode Double folding
Folding Folding position Paper center
Position
Provided
adjustment
Power Supply Supplied by the finisher unit (24V line x 2)
Power 160 W or less
Consumption
Note:
*1:Special paper, transparencies, masters, label paper and hole-punched paper cannot be handled.
Ver. 5.0 472 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Staple and Folding Position (Saddle Finisher Unit)
A3 B4 A4-R
Staple Position
148.5±1.0 mm
210±1.0 mm
182±1.0 mm
Center of Center of
Staple Staple
88.5±2.0 mm 68.5±2.0 mm 45±2.0 mm
208.5±2.0 mm 188.5±2.0 mm 165±2.0 mm
Stack Front Edge
LDR LTR-R
139.7±1.0 mm
216±1.0 mm
79.7±2.0 mm 48±2.0 mm
199.7±2.0 mm 168±2.0 mm
Fig. 1-002
Ver. 5.0 473 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Punch Unit (Optional)
Item Description
Punching Sequential punching
Method
2 holes: A3, A4, B4, A4-R, B5, B5-R
2 or 3 holes: 2 holes/LGL, LTR-R
Paper Size
3 holes/LTR, LDR
4 holes: A3, A4
Paper Weight 64 to 133 g/m2 *1
2 holes: 6.5 mm
Punched Hole 2 or 3 holes: 2 holes / 8.0 mm
Diameter 3 holes / 8.0 mm
4 holes: 6.5 mm
2 holes: 10,000 sheets or more (21 in (80 g/m2) or equivalent)
Punch Trash 2 holes / 3,000 sheets or more
Capacity
2 or 3 holes:
3 holes / 3,000 sheets or more
4 holes: 5,000 sheets or more
Power Supply Supplied by the Finisher Unit (24 VDC, 5 VDC)
Power
120 W or less
Consumption
Note:
*1:Transparencies, masters, label paper, postcards and hole-punched paper cannot be handled.
Hole Position (Punch Unit)

2 holes
A3 / A4 108.5 ± 3 mm
B5 / B4 88.5 ± 3 mm
80±1 mm x1
A4-R 65 ± 3 mm
12±3 mm B5-R 51 ± 3 mm
2 or 3 holes
x1
LGL / LTR-R 73 ± 3 mm
70±1 mm x1
12±3 mm
x1
LDR / LTR 31.5 ± 3 mm
108±1 mm 108±1 mm x1
12±3 mm
4 holes
x1
80±1 mm 80±1 mm 80±1 mm x 1 A3 / A4 28.5 ± 3 mm
12±3 mm
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Ver. 5.0 474 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.1.2.1. Cross Section
1. Finisher Unit
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12]
[1] Tray 1 / 2 [2] Shutter

[3] Delivery Roller [4] Swing Guide
[5] Feed Roller 2 [6] Height Sensor
[7] Wrap Flapper [8] Buffer Roller
[9] Buffer Inlet Flapper [10] Saddle Stitch Flapper
[11] Inlet Feed Roller [12] Feed Roller 1
[13] Vertical Path [14] Stapler
[15] Knurled Belt [16] Tray Lift Motor
[17] Saddle Stitch Unit
Fig. 1-003
Ver. 5.0 475 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Saddle Stitch Unit
[6]
[7]
[8]
[5]
[9]
[4]
[10]
[3]
[2] [11]
[12]
[1]
[1] Guide Plate [2] Paper Folding Roller

[3] Delivery Guide Plate [4] Holding Roller
[5] Stitcher (Front, Rear) [6] Inlet Roller
[7] No. 1 Flapper [8] No. 2 Flapper
[9] Stitcher Mount [10] Butting Plate
[11] Crescent Roller [12] Paper Positioning Plate
Fig. 1-004
Ver. 5.0 476 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Punch Unit (Optional)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4] [6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1] Punch Motor [2] Cam

[3] Hole Puncher (Punch Blade) [4] Die
[5] Photosensor PCB [6] LED PCB
[7] Horizontal Registration Motor [8] Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB Unit
[9] Punch Trash Container
Fig. 1-005
Ver. 5.0 477 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.1.3. Using the Machine
11.1.1.3.1. Removing Paper Jams from the Finisher Unit
If the Copier's message indicates a paper jam in the Finisher Unit, perform the following to remove the jam.
(1) Holding the Finisher Unit as shown, move it to

detach it from the Copier.
Fig. 1-006
(2) Remove any jam visible from the outside.
Fig. 1-007
(3) Open the Upper Cover, and check the inside of
the Finisher.
Fig. 1-008
Ver. 5.0 478 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Lift the Buffer Roller Cover, and remove the jam.
Fig. 1-009
(5) Lift the Buffer Roller, and remove the jam.
Fig. 1-010
(6) Return the Buffer Roller and the Buffer Roller
Cover to their original positions, and close the
Upper Cover.
Fig. 1-011
(7) Connect the Finisher to the Copier Machine.
(8) Operate as instructed on the Display.
Fig. 1-012
Ver. 5.0 479 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.1.3.2. Supplying the Finisher Unit with Staples
If the Copier's message indicates that the staples ran out in the Finisher Unit, perform the following to
supply it with staples.
Fig. 1-013
(2) Turn the Green Lever to the down.
Fig. 1-014
(3) Pull out the Staple Cartridge in the direction of
the arrow as illustrated.
Fig. 1-015
(4) Slide the empty Staple Case out.
Fig. 1-016
Ver. 5.0 480 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5) Set a new Staple Case (FQ-SS66).
Reference:
You may set no more than one Staple
Cartridge at a time. Make sure that the new
Cartridge is one specifically designed for the
Finisher Unit.
Note:
Do not remove the Tape used to hold the
Staples in place before installing the Staple
Cartridge.
Fig. 1-017
(6) Pull the length of Tape (used to hold the Staples
in place) straight out.
Fig. 1-018
(7) Push the Stapler Unit until it stops and turn the
Green Lever to the right to lock.
Fig. 1-019
(8) Close the Front Cover.
Fig. 1-020
Ver. 5.0 481 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.1.3.3. Removing Staple Jams from the Finisher Unit
If the Copier's message indicates a staple jam in the Finisher Unit, perform the following to remove the jam.
(1) Remove the Stack waiting to be stapled from the

Delivery Tray.
Fig. 1-021
Fig. 1-022
(3) Turn the Green Lever to the down.
Fig. 1-023
(4) Pull out the Staple Cartridge in the direction of
the arrow as illustrated.
Fig. 1-024
Ver. 5.0 482 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5) Push down Staple Cartridge Tab.
Fig. 1-025
(6) Remove all Slid Staple.
Fig. 1-026
(7) Push up the Staple Cartridge Tab until it stops.
(8) Turn the Green Lever to the right to lock. Close
the Front Cover.
Note:
After a Staple Cartridge has been reinstalled, the
first few sets may not staple. This is due to the
Staples need to be pre-fed to the stapling position.
Fig. 1-027
Ver. 5.0 483 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.1.3.4. Removing Paper Jams from the Saddle Stitch Unit
If the Copier's message indicates a paper jam in the Saddle Stitch Unit, perform the following to remove the
jam.
(1) Holding the Finisher Unit as shown, move it to

detach it from the Copier.
Fig. 1-028
Fig. 1-029
(3) Turn the right Green Knob.
Fig. 1-030
(4) Turn the left Green Knob while pushing it in.
Fig. 1-031
Ver. 5.0 484 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5) Open the Saddle Exit Cover.
(6) Remove jammed paper.
(7) Close the Saddle Exit Cover.
Fig. 1-032
(8) Open the Inlet Cover, and remove the jam.
Fig. 1-033
(9) Close the Front Lower Cover.
(10) Connect the Finisher Unit.
Fig. 1-034
Ver. 5.0 485 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.1.3.5. Supplying the Saddle Stitch Unit with Staples
If the Copier's message indicates the Saddle Stitch Unit ran out of staples, perform the following to supply it
with staples.
Fig. 1-035
(2) Slide out the Saddle Stitch Unit.
Fig. 1-036
(3) While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing
it upward.
Fig. 1-037
Ver. 5.0 486 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Hold the empty Cartridge by its sides, and
remove it.
Fig. 1-038
(5) Insert the new Cartridge (FQ-SS50).
Note:
You must always replace both Cartridges at the
same time.
Fig. 1-039
it downward, to return it to its original position.
Fig. 1-040
(7) Push in the Stitcher Unit, and close the Front
Cover.
Fig. 1-041
Ver. 5.0 487 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.1.3.6. Removing Staple Jams from the Saddle Stitch
If the Copier's message indicates a staple jam in the Saddle Stitch Unit, perform the following to remove the
jam.
Fig. 1-042
(2) Slide out the Saddle Stitch Unit.
Fig. 1-043
it upward.
Fig. 1-044
Ver. 5.0 488 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Hold the Cartridge by its sides, and remove it.
Fig. 1-045
(5) Push down on the area identified as (A), and pull
up the Tab identified as (B).
(B)
(A)
Fig. 1-046
(B)
(6) Remove the jammed staple, and return the Tab
(B) to its original position.
Fig. 1-047
(7) Reinstall the Cartridge to its original position.
Fig. 1-048
Ver. 5.0 489 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
it downward, to return it to its original position.
Fig. 1-049
(9) Push the Saddle Stitch Unit back to its original
position, and close the Front Lower Cover.
Note:
Whenever you remove a jammed Staple, be
sure to execute staple edging.
Fig. 1-050
Ver. 5.0 490 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.1.3.7. Removing Paper Jams from the Punch Unit (Optional)
If the display indicates a paper jam in the Punch Unit, perform the following to remove the jam.
(1) Open the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-051
(2) Align the triangle mark on the knob within the
range marked by .
Fig. 1-052
(3) Close the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-053
Ver. 5.0 491 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Open the Top Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-054
(5) Remove the jam.
Fig. 1-055
(6) Close the Top Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-056
Ver. 5.0 492 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.1.3.8. Removing Punch Hole Scrap from the Punch Trash Box (Optional)
If the display indicates to empty the Punch Trash Box, perform the following to remove the punch trash:
(1) Open the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.
Fig. 1-057
(2) Pull out the Punch Trash Box.
Fig. 1-058
(3) Discard the Punch Scrap.
Fig. 1-059
Ver. 5.0 493 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Return the Punch Trash Box to its original
position.
Fig. 1-060
11.1.1.4. Maintenance by the User
No. Item Timing

1 Replacing the Staple Cartridge (Finisher Unit) When the appropriate
2 Replacing the Staple Cartridge (Saddle Stitch Unit) indication is made on the
copier's display.
Caution:
The Finisher Unit and the Saddle Stitch Unit use different cartridge types. Be sure that the appropriate
type is used for each.
Table. 1-004
Ver. 5.0 494 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2. Finisher Unit Operation
11.1.2.1. Basic Operation
This chapter discusses the purpose and role of each of the Finisher's functions, and the principles of
operation used for the Finisher mechanical and electrical systems. It also explains the timing at which these
systems are operated.
The symbol in the drawings indicates transmission of mechanical drive, and signals marked by
together with the signal name indicates the flow of electrical signals.
In descriptions of digital circuits of the Finisher, "1" indicates a high signal voltage level, while "0" indicates a
low signal voltage level. Voltage values differ according to the circuit.
A microprocessor is used in the Finisher to control all the finishing functions.
Descriptions in this chapter also assume that PCBs will not be repaired at user sites. For this reason,
descriptions of circuits on PCBs is limited to block diagrams. Two types of block diagrams are provided for
separate functions: diagrams indicating details from sensors up to input sections of major PCBs, and
diagrams indicating details from the output sections of major PCBs up to the components.
Ver. 5.0 495 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.1.1. Outline
The Finisher is designed to deliver copies arriving from its Copier, and its modes of delivery include simple
stacking, job offset*1, and staple.
All operations involved in these modes are controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB, according to the
appropriate commands from the Copier.
Copies from the Copier may be routed to the Saddle Stitch Unit.
Swing guide drive system
Alignment drive system
Stapler drive system

Control system
Delivery drive system
Feeder drive system
Shutter drive system
Tray drive system
Saddle stitch unit control system
Fig. 2-001
Notes:
*1:The term job offset refers to shifting each sorting job, separating a single stack into several stacks.
Ver. 5.0 496 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.1.2. Outline of Electrical Circuitry
The Finisher's sequence of operation is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB. The Finisher Controller
PCB is a 16-bit microprocessor (CPU), and is used for communication with the Copier (serial) in addition to
controlling the finisher's sequence of operations.
The Finisher Controller PCB responds to the various commands coming from the Copier through a serial
communications line to drive solenoids, motors, and other components. In addition, it communicates the
Finisher's various states (information on sensors and switches) to the Copier through a serial
communications circuit.
The Finisher Controller PCB not only communicates with the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB but also
communicates the Saddle Stitch Unit's various states (information on sensors and switches) to the Copier.
The ICS used on the Finisher Controller PCB are designed for the following:
• Q1 (CPU)
Controls sequence of operations.
• Q2 (EP-ROM)
Backs up adjustment values.
• Q7
Contains sequence programs.
• Q8 / Q89 (RAM)
Backs up initial setting data.
• Q4 (communications IC)
Communicates with the copier and the saddle stitch unit.
• Q14 (regulator IC)
Generates 5V.
Flow of signals between the finisher and the options controller:
Finisher Controller Motor

Saddle Stitch PCB communication
Controller PCB Q1 Solenoid
CPU
Q2 Switch
Punch Driver PCB EEP-ROM
(Punch Unit
(optional)) Q4 Sensor
IC
Q7
Copier EP-ROM
(DC Controller PCB
PCU) Q8/Q89
RAM
Q14
Regulator IC
Fig. 2-002
Ver. 5.0 497 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB
1. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB
Finisher Controller PCB
PI1 J106-3 -7 -3 J17-7 +5V

Inlet When the sensor
J202
-1 -9 -1 -9 PENT
Sensor -2 -8 -2 -8 detects paper, “1”.
PI3 J134-1 -3 -5 J11-3 +5V

Delivery When the sensor
J208
-2 -2 -6 -2 PDEL
Sensor -3 -1 -7 -1 detects paper, “1”.
PI4 J122-3 -1 -11 J9A-1 +5V

Stapling When the sensor
J207A
-1 -3 -9 -3 STPTY
Tray -2 -2 -10 -2 detects paper, “1”.
Sensor
Shutter PI5 J118-3 -1 -3 J12B-4 +5V

When the shutter
J205
Open -1 -3 -1 -6 STOPN
-2 -2 -2 -5 opens, “1”.
Sensor
Alignment PI6 J121-3 -4 -8 J9A-4 +5V

When the alignment
J207A
Plate Home -1 -6 -6 -6 JOGHP

-2 -5 -7 -5 plate is at the home
Position
position, “1”.
Sensor
PI7 J129-3 -1 -3 J12A-7 +5V
Stapler When the stapler is
J210
-1 -3 -1 -9 STPHP
Shift Home -2 -2 -2 -8 at the home position,
sensor “1”.
PI8 J130-3 J12A-4 +5V
Tray Home When the tray is at
-1 -6 TRYHP
Position -2 -5 the home position,
Sensor “1”.
Fig. 2-003
Ver. 5.0 498 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI10 While the delivery

Delivery J120-1 -9 -3 J9A-9 +5V motor is rotating,
J207A
Motor -2 -8 -4 -8 DELCLK
-3 -7 -5 -7 oscillates between
Clock “0” and “1”.
Tray 1 PI11 J101-3 -1 -3 -1 -6 J14-1 +5V When paper is
J1010
J201
Paper -1 -3 -1 -3 -4 -3 FSTTRAY*
-2 -2 -2 -2 -5 -2 present on tray 1,
Sensor “0”.
PI12 J102-3 -1 -3 -4 -3 J14-4
Tray 2 +5V When paper is
J1020
J201
-1 -3 -1 -6 -1 -6
Paper -2 -2 -2 -5 -2 -5
SNDTRAY* present on tray 2,
Sensor “0”.
Buffer PI14 J110-3 J24-4 +5V When paper is in
Path -1 -6 BUFPASS
-2 -5 the buffer path, “1”.
Paper
Sensor
PI15 J117-3 J12A-1 +5V When the finisher is

Joint -1 -3 JOINT
Sensor -2 -2 joined with the
copier, “1”.
PI16 J113-3 J12B-1

Door +5V When the front door
-1 -3 DROPN
Open -2 -2 is open, “0”.
Sensor
Buffer PI17 J105-3 J24-1

+5V When paper is
Path Inlet -1 -3
-2 -2
BUFENTR present at the buffer
Paper path inlet, “1”.
Sensor
PI18 J127-3 -1 -3 J11-8
Swing +5V When the swing
-3 -1 -10
J204
-1 SWGOPN
Guide -2 -2 -2 -9 guide is open, “1”.
Open Sensor
Tray Lift PI19 J400-3 J14-10 When the tray lift

+5V
Motor -1 -12
SPTCLK1
motor is rotating,
Clock -2 -11 oscillates between
Sensor 1 “1” and “0”.
Tray Lift PI9 J400-6 J14-7

+5V When the tray lift
Motor -4 -9
-8
SFTCLK2 motor is rotating,
Clock -5
oscillates between
Sensor 2 Sensor PCB “1” and “0”.
Fig. 2-004
Ver. 5.0 499 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PI20 J125-1 -5 -7 J9B-5 +5V

Swing When the swing motor is
J207B
-2 -4 -8 -4 SWGCLK
Motor Clock -3 -3 -9 -3 rotating, oscillates
Sensor between “0” and “1”.
PS1
J114-3 -2 -3 J6-2 Measures the distance
+5V
-4 -1 -4 -1
Height between the sensor and
J212
V0
-2 -3 -2 -3
Sensor -1 -4 -1 -4
Vin the top of the stack on the
tray.
Door Switch
N.O. +24V When the
-1 J5-1
front door and
J112
MS1 +24VMOVE
-2 -3 the upper
DRSW
cover are
Swing Guide Closed Detect Switch 1 closed, “1”.
N.O.
-1 J5-9
J209
MS2
-2 -10
Swing Guide Closed Detect Switch 2

N.O.
-3 J5-11 When the
+24VSTPL
J209
MS6
-4 -12
swing guide is
SWGGCLD closed, “1”.
Safety Zone Switch
C. J131-3 J5-4 +24VHIFT When the tray
-2 -5
N.O.
-1 -6
is at the
N.C. TRAYSAF delivery, “1”.
MS3
Shutter Closed Detect Switch

J140-1 -3 J7-3 When the
N.C. SHUTCLD shutter is
J206
-2 -2 -2
N.O.
C.
-3 -1 -1 closed, “1”.
MS4
Tray Upper Limit Detect Switch

N.C. +24VSHIFT
When the tray
-1 J5-7 is at the upper
JI32
MS5
-2 -8
limit, “0”.
TRYLMT
Fig. 2-005
Ver. 5.0 500 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB
Stapler Unit Finisher Controller PCB
+5V
PI22
Staple Home J8-8
STPDRHP* When a stapler is at the
Position Sensor home position, “0”.
+5V
Staple Switch MS8
J8-10
HOOKEMP*
When staple are
present in the cartridge,
+5V +5V
“1”.
J8-11
J8-12
J8-7
When the stapler is
STPCON* connected, “0”.
J131-8 J400-1 J3-6

-7 -2 -5 Communication line
-6 -3 -4
-5 -4 -3 +24V
Saddle Stitch -4 -5 -2
-3 -6 -1
Controller PCB
+24V
J132-1 J500-1 J19-1
-2 -2 -2
J2-2 Communication line

-3
-4
-5
-7
Copier
+24V
J1-1
-2
Fig. 2-006
Ver. 5.0 501 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB
Flapper Solenoid +24V
-1 -2 J12A-10
When “0”, the
J107
SL1 solenoid turns On.
-2 -1 -11
FLPSL*
Buffer Inlet Solenoid +24V

-1 -3 J12B-9
When “0”, the
J108
SL2
-2 -2 -10 solenoid turns On.
ENTSL*
Buffer Outlet Solenoid +24V

-1 -2 J24-7
When “0”, the
J109
SL3
EXITSL*
Paddle Solenoid +24V

-1 -2 -1 -11 J9B-1
When “0”, the
J207B
J128
SL5 solenoid turns On.

-2 -1 -2 -10 -2
PDLSL*
Escape Solenoid +24V

-1 -3 -10 -2 J9A-10
When “0”, the
J207A
J123
SL6
-11
solenoid turns On.
-2 -2 -11 -1 ESCPSL*
Belt Escape Solenoid +24V

-1 -2 J12B-7
When “0”, the
J500
SL7
BESCPSL*
+24V
First Feed Motor J10-1
-2
According to rotation
-3
-4
B* direction/speed,
M1 A*
-5 changes between +
B and - in sequence.
-6
A
Fig. 2-007
Ver. 5.0 502 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB
Delivery Motor
J119-2 -2 -4 -4 J11-4 According to rotation
direction/speed, changes
J208
M2
-1 -1 -5 -3 -5 between + and -.
+24V
Alignment Motor
J124 -6 -6 J9B-6
5 5
-7 -5 -7
B*
4 4
J207B
M3 3 3
-8 -4 -8
A* direction/speed, changes
-9 -3 -9 between + and - in
2 2 B
-10 -2 -10
1 1 A sequence.
+24V
Stapler Shift Motor
J306 J304-1 J302-1 J301-14
5 5 J8-5
-2 -2 -15 According to rotation
4 4 -4 B*
-3 -3 -16
M4 3 3 -3 A* direction/speed, changes
-4 -4 -17
2 2
-5 -5 -18
-2 B between + and - in
1 1 -1 A sequence.
Staple Motor
J307
J305-1 J302-6 J301-6
1 1 J8-13 According to rotation
-2 -5 -5
M6 2 2
-3 -4 -4
-14 direction/speed, changes
3 3 -15 between + and -.
Tray Lift Motor
J115-2 -2 J7-4
M5
-3 -1 -5 direction/speed, changes
between + and -.
Swing Motor
J501-1 -1 -7 -1 J11-7 According to rotation
J208
M7 direction/speed, changes
-2 -2 -6 -2 -6
between + and -.
+24V
Second Feed Motor J16-1
-2
-3 B*
M8 -4 A*
direction/speed, changes
-5 B
between + and - .
-6 A
+24V
Inlet Feed Motor J502-1 -1 -6 -4 J17-6
A
-2 -2 -5 -5 -5
B
-3 -3 -4 -6 -4
J202
A
M9 -4 -4 -3 -7 -3
B direction/speed, changes
-5 -5 -2 -8 -2 between + and - in
-6 -6 -1 -9 -1 sequence.
Fig. 2-008
Ver. 5.0 503 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.2. Feed / Drive System
11.1.2.2.1. Outline
The Finisher is designed to operate according to the commands from its Copier to deliver arriving copies to
trays in the appropriate mode: simple stacking, job offset, stapling.
See Fig. 2-009 for a diagram of the 4 delivery modes.
Method of delivery Normal delivery Simple stacking
Job offset
Staple Front diagonal
Rear 1-point
Rear diagonal
2-point
Saddle stitch delivery
Fig. 2-009
Normal Delivery Tray
Normal Delivery Tray
To Saddle Stitch Unit
Fig.2-010
Ver. 5.0 504 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Normal Delivery
a. Simple Stacking
The Finisher delivers copies directly to the Tray.
Tray Tray
A A
B Copies B Copies
C C
Feed Roller 1
Feed Roller 2
Delivery Roller
Fig. 2-011
b. Job Offset
The Finisher forwards all copies of each sort job to the Stapling Tray. The first sort job on the
Stapling Tray is delivered with a shift to the front of about 30 mm, and the second sort job is
delivered without being shifted. Whether the first copy or the last copy of a sort job should be shifted
is determined by the Copier.
Tray
Each sort job is

stacked alternately.
Fig. 2-012
Swing Guide
Stapling Tray Stopper
Delivery Roller Feed Roller 1

Fig. 2-013
Results of Delivering 4 Sets
Copies handled
by job offset
Direction of delivery
Fig. 2-014
Ver. 5.0 505 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
c. Stapling
The Finisher stacks copies on the Stapling Tray, then it staples and delivers the copies to the
appropriate tray.
Tray
Copies
Staple
Swing Guide
Stapling
tray Stopper
Delivery Roller Feed Roller 1
Fig. 2-015
A
B
C
B
A
C
Paper width/2
Front diagonal stapling 2-point stapling
A A
B B
C C
Rear 1-point stapling

Rear diagonal stapling
Fig. 2-016
2. Saddle Stitch Delivery
A copy arriving in the Finisher from the Copier is routed to the Saddle Stitch by the Paper Deflecting
Plate. The Saddle Stitch executes stitching and saddling operations on the copy and then delivers it to
the Saddle Stitch Tray. For discussions of stacks in the Saddle Stitch, see 11.3.4.
To Saddle Stitch
Fig.2-017
Ver. 5.0 506 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.2.2. Delivery Paths
This Finisher has three different paper paths for delivery, each selected to suit paper size and delivery
mode.
1. Straight Path
When stacking copies shown in Table. 2-001, the copies pass under the Buffer Roller.
Copy size Length or width 182 mm or less

Typical copy A5-R, INV-R, thick stock
examples
Table. 2-001
Delivery Roller Buffer Roller
Fig. 2-018
2. Buffer Paper Path 1

When stacking copies shown in Table. 2-002, the copies pass over the Buffer Roller, increasing the
distance between copies.
Copy size Length and width 182 mm or more

Typical copy A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, LDR, LGL, LTR,
examples LTR-R, Transparencies
(excluding thick stock)
Table. 2-002
Buffer Roller
Feed Roller 2
Delivery Roller
Fig. 2-019
Ver. 5.0 507 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Buffer Paper Path 2
This is the paper path when copy sizes shown in Table. 2-003 are stacked. A maximum of two copies
(two originals or more in the staple mode) are wrapped round the Buffer Roller, during which job offset
and stapling are performed on the Stapling Tray.
Copy size Length 182 to 232 mm, and width 182 to 297 mm
Typical copy A4, B5, LTR,
examples (excluding transparencies and thick stock)
Table. 2-003
The following shows paper delivery operation in the case of two originals in the staple mode.
a. The first copy is moved in the direction of the Buffer Roller.
Buffer Roller
1st Copy
Fig. 2-020
b. The first copy wraps around the Buffer Roller and, at the same time, the second copy arrives from
the Copier.
1st Copy 2nd Copy
Fig. 2-021
c. The second copy is laid over the first copy.

1st Copy 2nd Copy
Fig. 2-022
Ver. 5.0 508 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
d. The first and second copies are simultaneously pulled into the Stapling Tray.
2nd Copy
1st Copy
Fig. 2-023
Caution:
The second copy as explained here is moved through buffer paper path 1.
This fact is omitted from the discussion to avoid interrupting the sequence of operations.
Ver. 5.0 509 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.2.3. Feeding and Delivering
1. Outline
The Finisher moves copies arriving from the Copier to the Delivery Tray, Stapling Tray, or the Saddle
Stitch Unit according to the mode of delivery. On the Stapling Tray, the copies are subjected to job
offset or stapling as instructed by the Copier. The First Feed Motor (M1), Second Feed Motor (M8) and
Inlet Feed Motor (M9) are stepping motors, and Delivery motor (M2) is a DC motor. These motors are
controlled by the microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB, and rotate either clockwise or
counter-clockwise.
The paper paths are equipped with the following four sensors for detection of paper (arrival,
passage):
• Inlet Sensor (PI1)
• Delivery Sensor (PI3)
• Stapling Tray Sensor (PI4)
• Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14)
In addition, each delivery tray is equipped with a sensor designed to detect the presence/absence of
paper on it.
• No. 1 Tray Paper Sensor (PI11)
• No. 2 Tray Paper Sensor (PI12)
If a copy fails to reach or move past each sensor within a specific period of time, the Finisher Controller
PCB identifies the condition as a jam, and stops the ongoing operation and at the same time informs
the Copier of the condition.
When all doors are closed after the paper jam is removed, the Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17)
checks whether or not copies are being detected. In addition to the above four sensors, the Inlet
Sensor, Delivery sensor, Stapling Tray Sensor and Buffer Path Paper Sensor are also checked for the
presence of paper. If the sensors detect paper, the Finisher Unit judges that paper jams have not
completely been removed, and sends the paper jam removal signal to the Copier again.
Ver. 5.0 510 NOV 2004

Ver. 5.0
Escape solenoid drive signal ESCPSL
Alignment motor drive signal
Delivery motor drive signal
Delivery motor clock signal DELCLK
Swing motor drive signal
Swing motor clock signal SWGCLK
Shift motor clock detection signal 1 SFTCLK1
PI10
PI20
Shift motor clock detection signal 2 SFTCLK2
M2
M7
M3
PI9
PI19
M5
Tray lift motor drive signal
Paddle solenoid drive signal PDLSL
SL6
SL5 M8
511
Second feed motor drive signal
M4
Fig. 2-024
M1
First feed motor drive signal

M9
Inlet feed motor drive signal
M6
SL7
SL1
SL2
SL3
Buffer outlet solenoid drive signal EXITSL

Buffer inlet solenoid drive signal EXTSL
Flapper solenoid drive signal FLPSL
Belt escape solenoid drive signal BESCPSL
Stapler motor drive signal
Stapler shift motor drive signal
NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.0
No.2 tray paper detection signal SNDTRAY
No.1 tray paper detection signal FSTTRAY
PI11
Stapling tray paper detection signal STPTY
PI12
Buffer path paper detection
signal BUFPASS
PI4
PI3
Delivery detection signal PDEL
512
Fig. 2-025
PI14
Buffer path inlet paper detection

PI7
signal BUFENTR
Inlet paper detection signal PENT

PI1
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.2.4. Job Offset
1. Outline
In the job offset mode, sort jobs and entire copy groups are shifted to the front for delivery to the tray,
and other copies are delivered to the tray without a shift.
The copies are shifted by the alignment plate. The alignment plate is checked by the Alignment Home
Position Sensor (PI6) to find out whether it is at the home position.
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Plate Motor (M3) at power-on to return the Alignment
Plate to its home position.
The Finisher Controller PCB stops the Delivery Motor (M2) when the trailing edge of the copy has
moved past the Feed Roller 2. Then, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Delivery Motor counter-
clockwise, and drives the Swing Motor (M7). As a result, the drive of the Delivery Motor is transmitted
to the Swing Guide to move up the guide. When the Swing Guide Open Detection Sensor (PI18)
detects the Swing Guide, the Delivery Motor stops, and the Swing Guide is held at the up position.
When the Swing Guide has moved up, the Feed Belts attached to the Feed Roller 2 move the copy to
the Stapling Tray. The presence of paper on the Stapling Tray is monitored by the Stapling Tray Paper
Sensor (PI4). (The first sheet is fed to the Stapling Tray while the Swing Guide is moving up.)
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Motor (M3) in advance, and keeps the Alignment
Plate poised 10mm behind the trailing edge of a sheet. Whenever one sheet is moved to the Stapling
Tray, each sheet is aligned, and when the fifth or last sheet in a sort job/group is fed to the Stapling
Tray, the Guide Plate Retaining Solenoid (SL6) moves the Guide Plate away and under the Stapling
Tray. From then on, the Alignment Motor shifts the sheets to the front by 30 mm.
When the copy has been shifted, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Alignment Motor counter-
clockwise to move the Alignment Plate to a point 10 mm behind the trailing edge of the sheet.
This alignment operation is repeated until alignment of the fifth or last sheet in a sort job is completed.
At this time, the Swing Guide is moved down and is closed, and the Delivery Motor rotates clockwise to
deliver the sheet.
Alignment
Plate
Guide
Plate
Alignment Plate
Home Position
Sensor (PI6)
Alignment
Paper Motor (M3)
Escape
Solenoid (SL6)
Fig. 2-026
Ver. 5.0 513 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Sequence of Operation (Job Offset)

Delivery Motor (M2)
First Feed Motor (M1)
Second Feed Motor (M8)
Alignment Plate Motor

(M8)
Alignment Plate Home

Position Sensor (PI6)
Swing Guide Open
Detection Switch (PI8)
Swing Guide Closed

Detection Switch (SW2)
Swing Motor (M7)

Stapling Tray Paper
Sensor (PI4)
Guide Plate Escape
Solenoid (SL6)
: Motor CW rotation : Motor CCW rotation
Fig. 2-027
2. Flow of Job Offset Operations
a. The Swing Guide moves up and, at the same time, the Feed Belts move the sheet to the Stapling
Tray.
Swing Guide
Offset Sheet
Feed Roller 2
Tray 1/2 Feed Belts

Delivery
Roller
Stapling Tray
Stopper
Fig. 2-028
b. The Alignment Plate shifts the sheet to the front.

Existing Stack Alignment Plate
Offset Sheet
Fig. 2-029
Ver. 5.0 514 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
c. The Swing Guide moves down and, at the same time, the Delivery Roller delivers the sheet.
Offset Sheet
Swing Guide
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
Tray 1/2 Delivery
Roller
Stapling Tray
Stopper
Fig. 2-030
Ver. 5.0 515 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.2.5. Staple Operation
1. Outline
The Stapler Unit staples a stack of as many sheets as specified.
The stapling position differs according to the selected staple mode and paper size. The Stapler Unit is
checked by the Stapler Shift Home Position Sensor (PI7) to find out whether it is at the home position.
When starting operation after power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Stapler Shift Motor (M4)
to return the Stapler Unit to the home position. If the Stapler is already at the home position, then (M4)
is not turned on.
Stapler Shift Motor (M4)
Sheets
Stapler
Stapler Shift Home

Fig. 2-031
Paper
width/2
Front diagonal stapling 2-point stapling

Rear diagonal stapling
Fig. 2-032
Ver. 5.0 516 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. First Sheet
The Finisher Controller PCB stops the Delivery Motor (M2) as soon as the trailing edge of the first
sheet has moved past the Feed Roller 2. Then, it rotates the Delivery Motor clockwise to switch the
gear drive to the Swing Motor (M7), causing the Swing Guide to move up.
When the Swing Guide Open Sensor (PI18) finds the Swing Guide at the up position, the Swing Motor
stops, maintaining the Swing Guide at the up position.
When the Swing Guide has moved up, the feed belts of the Feed Roller 2 move the sheet to the
Stapling Tray. (The first sheet is fed to the Stapling Tray while the Swing Guide is moving up.) The
presence of paper on the Stapling Tray is detected by the Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (PI4).
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Plate Shift Motor (M3) when the Stapling Tray Paper
Sensor has detected paper to put sheets in order. The Alignment Plate is kept poised 10 mm behind
the trailing edge of the paper.
The Swing Guide is kept in wait at the up position until the last sheet is output onto the Stapling Tray.
Swing Guide
1st Sheet
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
Tray 1/2
Delivery
Roller
Stapling
Tray Stapler
Fig. 2-033
Swing Guide
Swing Guide Open
Sensor (PI18) Delivery Roller
Swing Guide
Closed
Detect
Switches
(MS2/MS6) Swing Motor Clock
Sensor (PI20)
Delivery
Motor Clock
Sensor (PI10)
Swing Motor (M7)
Delivery Motor (M2)
Fig. 2-034
Ver. 5.0 517 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. 2nd and Subsequent Sheets
The Finisher Controller PCB turns on the Belt Escape Solenoid (SL7) before the trailing edge of the
second and subsequent sheets have moved past the Feed Roller 2 to make the Feed Belt escape.
This operation is performed to reduce the time it takes for the trailing edge of the paper to fall on the
Stapling Tray, and to improve the duty cycle.
The Finisher Controller PCB turns on the Paddle Solenoid (SL5) as soon as the trailing edge of the
second and subsequent sheets have moved past the Feed Roller 2, causing the drive of the Second
Feed Motor (M8) to rotate the Paddle. The sheets are pushed by the Paddle and moved to the Stapling
Tray.
Almost simultaneously with the trailing edge of the sheet falling into the Stapling Tray, the Belt Escape
Solenoid turns off to return the Feed Belts that were in the escape position to its original position, and
feed the sheet onto the Stapling Tray. When the sheet has been output onto the Stapling Tray, the
Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Alignment Motor (M3) to put the sheets in order.
Swing Guide
2nd and Subsequent
Sheets
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
SL7
Tray 1/2
Delivery Belt Escape
Roller Solenoid
Stapling Tray
Stapler
Fig. 2-035
Feed Belts
Escape Direction
Belt Escape
Solenoid (SL7)
Fig. 2-036
Ver. 5.0 518 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paddles
Paddles
Paddle
Solenoid (SL5) 2nd and Subsequent
Sheets
1st Sheet
Stapler
M8
2nd Feed Motor Stopper

Fig. 2-037
4. Last sheet
When the last sheet has been put in order, the Finisher Controller PCB turns on the Alignment Motor
(M3) to move the Alignment Plate to the alignment position (to butt the plate against the stack). Then,
the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Swing Motor (M7) counter-clockwise to move down the Swing
Guide.
The Finisher Controller PCB moves the stapler according to the staple mode for stapling. From then
on, it rotates the Delivery Motor (M2) clockwise to delivery the stack to the tray.
Swing Guide
Sheets
Feed Roller 2
Feed Belts
Tray 1/2 Delivery
Roller
Stapling Tray
Stapler
Fig. 2-038
Ver. 5.0 519 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Swing Guide
Delivery Roller
Swing Motor (M7)
Delivery Motor (M2)

Fig. 2-039
11.1.2.2.6. Staple Unit
Stapling is executed by the Stapler Motor (M6). A signal rotation of the cam by the motor results in one
stapling operation.
The cam is checked by the Stapling Home Position Sensor (PI22) to find out whether it is at the home
position.
The Stapler Motor is controlled by the Microprocessor (Q1) on the Finisher Controller so that it is rotated
clockwise or counter-clockwise.
When the Stapling Home Position Sensor is off, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Stapler Motor
clockwise until the sensor turns on so as to return the Stapling Cam to its initial state.
The presence/absence of staples inside the Staple Cartridge is detected by the Staple Detecting Switch
(MS9). The Finisher Controller PCB does not drive the Stapler Motor (M6) unless the Swing Guide Closed
Detecting Switch 2 (MS6) is on (i.e., the swing guide is closed). This is to protect against injuries that could
occur when a finger is stuck inside the Stapler.
Fig. 2-041
Ver. 5.0 520 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Staple edge detection signal
Cartridge detection signal

position detection signal
Staple detection signal

Stapling home
Staple motor
drive signal
Fig. 2-042
Start signal Mode selected

Stacking Stapling Delivery
1st sheet 2nd sheet
Delivery Motor (M2)

(M3)
Swing Guide Open
Sensor (PI8)
Stapling Tray Paper
Sensor (PI4)
Swing Guide Open/Closed
Detecting Switch (MS2)
Stapler Home Position
sensor (PI7)
Paddle Solenoid (SL5)

Stapler Shift Motor
(M4)
Stapler Motor (M4)
Fig. 2-043
Ver. 5.0 521 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Shifting the Staple Unit
The Stapler Unit is moved by the Stapler Shift Motor (M4). Its home position is detected by the Stapler
Shift Home Position Sensor (PI7). When the start signal arrives from the Copier, the Stapler moves to
the center of its movement range. This movement occurs regardless of the selected mode of delivery,
as no specific mode is recognized at this point in time.
When the command for stapling arrives from the Copier after the first sheet has reached the Copier
Pre-registration Sensor, the Stapler moves to the staple wait position to suit the appropriate stapling
position and paper size.
See Fig. 2-044 and later for an idea of the wait position according to the stapling mode.
a. Front Diagonal Stapling

The position is the same as the stapling position.
Stopper
Stapling Tray
Delivery
Direction Stopper
Guide Plate
Stapler
Fig. 2-044
b. Rear 1-point Stapling

The Stapler is kept in wait at the center position. The Stapler is moved to and from the stapling
position for each stapling operation.
Stopper
Stapling Position
Wait Position
Stapling Tray
Delivery Direction Stapler
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 2-045
Ver. 5.0 522 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
c. Rear Diagonal Stapling
For A4, B5 and LTR sizes, the Stapler is kept in wait toward the rear away from the stapling
position. The Stapler is moved to and from the stapling position for each stapling operation.
Stapler
Wait Position
Stapling Position
Stopper
Stapling Tray
Delivery Direction
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 2-046
d. 2-Point Stapling
The Stapler is kept in wait at the center of paper. Stapling occurs at two points, first at the rear and
then at the front.
Stopper
Stapling position
Wait position
Stapler
Stapling Tray
delivery direction
Stapling position
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 2-047
Ver. 5.0 523 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.2.7. Tray Operation
The Finisher has two delivery trays for normal delivery, each accepting sheets. Each tray is moved up and
down by the Tray Lift Motor (M5).
The position of tray is identified with reference to the number of clock pulses of the Tray Lift Motor Clock
Sensor 1/2 (PI9/PI19) coming from the Tray Home Position Sensor (PI8). The Finisher Controller PCB finds
out in which direction (up or down) the tray is moving based on combinations of pulses from the two clock
sensors.
The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Tray Lift Motor (M5) to return the tray to the home position at power-
on. If the tray is already at the home position, then (M5) is not turned on.
The Finisher Controller PCB moves up and down the tray selected by the Copier so that it is positioned at
the delivery slot.
The upper limit of the tray is detected by the Tray Upper Limit Detecting Switch (MS5). The Finisher
Controller PCB stops the drive (up) of the Tray Lift Motor (M5) as soon as the Tray Upper Limit Detecting
Switch turns on.
The height of the stack on the tray is identified by the Height Sensor (PS1), which measures its distance
from the top of the stack. The tray is moved down when the distance between the top of the stack and the
Delivery Assembly drops to a specific measurement.
The Finisher Controller PCB cuts off the +24V power of the Tray Lift Motor (M5) as soon as the Safety Zone
Detecting Switch (MS3) turns on while the Shutter and the Swing Guide are open, stopping the operation of
the Finisher.
Tray 1 Tray Guide
Tray Upper Limit

Detecting Switch
(MS5)
Tray 2
Encoder
Tray Lift Motor Clock
Sensor 2 (PI9)
Tray Lift Motor Clock

Sensor 1 (PI19)
Safety Zone Switch (MS3)
Tray Home Position
Tray Lift Motor (M5) Sensor (PI8)
Fig. 2-048
Ver. 5.0 524 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.2.8. Detecting the Height of Output on the Tray
1. Outline
The number of sheets delivered to the tray and the number of sets (number of stapling operations) are
stored in memory by the Finisher Controller PCB. The height of the paper checked by the Height
Sensor (PS1). See Table. 2-004 for the maximum loading capacity of each tray.
The Finisher Controller PCB stops operation when the conditions in Table. 2-004 occur, informing the
Copier that the tray is full.
Stacking mode
Non-staple sort Staple sort
Tray
Mixed Mixed
Small-size Large-size Small-size Large-size
sizes sizes
5.79 in 1.73 in 1.73 in 4.33 in 2.91 in 0.87 in
(147 mm) (44 mm) (44 mm) (110 mm) (74 mm) (22 mm)
Tray 1 high high high high high high
(1000 (500 (300 (750 sheets (500 sheets (150 sheets
sheets) sheets) sheets) / 30 sets) / 30 sets) /30 sets)
5.79 in 2.91 in 1.73 in 4.33 in 2.91 in 0.87 in
(147 mm) (74 mm) (44 mm) (110 mm) (74 mm) (22 mm)
Tray 2 high high high high high high
(1000 (500 (300 (750 sheets (500 sheets (150 sheets
sheets) sheets) sheets) / 30 sets) / 30 sets) / 30 sets)
Notes:
1. The capacity for the non-staple sort mode is approximate and computed based on 21 lbs
(80g/m2) paper.
2. Alignment for stacks containing 750 sheets or more is not guaranteed.
3. Stacking height specification is ±7 mm.
Caution:
1. The term “small-size” stands for A4, A5-R, B5, LTR, and INV-R.
2. The term “large-size” Stands for A3, A4-R, B4, B5-R, LGL, LDR, LTR-R, and FLS.
Table. 2-004
Height Sensor (PS1)

Paper
Fig. 2-049
Ver. 5.0 525 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.2.9. Shutter Operation
When the Top Output Tray reaches capacity, the output is then switched to another tray. Using the Tray Lift
Motor (M5) the Finisher Controller PCB closes the shutter mounted on the delivery slot before moving the
tray. This prevents the existing stack on the tray from interfering with the delivery slot, and prevents any
access by hand while the trays are moving.
The shutter moves up (to close) when the Second Feed Motor (M8) rotates counter-clockwise, and is held
in position when the motor stops. When the Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise once again, it
moves down (to open) to enable delivery.
When the shutter is held at the up position, claws slide out of the Swing Guide to engage the back of the
shutter. This way, the existing stack and the Swing Guide engage while the tray is moved, preventing the
guide from opening. The claws slide in when the shutter is moved down to release the engagement.
The upward movement of the shutter is monitored by the Shutter Closed Detecting Switch (MS4), and the
downward movement is monitored by the Shutter Open Sensor (PI5).
See the following diagrams for how these operations take place.
1. The Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise to move the shutter up.
M8 Second Feed Motor
Fig. 2-050
2. The Tray Lift Motor rotates, and the new tray moves to the stacking lower limit. The distance of
movement is detected by the Tray Shift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9/19).
M5
Tray Lift Motor
Fig. 2-051
Ver. 5.0 526 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. The Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise, and the shutter moves down.
M8 Second Feed Motor
Fig. 2-052
4. The Tray Lift Motor rotates, and the tray moves to suit the height of the stack. The appropriate height in
relation to the existing stack is checked by the Height Sensor (PS1).
Height Sensor
(S1)
M5
Tray Lift Motor
Fig. 2-053
Claw
Shutter
Claw
Shutter Closed
Detecting
Switch (MS4)
Shutter Open
Sensor
(PI5)
Second Feed Motor M8 One-Way

Cam
Fig. 2-054
Ver. 5.0 527 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Sequence Operations (shutter drive)
Move from Tray 1 to Tray 2
Shutter Tray Shutter Tray

closed moved opened moved
Second Feed Motor (M8)
Tray Lift Motor (M5)

Shutter Closed Detecting
Switch (MS4)
Shutter Open Sensor (PI5)

Correct height detected
Height Sensor (PS1)
Fig. 2-055
Ver. 5.0 528 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.2.10. Buffer Path Operation
This machine is provided with a buffer paper path for continuously receiving paper from the Copier during
stapling and stack job offset operation on the Stapling Tray. A maximum of three copies (three originals or
more in the staple mode) are wrapped around the Buffer Roller. During this time, stack job offset and
stapling are performed on the Stapling Tray.
The following shows operation on the buffer paper path.

1. When the first sheet arrives, the Buffer Inlet Solenoid (SL2) remains off.
The first sheet enters the buffer path.
OFF 1st Sheet

SL2
Buffer Inlet Solenoid

Fig. 2-056
2. When the leading edge of the sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17), the
Buffer Outlet Solenoid (SL3) turns on so as to cause the sheet to wrap around the Buffer Roller.
Buffer Outlet
Solenoid
ON
Buffer Path Inlet
SL3 Paper Sensor (PI17)
Fig. 2-057
3. When the leading edge of the sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14), the Buffer
Roller stops and waits for the second sheet.
1st Sheet
2nd Sheet
Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14)
Fig. 2-058
Ver. 5.0 529 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. When the second sheet arrives and its leading edge reaches the Inlet Sensor (PI1), the Buffer Roller
starts to operate once again.
1st Sheet
2nd Sheet
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-059
5. The Buffer Roller continues to rotate, and the 2nd sheet stacks on the 1st sheet.
1st 2nd Sheet
Sheet
Fig. 2-060
6. When the leading edge of the 2nd sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14), the
Buffer Roller stops and waits for the 3rd sheet.
1st 2nd Sheet
Sheet
3rd Sheet
Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14)
Fig. 2-061
Ver. 5.0 530 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7. When the 3rd sheet arrives and its leading edge reaches the Inlet Sensor (PI1), the Buffer Roller starts
to operate once again.
1st 2nd Sheet
Sheet
3rd Sheet
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-062
8. When the Buffer Roller starts to operate, the Buffer Outlet Solenoid (SL3) turns off so that the path is
directed in the direction of delivery. (The actual switch-over will occur after the trail edge of the first
sheet has moved past the flapper.)
Buffer Outlet 1st Sheet

Solenoid
OFF
SL3
3rd Sheet
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Fig. 2-063
9. The Buffer Roller continues to rotate, and all the sheets are fed together towards the Delivery Roller.
Fig. 2-064
Ver. 5.0 531 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.2.11. Detecting Jams
The following sensors are used to detect the presence/absence of paper and to make sure that
sheets are moved properly:
• Inlet Sensor (PI1)
• Delivery Sensor (PI3)
• Stapling Tray Sensor (PI4)
• Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14)
A jam is identified with reference to the presence/absence of paper at each specific sensor at the times
programmed in the memory of the Microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB.
When the CPU identifies a jam, it suspends the Finisher's delivery operation and informs the Copiers DC
controller of the presence of a jam. When all doors are closed after the paper jam is removed, the Buffer
Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17) checks whether or not paper is being detected in addition to the above four
sensors (Inlet Sensor, Delivery Sensor, Stapling Tray Sensor and Buffer Path Paper Sensor). If the sensors
detect paper, the Finisher Unit judges that paper jams have not completely been removed, and sends the
paper jam removal signal to the Copier again.
The Tray 1 Paper Sensor (PI11) and Tray 2 Paper Sensor (PI12) are not used to detect jams.
PI3
PI14
PI1
PI4
Fig. 2-065
No. Sensor Names

PI1 Inlet Sensor
PI3 Delivery Sensor
PI4 Stapler Tray Sensor
PI14 Buffer Path Paper Sensor
Table. 2-005
Ver. 5.0 532 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Inlet Sensor Delay Jam (11H)
The Inlet Sensor does not detect paper when feeding an equivalent of 400 mm from when the copier
delivery signal has been issued.
Copier delivery signal Copier delivery signal
Equivalent of 400 mm Equivalent of 400 mm
Jam check Jam check

Normal Jam
Inlet Sensor (PI1) Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Inlet Feed Motor (M9) Inlet Feed Motor (M9)
Fig. 2-066
2. Inlet Sensor Stationary Jam (21H)

The sheet does not move past the Inlet Sensor when an equivalent of twice the feeding length of the
sheet has been fed after the sensor turned on.
Equivalent of size x2 Equivalent of size x2
Jam check Jam check

Normal Jam
Inlet Feed Motor (M9) Inlet Feed Motor (M9)
Fig. 2-067
3. Buffer Path Paper Sensor Delay Jam (13H)

The Buffer Inlet Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 540 mm has been fed after the
Inlet Sensor turned on.

Jam check Jam check

Buffer Path Paper Normal Buffer Path Paper Jam
Sensor (PI14) Sensor (PI14)
First Feed Motor (M1) First Feed Motor (M1)
Fig. 2-068
Ver. 5.0 533 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Buffer Path Paper Sensor Stationary Jam (23H)
The sheet does not move past the Buffer Inlet Sensor when an equivalent of twice the feeding length of
the sheet has been fed after the sensor turned on.
Equivalent of Size x2 Equivalent of Size x2
Jam check Jam check

Buffer Path Paper Normal Buffer Path Paper Jam
Fig. 2-069
5. Delivery Sensor Delay Jam (14H)

a. Straight Path
The Delivery Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 285 mm has been fed after the

Jam check Jam check
Jam
Normal
Delivery Sensor (PI3) Delivery Sensor (PI3)
First Feed Motor First Feed Motor
(M1) (M1)
Second Feed Motor Second Feed Motor
(M8) (M8)
Fig. 2-070
b. Buffer Path
The Delivery Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 480 mm has been fed after the

Jam check Jam check
Normal Jam

(M8) (M8)
Fig. 2-071
Ver. 5.0 534 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6. Delivery Sensor Stationary Jam (24H)
The sheet does not move past the Delivery Sensor when an equivalent of twice the feeding length of
the sheet has been fed after the Delivery Sensor turned on.
Equivalent of size x2 Equivalent of size x2
Jam check Jam check

Normal Jam
(M8) (M8)
Delivery Motor (M2) Delivery Motor (M2)
Fig. 2-072
7. Stapling Tray Sensor Stationary Jam (25H)

The sheet does not move past the Stapling Tray Sensor 1 sec after the Delivery Motor (M2) turned on.
1 sec 1 sec
Jam check Jam check
Stapling Tray Normal Stapling Tray Jam
Fig. 2-073
8. Timing Jam (05H)

The Inlet Sensor (PI1) detects a sheet before the delivery signal is received from the Copier.
9. Staple Jam (05H)

When the Staple Motor (M6) is rotating clockwise, the Staple Home Position Sensor (PI22) does not
turn on within 0.5 sec. after it has turned off. However, the sensor turns on within 0.5 sec. after the
motor has been rotated counter-clockwise.
10. Power-On Jam (07H)

The Inlet Sensor (PI1), Delivery Sensor (PI3), Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI4) and/or Buffer Path Inlet
Paper Sensor (PI17) detects paper at power-on.
11. Door Open Jam (08H)

The Joint Sensor (PI15), Door Open Sensor (PI16) or Door Switch (MS1) detects the cover open
during operation (including the Upper Door Switch (MS1P) and Front Door Switch (MS2P) when the
optional punch unit is mounted).
12. Punch Jam (0AH)

The Punch Home Sensor (PI3P) does not turn on again within 200 misc. after turning off.
Ver. 5.0 535 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.2.3. Power Supply System
11.1.2.3.1. Outline
The Finisher Controller PCB is supplied with 24 VDC power when the Copier is turned on. The 24 VDC
power line is used to drive the motor and solenoids. It also serves for sensors and ICs on PCBs after being
converted to 5 VDC by the Regulator IC(Q14) on the Finisher Controller PCB. The 24 VDC power is also
used to feed power from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. The power is also
supplied to the Punch Driver PCB when the optional Punch Unit is mounted.
Some of the 24 VDC power used to drive motors is cut off when the Door Switch (MS1) is open.
The power to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB and the Punch Driver PCB, however, will not be cut off.
Fig. 2-074 is a block diagram showing the power supply system.
Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB Door Switch (MS1)
24V
Motor
24V
Motor
24V
Circuit Breaker 24V

Solenoid
(CB1)

Copier
5V
Sensors
(Q14)
5V
Regular IC Logic
Punch Driver PCB

(Punch Unit (optional))
Fig. 2-074
11.1.2.3.2. Protection Functions

The 24 VDC power line used to drive motors and solenoids is equipped with a Circuit Breaker (CB1) for
protection against overcurrent. The 24V line used to drive the First Feed Motor (M1), Alignment Motor (M3),
and Stapler Shift Motor (M4) are equipped with a fuse, which is designed to blow when an overcurrent
occurs.
Ver. 5.0 536 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3. Saddle Stitch Unit Operation
This chapter discusses the purpose and role of each of the saddle stitch functions, and the principles of
operation used for the saddle stitch mechanical and electrical systems. It also explains the timing at which
these systems are operated.
The symbol in drawings indicates transmission of mechanical drive, and signals marked by
In descriptions of digital circuits on the Saddle Stitch, "1" indicates a high signal voltage level, while "0"
indicates a low signal voltage level. Voltage values differ according to circuit.
A microprocessor is used in the Saddle Stitch to control all finishing functions.
diagrams indicating details from the output sections of major PCBs up the components.
11.1.3.1.1. Outline
The unit “stitches” (2 points) a stack of sheets delivered by the Finisher Unit and folds it in two for delivery.
All these operations are controlled by the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB in response to commands from the
Copier via the Finisher Unit.
Finisher Unit Control System
Guide Plate Drive

System
Paper Positioning
Plate Drive System
Alignment Drive
Control System
System
Saddle Stitch Drive
System
Delivery Drive System
Feed Drive System

Paper Pushing Plate
Drive System
Paper Folding Roller
Drive System
Fig. 3-001
Ver. 5.0 537 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.1.2. Electrical Circuitry
The sequence of operations used for the Saddle Stitch is controlled by the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.
The Saddle Stitch Controller PCB has a microprocessor. This microprocessor is used to control the
sequence of operations and to handle serial communications with the Finisher Controller PCB, driving
solenoids and motors in response to the various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB.
The Saddle Stitch Controller PCB is also used to communicate the state of various sensors and switches to
the Finisher Controller PCB in serial.
The functions of the major ICs mounted on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB are as follows:
• Q1
Controls the sequence of operations.
• Q2
Contains sequence programs.
• Q3
Controls the sequence of operations.
• Q4
Handles IPC communications.
Electrical Circuitry Block Diagram

Saddle Stitch
Sensor Controller PCB Motor
Q1 CPU Solenoid
Switch
Q2
ROM
Q3
RAM
Q4
Communications IC
Finisher Controller PCB Copier
Fig. 3-002
Ver. 5.0 538 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
PI1S J107-1 J11-15 +5V When the Paper

Paper Pushing
Plate Motor -2 -14 LUNGECLK pushing plate motor is
-3 -13 rotating, it pulsates
Clock Sensor
between “1” and “0”.
PI2S J104-3 J11-10 +5V
Front Door When the front door is
-1 -12 FDR
Open/Closed -2 -11 open, “0”.
Sensor
PI3S J103-3 J303-1 J203-3 J11-7 +5V
Delivery Cover -1 -3 -1 -9 EJCVR When the delivery
Sensor -2 -2 -2 -8 cover is open, “0”.
Paper Folding PI4S J102-1 J11-6 +5V When the Paper

Motor Clock -3 -5 FLDCLK folding motor is
-2 -4 rotating, it pulsates
Sensor
between “1” and “0”.
PI5S J101-3 J309-1 J209-3 J11-1 +5V
Alignment When the alignment
-1 -3 -1 -3 JOGHP
Plate Home -2 -2 -2 -2 plate is at home
Position Sensor position, “1”.
PI6S J100-3 -1 -3 -4 -3 J6-7 +5V When paper is present

J209A
Paper Tray
J502
J402
-1 -3 -1 -6 -1 -9 TRYPAR
Sensor -2 -2 -2 -5 -2 -8 on the tray, “1”.
J202A
J302
J202
PI7S J106-3 -1 J6-4

Paper -6 When the Paper
-1 -3 -4 -6 +5V
Positioning Plate -2 -2 -5 -5 PAPPOS
positioning plate is at
Home Position the home position
Sensor sensor, “1”.
Fig. 3-003
Ver. 5.0 539 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Inputs to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
Paper PI8S J105-3 -1 -3 J6-1 +5V When paper is
J201A
Positioning
J301
J201
-1 -3 -1 -3 PPOSPAR
Plate Paper -3 -2 -2 -2
present at the paper
Sensor positioning plate, “1”.
PI9S J124-3 J10-6 +5V
Inlet Cover -1 -8 INLTCVR
When the inlet cover
Sensor -2 -7 is closed, “1”.
PI11S J525-3 -2 -3 -2 -3 J9-1 +5V

Delivery When paper is
J425
J325
J225
J125
-1 -4 -1 -4 -1 -3 DELV
Sensor -2 -3 -2 -3 -2 -2 present in the delivery
sensor unit, “1”.
PI12S J126-3 J9-4 +5V
Crescent -1 -6 FDRLHP When the flag of the
Roller Phase -2 -5 crescent roller is at
Sensor the sensor, “1”.
PI13S J117-3 J9-7 +5V

Guide Home When the guide is at
-1 -9 GIDHP
Position -2 -8
home position, “1”.
Sensor
PI14S J128-3 J9-10 +5V

Paper When the paper
-1 -12 LUNGEHP
Pushing -2 -11
pushing plate is at
Plate Home home position, “1”.
Position Sensor
Paper PI15S J129-3 J9-13 +5V When the paper
Pushing -1 -15 LUNGETOP
-2 -14
pushing plate is at the
Plate Top leading edge, “1”.
Position Sensor
PI16S J131-3 J13-1 +5V When the saddle
Saddle Stitch -1 -3 STPLHP*
stitch unit is properly
Unit IN -2 -2
Sensor inserted, “0”.
PI17S J132-3 -1 -4 J13-4 +5V When paper is

J208A
Vertical Path
J308
J208
-1 -3 -2 -6 VPJM
Paper -2 -2 -3 -5
present in the vertical
Sensor path, “1”.
PI21S J130-3 J18-1 +5V

Paper Folding -2 -3 PAFLDHP* When the paper
Home -1 -2 folding roller is at
Position Sensor home position, “0”.
Fig. 3-004
Ver. 5.0 540 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Inputs to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
Paper Sensor PCB
PI18S
No. 1 Paper
Sensor When paper is present at
J123-5 -1 -5 J10-1
+5V the No.1 paper sensor, “1”.
PI19S -4 -2 -4 -2
J204A
1STPA
J304
J204
No. 2 Paper -3 -3 -3 -3 2NDPA When paper is present at
Sensor -2 -4 -2 -4 the No.2 paper sensor, “1”.
3RDPA
-1 -5 -1 -5
PI20S When paper is present at
No. 3 Paper the No.3 paper sensor, “1”.
Sensor
Saddle Stitch Unit (front)

Saddle Stitch
Home Position
Sensor (front) MS7S
J315-3 -5 -5 J8-3 STCHHP1* When the saddle stitch
Staple unit is at the home
J305
J120
Sensor (front) MS6S position for stitching,
-1 -7 -7 -1 HKEMP1
-2 -6 -6 -2
“0”.
When no staple is
present “0”.
JD2
Saddle Stitch Unit (rear) JD1
Saddle Stitch
Home Position
Sensor (rear) MS5S
J316-3 -5 -5 J8-10 When the saddle stitch
STCHHP2*
Staple unit is at the home
J306
J121
Sensor (rear) MS4S

position for stitching,
-1 -7 -7 -8 “0”.
HKEMP2
-2 -6 -6 -9
When no staple is
present, “0”.
Inlet Door Switch

+24V
N.O.
J4-1
MS1S
-2 INLTCVRMS When the inlet door
Front Door Switch is closed, “1”.
N.O.
J4-3
MS2S
-4
FDROPN
When the front
Delivery Door Switch door is closed, “1”.
N.O.
J4-5
J305
J205
MS3S -6 When the delivery

DELVMS
door is closed, “1”.
Fig. 3-005
Ver. 5.0 541 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Outputs from the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
No. 1 Paper Deflect Solenoid +24V
-1 -2 J15-1
When “0”, the
J118
SL1S
-2 -1 -2
solenoid turns ON.
FLPSL1*
No. 2 Paper Deflect Solenoid +24V

-1 -2 J15-3 When “0”, the
solenoid turns ON.
J117
SL2S
-2 -1 -4
FLPSL2*
Feed Plate Contact +24V

-1 -2 J15-5 When “0”, the
J116
SL4S
solenoid turns ON.
-2 -1 -6
RLNIPSL*
Feed Motor
-1 -4 J5-1
A
-2 -3 -2
The pulse signals
A* change according to the
J115A
M1S -3 -2 -3
B rotation of the motor.
-4 -1 -4
B*
Paper Folding Motor

J112-2 J4-8
The state (+ and -)
M2S changes according to
-1 -7 the rotation of the motor.
Guide Motor +24V

J119-5 J12-1
-4 -2 The pulse signals
B*
-3 -3 change according to the
M3S A* rotation of the motor.
-2 -4
B
-1 -5
A
+24V
Paper Positioning Plate Motor
J114-5 J7-6
-4 -7
The pulse signals
B* change according to the
-3 -8
M4S A* rotation of the motor.
-2 -9
B
-1 -10
A
Alignment Motor +24V
J113-5 J7-1
-4 -2 The pulse signals
B*
-3 -3 change according to the
M5S A*
-2 -4 rotation of the motor.
B
-1 -5
A
Fig. 3-006
Ver. 5.0 542 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. Outputs from the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
Saddle Stitch Unit (front)
J315-4 -4 J8-4
-5 -3 -5 The state (+ and -)
J305
J120
M7S
-6 -2 -6 changes according
-7 -1 -7 to the rotation of
Saddle Stitch
the motor.
motor (front)
JD2
JD1
Saddle Stitch Unit (rear)
J316-4 -4 J8-11
The state (+ and -)
-5 -3 -12 changes according
M6S
J306
J121
-6 -2 -13 to the rotation of
-7 -1 -14 the motor.
Saddle Stitch
motor (rear)
Paper Pushing Plate Motor

J108-1 J4-9 The state (+ and -)
M8S changes according
-2 -10 to the rotation of
the motor.

J400-1 J131-8 J2-1
-2 -7 -2 Communication line
-3 -6 -3
-4 -5 -4 +24V
-5 -4 -5
-6 -3 -6
+24V
J500-1 J132-1 J1-1
-2 -2 -2
Fig. 3-007
Ver. 5.0 543 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.2. Feeding / Drive System
11.1.3.2.1. Outline
The Saddle Stitch Unit aligns the sheets coming from the Finisher unit and stitches the resulting stack for
delivery to the Delivery Tray according to the commands coming from the Finisher Controller PCB.
The machine's operation consists of the following:

1. Receives the sheets
2. Aligns the sheets
3. Stitches the stack
4. Feeds the stack
5. Folds and delivers the stack
1. Receives the sheets
3. Stitches the stack
2. Align the sheets
5. Folds and
delivers the stack
4. Feeds the stack
Fig. 3-008
Ver. 5.0 544 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Receiving Sheets
The Saddle Stitch Unit receives the sheets from the Finisher unit and sends them to the vertical path in
a vertical orientation.
The vertical path assembly uses two deflecting plates and a paper positioning plate to position the
center of the stack so it matches the stapling / folding requirements.
Sheets coming later are output closer to the delivery slot, and the volume of paper that may be output
is as follows:
• 15 sheets (maximum of 14 sheets of 80g/m2 + 1 sheet of 133g/m2)
Direction of delivery
2nd Sheet
1st Sheet
Paper Positioning Plate
Fig. 3-009
2. Aligning the Sheets

The Alignment Plates operate to set the sheets in order each time a sheet of paper is sent to the
vertical path assembly. The Alignment Plates are mounted at the edge of the vertical path assembly.
The Alignment Plates also operate after stapling to prepare the stack for delivery.
Sheets
Alignment Plate Alignment Plate
Fig. 3-010
Ver. 5.0 545 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Stitching
When all the sheets are properly set in the vertical path assembly, the two stitchers, stitch the stack.
The Stitchers are positioned so that they face the center of a stack.
The two Stitchers are not operated simultaneously so as to prevent the paper from wrinkling between
the two staples and to limit the load on the power supply.
If only one sheet of paper arrives from the Copier, stitching does not take place and the sequence goes
to the next operation (stack feeding).
Stitcher
Staple
Fig. 3-011
Ver. 5.0 546 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Feeding the Stack
The unit folds the stitched stack of sheets, and then feeds them to the point of delivery. This point is
where the center of the stack (i.e., stapling position), matches the height of the Paper Pushing Plate
and the Paper Folding Roller nip. The stack is moved forward by operating the Paper Positioning Plate.
When the plate is operated, the Guide Plate which has been covering the Paper Folding Rollers, also
moves down so that the Paper Folding Rollers directly face the stack.
Paper Folding Roller
Paper Pushing Guide

Guide Plate
Fig. 3-012
5. Folding / Delivering the Stack

The Paper Pushing Plate pushes the center of the stack again to move it in the direction of the Paper
Folding Rollers. In response, the Paper Folding Rollers pick the stack along its center and folds it in
two. The Paper Folding Rollers together with the Delivery Roller then move the stack along to output it
on the Delivery Tray.
Paper Folding
Roller
Delivery Roller
Fig. 3-013
Ver. 5.0 547 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.3. Paper Output Mechanism
11.1.3.3.1. Outline
The paper output mechanism serves to keep a stack of sheets coming from the Finisher in place for the
next operation (stapling, folding). The paper inlet is equipped with the No. 1 Flapper and the No. 2 Flapper,
which operate to configure the paper path to suit the paper size. The Paper Positioning Plate is kept poised
at a predetermined location to suit the paper size. The Paper Positioning Plate is driven by the Paper
Positioning Plate Motor (M4S), and the position of the plate is identified in reference to the number of motor
pulses coming from the Paper Positioning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI7S).
A sheet moved by the Inlet Roller is handled by the Feed Rollers and the Crescent Roller and held in a
predetermined position. The Feed Plate moves the sheets by coming into contact with or moving away from
the sheets as needed. The Alignment Plates sets the stack in order each time a sheet is ejected. The
Alignment Plates are driven by the Alignment Motor (M5S), whose position is identified in reference to the
number of motor pulses coming from the Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5S).
To prevent interference between paper and the Paper Folding Rollers when the paper is being ejected, the
Folding Rollers are designed to be covered by a Guide Plate. The Guide Plate moves down before paper is
folded so as to expose the Paper Folding Rollers. The Inlet is equipped with the No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3
Paper Sensors (PI18S, PI19S, PI20S) each suited for a specific paper size, and the Paper Positioning Plate
is equipped with a Paper Positioning Plate Paper Sensor (PI8S).
Ver. 5.0 548 NOV 2004

Ver. 5.0
Feed motor drive signal
Guide motor drive signal
M3S
M1S
Stitcher motor drive signal (front/rear)
Alignment motor drive signal
M5S
M7S
M6S/
549
Paper pushing motor drive signal
Fig. 3-014
Paper folding motor drive signal
Paper positioning plate motor drive

signal
No. 1 paper deflecting plate
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB (2/2)

solenoid drive signal
FLPSL1
SL1S
M4S
M2S
M8S
No. 2 paper deflecting plate

solenoid drive signal FLPSL2
SL2S
PI4S
PI1S
Saddle Stitch
SL4S
Feed plate contact solenoid drive signal RLNIPSL

Paper folding motor clock signal FLDCLK
Controller PCB (1/2)
Paper pushing motor clock signal LUNGECLK
NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.0
Paper positioning plate home position detection signal PAPPOS
Paper positioning plate paper detection signal PPOSPAR
Paper tray detection signal TRYPAR
PI6S
Guide plate home position detection signal GIDHP
Crescent roller position detection signal FDRLHP
Delivery detection signal DEIV
PI11S
Paper folding home position detection signal PAFLDHP
PI7S
PI8S
550
PI21S
PI13S
PI12S
Vertical path paper detection signal VPJM
Fig. 3-015
PI17S
Paper pushing plate leading edge

position detection signal LUNGETOP PI15S
Paper pushing plate home position

PI19S
detection signal LUNGEHP

No. 3 paper detection signal 3RDPA

PI14S
PI20S

PI18S
No. 2 paper detection signal 2NDPA
No. 1 paper detection signal 1STPA

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.3.2. Controlling the Inlet Flappers
1. Outline
The two Flappers mounted at the Paper Inlet are operated to configure the feed path according to the
paper size.
The Flappers are used to enable the following:

a) To detect the passage of the trailing edge of the paper being detected by an appropriate Sensor.
b) To prevent the following sheet from butting against the top of the existing stack Table. 3-001 shows
the relationship between Sensors and paper sizes.
Ledger / 11 x 17 in
Sensor B4 LTR-R/A4-R
(A3 / 279 x 432 mm)
No. 1 Paper Sensor
Used Used Used
(PI18S)
No. 2 Paper Sensor
Not Used Used Used
(PI19S)
No. 3 Paper Sensor
Not Used Not Used Used
(PI20S)
Table. 3-001
Each Flapper is driven by its own solenoid.

Table. 3-002 shows the relationship between solenoids and paper sizes.
Ledger / 11 x 17 in
Solenoid B4 A4-R/LTR-R
(A3 / 279 x 432 mm)
No. 1 Paper Deflecting
OFF ON ON
Plate Solenoid (SL1S)
OFF OFF ON
Plate Solenoid (SL2S)
Table. 3-002
Ver. 5.0 551 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Ledger / 11 x 17 in (A3 / 279 x 432 mm)
No. 1 Paper Sensor

PI18S Passage of paper
SL1
Plate Solenoid OFF
No passage of paper
No. 2 paper
Sensor PI19S SL2
No. 2 Paper Deflecting OFF
Plate Solenoid No passage of paper
No. 3 Paper Sensor

PI20S
Top edge
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
Entry of 2nd sheet
Entry of 3rd sheet
Fig. 3-016
Ver. 5.0 552 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. B4 Paper Path (3 sheets)
No. 1 Paper Passage of paper

Sensor PI18S
SL1 ON
No. 2 Paper Passage of paper
Sensor PI19S
SL2
OFF
No passage of paper
No. 3 Paper
Sensor PI20S
PI18S
PI19S
Top edge
PI20S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
Entry of 1st sheet
Entry of 2nd sheet
Entry of 3rd sheet
Fig. 3-017
Ver. 5.0 553 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. A4-R / LTR-R Paper Path (3 sheets)
Passage of paper
No.1 Paper
Sensor PI18S
SL1
ON
No.2 Paper Passage of paper
Sensor PI19S
SL2
ON
Passage of paper
No.3 Paper
Sensor PI20S
PI18S
PI19S
Top edge
PI20S
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
Enty of 1st sheet
Enty of 2nd sheet
Enty of 3rd sheet
Fig. 3-018
Ver. 5.0 554 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.3.3. Controlling the Movement of Sheets
When the leading edge of a sheet has moved past the Inlet Flapper, the Intermediate Feed Roller and the
crescent Roller start to move the sheet forward.
The Intermediate Feed Roller is normally not in contact with the Path Bed. When the leading edge of a
sheet reaches the Intermediate Feed Roller contact section, the Feed Plate contact Solenoid (SL4S)
causes the roller to come into contact with the Path Bed so as to move the sheet. The contact is broken as
soon as the leading edge of the sheet reaches the Paper Positioning Plate. This series of operations is
executed each time a sheet arrives.
When the leading edge of the first sheet reaches the Paper Positioning Plate, the Paper Positioning Plate
Paper Sensor (PI18S) turns ON. The arrival of the second and subsequent sheets will not be checked since
the first sheet will still be over the sensor. The Crescent Roller keeps rotating while the sheets are being
output, butting the leading edge of each sheet against the Paper Positioning Plate, and ultimately, keeping
the leading edge of the stack in order.
The Alignment Plate Motor (M5S) drives the Alignment Plates for each sheet so as to set both left and right
edges of the sheet in proper alignment.
1. The Solenoid turns ON while the paper is being moved so that the Feed Plate comes into contact.
Intermediate Feed Roller
Feed Roller
M1S
ON
SL4S
Feed Plate Contact Solenoid
Fig. 3-019
2. The Solenoid turns OFF when the paper butts against the Paper Positioning Plate. The Feed Motor
continues to rotate.
M1S
OFF
SL4S
Fig. 3-020
Ver. 5.0 555 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. The Solenoid turns ON when the next sheet arrives, and the Feed Plate comes into contact.
M1S
ON
SL4S
Fig. 3-021
11.1.3.3.4. Aligning the Sheets

The Alignment Plate Motor (M5S) drives the Alignment Plates each time a sheet is ejected, setting both left
and right edges of the sheet in proper alignment. The Alignment Plate Motor is a 4-phase stepping motor.
The position of Alignment Plate is identified in reference to the number of motor pulses from the Alignment
Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5S).
The following briefly describes what takes place when the saddle stitching mechanism operates on two
sheets.
1. When the first sheet has been ejected, the Alignment Plates butts against the left and right edges of
the stack (first alignment). The Alignment Plates leave the home position in advance and remain
separated by 10 mm from the edges of the stack.
Sheets
Alignment Alignment
Plate Plate

Paper Position Sensor (PI5)
Positioning Plate
Fig. 3-022
2. The Alignment Plates move away from the edges of the stack over a short distance and then butt
against the edges once again (2nd alignment).
Fig. 3-023
Ver. 5.0 556 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. The Alignment Plates separate by 10 mm from the edges of the stack.
Fig. 3-024
4. When the following stack arrives, steps 1 through 3 above are repeated.
5. The Alignment Plates butt against the stack once again, during which, stitching takes place.
Fig. 3-025
6. The Alignment Plates separate by 10 mm from the edges of the stack, after which, folding and delivery
take place.
Fig. 3-026
7. When the first sheet of the following stack reaches the No. 1 Paper Sensor, the Guide moves to a
position 10 mm from the edge of the stack and prepares for the next alignment operation.
Fig. 3-027
Ver. 5.0 557 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
In case of 2 sheets:
Entry of Entry of 1st sheet of following
1st sheet 2nd sheet stack entry
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Position Sensor (PI5S)
Alignment Motor (M5S)

Motor (M4S)
: Alignment : Escape
[1] : Move to poised position

[2] : Stapling period
[3] : Paper folding/delivery period
[4] : Move to following stack size poised position
Fig. 3-028
Alignment Plate
Alignment Motor
M5S
Alignment Plate
Stack
Alignment Plate
Home Position
Paper
Sensor (PI5S)
Positioning Plate
Fig. 3-029
Ver. 5.0 558 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.3.5. Controlling the Phase of the Crescent Roller
1. Outline
If alignment was executed with the Crescent Roller in contact with the stack of sheets, the resulting
friction against the roller causes the stack to move inappropriately (fig. 3-030). To prevent this problem,
the phase of the roller is identified and used to determine the timing of alignment.
The phase of the Crescent Roller is identified by the Crescent Roller Phase Sensor (PI12S). The flag
for the Crescent Roller Phase Sensor is mounted to the Crescent Roller Shaft. The flag will leave the
Sensor while the Roller Shaft rotates, turning the Sensor ON or OFF, enabling the assumption that the
Crescent Roller is positioned at the opposite side of the stack (fig. 3-032). The Alignment Plates are
operated to correspond with this change in the state of the Sensor.
Crescent Roller Phase
Sensor (PI12S)
Alignment Plates
Flag
Crescent Roller
M1S
Feed Motor
Stack
Fig. 3-030
Alignment Plates
Crescent Roller Phase

Sensor (PI12S)
Sensor Flag
Crescent Roller
If the crescent roller was

in contact with the stack,
alignment operation
could be obstructed.
Fig. 3-031
Ver. 5.0 559 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Alignment operation is
started when the flag
has covered the sensor
and the crescent roller is
away from the stack.
Fig. 3-032
1st sheet 3rd sheet

2nd sheet 4th sheet
Feed motor
Crescent Roller Phase stops
Sensor (PI12S)
Alignment operation
Feed Motor (M1)
Fig. 3-033
Ver. 5.0 560 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.4. Stitching System
1. Outline
The stitching system “stitches” the center of an output stack with Staples.
To enable stitching at two locations on a stack, two Stitcher Units (front, rear) are used. Each Stitcher
Unit is equipped with a Stitcher Motor (M7S, M6S) for drive, a Stitcher Home Position Sensor (MS7S,
MS5S) for detection of position and a Staple Sensor (MS6S, MS4S) for detection of the presence/
absence of staples.
The Stitcher Base is designed so that it may be drawn out to the front from the Saddle Stitch for
replacement of the Staple Cartridge or removal of a staple jam. The Stitcher Unit in Sensor (PI16S) is
used to make sure that the Stitcher Base is properly fitted to the Saddle Stitcher.
Safety Switches are not mounted for the Saddle Stitch Unit (front, rear), as the location does not allow
access by the user.
Stitcher (rear)
Stitcher (front)
Stack
Fig. 3-034
Ver. 5.0 561 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Saddle Stitch Unit Operation
The Saddle Stitch Base Unit consists of two Stitchers and Stitcher Bases. The Stitchers are fixed in
position, and are not designed to slide or swing.
Stitching is executed by driving the Rotary Cam by the Stitcher Motor (M7S, M6S). The Front and Rear
Stitcher Units are operated with a time delay so as to prevent wrinkling of paper and to limit the load
applied to the Power Supply. (A time delay for initiating the Stitcher Motor startup current helps
decrease the load on the Power Supply.)
The Stitcher Home Position Sensor (MS7S, MS5S) is used to monitor the movement of the Rotary
Cam, enabling identification of individual stitcher operations. The presence/absence of staples inside
the Staple Cartridge fitted to the Stitcher is detected by the Staple Sensor (MS6S, MS4S).
The Alignment Plates keep both edges of the stack in place while stitching takes place.
Fig. 3-035
Stitcher Home Position Sensor

(front) (MS7S)
Stitcher Motor (front) (MS7)

Stitcher Home Position Sensor
(rear) (MS5S)
Stitcher Motor (rear) (M6S)
No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S)
Alignment Motor (M5S)
: Alignment : Escape
Fig. 3-036
Cam
Mount
Fig. 3-037
Ver. 5.0 562 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.5. Folding / Delivery System
1. Outline
The paper folding mechanism consists of a Guide Plate, Paper Folding Rollers, Paper Pushing Plate,
and Paper Positioning Plate.
The Guide Plate is used to cover the Folding Rollers while sheets are output as to prevent sheets from
coming into contact with the Folding Rollers during output. Before the stack is folded, the Guide Plate
moves down to enable the Folding Rollers to operate. The Folding Rollers are driven by the Paper
Folding Motor (M2S), and the drive of the motor is monitored by the Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor
(PI4S). The mechanism is also equipped with a Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI12S) for
detecting the position of the Paper Folding Rollers.
The Paper Pushing Plate is driven by the Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S), and the drive of the Paper
Pushing Plate Motor is monitored by the Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor (PI1S). The Paper
Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI14S) and the Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor
(PI15S) are used to detect the position of the Paper Pushing Plate.
After being folded in half by the Paper Folding Rollers, the stack is moved ahead by the Delivery Roller
for delivery. The Delivery Roller is driven by the Paper Folding Motor. The Delivery Sensor (PI11S) is
mounted to the Delivery Assembly to detect delivery of paper. The Tray Paper Sensor (PI6S) is used to
detect the presence/absence of paper on the tray, but does not detect jams. The Vertical Path Paper
Sensor (PI17S) serves to detect the presence of paper after jam removal.
2. Controlling the Movement of Stacks

When a stack has been stitched (2 points), the Paper Positioning Plate lowers so that the stack will
move to where the Paper Folding Rollers come into contact with the stack and where the Paper
Pushing Plate is located. The position of the Paper Positioning Plate is controlled in reference to the
number of motor pulses coming from the Paper Positioning Home Position Sensor (PI7S).
At the same time as the Paper Positioning Plate operates, the Guide Plate lowers so that folding may
take place.
Equivalent of specific
Stitcher ends number of pulses
Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4S)
Guide Motor (M3S)
Guide Plate Home Position Sensor

(PI13S)
Fig. 3-038
Ver. 5.0 563 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Folding a Stack
A stack is folded by the action of the Paper Folding Rollers and the Paper Pushing Plate. The Paper
Pushing Plate pushes against the center of a stack toward the roller contact section. The Paper
Pushing Plate starts at its home position and waits at the leading edge position until the stack has been
drawn to the Paper Folding Roller and is gripped for a length of 10 mm. When the Paper Folding Roller
has gripped the stack for a length about 10 mm, the Paper Pushing Plate Motor starts to rotate once
again, and the Paper Pushing Plate returns to its home position. The stack gripped in this way by the
Paper Folding Roller is drawn further by the Paper Folding Roller and then is moved by the Delivery
Roller to the Paper Tray.
Half of the peripheral area of the Paper Folding Rollers excluding the center part is punched out. This
punched out area only feeds the paper as the Paper Feeding Roller (lower) contacts the Paper
Feeding Roller (upper) only at the center of the roller to prevent the paper from wrinkling. As the Paper
Feeding Roller (lower) contacts the Paper Feeding Roller (upper) at their entire surfaces on the
remaining half of the peripheral area, paper folding starts from this half of the peripheral area, and
paper is fed while it is being folded. The stop position of the Paper Folding Rollers is in this half of the
peripheral area.
The paper folding start and stop positions on the Paper Folding Rollers is controlled according to the
motor lock signals from the Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI21S).
Paper Pushing Plate Top Paper Pushing Plate Home
Position Sensor (PI15S) Position Sensor (PI14S)
Paper Folding Roller (upper)
Sensor Flag
Paper Folding Home
Paper Pushing Plate
Position Sensor
(PI21S)
Paper Folding
Roller (lower)
M8S
M2S Paper Pushing

Plate Motor
Stack of Sheets Paper
Folding Motor
Fig. 3-039
Paper Pushing Plate Top Paper Pushing Plate Home

Sensor Flag
Paper Folding Home Paper Pushing Plate
Position Sensor
(PI21S)
M8S
M2S Paper Pushing

Plate Motor
Paper
Folding Motor
Fig. 3-040
Ver. 5.0 564 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[Paper folding start position]
Stack of Sheets
Paper Pushing Plate

Delivery Outlet
Paper Feed Inlet
Sensor Flag
Paper Folding
Home Position
Sensor (PI21S)
Paper folding/feeding is performed.
Paper feeding is performed.
Fig. 3-041
[Paper folding roller stop position]
Delivery outlet Paper feed inlet
Sensor flag
Paper folding
home position
sensor (PI21S)
Paper folding/feeding is performed.
Paper feeding is performed.
Fig. 3-042
Ver. 5.0 565 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paper Folding Motor (M2S)
Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S)
Paper Pushing Plate Home Position

Sensor (PI14S)
Equivalent of 10mm by paper folding motor
Paper Pushing Plate Top Position
Sensor (PI15S)
Delivery Sensor (PI11S)
Tray Paper Sensor (PI6S)
Paper Folding Home Position

Sensor (PI21S)
: Motor CW : Motor CCW
Fig. 3-043
4. Double Folding a Stack

To fold a stack consisting of 10 or more A4-R or LTR-R sheets, folding is executed twice for the same
sheet.
The Paper Folding Rollers rotate in reverse for an equivalent of 20 mm after gripping the stack for a
length of 20mm, enabling the Paper Folding Rollers to apply an increased degree of pressure along
the crease on the stack. Then, the Paper Folding Rollers rotate normally, and the Paper Pushing Plate
returns to its home position while the stack is being delivered. This way, a stack requiring a large force
may properly be folded with less pressure.
a. The Paper Pushing Plate pushes the stack in the direction of the Paper Folding Rollers.
Paper Pushing Plate
M2S
M8S
Paper Folding Motor
Paper Paper Pushing Plate Motor
Folding
Roller
Fig. 3-044
Ver. 5.0 566 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. The Paper Folding Rollers grip the stack for a length of about 20 mm.
20mm
(appro
x.)
M2S
Paper Folding Motor
Fig. 3-045
c. The Paper Folding Rollers rotate in reverse, pushing back the stack for a length of about 20 mm
(reverse feeding).
20mm
(appro
x .)
M2S
Paper Folding Motor
Fig. 3-046
Ver. 5.0 567 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
d. The Paper Folding Rollers rotate again, feeding out the stack. The Paper Pushing Plate returns to
its home position.
M2S
M8S
Paper Folding Motor
Fig. 3-047
Gripping of paper stack
Equivalent of 20mm Equivalent of 20mm (reverse feeding)
Paper Folding Motor (M2S)

(M8S)
Paper Pushing Plate Home
Paper Pushing Plate Top
Delivery Sensor (PI11S)
Tray Paper Sensor (PI6S)

Paper Folding Home
Fig. 3-048
Ver. 5.0 568 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.6. Checking for a Jam
1. Checking for a Jam
The Saddle Stitch Unit identifies any of the following conditions as a jam, and sends the jam signal to
the Copier. In response, the Copier may stop copying operation and indicate the presence of a jam on
the Control Panel.
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S
PI11S PI17S
PI15S
PI14S
Fig. 3-049
No. Sensor
PI11S Delivery Sensor
PI14S Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor
PI15S Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor
PI17S Vertical Path Paper Sensor
PI18S No. 1 Paper Sensor
Table. 3-003
Ver. 5.0 569 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Inlet Delay Jam (91H)
The No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) on the Paper Sensor PCB does not turn ON for a specific period of
time after the Inlet Sensor (PI1) of the Finisher turned ON.
T T
No. 1 Paper Sensor No. 1 Paper Sensor
(PI18S) (PI18S)
Jam
Feed Motor (M1S) Feed Motor (M1S) Load stops
100 (mm) 100 (mm)

T: T:
Delivery speed (mm/sec) Delivery speed (mm/sec)
Fig. 3-050
3. Inlet Stationary Jam (A1H)

The No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S), No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S), and No. 3 Paper Sensor (PI20S) on the
Paper Sensor PCB do not turn OFF when the stack has been fed for a specific period after the No. 1
Paper Sensor (PI18S) turns ON. The Paper Sensor used varies according to the paper size.
a. Ledger / 11 x 17 in (A3 / 279 x 432 mm) Stack
T
No. 1 Paper Sensor Normal No. 1 Paper Sensor T
(PI18S) (PI18S)
Jam
Feed Motor (M1S) Feed Motor (M1S)
T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm Load stops
T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm
Fig. 3-051
Ver. 5.0 570 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. B4 Stack
T T
No. 1 Paper Sensor Normal No. 1 Paper Sensor
(PI18S) Jam
(PI18S)
No. 2 Paper Sensor T T
Normal No. 2 Paper Sensor Jam
(PI19S) (PI19S)

T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm Load stops
T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm
Note:
The illustration shows two Sensors checking for jams. Single detection, however, uses only one
sensor.
Fig. 3-052
c. LTR-R / A4-R Stack

T T
No. 1 Paper Sensor Normal No. 1 Paper Sensor Jam
(PI18S) (PI18S)
No. 2 Paper Sensor T No. 2 Paper Sensor T
Normal Jam
(PI19S) (PI19S)
No. 3 Paper Sensor T No. 3 Paper Sensor T
Normal Jam
(PI20S) (PI20S)

Load stops
T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm
Note:
The illustration shows two Sensors checking for jams. Single detection, however, uses only one
sensor.
Fig. 3-053
4. Delivery Delay Jam (92H)

a. By Delivery Sensor
The Delivery Sensor (PI11S) does not turn ON within a specific period of time after the Paper
Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor has turned ON.
T T
Paper Pushing Plate Top Normal Paper Pushing Plate Top Jam
Delivery Sensor Delivery Sensor
(PI11S) (PI11S)
Paper Folding Motor Paper Folding Motor
(M2S) (M2S)
Load stops
T : Equivalent of 180 mm T : Equivalent of 180 mm
Fig. 3-054
Ver. 5.0 571 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. Delivery Stationary Jam (A2H)
a. By Vertical Path Paper Sensor
The Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) does not turn OFF within a specific period of time (feeding)
after the Delivery Sensor (PI11S) has turned ON, i.e., the trailing edge of the stack does not leave
the Vertical Path Paper Sensor.
T T
Vertical Path Paper Normal Vertical Path Paper Jam
Sensor (PI17S) Sensor (PI17S)
Delivery Sensor Delivery Sensor
(PI11S) (PI11S)
Paper Folding Motor Paper Folding Motor
(M2S) (M2S)
T : Feeding of
( Paper length
2 )
– 130 +50 mm T : Feeding of
( Paper length
2 )
– 130 +50 mm
Note:
The length 130 mm is the length of the feeding path from the Vertical Path Paper Sensor to the
Delivery Paper Sensor, while the length 50 mm is a margin.
Fig. 3-055
b. By Delivery Sensor
T T
Delivery Sensor Normal Delivery Sensor
Jam
(PI11S) (PI11S)
Paper Folding Motor Paper Folding Motor Load stops
(M2S) (M2S)
T : Feeding of
( Paper length
2 )
x 1.5 mm T : Feeding of
( Paper length
2 )
x 1.5 mm
Fig. 3-056
6. Power-ON Jam (87H)

Any of the No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S), No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S), No. 3 Paper Sensor (PI20S),
Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) and Delivery Sensor (PI11S) on the Paper Sensor PCB detects
paper at power-ON.
7. Door Open Jam (88H / 89H)

The Front Door Open/Closed Sensor (PI2S), Outlet Cover Sensor (PI3S), or Inlet Cover Sensor (PI9S)
finds that the Respective Cover is open during operation.
8. Stitcher Staple Jam (86H)

When the Stitcher Motor (M7S/M6S) is rotating clockwise, the Stitcher Home Position Sensor (MS7S/
MS5S) does not turn ON within 0.5 sec. after it has turned OFF. In addition, the sensor turns ON within
0.5 sec after the motor has been rotated counter-clockwise.
Reference:
When all doors are closed after the user has removed the jam, the Saddle Stitch Unit checks
whether the Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) has detected the presence of paper. If the sensor
has detected paper, the unit will identify the condition as being faulty jam removal and send the jam
signal to the Copier once again.
Ver. 5.0 572 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.3.7. Power Supply
1. Outline
When the Copier Power Switch is turned ON, two 24V Power Lines are supplied by the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Of the two 24V Lines, one is used to Drive Solenoids. The 24V Power from the Finisher Controller PCB
to solenoids does not pass through any interlocks. The 24V Power to motors, on the other hand, will
not be supplied if any of the three door Switches is open.
The 24V line is used for the generation of 5V power intended for sensors.
Inlet Door Front Door Delivery
Switch Switch Door Switch
(MS1S) (MS2S) (MS3S)
24V 24V
Motor systems
Circuit
Breaker
(CB1) 24V
Solenoids
Finisher Saddle Stitch

Controller Controller PCB 5V
Sensors
PCB
(Q6)
24VR 5V
Regulator IC Logic
Fig. 3-057
2. Protective Mechanisms
The 24VDC Power Supply used for motors and solenoids is equipped with a Circuit Breaker (CB1).
The 24V Power Supply used to drive the Feed Motor (M1S), Alignment Motor (M5S), and the Paper
Positioning Plate Motor (M4S) is equipped with a fuse designed to blow when an overcurrent flows.
Ver. 5.0 573 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.4. Punch Unit (Option) Operation
This chapter discusses the purpose and role of each of the Punch Unit's functions, and the principles of
operation used for the Punch Unit mechanical and electrical systems. It also explains the timing at which
these systems are operated.
The symbol in drawings indicates transmission of mechanical drive, and signals marked by
In descriptions of digital circuits on the Punch Unit, "1" indicates a high signal voltage level, while "0"
indicates a low signal voltage level. Voltage values differ according to the circuits.
diagrams indicating details from the output sections of major PCBs up the components.
11.1.4.1.1. Outline
The Punch Unit (option) is attached on the feed path between the Copier and the Finisher.
The Punch Unit does not have a paper feed mechanism. Paper from the Copier is fed by feed drive from the
Finisher via the Punch Unit. When the trailing edge of the paper from the Copier reaches the Punch Unit,
the paper stops temporarily, and the Punch Shaft is rotated to punch the trailing edge of the paper. This
operation is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB, and each of the parts on the Finisher is driven by the
Punch Driver PCB.
Punch
drive
system
Finisher unit control system
Punch Driver PCB
Horizontal
registration
drive
system
Fig. 4-001
Ver. 5.0 574 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.4.1.2. Inputs to and Outputs from Punch Driver PCB
1. Inputs to Punch Driver PCB (1/3)
Punch Driver PCB
PI1P J102-3 J1A-1
Horizontal -2 -2
+5V When the punch
Registration -1 -3
SREGHP slide unit is at the
Home home position, “1”.
Position Sensor
PI2P J105-1 J1B-6 When the punch
Punch +5V
-2 -5 motor is rotating
Motor PUNCHCLK
-3 -4 oscillates between
Clock
Sensor “1” and “0”.
PI3P J104-2 J1B-2
Punch +5V When the hole
Home -3 -3 puncher is at the
PUNCHHP*
Position -1 -1
home position, “0”.
System
Upper +24V
N.O.
Door J5-1
When the upper
Switch MS1P
door is closed, “1”.
-2
UDROPN
Front N.O.
Door J5-3 When the front door
Switch MS2P is closed, “1”.
-4
FDROPN
Photosensor PCB
+5V +5V
J115-2 J7-12
PTR1 -3 -11
SREG1*
PTR2 -4 -10 When a paper is
SREG2*
PTR3 -5 -9
SREG3* detected, “0”.
PTR4 -6 -8
SREG4*
PTR5 -7 -7
PAEND*
-1 -13
Fig. 4-002
Ver. 5.0 575 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Outputs from Punch Driver PCB (2/3)
Punch Driver PCB
LED PCB
LED5 J116-6 J7-1
LEDON5
LED4 -5 -2
LEDON4
LED3 -4 -3 When “1”, LED is
LEDON3
LED2 -3 -4
LEDON2 ON.
LED1 -2 -5
LEDON1
-1 -6
Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB +5V
LED6 J1B-8
LEDON*
PTR6 7
When light is blocked, “0”.

9
DFULL
10
Punch Motor
J114-1 J2-1
According to direcrtion of
M1P motor rotation, changes
-2 -2 between + and -.
+24V
Horizontal Registration
Motor J114-5 J1A-7
-4 -8 B*
-3 -9 A* The pulse signal is
M2P
-2 -10 B switched according to
-1 -11 A
motor rotation.
Fig. 4-003
Ver. 5.0 576 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Outputs from Punch Driver PCB (3/3)
Punch Driver PCB

J21A-14 J3A-1
-13 -2
-12 -3
-11 -4
-10 -5
-9 -6
-8 -7
-7 -8
-6 -9
-5 -10
-4 -11
-3 -12
-2 -13
-1 -14
J21B-13 J3B-2
-12 -3
-11 -4
-10 -5
-9 -6
-8 -7
-7 -8
-6 -9
-5 -10
-4 -11
-3 -12
-2 -13
-1 -14
+24V
J4-4
-3
-2
-1
Fig. 4-004
Ver. 5.0 577 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.4.2. Punch Operation
11.1.4.2.1. Outline
The Punch Unit is located on the feed path between the Copier and the Finisher, and successively punches
holes when the paper stops temporarily. When the trailing edge of the paper reaches the Punch Unit, the
Inlet Roller of the Finisher Unit temporarily stops the paper and holes are punched on the trailing edge of
the paper.
The Punch Unit consists of a die and hole puncher (punch blade). The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch
Motor (M1P). The Hole Puncher is attached to the eccentric cam of the Punch Shaft, and rotary action of
the Punch Shaft is converted to reciprocal motion to perform punching.
Punch Motor (M1P) is a DC Motor. The home position of the Punch Shaft is detected by Punch Home
Position Sensor (PI3P). To stop the DC Punch Motor accurately at its home position, the Punch Motor Clock
Sensor (PI2P) counts a predetermined number of clock pulses to stop the Punch Motor. A single punch
operation is performed by rotating the Punch Shaft 180° from its home position. Five Light Sensors
(Photosensor PCB) are located at the upper side of the inlet paper feed path of the Punch Unit and a set of
five LEDs (LED PCB) are located at the lower side. These Sensors and LEDs function as five Sensors. The
Frontmost Sensor (LED5, PTR5) are the Trailing Edge Sensor and are used for detecting the trailing edge
of the paper. The remaining Sensor (LED1 to LED4, PTR1 to PTR4) are Horizontal Registration Sensors,
and are used for detecting the inner position of the paper for determining the hole punching position.
The Punch Motor, Punch Unit and above Sensors comprise the Punch Slide Unit. This Unit moves
backwards and forwards according to the size of the paper. Backward and forward movement is driven by
the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the
Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI1P). The Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is a 2-
phase stepping motor.
The Punch Motor and Horizontal Registration Motor is driven by the Punch Driver PCB according to control
signals from the Finisher Controller PCB.
Punch scraps caused by punching are stored in the Punch Trash Box. Detection of the paper scraps in the
Punch Trash Box is performed by a deflective sensor (LED6 and PTR6 on the Punch Trash Box Full
Detector PCB unit).
Ver. 5.0 578 NOV 2004

Ver. 5.0
Trailing edge detection signal PAEND
Scrap full detection signal
579
(LED6, PTR6) DFULL
Horizontal registration detection signal
Fig. 4-005
(LED1 to 4, PTR1 to 4) SREG1 to 4
Punch Driver PCB (2/2)

Punch Driver PCB (1/2)
4
4
Punch motor (M1P) drive signal

3
2
2
Punch motor clock (PI2P)

LED1
PTR1
Horizontal registration home position (PI1P) detection signal PUNCHCLK

detection signal SREGHP
Punch home position (PI3P)

Horizontal registration motor (M2P) drive signal detection signal PUNCHHP
NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.4.2.2. Punch Operation
The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). The hole puncher home position is detected by the
Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P).
In all there are four types of Punch Unit depending on the destination: 2- hole type (Punch Unit A1), 2-/3-
hole Dual Use (Punch Unit B1), and two 4-hole types (Punch Unit C1 and Punch Unit D1). With the 2-hole
and 4-hole types, the Hole Puncher is moved reciprocally and punching is performed by the Punch Shaft
rotating 180° from its home position. With the 2-/3-hole dual use type, too, the Hole Puncher is moved
reciprocally and punching is performed by the Punch Shaft rotating 180° from its home position. However,
half of the peripheral area of the Punch Shaft can be used as a 2-hole type while the other half can be as a
3-hole type. Whether the Punch Shaft is used as a 2-hole punch or a 3-hole punch depends on the
instructions from the Copier.
1. 2- / 4-hole Type
At the home position, the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. Punching of the first sheet ends when
the Punch Shaft has rotated in the forward direction 180°, and the state of the Punch Home Position
Sensor has changed from OFF to ON. Punching of the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has
rotated in the reverse direction 180°, and the state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed
from OFF to ON.
The following illustrates when two sheets are punched.
a. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the first sheet.
Punch Home Sensor Flag
Position
Sensor (PI3P)
Punch Shaft
Eccentric Hole
Cam Puncher
Die Sheet
Die Punch Trash
[punch shaft [punch shaft is [punch shaft is rotated
stopped/home rotated 90 in the 180 in the forward
position] forward direction/ direction/punch
hole punched] operation completed]
Fig. 4-006
Ver. 5.0 580 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the second sheet.

stopped/home rotated 90° in the 180° in the reverse
position] reverse direction/ direction/punch
Fig. 4-007
Ver. 5.0 581 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. 2- / 3-hole Dual Use Type
At the home position, the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. To punch two holes, punching of the first
sheet ends when the punch shaft half peripheral area has rotated in the forward direction 180°, and the
state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed from OFF to ON. At this time, the 3-hole
puncher is moved reciprocally in the escape direction (hole puncher rise direction) on the remaining
half peripheral area on the Punch Shaft.
Punching of the second sheet ends when the punch shaft half peripheral area has rotated in the
reverse direction 180°, and the state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed from OFF to
ON. Also at this time, the 3-hole puncher is moved reciprocally in the escape direction (hole puncher
rise direction) on the remaining half peripheral area on the Punch Shaft. To punch three holes, the 2-
Hole Puncher is moved reciprocally in the escape direction (hole puncher rise direction).
The following illustrates punching when two sheets are punched with two holes.
a. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the first sheet.
Punch Home Sensor Flag
Position
Sensor (PI3P)
Punch Shaft
Eccentric Hole
Cam Puncher
Die Sheet
Die Punch Trash
stopped/home rotated 90 in the 180 in the forward
position] forward direction/ direction/punch
Fig. 4-008
When two holes are punched, the 3-Hole Puncher is fed reciprocally in the escape direction (hole
puncher rise direction) as shown below.

position] reverse direction/ direction/hole puncher
hole puncher rises returns to original
to topmost position] position]
Fig. 4-009
Ver. 5.0 582 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the second sheet.

position] reverse direction/ direction/punch
Fig. 4-010
When two holes are punched, the 3-Hole Puncher is fed reciprocally in the escape direction (hole
puncher rise direction) as shown below.

position] reverse direction/ direction/hole puncher
hole puncher rises returns to original
to topmost position] position]
Fig. 4-011
Ver. 5.0 583 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.4.2.3. Horizontal Registration Operation
Horizontal registration drive of the Punch Slide Unit is performed by the Horizontal Registration Motor
(M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration Home Position
Sensor (PI1P). The Punch Slide Unit detects the trailing edge of the paper by the Trailing Edge Sensor
(LED5, PTR5) and Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 to 4, SREG1 to 4) and is moved to the trailing
edge position matched to the paper size.
The following shows horizontal registration operation.

1. When the leading edge of the paper from the Copier is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5,
PTR5) on the Punch Unit, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) starts to move the Punch Slide Unit
towards the front.
Punch Slide Unit

Motor (M2P)
Trailing Edge
Detection Sensor
(LED5, PTR5)
Sheet Delivery
Direction
Sheet
Fig. 4-012
2. After the Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 to 4, PTR1 to 4) detect the edge of the paper at its
inner side in keeping with the paper size signals arriving from the Copier, the Horizontal Registration
Motor (M2P) drives the Punch Slide Unit to a predetermined position further towards the front, and
stops the Unit at this position.
Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 (LED1, PTR1):

detects the edge of A3, A4, LTR and 279mm x
432mm (11" x 17") papers
detects the edge of B4, B5, LTR-R, and LGL
papers.
detects the edge of A4-R paper
Horizontal Registration Sensor 4(LED4, PTR4):

detects the edge of B5-R paper
Fig. 4-013
Ver. 5.0 584 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. When the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PTR5) detects the trailing edge of the paper, drive of the Inlet
Feed Motor (M9) and First Feed Motor (M1) on the Finisher is stopped to stop paper feed. Next, the
Punch Motor (M1P) is driven to punch the holes.
Punch
Fig. 4-014
4. When the punching operation ends, drive of the Inlet Feed Motor (M9) and First Motor (M1) on the
Finisher is started, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is operated in the reverse direction, and the
Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position where it comes to a stop.
5. Even if paper to be punched continues to arrive, the Punch Slide Unit returns to its home position for
each arriving sheet, and steps 1 to 4 are repeated.
Inlet Feed Motor (M9)
Trailing Edge Detection Sensor

(LED5, PTR5)
Horizontal Registration Sensor

(LED1 to 4, PTR1 to 4)
Horizontal Registration Motor

(M2P)
Horizontal Registration Home

Position Sensor (PI1P)
Punch Motor (M1P)
Punch Home Position Sensor

(PI3P)
Fig. 4-015
Ver. 5.0 585 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Outline
24V power and 5V power are supplied from the Finisher Controller PCB when the Power Switch on the
Copier is turned ON.
24V power is used for driving Motors, while 5V power is used for driving Sensors and the ICs on the
Punch Driver PCB.
24V power to the Motors is not supplied when either of the two Door Switches on the Punch Unit is
open.
Upper Door Front Door
Switch Switch
(MS1P) (MS2P)
24V 24V
Motor System
Punch Driver PCB

Finisher
Controller 5V
PCB Sensor
5V 5V
Logic
Fig. 4-016
2. Protection Function
The 24V power supplies for the Punch Motor (M1P) and Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) are
equipped with a fuse designed to blow when an overcurrent flows.
Ver. 5.0 586 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.5. Mechanical Construction
11.1.5.1. Finisher Unit
This chapter describes the mechanical features, operations, disassembly and reassembly procedures.
Be sure to observe the following points when disassembling and reassembling the Machine:
1. Before disassembling or reassembling, be sure to unplug the Power Plug from the wall outlet.
2. Reassemble parts in reverse order, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Reassemble Screws to their original locations, ensuring their correct length and diameter.
4. As a rule, do not operate the Machine with any parts removed.
11.1.5.1.1. External Components
Figures in parentheses ( ) indicate the number of
[4] Upper Door Assembly
Tray [1] [2] Rear
mounting Screws.
Cover (3)
[3]
Front
Door
Fig. 5-001
1. Removing of the Front Door Assembly.

(1) Open the Front Door Assembly [1].
[5] [4]
(2) Remove the Screw [2], and remove the Bushing
[3] (center).
(3) Remove the Screw [4], and remove the Bushing
(top) [5]. Then, remove the Front Door Assembly.
[1]
[3] [2]
Fig. 5-002
Ver. 5.0 587 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Removing the Rear Cover.
(1) Open the Upper Door Assembly [1].

[1] Upper
Door (2) Remove the 3 Screws [2], and lift the Rear Cover
Assembly [3] to remove.
[3]
Rear [2] Screws
Cover
Fig. 5-003
3. Removing the Upper Door Assembly.
(1) Open the Upper Door Assembly [1].

[1]
(2) Remove the 2 Claws [2], and remove the Upper
Door Assembly.
[2]
Fig. 5-004
4. Removing the Front Cover.
[1]
(2) Remove 1 Screw [2], and remove the Front
Cover [3].
[2] [3]
Fig. 5-005
Ver. 5.0 588 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. Removing the Tray Rack Assembly.
[2] (1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See Fig. 5-003.)

(2) Remove the Rear Lower Cover also.
(See Fig. 5-031.)
(3) Disconnect the J201 [1] Connector, Ground Wire
[2], and release the Harness Stop [3].
[1] [3]
Fig. 5-006
(4) Remove the Slide Guide [4].
[6] [4] [5]
(5) Remove the End Cap (F) [5] and End Cap (R)
[6].
(6) Carefully lift the Tray Rack Assembly [7] to
remove.
[7]
Fig. 5-007
Caution:
[1] When reinstalling the Tray Rack Assembly back
into the Finisher Assembly, before inserting it, be
sure to release the Tray Lift Motor Gear Clutch [1]
with a Screwdriver or a similar object. Take extra
care during this operation.
Fig. 5-008
Ver. 5.0 589 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6. Removing the Grate-Sharped Upper Guide.
(1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See Fig. 5-003.)

[4] [1]
(2) Release the Tray Lift Motor Gear Clutch with a
Screwdriver or a similar object while supporting
the Tray Rack Assembly, to its lowest position.
[2] (See Fig. 5-008.)
[2] (3) Remove the Slide Guide [1].
(4) Remove 5 Screws [2] (M4).
(5) Remove 1 Screw [3] (M3), and remove the
[3] Grate-Shaped Upper Guide [4].
Fig. 5-009
7. Removing the Grate-Sharped Lower Guide.
(1) Remove the Tray Rack Assembly.

(See Fig. 5-006.)
(2) Remove 3 Screws [1] (M4).
(3) Remove 3 Screws [2] (M3), and open the Grate-
[1] Shaped Lower Guide [3] to the front.
[2]
[3]
Fig. 5-010
(4) Free the Harness [5] from the Harness Stop [4].
[6] (5) Disconnect 2 Connectors [6], and remove the
[4] Grate-Sharped Lower Guide [3].
[5]
[3]
Fig. 5-011
Ver. 5.0 590 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8. Removing the Right Guide Assembly.

(3) Remove 5 Screws [2], and remove the Right
[1] [3] Guide Assembly [3].
[2]
[2]
Fig. 5-012
11.1.5.1.2. Feeding System

1. Removing the Swing Unit.
(1) Remove the Tray Rack Assembly.

[1] [4] (See Fig. 5-006.)
(2) Remove the Grate-Shaped Upper Guide.
(See Fig. 5-009.)
(3) Remove the Grate-Shaped Lower Guide.
(See Fig. 5-010.)
(4) Remove the Harness from the 2 Harness Stops
[1], and disconnect the 4 Connectors [2].
(5) Remove 1 Screw [3], and remove the Stapler
[3]
[2] Stay Holder [4].
Fig. 5-013
(6) Open the Front Cover [5] and push the Stapler
[5] [6] Unit [6] backward as illustrated.
Fig. 5-014
Ver. 5.0 591 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7) Remove the RB Link Spring [7].
[7]
Fig. 5-015
(8) Remove 3 Screws [8], and draw out the Swing
[8] [9]
Unit [9] towards you.
[8]
[8]
Fig. 5-016
Ver. 5.0 592 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Removing the Feed Drive Unit.
(1) Remove the Finisher Controller PCB.

[1] [2] [1]
(See Fig. 5-028.)
(2) Remove the Harness Leads [2] from 2 Harness
Stops [1] at the PCB Base, and disconnect
2 Connectors [3].
[3]
Fig. 5-017
[6]
(3) Remove the Ground Lead [4] and 3 Screws [5],
and pull down the PCB [6] towards you.
[5]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 5-018
(4) Remove the Harness Leads [8] from 2 Edge
Saddles [7], and remove the PCB Base.
[8]
[7] [7]
Fig. 5-019
(5) Remove 3 Screws [9], and remove the Feed
[10] [9] Drive Unit [10].
[9]
[9]
Fig. 5-020
Ver. 5.0 593 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Caution:
Before re-attaching the Feed Drive Unit back on
the Finisher Unit, loosen the Move Gear Stop
Screw [11] to relieve the tension, and then fasten
the Screw after attaching the Feed Drive Unit.
The Move Gear Attachment must be adjusted
when removing and attaching the Swing Unit.
If you forget to fasten the Screw, the Gear Teeth
may disengage, resulting in defective feed.
[11]
Fig. 5-021
Ver. 5.0 594 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Removing the Buffer Roller Assembly.
(1) Remove the Finisher Controller PCB.

(See Fig. 5-027.)
[1] [3]
(2) Remove the Feed Drive Unit. (See Fig. 5-021.)
(3) Remove 1 Screw [1], and remove the Guide
Support Plate Assembly [2] to draw out the
[2] Harness Leads [3] towards the Buffer Roller
Assembly side.
Fig. 5-022
(4) Remove the Front Cover. (See Fig. 5-005.)
[5] (5) Remove 1 Screw [4], and remove the Guide
Support Plate Assembly [5]. Then remove the
[4] Buffer Roller Assembly [6].
[5]
Fig. 5-023
4. Removing the Stapler.
(1) Open the Front Cover, and move the Stapler

[2]
Assembly to the front.
(2) Remove 1 Screw.
(3) Turn the Green Tab to the left, pull out the
Stapler Assembly [2] forward and lift it up by
rotating upwards.
Fig. 5-024
Ver. 5.0 595 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Disconnect 1 Connector [4] of the Stapler
Assembly [3] and remove the Earth Ground.
[4] [3]
Fig. 5-025
(5) Remove 2 Screws (M4) used to hold the Stapler
[5] Cover.
Stapler
Cover
Fig. 5-026
11.1.5.1.3. PCBs
1. Removing the Finisher Controller PCB.
[2] (1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See Fig. 5-003.)

(2) Disconnect 16 Connectors [1].
(3) Remove 4 Screws [2], and remove the Finisher
Controller PCB [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-027
Ver. 5.0 596 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.5.2. Saddle Stitch Unit
Figures in parentheses ( ) indicates the number of
mounting Screws
[1]
Rear
Lower
Cover
(4)
Front Lower Door [2]
Fig. 5-028
1. Removing the Front Lower Door Assembly.
(1) Open the Lower Door Assembly [1].

(2) Remove 1 Screw [2] and remove the Bushing
[3], and then remove the Front Lower Door
Assembly.
[3] [2]
[1]
Fig. 5-029
2. Removing the Rear Lower Cover.

(1) Remove 4 Screws [1], and remove the Rear
Lower Cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
Fig. 5-030
Ver. 5.0 597 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Removing Front Inside Cover.
(1) Open the Front Lower Door Assembly [1].

(2) Remove 1 Screw [2], and remove the Folding
[4] Roller Knob [3].
(3) Remove 5 Screws [4], and remove the Front
Inside Cover [5].
[1]
[5]
[4] [2]
[3]
[4]
Fig. 5-031
4. Removing the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly.

(1) Lift up the Open / Close Lever [2] of the Saddle
[1] [2] Delivery Tray Assembly [1], and open the Saddle
Delivery Tray Assembly.
Fig. 5-032
(2) Remove the Door Shaft [3] in the direction of the
arrow, and draw out towards the front of the
Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly [4].
[4]
[3]
Fig. 5-033
Ver. 5.0 598 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3) Remove the Harness Leads from the Harness
[5] [7]
Stop [5] and Edge Saddle [6].
(4) Disconnect 2 Connectors [7], and remove the
Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly [8].
[6] [8]
Fig. 5-034
5. Removing Upper Delivery Guide Assembly.

[2] (See Fig. 5-010.)
(2) Remove 2 Screws [1] and Ground Lead [2], and
remove the Upper Delivery Guide Assembly [3].
[1]
[3]
[1]
Fig. 5-035
6. Removing the PCB Cover.
(1) Remove 4 Screws [4], and remove the PCB

[1] Cover [2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-036
Ver. 5.0 599 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.5.2.2. Saddle Unit
1. Removing the Saddle Unit.

(See Fig. 5-010.)
(2) Remove the Right Guide Assembly.
(See Fig. 5-012.)
(3) Remove the Front Lower Door Assembly.
(See Fig. 5-030.)
[1]
(4) Remove the Rear Lower Cover.
[2] (See Fig. 5-031.)
(5) Remove the Front Inside Cover.
(See Fig. 5-032.)
(6) Remove the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly.
(See Fig. 5-033.)
(7) Remove the Upper Delivery Guide.
(See Fig. 5-036.)
(8) Remove the PCB Cover. (See Fig. 5-037.)
(9) Disconnect 2 Connectors [1] and remove
2 Screws [2].
Fig. 5-037
(10) Remove Harness Stop [3] and Harness Lead [4].
[4]
[3]
Fig. 5-038
(11) Remove 1 Screw [5].
[5]
Fig. 5-039
Ver. 5.0 600 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(12) Remove 2 Screws [6], and remove the Saddle
[6] [6]
Stitch Unit [7] by moving it in the upward
direction.
[7]
Fig. 5-040
Caution:
When removing the Saddle Unit from the Finisher
Unit Body, prevent the Timing Belt [8] from
catching on the Communications Cable Bracket
[9].
[8]
[9]
Fig. 5-041
Ver. 5.0 601 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Removing the Paper Folding Roller.
(1) Remove theFront Lower Door Assembly.

(See Fig. 5-030.)
(See Fig. 5-032.)
(3) Remove the Upper Delivery Guide.
(See Fig. 5-036.)
[1]
Fig. 5-042
(6) Disconnect 2 Connectors [2], remove 3 Screws
[4] [3], and remove the Paper Pushing Motor Mount
[4].
[2] [3] [2]
Fig. 5-043
(7) Remove the Tension Springs (front [5], rear [6]).
[5]
Fig. 5-044
[6]
Fig. 5-045
Ver. 5.0 602 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8) Remove 2 C-Rings [7], and remove the Sensor
Flag [8] and 2 Bearings [9] on the rear.
[9]
[7]
[8]
Fig. 5-046
(9) Remove 2 C-Rings [10], and remove the 2 Gears
[11] on the front.
[10] [11]
Fig. 5-047
(10) Remove 2 Bearings [12].
[12]
Fig. 5-048
(11) Open the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly [13].
[16]
(12) Remove 2 Screws [14], and remove the 2
Alignment Plates [15].
(13) Slide the Paper Folding Roller [16] to the front,
and pull it out in the delivery direction.
[14] [14]
[15]
[13]
Fig. 5-049
Ver. 5.0 603 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Installing the Paper Folding Roller.
(1) Attach the Gear [2] so that the grooved section

[1] on the Gear is facing the grooved section [1]
on the Paper Folding Roller to align the phases.
[1]
Fig. 5-050
4. Removing the Stitcher Mount Unit.

(See Fig. 5-032.)
(2) Remove 1 E-Ring [1], Roller [2], and Shaft [3].
[2] [1] [3]
Fig. 5-051
(3) Pull out the Stitcher Mount Unit [4] to the front.
[4]
Fig. 5-052
Ver. 5.0 604 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. Adjusting the Stitcher Position.
(1) Remove the Front Lower Door. (See Fig. 5-030.)

[1]
(See Fig. 5-032.)
(3) Open the Front Door Assembly.
(4) Pull out the Saddle Stitch Mount Unit to the front,
then pull out the Saddle Stitch towards you and
then pull the Saddle Stitch down.
(5) Remove 3 Screws [1], and remove the Saddle
Stitch Mount Unit Cover [2].
[2]
Fig. 5-053
(6) Remove the Saddle Stitch Positioning Tool [3]
[3] from the back of the Cover.
Fig. 5-054
(7) If you must adjust the Front Saddle Stitch,
remove the Center Guide Plate [5] and Front
Guide Plate [4] (one screw each). If you must
adjust the Rear Saddle Stitch, remove the
Center Guide Plate [5] and the Rear Guide Plate
[6] (one screw each).
[6] [5] [4]
Fig. 5-055
(8) If you must adjust the Front Saddle Stitch,
[9] loosen 2 Screws [8] on the Saddle Stitch Mount
[8]
[7].
If you must adjust the Rear Saddle Stitch, loosen
2 Screws [9].
[7]
Fig. 5-056
Ver. 5.0 605 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(9) Insert the Tool [10] into the Staple Slot of the
Saddle Stitch [9].
[9]
[10]
Fig. 5-057
(10) Shift down the Saddle Stitch, and turn the Saddle
Stitch Gear so that the boss on the Tool [11] and
the recess of the Mount Match. Then, tighten the
Screws [12] on the Mount to fix them in place.
[11]
[12]
Fig. 5-058
Ver. 5.0 606 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6. Removing the Positioning Plate Unit.
(1) Remove the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.

[2] (See Fig. 5-063.)
[3]
[6] (2) Disconnect 2 Connectors [1], remove 3 Harness
[1]
Stops [2], and remove the Harness Leads [3]
from the 2 Edge Saddles [4].
(3) Remove 2 Screws [5], slide the Positioning Plate
Unit [6] once towards the front and remove from
the rear side.
[5] [4]
Fig. 5-059
7. Removing the No. 1 and No. 2 Paper Deflecting Plates.

(See Fig. 5-031.)
[1] [2] (3) Remove the Claw [1] of the No. 1 Deflect Plate
Bushing, and pull out the No. 1 Deflect Plate
Shaft [2] toward the rear. (The procedure is the
same for the No. 2 Paper Deflect Plate.)
Fig. 5-060
(4) After detaching the Front Shaft of the No. 1
[3] Paper Deflect Plate [3] from the Front Side Plate,
remove the No. 1 Paper Deflect Plate.
1 2
Fig. 5-061
Ver. 5.0 607 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.5.2.3. PCBs
1. Removing the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

[1] [2] [3] [2] [2] [1] (2) Remove 4 Screws [1] and 14 Connectors [2],
and remove the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB [3].
[1] [2] [1]
Fig. 5-062
11.1.5.3. Punch Unit (Optional)

Figures in parentheses ( ) indicate the number of
Upper Cover (3) [1]
[2] mounting Screws.
Upper
Cover 2
[4]
Front Right Guide
Door [3] Assembly (5)
Fig. 5-063
1. Removing the Right Guide Assembly.

(1) Remove 5 Screws [1], and remove the Right
[2] Guide Assembly [2].
[1]
[1]
Fig. 5-064
Ver. 5.0 608 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Removing the Upper Cover.
(1) Open the Front Door [1], remove 3 Screws [2],

[4] and slacken the inner side of the Right Cover [3]
to remove the Upper Cover [4] from the hook.
[4]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 5-065
11.1.5.3.2. Puncher Driver System

1. Removing the Punch Motor.
(1) Remove the Upper Cover. (See Fig. 5-066.)

[1] (2) Disconnect 1 Connector [1].
[3]
[2]
(3) Remove 2 Screws [2], and remove the Punch
Motor [3].
Fig. 5-066
2. Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor.

[2] (See Fig. 5-065.)
(2) Disconnect 1 Connector [1].
(3) Remove 2 Screws [2], and slide the Horizontal
Registration Motor [3] in the direction of the
arrow.
[1] [3]
Fig. 5-067
Ver. 5.0 609 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Removing the Punch Slide Unit.
Caution:
Exercise care as the Punch Slide Unit opens when
it is removed.
[2] If necessary, perform operations with the Punch
Slide unit open.
[2] (1) Remove the Right Guide Assembly.
[3] (See Fig. 5-065.)
[1]
[3] (3) Remove the Photosensor PCB. (See Fig. 5-078.)
[1] (4) Hold the 2 Lock-type Tie Wraps [1] between your
[4] fingers to remove. (Exercise care not to cut the
[3] Tie Wraps when removing.)
(6) Remove Harness Lead [4] from the 3 Harness
Stops [3].
Fig. 5-068
(7) Remove the E-Ring [5], and Puncher Spring [6].
[6]
[5]
Fig. 5-069
Ver. 5.0 610 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8) Rotate the Gear [7] in the direction of the arrow,
and slide the Punch Slide Unit Assembly [8] to
[8] the front.
[7]
Fig. 5-070
(9) Disconnect the Connector [9], and remove 1
[11] Screw [10] and Horizontal Registration Home
Position Sensor [11].
[10]
[9]
Fig. 5-071
(10) Remove 2 Screws [12] and Sensor Base [13].
[12]
[13]
[12]
Fig. 5-072
Ver. 5.0 611 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(11) Disconnect the Connector [14].
[14]
Fig. 5-073
(12) Rotate the Gear [7] in the direction of the arrow,
and slide the Punch Slide Unit Assembly [8]
[8]
away from you.
[7]
Fig. 5-074
(13) Lift up the front side of the Punch Slide Unit
Assembly, and then slide the Unit in the direction
of the arrow to remove.
Fig. 5-075
Ver. 5.0 612 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.5.3.3. PCBs
1. Removing the LED PCB.
(1) Remove the Punch Slide Unit Assembly.

(See Fig. 5-069.)
(2) Remove 1 Screw [1] and the LED PCB [2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-076
2. Removing the Photosensor PCB.

[4] [3] (2) Remove 2 Screws [1], and remove the Sensor
Plate [2].
(3) Disconnect the Connector [2], and remove the
Photosensor PCB [4].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-077
3. Removing the Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB Unit.

[3]
(See Fig. 5-065.)
(2) Remove 1 Screw [1], disconnect the Connector
[2], and remove the Punch Trash Box Full
Detector PCB Unit [3].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 5-078
Ver. 5.0 613 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Removing the Punch Driver PCB.
(1) Remove the Punch Unit from the Finisher.

[3] [1]
(2) Remove 4 Screws [1], disconnect 4 Connectors
[2], and remove the Punch Driver PCB [3].
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
Fig. 5-079
Ver. 5.0 614 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.6. Preventive Maintenance
11.1.6.1. Unit Breakdown
11.1.6.1.1. Finisher Unit
The Finisher Unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a fixed schedule. Please refer to the section
noted for its estimated parts replacement.
11.1.6.1.2. Saddle Stitch Unit

The Saddle Stitch Unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.
11.1.6.1.3. Punch Unit (option)

The Punch Unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.
11.1.6.2. PM Items
Some of the parts of the Machine may need to be replaced once or more times because of wear or tear
during the machine’s warranty period. Replace them as necessary.
No. Name Parts No. Qty. Estimated Life Remarks

5,000 operations /
1 Stapler FB2-9999-000 1 500,000 operations
cartridge
2 Feed belt FB4-6656-000 2 1,000,000 copies
FG5-8178-000 2 Paddle unit
3 Paddle 1,000,000 copies
FB4-5825-000 4 Paddle rubber only

2,000 operations /
1 Stitch FB3-7860-000 2 200,000 operations
cartridge

FG6-6156-000 2-hole (Punch Unit)
1 Punch Slide Unit FG6-6157-000 1 1,000,000 operations 2-/3-hole (Punch Unit)
FG6-6158-000 4-hole (Punch Unit)
Ver. 5.0 615 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.6.3. PM Interval
Item Interval Work Remarks

Feed Belt
When preventive Use moist cloth
Paddle
maintenance is performed Cleaning
Transmission Sensor on the copier.
Use dry cloth
(Punch Unit) (option)
Ver. 5.0 616 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.7. Troubleshooting
11.1.7.1. Adjustments
11.1.7.1.1. Electrical System (finisher unit)
1. Adjusting the Height Sensor (PS1)
Perform the following adjustments whenever you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB or the
Height Sensor (PS1).
a. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-001
b. Make sure that there is no unwanted paper on the Trays.

c. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
This causes the Finisher to execute automatic adjustment, in which the Tray Unit will shift Tray 1,
and Tray 2 in sequence.
• At the end of adjustment, Trays will return to their home positions.
• During adjustment, LED1 flashes. At the end of adjustment, LED1 turns and remains ON.
• If automatic adjustment fails, the mechanism stops while the Tray in question is being adjusted. (At
the same time, LED1 turns OFF.)
d. Shift all bits on SW3 to OFF, and turn OFF the Copier once.
2. Adjusting the Alignment Position

If you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB or if an alignment fault occurs, adjust as follows.
Performing the steps will affect all paper sizes.
a. Remove the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit.
b. Set SW3 of the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-002
c. If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. If you are using LTR paper,
press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
• Pressing SW1 or 2 will open the Swing Guide and cause the Alignment Plate to move to A4/LTR
positions.
d. Place 10 sheets of A4/LTR paper between the Alignment Plate and the Guide Plate, butting them
against the stoppers.
e. Press SW1 or SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB, and butt the Alignment Plate against the sheets.
• Pressing SW1 will shift the Alignment Plate to the front in 0.35 mm increments.
• Pressing SW2 will shift the Alignment Plate to the rear in 0.35 mm increments.
Ver. 5.0 617 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Alignment Plate
Shift by SW2
A4/LTR Paper Shift by SW1
Stopper
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 7-003
f. Press SW1 and SW2 simultaneously to store the adjustment value.

(This will lower the Swinging Guide.)
g. Shift all bits of SW3 to OFF, and install the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit.
3. Adjusting the Staple Position (stapler movement range)

Adjust as follows if you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB. Performing the steps will affect all
paper sizes and all stapling positions.
a. Remove the Rear Cover from the Finisher Unit.
b. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-004
c. If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. If you are using LTR paper,
press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
• Pressing SW1 or 2 will open the Swing Guide and cause the feed belt to rotate.
d. Within 5 sec. after pressing the Switch, place one sheet of A4/LTR paper between the Alignment
Plate and the Guide Plate, butting it against the stoppers.
• When the Finisher detects the paper, it will lower the Swing Guide and execute stapling (rear, 1-
position). Take out the stapled paper manually as delivery will not be executed.
Ver. 5.0 618 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Alignment Stapler
Plate
Stopper
Stopper
Guide Plate
Fig. 7-005
e. If the stapling position is correct, set all bits on SW3 to OFF to end the adjustments. If you need to
change the stapling position, on the other hand, go to the next step.
f. To suit the position of the staple on the paper, press SW1 or SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB as
many times as necessary.
• Pressing SW1 will shift the stapling position to the front in 0.3 mm increments.
• Pressing SW2 will shift the stapling position to the rear in 0.3 mm increments.
290±2mm (A4)/
273±2mm (LTR)
Staple
Paper
Shift by Shift by
SW2 SW1 Feeding direction
Fig. 7-006
g. Press SW1 and SW2 simultaneously.

• This will open the Swing Guide, and cause the feed belt to rotate. Placement of one sheet of A4/
LTR paper will cause the Finisher to start stapling.
h. Check the stapling position. If good, set all bits of SW3 to OFF. If re-adjustments are necessary, go
back to step f).
Caution:
The settings held by the Finisher Controller PCB are changed as soon as SW1 or SW2 is
pressed. As such, to recover the previous settings after the press, you must press the other of
the two Switches as many times as you pressed previously.
Ver. 5.0 619 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Adjusting the Buffer Roller Winding Amount
Perform this adjustment in the following instances:
(1) When the Finisher Controller PCB or the EEPROM (Q2) on the Finisher Controller PCB has been
replaced.
(2) When something causes the winding amount to fluctuate
The “winding amount” is the amount of difference between the 1st and 2nd sheets wound onto the
Buffer Roller Device in the freed direction.
2nd sheet
Paper exit direction
3rd sheet
Winding
amount 1st sheet
Fig. 7-007
a. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-008
b. Turn the Copier OFF then back ON again.

c. Set the mode setting on the Copier to “1” and the number of originals (A4 or LTR) to “3” in the staple
mode.
d. Press the copy start key.
• Copying starts, three sheets for the first copy are output as a stack on the Staple Tray, and copying
stops with the copies held at the Exit Roller.
e. Remove the stack of sheets from the Finisher exit taking care to prevent the offset of the output
sheets from changing.
Ver. 5.0 620 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
f. Measure the winding amount (shift) of the stack of sheets, and compare this amount with the
standard amounts.
• This amount should be measured at the center of the paper leading edge.
1st sheet and 2nd sheet: 0± 1mm

1st sheet and 3rd sheet: 4mm or less
2nd sheet and 3rd sheet: 4mm or less
Paper exit direction

3rd sheet
2nd sheet
1st sheet
Fig. 7-009
g. If the amount is within the standard, turn the Copier OFF, and then set all bits of SW3 to OFF. If the
amount is outside the standard, perform the following.
h. Turn the Copier OFF, and set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated. If EEPROM (Q2) on
the Finisher Controller PCB has been replaced, proceed to step j).
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-010
i. Turn the Copier ON, and then press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
• The current setting values are displayed at LED1.
Adjustment value 0 Lights for 1 second (once)

Adjustment value +N Blinks (lights for 0.2 second) for N times.
Lights for 1 second (once), and blinks
Adjustment value –N
(lights for 0.2 second) for N times.
The adjustment width is 0.72 mm for each N=1.
Table 7-001
j. Turn the Copier OFF, and then set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-011
Ver. 5.0 621 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
k. Press SW1 or SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB as necessary.
• Each press of SW1 increments the winding amount in 0.72 mm increments.
• Each press of SW2 decrements the winding amount in 0.72 mm increments.
Paper exit
direction 3rd sheet
2nd sheet
1st sheet
Movement of Movement of
direction of direction of
1st sheet by SW2 1st sheet by SW1
Fig. 7-012
l. Repeat steps a. though f. twice. Check that the winding amount is within the standard in both times.
m. Turn the Copier OFF, and set all bits of SW3 to OFF.
This completes the adjustment.
5. Setting the Upward Curling Sheet Mode

(1) Outline
Upward curling of sheets stacked on the Tray sometimes increases depending on the state of the
copy paper. If this happens, the stacked sheets are pushed out by subsequent output sheets. This
sometimes increases the alignment deviation.
See the stacking example below.
Subsequent output Subsequent output
sheets contact stacked sheets contact stacked
sheets sheets.
Fig. 7-013
If this happens:
a. Turn over the paper in the Paper Tray and load the paper again.
If upward curling is larger than before the paper was loaded again, return the paper in the Paper
Tray to its original orientation.
From here on, too, if upward curling is excessive, resulting in stacked sheets being pushed out
by subsequent output sheets, try setting the upward curling sheet mode as indicated.
Ver. 5.0 622 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(2) Setting the upward curling sheet mode
a. Turn the Copier OFF.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-014
c. Turn the copier ON.

• When the Machine enters the upward curling sheet mode, the stop position of the Stacking Tray
is lowered by about 15 mm when stack sheets are output to prevent subsequent output sheets
from catching on the sheets on the Stacking Tray.
• After setting this mode, if sheets with little curling or downward curling sheets are output and
stacked, the Stacking Tray is lowered too far. For this reason, sheets are sometimes stacked
away from the stacking wall. (Fig 7-015). Set this mode after carefully checking the type of paper
used by the customer.
Fig. 7-015
6. Setting the Downward Curling Sheet Mode

(1) Outline
Downward curling of sheets stacked on the tray sometimes increases depending on the state of the
copy paper, If this happens, the sheets are sometimes stacked away from the stacking wall when
they are output and stacked on the Stacking Tray.
See the stacking example below.
Fig. 7-016
Ver. 5.0 623 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
If this happens:
a. Turn over the paper in the Paper Tray and load the paper again.
If downward curling is larger than before the paper was loaded again, return the paper in the
Paper Tray to its original orientation.
From here on, too, if downward curling is excessive, resulting in output sheets being stacked
incorrectly, try setting the downward curling sheet mode as indicated.
(2) Setting the downward curling sheet mode

a. Turn the Copier OFF.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-017
c. Turn the Copier ON.

• When the Machine enters the downward curling sheet mode, the stop position of the Stacking
Tray is raised by about 10mm when stack sheets are output so that output sheets are stacked
without being away from the stacking wall.
• After setting this mode, if sheets with little curling or upward curling sheets are output and
stacked, the stacking tray is raised too far. For this reason, sheets are stacked pressed out by
subsequent output sheets. (Fig. 7-018). Set this mode after carefully checking the type of paper
used by the customer.
Fig. 7-018
Ver. 5.0 624 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.7.1.2. Electrical System (Saddle Stitch Unit)
1. Adjusting the Folding Position
The folding position is adjusted by changing the settings of bits 6 through 8 of DIPSW1 on the Saddle
Stitch Controller PCB to match the stitching position (i.e., adjusting the distance over which the Paper
Positioning Plate is moved to the folding position from the stitching position.)
If you have replaced the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB, be sure to set the new DIPSW1 so that the
settings will be the same as those on the old DIPSW1. If, for any reason, you must change the
following position, perform the following steps:
a. Remove the PCB cover, and set bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB as
indicated.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Do not change bits 5 through 8.
Fig. 7-019
b. Remove the Rear Cover of the Saddle Stitch Unit, and tape the actuator of the Inlet Cover Open
Sensor (PI9S) and the Inlet Cover Open Detection Switch (MS1S) of the Saddle Stitch Unit in place.
c. Press SW2 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB so that the Feed Motor (M1S) starts to rotate.
d. Open the Inlet Cover, and insert two sheets of A3 or LDR paper. (Push them in by hand until the
leading edge of the sheets butts against the Paper Positioning Plate.)
Ledger / A3 Paper
Insert direction
Fig. 7-020
Ver. 5.0 625 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Sheets Mark
Fig. 7-021
e. Close the Inlet Door while holding it down with your hand.
f. Press SW2 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.
• The Saddle Stitch Unit will “stitch” the sheets, and fold and deliver the stack automatically.
g. Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position and the folding position. Then, perform
“positive width adjustment” or “negative width adjustment” to suit the relationship between the
stitching position and the folding position.
• If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform “positive width adjustment.”
• If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform “negative width adjustment.”
Positive Width Negative Width
Adjustment Adjustment
Folding position Stitching position

Stitching position Folding position
Unit: mm Unit: mm
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide “+1 mm”. Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide “-0.5 mm”.
Fig. 7-022
h. Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on DIPSW1 referring to Table 7-001 below.
• If the width adjustment is “0”,
The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change.
• If for “positive width adjustment,”
Set DIPSW1 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropriate
setting in Table 7-001 is provided.
For instance, if the DIPSW1 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set DIPSW1 to reflect –
2.
• If for “negative width adjustment”
Set DIPSW1 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting is
provided.
For instance, if the DIPSW1 is currently set to –1 and the interval is +0.5 mm, set DIPSW1 to reflect
+1.
Ver. 5.0 626 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DIPSW1 Bit Settings Settings

Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 (in units of 0.5 mm)
OFF ON ON +3
OFF ON OFF +2
OFF OFF ON +1
OFF OFF OFF 0
ON OFF ON -1
ON ON OFF -2
ON ON ON -3
Do not touch the following:
Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8

ON OFF OFF
Table 7-002
i. Set bits 1 through 4 on DIPSW1 to OFF.
11.1.7.1.3. Electrical System (Punch Unit (option))

1. Sensor Output Adjustment
Perform this adjustment when the Punch Driver PCB, Transmission Sensor (Photosensor PCB / LED
PCB) or Reflection Sensor (Punch Trash Box Full Detection PCB unit) has been replaced.
b. Set bits 1 through 6 of DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-024

Pressing this Switch automatically adjusts sensor output.
d. Set all bits on DIPSW2 to OFF.
2. Registering the Number of Punch Holes

This operation registers which Punch Unit is attached to the IC on the Punch Driver PCB so that the
Punch Unit can be identified by the Finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed when
the Punch Driver PCB has been replaced. This operation, however, is not necessary on the Japanese
market as the 2-Hole Puncher is already registered as the default for new service parts.
The following describes a reference example of how to register the number of punch holes.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-025
c. Set bits 7 and 8 on DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB to match the number of punch holes of
Ver. 5.0 627 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
the attached punch unit according to Table 7-002.
DIPSW3 bit settings

Number of Punch Holes
Bit 7 Bit 8
2-hole (punch Unit) OFF OFF
2-/3-hole (Punch Unit) OFF OFF
4-hole (punch Unit) ON OFF
Table 7-003
• As the number of punch holes on domestic models is two, bits 7 and 8 of DIPSW3 are both OFF.
Settings for overseas models are provided for reference.
d. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. Press SW2 when setting a 2-/3- hole model (Punch
Unit-B1). Pressing this switch registers the number of punch holes to the Punch Driver PCB.
e. Set all bits on DIPSW3 to OFF.
3. Checking the Sensitivity Level of the Transmission Sensor

How dirty the Transmission Sensor (Photosensor PCB/LED PCB) can be checked by the number of
times that LED1 on the Finisher Controller PCB lights. For this reason, how dirty the Transmission
Sensor is serves as a guide for when to perform cleaning during periodic maintenance.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 7-026

Pressing this Switch lights LED1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated in Table 7-003 so that
you can check the sensitivity level of the Transmission Sensor.
Sensitivity Level Number of LED Lightings

Sensor not dirty Lit 1X
Sensor slightly dirty Lit 2X
Sensor dirty Lit 3X
Table 7-004
d. Set all bits of DIPSW3 of OFF.
Ver. 5.0 628 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.7.2. Component Location
1. Sensors
PI18
PI17
PS1
PI10
PI14 PI20
PI6
PI3 PI8 PI19
PI4
PI16
PI11 PI15
PI1
PI9
PI12
PI5 PI21
PI22
PI7
Fig. 7-027
Ver. 5.0 629 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Name Notation Function

Photo-interrupter PI1 Detects paper in the inlet area
PI3 Detects paper in the delivery area
PI4 Detects paper on the Stapling Tray
PI5 Detects the state (open) of the Shutter
PI6 Detects alignment plate at home position
PI7 Detects the stapler at home position
PI8 Detects the tray at home position
PI10 Detects delivery motor clock pulses
PI11 Detects paper on Tray 1
PI12 Detects paper on Tray 2
PI14 Detects paper in the buffer path
PI15 Detects the finisher joint
PI16 Detects the state (open) of the Door
PI17 Detects paper at the inlet to the buffer path
PI18 Detects the state (open) of the Swing Guide
PI19 Detects tray lift motor clock pulses 1 (on sensor PCB)
PI9 Detects tray lift motor clock pulses 2 (on sensor PCB)
PI20 Detects swing guide clock
PI21 Detects edging of staples (inside stapler)
PI22 Detects staple drive home position (inside stapler)
Height Sensor PS1 Detects the height of the stack on the tray
Table. 7-005
Ver. 5.0 630 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Micro Switches
MS5
MS2
MS6
MS1 MS3
MS4
MS8
Fig. 7-028

Micro Switches MS1 Detects the state (open) of the front door and the upper
door
MS2 Detects the state (closed) of the swing guide 1
MS3 Detects the safety range
MS4 Detects the state (closed) of the shutter
MS5 Detects the tray at the upper limit
MS6 Detects the state (closed) of the swing guide 2
MS8 Detects the presence/absence of staples (inside stapler)
Table 7-006
Ver. 5.0 631 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Motors
M8
M7
M1
M2 M9
M3
M5
M4
M6
Fig. 7-029

Motor M1 First Feed motor
M2 Delivery motor
M3 Alignment motor
M4 Stapler shift motor
M5 Tray lift motor
M6 Staple motor
M7 Swing motor
M8 Second feed motor
M9 Inlet feed motor
Table 7-007
Ver. 5.0 632 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Solenoids
SL5 SL2
SL3 SL1
SL7
SL6
Fig. 7-030

Solenoid SL1 Flapper solenoid
SL2 Buffer inlet solenoid
SL3 Buffer outlet solenoid
SL5 Paddle solenoid
SL6 Escape solenoid
SL7 Belt escape solenoid
Table 7-008
Ver. 5.0 633 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. PCBs
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
Fig. 7-031
Reference Name
[1] Finisher Controller PCB
[2] Relay PCB 4
[3] Relay PCB 3
[4] Sensor PCB
Tabl3 7-009
Ver. 5.0 634 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Photo-interrupters
PI18S
PI19S
PI20S PI16S
PI9S
PI21S PI14S
PI2S
PI15S
PI11S PI17S PI12S
PI6S
PI13S
PI5S
PI8S
PI3S
PI7S
PI4S
PI1S
Fig. 7-032
Ver. 5.0 635 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Photo-interrupter PI1S Detects clock pulses from the paper pushing plate motor
PI2S Detects the state (open) of the front door
PI3S Detects the state (open) of the delivery cover
PI4S Detects clock pulses from the paper folding motor
PI5S Detects the alignment plates at home position
PI6S Detects paper on the tray
PI7S Detects paper positioning plate at home position
PI8S Detects paper on the paper positioning plate
PI9S Detects the state (open) of the inlet cover
PI11S Detects paper in the delivery area
PI12S Detects the phase of the crescent roller
PI13S Detects the guide at home position
PI14S Detects the paper pushing plate at home position
PI15S Detects the paper pushing plate at top position
PI16S Detects the state (in) of the stitcher unit
PI17S Detects paper in the vertical path
PI18S Detects paper (No.1; on paper sensor PCB)
PI19S Detects paper (No. 2; on paper sensor PCB)
PI20S Detects paper (No. 3; on paper sensor PCB)
PI21S Detects the paper folding at home position
Table 7-010
Ver. 5.0 636 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Micro Switches
MS1S
MS4,5S
MS6,7S
MS2S
MS3S
Fig. 7-033

Micro Switches MS1S Detects the state (open) of the inlet door
MS2S Detects the state (open) of the front door
MS3S Detects the state (open) of the delivery door
MS4S Detects the presence of staples (rear)
MS5S Detects stitching home position (rear)
MS6S Detects the presence of staples (front)
MS7S Detects stitching home position (front)
Table 7-011
Ver. 5.0 637 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Motors
M6S
M7S
M4S
M3S
M1S
M2S M5S
M8S
Fig. 7-034

Motor M1S Feed Motor
M2S Paper Folding Motor
M3S Guide Motor
M4S Paper Positioning Plate Motor
M5S Alignment Motor
M6S Stitcher Motor (rear)
M7S Stitcher Motor (front)
M8S Paper Pushing Plate Motor
Table 7-012
Ver. 5.0 638 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Solenoids
SL1S
SL2S
SL4S
Fig. 7-035

Solenoid SL1S No. 1 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid
SL2S No. 2 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid
SL4S Feed Plate Contact Solenoid
Table 7-013
Ver. 5.0 639 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. PCBs
[2]
[1]
Fig. 7-036
Reference Name
[1] Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
[2] Paper Sensor PCB
Table 7-014
Ver. 5.0 640 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Photo-interrupters
PI2P
PI3P
PI1P
Fig. 7-037

Photo-interrupter PI1P Horizontal registration home position detection
PI2P Punch motor clock detection
PI3P Punch home position detection
Table 7-015
Ver. 5.0 641 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Micro Switches
MS1P
MS2P
Fig. 7-038

Micro Switches MS1P Upper door open detection
MS2P Front door open detection
Table 7-016
Ver. 5.0 642 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Motors
M1P
M2P
Fig. 7-039

Motor M1P Punch Motor
M2P Horizontal Registration Motor
Table 7-017
Ver. 5.0 643 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. PCBs
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
Fig. 7-040
Reference Name
[1] Punch Driver PCB
[2] Photosensor PCB
[3] LED PCB
[4] Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB
Fig. 7-018
Ver. 5.0 644 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.7.2.4. Light-Emitting Diodes (LED) and Check Pins by PCB
This section discusses the LEDs and check pins used in the Machine that are needed in the field.
Caution:
The VRs and check pins not discussed in this section are for factory use only. Making adjustments and
checks using these will require special tools and instruments and adjustments must be to high accuracy.
Do not touch them in the field.
1. Finisher Controller PCB

11 11 8 1 7 1 12 11 11 41 6
J3 J14 J6 J16
1 J2
J12 11 SW1 1 J9 11
9
SW2
J17
1 1
LED1 J27
LED2 8
1 14
J21
SW3
1
14 1
4 J11
J25
1 10
1
J1
CB1
1 2
J7 J5
1 J19 15 J10 2 J19
6 1
5 1 15 1
Fig. 7-041
Switch Function
SW1 Adjust the height sensor / alignment plate position / stapling position and move
the trays up, etc.
SW2 Adjust the alignment plate position / staple position and move the trays down, etc.
SW3 Adjust the height sensor / alignment plate position and stapling position, etc.
Table 7-019
Ver. 5.0 645 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
SW1 J18 J13 J2
15
1 3 1 7 1 6
J11
1
10 1
J7 J10
8
1
1
10
J9
J4
15
1
CB1
1
J6
2
J1 9
1 J8 J15 J5 J12
14 1 8 1 4 1 5 1
Fig. 7-042
Switch Function
DIPSW1 Starts correction of discrepancy between stitching position and folding position.
(bits 1-2)
DIPSW1 Stores corrected settings for stapling position and folding position.
(bits 6-8)
SW2 Starts correction of discrepancy between stitching position and folding position.
Table 7-020
Ver. 5.0 646 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.7.3. Troubleshooting
1. E7-40 (Fault in communication with Saddle Stitch Unit)
Yes
Cause Step Checks Action
/ No
Finisher Controller 1 Turn the Copier OFF then ON. Is Yes End.
PCB, Saddle Stitch the problem corrected?
Controller PCB
Wiring 2 Is the wiring between the Finisher No Correct it.
Controller PCB and the Saddle
Stitch Controller PCB normal?
Power Supply 3 Measure the voltage between J3- No Replace the Finisher
2(+) and J3-1(-) on the Finisher Controller PCB.
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. Is it 24 VDC? Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB Controller PCB.
2. E7-25 (Faulty height sensor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Finisher Controller Turn the Copier OFF then ON. Yes End.
PCB Is the problem corrected?
Wiring Is the wiring between the Finisher No Correct the wiring.
Controller PCB and the sensors
normal?
Power Supply Measure the voltage between J6-2(+) No Replace the Finisher
and J6-4(-) on the Finisher Controller Controller PCB.
PCB. Is it 5 VDC?
Connector Is J6 on the Finisher Controller PCB, Yes Connect the connector.
J114 on the height sensor, or the relay
connector J212 disconnected?
Height Sensor (PS1) Measure the voltage between J6-2(+) Yes Adjust the height sensor
and J6-4(-) on the Finisher Controller once again. If an error
PCB. Is it 5 VDC? occurs again, replace the
height sensor.
No Replace the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Is the wiring between the Finisher Yes Replace the height sensor.
Controller PCB and the sensors No Correct the wiring.
normal?
Adjustment Try making adjustments using the DIP Yes End.
switch once again. Is the problem
corrected?
Ver. 5.0 647 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. E7-26 (Faulty Back-up RAM)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Finisher Controller Turn the Copier OFF then ON. Is the Yes End.
PCB, Punch Drive problem corrected?
PCB Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Yes End.
and punch driver PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
4. E7-21 (Faulty Delivery Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Deliver Roller Turn the delivery roller by hand. Does it No Correct mechanical
turn smoothly? operation.
Delivery Motor Clock Check the delivery clock sensor. Is the No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI10) sensor normal?
Finisher Controller Does the voltage between J11-4 and No Replace the Finisher
PCB J11-5 on the Finisher Controller PCB Controller PCB.
change to 24 VDC as soon as the Yes Check the wiring from the
delivery motor starts to rotate? motor to the controller PCB.
If normal, replace the motor.
5. E7-22 (Faulty Alignment Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Alignment Plate Home Check the alignment plate home No Replace the sensor.
Position Sensor (PI6) position sensor. Is it normal?
Controller PCB and the alignment plate
motor normal?
Alignment Plate Is there any mechanical obstacle in the Yes Remove the mechanical
path of the alignment plate? obstacle.
Alignment Motor (M3) Replace the alignment motor. Is the Yes End.
Finisher Controller problem corrected? No Replace the Finisher
PCB Controller PCB.
6. E7-23 (Faulty Staple Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Wiring Is the wiring between the stapler and No Correct the wiring.
the Finisher Controller PCB normal?
Stapler Replace the stapler. Is the problem Yes End.
Finisher Controller corrected? No Replace the Finisher
PCB Controller PCB.
Ver. 5.0 648 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
7. E7-24 (Faulty Stapler Shift Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Stapler Shift Home Check the stapler shift home position No Replace the sensor.
Position Sensor (PI7) sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Controller PCB and the stapler shift
motor normal?
Stapler Shift Base Is there any mechanical obstacle in the Yes Remove the mechanical
path of the stapler shift base? obstacles.
Stapler Shift Motor Replace the stapler motor. Is the Yes End.
(M4) problem corrected?
Finisher Controller No Replace the Finisher
PCB Controller PCB.
8. E7-48 (Faulty Swing Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Swinging Mechanism Turn the Swing Motor in reverse by No Correct the swing
hand. Does the swing guide move up mechanism.
and down?
Swing Guide Closed Is the swing guide closed detection No Replace the microswitch.
Detection Switch 2 switch 2 normal?
(MS6) Is the swing guide closed detection No Correct mechanical
switch 2 pressed correctly? operation.
Yes Replace the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Swing Motor (M7) Does the swing motor rotate in reverse No Replace the motor.
Finisher Controller at a specific timing? Yes Replace the Finisher
PCB Controller PCB.
Swing Guide Open Is the swing guide open sensor normal? No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI18)
Safety Range Switch Check the safety range switch. Is the No Replace the switch.
(MS3) switch normal?
Is the safety range detection switch No Correct mechanical
pressed correctly? operation.
Swing Guide Clock Check the swing guide clock sensor. Is No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI20) the sensor normal?
Finisher Controller Does the voltage of the swing motor No Replace the Finisher
PCB between J11-6 and -7 on the Finisher Controller PCB.
Controller PCB reach 24 V at a specific Yes Check the wiring from the
rotation timing? motor to the Finisher
Controller PCB. If normal,
replace the motor.
Ver. 5.0 649 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
9. E7-27 (Faulty Tray Lift Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Tray Home Position Check the tray home position sensor. Is No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI8) it normal?
Tray Lift Mechanism Check the tray lift mechanism. Is the No Correct the mechanism.
mechanism normal?
Finisher Controller Is the tray lift motor supplied with 24 No Replace the Finisher
PCB VDC by the Finisher Controller PCB as Controller PCB.
soon as the tray is driven?
Wiring Check the wiring from the finisher No Correct the wiring.
Tray Lift Motor (M5) controller PCB to the tray lift motor. Is Yes Replace the tray lift motor.
the wiring normal?
Tray Position Is the tray at the tray upper limit switch? Yes Lower the tray.
Tray Upper Limit Check the tray upper limit switch. Is the No Replace the switch.
Switch (MS5) switch normal?
Wiring Check the wiring from the Finisher No Correct the wiring.
Finisher Controller Controller PCB to the tray upper limit Yes Replace the Finisher
PCB switch. Is the wiring normal? Controller PCB.
- Does the tray move up / down? No Go to a. on the left.
Yes Go to c. on the left.
Finisher Controller a. Is the motor supplied with power by Yes Go to b. on the left.
PCB the Finisher Controller PCB as soon No Replace the Finisher
as the tray moves up / down? Controller PCB.
Tray Lift Mechanism b. Is there a fault in the tray lift Yes Correct the tray lift
mechanism? mechanism.
Tray Lift Motor (M5) No Replace the tray lift motor.
Tray Lift Motor Clock c. Is the tray lift motor clock sensor 1/2 No Replace the sensor PCB.
Sensor 1/2 (PI9 / 19) normal?
Finisher Controller Yes Replace the Finisher
PCB Controller PCB.
Ver. 5.0 650 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
10. E7-20 (Faulty Second Feed Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Second Feed Motor Does the second feed motor in reverse No Replace the second feed
(M8) at a specific timing? motor or the Finisher
Controller PCB.
Shutter Mechanism Are the shutter and the shutter upper / No Engage them correctly.
lower bar engaged correctly?
Turn the feed roller 2 in reverse by No Correct mechanism from
hand. Does the shutter upper / lower the shutter upper/lower bar
bar move up / down? to the gear of the feed roller
2.
Shutter Open Is the shutter open detection sensor No Replace the sensor.
Detection Sensor normal?
(PI5)
Finisher Controller Yes Replace the Finisher
PCB Controller PCB.
Shutter Closed Is the shutter closed detection switch No Replace the switch.
Detection Switch normal?
(MS4) Check the safety range switch. Is the
Safety Range Switch switch normal? No Replace the switch.
(MS3) Is the safety range detection switch No Correct mechanical
passed correctly? operation.
Is the shutter closed detection switch No Correct the mechanism.
Finisher Controller pressed correctly? Yes Replace the Finisher
PCB Controller PCB.
Ver. 5.0 651 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. E7-41 (Faulty Paper Positioning Plate)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Paper Positioning Check the paper positioning plate home No Replace the sensor.
Plate Home Position position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Sensor (PI7S)
Saddle Stitch Do the paper positioning plates operate Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB at a specific timing? Controller PCB.
Paper Positioning No Check the positioning plate
Plate Motor (M4S) drive mechanism. If a fault
is found, correct it.
Otherwise, go to step 3.
Saddle Stitch Replace the paper positioning plate Yes End.
Controller PCB motor. Is the problem corrected? No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
2. E7-42 (Faulty Paper Folding Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Paper Folding Motor Check the paper folding motor clock No Replace the sensor.
Clock Sensor (PI4S) sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Paper Folding Home Check the paper folding home position No Replace the sensor.
Position Sensor sensor. Is the sensor normal?
(PI21S)
Saddle Stitch Does the paper folding motor operate at Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB a specific timing? Controller PCB.
Paper Folding Motor No Check the paper folding
(M2S) roller drive mechanism. If a
fault is found, correct it.
Saddle Stitch Replace the paper folding motor. Is the Yes End.
Controller PCB problem corrected? No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
Ver. 5.0 652 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. E7-43 (Faulty Guide Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Guide Home Position Check the guide home position sensor. No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI13S) Is the sensor normal?
Saddle Stitch Does the guide motor operate at a Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB specific timing? Controller PCB.
Guide Motor (M3S) No Check the guide plate drive
mechanism. If a fault is
found, correct it. Otherwise,
go to step 3.
Saddle Stitch Replace the guide motor. Is the problem Yes End.
Controller PCB corrected? No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
4. E7-44 (Faulty Alignment Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Alignment Plate Home Check the alignment plate home No Replace the sensor.
Position Sensor position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
(PI5S)
Saddle Stitch Does the alignment motor operate at a Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB specific timing? Controller PCB.
No Check the alignment plate
drive mechanism. If a fault
is found, correct it.
Saddle Stitch Replace the alignment motor. Is the Yes End.
Controller PCB problem corrected? No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
5. E7-45 / 46 (Faulty Stitcher)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Stitcher (installation) Are the front (E7-46) and rear (E7-45) No Install them correctly.
stitchers and bases installed correctly?
Stitching Home Is the stitching home position switch of No Replace the front or rear
Position Switch the front and the rear stitchers normal? stitcher.
(MS7S / MS5S)
Saddle Stitch Do the front and the rear stitchers Yes Check the wiring between
Controller PCB operate at a specific timing? the stitcher and the Saddle
Stitch Controller PCB. If
normal, replace the
controller PCB.
Stitcher Motor No Replace the front or the rear
(M7S / M6S) stitcher.
Ver. 5.0 653 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6. E7-47 (Faulty Paper Pushing Plate Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Paper Pushing Plate Check the paper pushing plate home No Replace the sensor.
Home Position Sensor position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
(PI14S)
Saddle Stitch Does the paper pushing plate motor Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB operate at a specific timing? Controller PCB.
Paper Pushing Plate No Check the paper pushing
Motor (M8S) plate drive mechanisms. If a
fault is found, correct it.
Saddle Stitch Replace the paper pushing plate motor. Yes End.
Controller PCB Is the problem corrected? No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
Paper Pushing Top Check the paper pushing plate top No Replace the sensor.
Position Sensor position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
(PI15S)
Paper Pushing Plate Check the paper pushing plate motor No Replace the sensor.
Motor Clock Sensor clock sensor. Is the sensor normal?
(PI1S)
7. E7-49 (Disconnected Sensor Connector)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Guide Home Position Are the connectors of the guide home No Connect the connectors.
Sensor (PI13S; position sensor and the Saddle Stitch
disconnected) Controller PCB connected correctly?
Wiring Is the wiring between the sensor and Yes Correct the wiring.
the Saddle Stitch broken?
Power Supply Is 5 VDC present at J9-7 on the Saddle No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Stitch Controller PCB? Controller PCB.
Is 5 VDC present at J9-10 on the
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB?
Is 5 VDC present at J9-13 on the
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB?
Ground Is J9-8 on the Saddle Stitch Controller No
PCB grounded correctly?
Is J9-11 on the Saddle Stitch Controller
Is J9-14 on the Saddle Stitch Controller
Paper Pushing Plate Are the connectors of the paper pushing No Connect the connectors.
Home Position Top plate top position sensor and the
Position Sensor Saddle Stitch Controller PCB connected
(PI14S; disconnected) correctly?
Paper Pushing Plate
Home Position Top
Position Sensor
(PI15S; disconnected)
Ver. 5.0 654 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
8. E7-50 (Faulty Microswitch)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Switch Actuator Check the switch actuator of the inlet No Correct the mechanism.
door. Do the switch and the sensor
operate correctly?
Check the switch actuator of the front
door. Do the switch and the sensor
operate correctly?
Check the delivery door switch actuator.
Do the switch and the sensor operate
correctly?
Inlet Door Switch Check the inlet door switch. Is the No Replace the switch.
(MS1S) switch normal?
Inlet Cover Sensor Measure the voltage at J10-8 on the Yes The sensor is faulty.
(PI9S) Saddle Stitch Controller PCB with the Replace the sensor.
inlet cover open. Is it 5V?
Power Supply, Wiring Measure the voltage between J19-1 (+) No Replace the Saddle Stitch
and J19-2 (–) on the Finisher Controller Controller PCB.
PCB. Is it 24V? Yes Check the wiring between
J19 on the Finisher
Controller PCB and J1 on
the Saddle Stitch Controller
PCB. If a fault is found,
correct it. Otherwise,
replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
Front Door Switch Check the front door switch. Is the No Replace the switch.
Front Door Open / Measure the voltage at J11-12 on the Yes The sensor is faulty.
Closed Sensor Saddle Stitch Controller PCB with the Replace the sensor.
(PI12S) front door open. Is it 5V? No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
Delivery Switch Check the delivery door switch. Is the No Replace the switch.
Delivery Cover Measure the voltage at J11-9 on the Yes The sensor is faulty.
Sensor (PI3S) Saddle Stitch Controller PCB with the Replace the sensor.
delivery door open. Is it 5V? No Replace the Saddle Stitch
Controller PCB.
Ver. 5.0 655 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.7.3.3. Puncher Unit (option)
1. E7-28 (Faulty Punch Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Punch Motor Clock Check the punch motor clock sensor. Is No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI2P) the sensor normal?
Punch Home Position Check the punch home position sensor. No Replace the sensor.
Sensor (PI3P) Is the sensor normal?
Wiring Is the wiring between the punch home No Correct the wiring.
position sensor and the Finisher
Controller PCB normal?
Punch Mechanism Is there any trouble with the punch Yes Correct the punch
mechanism? mechanism.
Punch Motor (M1P) No Replace the punch motor.
Punch Driver PCB Replace the punch driver PCB. Is the No Replace the Finisher
problem corrected? Controller PCB.
Yes End.
2. E7-29 (Faulty Horizontal Registration Motor)
Yes
Cause Checks Action
/ No
Horizontal Check the horizontal registration home No Replace the sensor.
Registration Home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Position Sensor
(PI1P)
Wiring Is the wiring between the horizontal No Correct the wiring.
registration home position sensor and
the Finisher Controller PCB normal?
Horizontal Is there any problem with the horizontal Yes Correct the horizontal
Registration registration mechanism? registration mechanism.
Mechanism
Horizontal No Replace the horizontal
Registration Motor registration motor.
(M2P)
Punch Driver PCB Replace the punch driver PCB. Is the No Replace the Finisher
problem corrected? Controller PCB.
Yes End.
Ver. 5.0 656 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.7.4. Self Diagnosis
The CPU (Q1) on the machine’s Finisher Controller PCB or on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB is equipped
with a self diagnosis function. This function runs a check at programmed times and sends an error code to
the copier upon detection of any detected abnormalities.
Error
Error Type Description
Code
E7-40 • Communication Error • Communications with the saddle stitch unit is
disrupted.
E7-25 • Height Sensor (PS1) • Communications is not possible between the height
sensor and the Finisher Controller PCB. Or, there is
a fault in communication data.
• Communications between the sensor and the
Finisher Controller is not possible for a specific
period of time.
• The sensor is identified as being disconnected at
power-ON.
• Sensor adjustment using a DIP switch has a fault.
E7-26 • Back-up RAM • There is a fault in the checksum value of the
Finisher Controller PCB at power-ON.
• There is a fault in the checksum value of the punch
driver PCB at power-ON.
E7-21 • Delivery Motor (M2) • A specific number of clock pulses have not been
• Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PI10) obtained from the delivery motor clock sensor at the
beginning of operation.
• Clock pulses in numbers equivalent to a feed length
of 200 mm are not obtained while paper is being fed.
E7-22 • Alignment Motor (M3) • The alignment plate does not leave the alignment
• Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor home position sensor even after the alignment
motor has operated for 2 sec.
• The alignment plate does not return to the alignment
plate home position sensor even after the alignment
motor has operated for 2 sec.
E7-23 • Staple Motor (M6) • The stapler does not leave the stapling home
• Staple Home Position Detection Switch position even after the stapler motor has operated
(MS7) for 0.5 sec.
• The stapler does not return to the stapling home
position even after the stapler motor has operated
for 0.5 sec.
E7-24 • Stapler Shift Motor (M4) • The stapler shift home position sensor does not turn
• Stapler Shift Home Position Sensor OFF even after the stapler shift motor has operated
(PI7) for 4 sec.
• The stapler shift home position cannot be detected
even after the stapler shift motor has operated for 4
sec.
Ver. 5.0 657 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Error
Code
E7-48 • Swing Motor (M7) • The swing guide closed detection switch does not
• Swing Guide Closed Detection Switch turn ON even after the swing motor has rotated
2 (MS6) counter-clockwise for 1 sec.
• Swing Motor (M7) • The swing guide open detection sensor does not
• Swing Guide Open Detecting Sensor turn ON even after the swing motor has rotated
(PI18) clockwise for 1 sec.
• Safety Range Switch (MS3) • The swing guide closed detection switch is OFF
• Swing Guide Closed Detection Switch when the tray 1/2 is at the safety range switch OFF
2 (MS6) position.
• Swing Motor (M7) • The clock pulse is discontinued for 200 ms during
• Swing Motor Clock Sensor (PI20) swing operation.
E7-27 • Tray Lift Motor (M5) • The movement does not end within 15 sec after the
• Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9 / tray lift motor is driven.
PI19) • The tray home position can not be detected after the
• Tray Home Position Sensor (PI8) tray lift motor has been driven for 15 sec.
• Tray Upper Limit Detection Switch • The tray upper limit detection switch is ON while the
(MS5) tray is moving up.
• Tray Lift Motor (M5) • Clock pulses from the clock sensor 1/2 are not
• Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9 / obtained for 200 ms after the tray lift motor has been
PI19) driven.
E7-20 • Second Feed Motor (M8) • The shutter closed detection switch does not turn
• Shutter Closed Detection Switch (MS4) ON after the second feed motor has rotated counter-
clockwise for 1 sec or more.
• Second Feed Motor (M8) • The shutter open sensor does not turn ON after the
• Shutter Open Sensor (PI5) second feed motor has rotated counter-clockwise for
1 sec or more.
• Safety Range Detection Switch (MS3) • The shutter closed detection switch is OFF when the
• Shutter Closed Detection Switch (MS4) tray 1/2 is at the safety range switch OFF position
during operation of the tray lift motor.
Ver. 5.0 658 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Error
Code
E7-41 • Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4S) • The paper positioning plate home position sensor
• Paper Positioning Plate Home Position does not turn ON even after the paper positioning
Sensor (PI7S) plate motor has been driven for 1.33 sec or more.
• The paper positioning plate home position sensor
does not turn OFF even after the paper positioning
plate motor has been driven for 1 sec or more.
E7-42 • Paper Folding Motor (M2S) • The number of detecting pulses from the paper
• Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor folding motor clock sensor drops below a specific
(PI4S) value.
• Paper Folding Motor (M2S) • The state of the paper folding home position sensor
• Paper Folding Home Position Sensor does not change even after the paper folding motor
(PI21S) has driven for 3 sec.
E7-43 • Guide Motor (M3S) • The guide home position sensor does not turn ON
• Guide Home Position Sensor (PI13S) even after the guide motor has been driven for 0.455
sec or more.
• The guide home position sensor does not turn OFF
even after the guide motor has been driven for 1 sec
or more.
E7-44 • Alignment Motor (M5S) • The alignment plate home position sensor does not
• Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor turn ON even when the alignment motor has been
(PI5S) driven for 0.5 sec or more. (During initial operation,
the motor is driven for 1.67 sec.)
• The alignment plate home position sensor does not
turn OFF even when the alignment motor has been
driven for 1 sec or more.
E7-45 • Stitcher Motor (rear, M6S) • The stitching home position sensor does not turn
• Stitching Home Position Sensor (rear, OFF even when the stitcher motor (rear) has been
MS5S) rotated clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.
• The stitching home position sensor does not turn
ON even when the stitcher motor (rear) has been
rotated counter-clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.
E7-46 • Stitcher Motor (front, M7S) • The stitching home position sensor does not turn
• Stitching Home Position Sensor (front, OFF even when the stitcher motor (front) has been
MS7S) rotated clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.
• The stitching home position sensor does not turn
ON even when the stitcher motor (front) has been
rotated counter-clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.
Ver. 5.0 659 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Error
Code
E7-47 • Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S) • The paper pushing plate home position sensor does
• Paper Pushing Plate Home Position not turn ON even when the paper pushing plate
Sensor (PI4S) motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
• The paper pushing plate home position sensor does
not turn OFF even when the paper pushing plate
motor has been driven for 80 msec or more.
• Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S) • The paper pushing plate top position sensor does
• Paper Pushing Plate Top Position not turn OFF even after the paper pushing plate
Sensor (PI15S) motor has been driven for 80 msec or more.
• Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S) • The number of clock pulses for the paper pushing
• Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock plate motor clock sensor drops below a specific
Sensor (PI1S) value.
• Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S) • The paper pushing plate top position sensor does
• Paper Pushing Plate Top Position not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has
Sensor (PI5S) been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
E7-49 • Guide Home Position Sensor (PI13S) • The connector of the guide home position sensor is
Connector identified as being disconnected.
• Paper Pushing Plate Home Position • The connector of the paper pushing plate home
Sensor (PI14S) Connector position sensor is identified as being disconnected.
• Paper Pushing Plate Top Position • The connector of the paper pushing plate top
Sensor (PI15S) Connector position sensor is identified as being disconnected.
E7-50 • Inlet Door Switch (MS1S) • After any of the following three photo-interrupters
• Front Door Switch (MS2S) used for the covers has found that its respective
• Delivery Door Switch (MS3S) door is closed, the inlet door switch is identified as
being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or
more after the start of the copier initial rotation.
• Inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
• Front door open / closed sensor (PI2S)
• Delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
(The front door switch (MS2S) or the delivery door
switch (MS3S) may be also open.)
• Front Door Switch (MS2S) • After any of the following three photo-interrupters
• Delivery Door Switch (MS3S) used for the covers has found that its respective
door is closed, the front door switch is identified as
being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or
(The delivery door switch (MS3S) may be also
open.)
• Delivery Door Switch (MS3S) • After any of the following three photo-interrupters
used for the covers has found that its respective
door is closed, the delivery door switch is identified
as being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or
Ver. 5.0 660 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.7.4.3. Punch Unit (Optional)
Error
Code
E7-28 • Punch Motor (M1P) • The punch motor clock sensor cannot detect the
• Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI2P) clock pulse within 100 ms.
• Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P) • The puncher does not leave the punch home
position sensor even after the punch motor has
operated for 200 ms.
• The puncher does not return to the punch home
position sensor even after the punch motor has
operated for 200 ms.
• The target number of clock pulses cannot be
obtained from the punch motor clock sensor at start
of operation.
E7-29 • Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) • The puncher does not leave the horizontal
• Horizontal Registration Home Position registration home position even after the horizontal
Sensor (PI1P) registration motor has operated for 4 sec.
• The puncher does not return to the horizontal
registration home position even after the horizontal
registration motor has operated for 4 sec.
Ver. 5.0 661 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.7.4.4. Finisher User error
Note:
UXX will appear in the message display.
Code Item See Page

U4 Finisher / Inverting Unit / Inverting Shift Tray (option) open
U11 Finisher Copy Paper removal
U12 Staple Cover / Top Door open (option)
U30 Finisher Punch Cover open
U31 Finisher Saddle Unit paper removal
U32 Finisher Saddle Unit Feed Cover open
U33 Finisher Saddle Staple Unit is not installed
U34 Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Front Cover open
U35 Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Paper Exit Cover open
oF Finisher overflow
1. User Error

U4 Finisher Inverting Unit / Inverting Shift 1) Are the exit options installed correctly?
Tray (option) 2) Exit options connector is shorted or broken.
3) Exit options connector is defective.
4) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Finisher CPU PCB is defective.
6) LVPS connector is shorted or broken.
7) LVPS is defective.
8) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken.
9) CPU PCB is defective.
U11 Finisher copy paper removal 1) Copy paper is already in at least one bin.
Note: 2) Copy paper which is unsuitable size for stapler
When clearing U11, all paper must be use is in the bin.
removed from bins. 3) There is a double feed from the duplex unit in the
bin.
4) Finisher paper detecting sensor connector is
shorted or broken.
5) Finisher paper detecting sensor is defective.
broken.
Ver. 5.0 662 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
U12 Staple Door / Top Door open 1) Is the stapler door or top door closed correctly?
2) Stapler door or top door open/close sensor
connector is shorted or broken.
3) Stapler door or top door open close sensor is
defective.
broken.
U30 Finisher Punch Cover open 1) Is the punch cover closed correctly?
2) Punch cover open/close sensor connector is
shorted or broken.
3) Punch cover open/close sensor is defective.
4) Punch unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Punch unit CPU PCB is defective.
broken.
U31 Finisher Saddle Unit paper removal 1) Copy paper is already in finisher saddle unit.
2) Copy paper which is unsuitable size is in saddle
unit.
3) Too many copy paper in saddle unit.
4) Finisher saddle unit paper detecting sensor
5) Finisher saddle unit paper detecting sensor is
defective.
broken.
U32 Finisher Saddle Unit Feed Cover open 1) Is the saddle unit feed cover closed correctly?
2) Saddle unit feed cover open / close sensor
3) Saddle unit feed cover open / close sensor is
defective.
4) Saddle unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or
broken.
5) Saddle unit CPU PCB is defective.
broken.
Ver. 5.0 663 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
U33 Finisher Saddle Staple Unit is not 1) Is the saddle staple unit installed properly?
installed 2) Saddle staple unit storage sensor connector is
shorted or broken.
3) Saddle staple unit storage sensor is defective.
broken.
broken.
U34 Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Front Cover 1) Is the saddle front cover closed correctly?
open 2) Saddle front cover open / close sensor connector
is shorted or broken.
3) Saddle front cover open / close sensor is
defective.
broken.
broken.
U35 Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Paper Exit 1) Is the saddle paper exit cover closed correctly?
Cover open 2) Saddle paper exit cover open/close sensor
3) Saddle paper exit cover open/close sensor is
defective.
broken.
broken.
oF Finisher over flow Too many copies in the finisher bin.
The paper must be removed and press the finisher
mode key.
Ver. 5.0 664 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.1.8. Appendix
11.1.8.1. Signal Names and Abbreviations
Provided below are the abbreviations and signal names used in this manual and in drawings for all the
Finisher and punch functions.
Note:
Signals enclosed by brackets [ ] are electrical signals. However, the state “1” or “0” of these analog
signals cannot be indicated, Otherwise, the state of digital signals “1” or “0” can be indicated.
Finisher Unit
BESCPSL Belt Escape Solenoid Drive Signal

BUFENTR Buffer Path Inlet Paper Detect Signal
BUFPASS Buffer Path Paper Detect Signal
CRTSET Cartridge Detect Signal
DELCLK Delivery Motor Clock Detect Signal
DROPN Door Open Detect Signal
DRSW Door Switch Signal
ENTSL Buffer Inlet Solenoid Drive Signal
ESCPSL Escape Solenoid Drive Signal
EXITSL Buffer Outlet Solenoid Drive Signal
FLPSL Flapper Solenoid Drive Signal
FSTTRAY Tray 1 Paper Detect Signal
HOOKEMP Hook Empty Detect Signal
HOOKTOP Hook Stop Position Detect Signal
JOGHP Alignment Plate HP Detect Signal
JOINT Joint Detect Signal
PDEL Delivery Detect Signal
PDLSL Paddle Solenoid Drive Signal
PENT Inlet Paper Detect Signal
SFTCLK1 Shift Motor Clock Detect Signal 1
SFTCLK2 Shift Motor Clock Detect Signal 2
SHUTCLD Shutter Closed Detect Switch Signal
SNDTRAY Tray 2 Paper Detect Signal
STOPN Shutter Open Detect Signal
STPCON Stapler Connect Detect Signal
STPDRHP Stapler Drive HP Detect Signal
STPHP Stapler HP Detect Signal
STPTY Staple Tray Paper Detect Signal
SWGCLK Swing Guide Clock Detect Signal
SWGGCLD Swing Guide Closed Detect Switch Signal
SWGOPN Swing Guide Open Detect Signal
TRAYSAF Tray Safety Switch Signal
TRAYHP Tray Home Position Detect Signal
TRYLIM Tray Upper Limit Detecting Switch Signal
Ver. 5.0 665 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Saddle Stitch Unit
1STPA No. 1 Paper Sensor Detect Signal

2NDPA No. 2 Paper Sensor Detect Signal
3RDDPA No. 3 Paper Sensor Detect Signal
DELV Delivery Detect Signal
DELVMS Delivery Door Open Detect Switch Signal
EJCVR Delivery Door Open Detect Signal
FDR Front Door Open Detect Signal
FDRLHP Crescent Roller Phase Detect Signal
FDROPN Front Door Open Detect Switch Signal
FLDCLK Fold Motor Clock Signal
FLPSL1 Flapper Drive Signal 1
FSPSL2 Flapper Drive Signal 2
GIDHP Paper Guide Home Position Detect Signal
HKEMP1 Hook Empty Detect Signal 1
HKEMP2 Hook Empty Detect Signal 2
INLTCVR Inlet Cover Open Detect Signal
INLTCVRMS Inlet Cover Open Switch Signal
JOGHP Alignment HP Detect Signal
LUNGECLK Lunge Motor Clock Signal
LUNGEHP Lunge Home Position Detect Signal
LUNGETOP Lunge Top Position Detect Signal
PAFLDHP Paper Fold Home Position Detect Signal
PAPPOS Paper Position Plate HP Detect Signal
PPOSPAR Paper Positioning Guide Paper Detect Signal
RLNIPSL Feed Plate Contact Solenoid Drive Signal
STCHHP1 Stitching HP Detect Signal 1
STCHHP2 Stitching HP Detect Signal 2
STPLHP Stitcher IN Detect Signal
TRAYPAR Tray Paper Detect Signal
VPJM Vertical Path Paper Detect Signal
Ver. 5.0 666 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Puncher Unit (Option)
DFULL Dust Full Detect Signal

FDROPN Front Door Open Detect Switch Signal
LEDON LED ON Signal
LEDON1 LED1 ON Signal
PAEND Paper End Detect Signal
PUNCHHP Punch Home Position Detect Signal
PUNCHCLK Punch Motor Clock Detect Signal
SREG1 Side Registration Detect Signal 1
SREGHP Side Registration Home Position Detect Signal
UDROPN Upper Door Open Detect Switch Signal
Ver. 5.0 667 NOV 2004

Ver. 5.0
11.1.9.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J10-6 JS1-C1
J10-5
J10-4
M
M1
J10-3 JS1
J306 J304 J10-2
C4
1 1 5 5 J10-1
First Feed Motor

J1-1 C3
2 2 4 4 FG-1 C1
J10 1 2 3 4 5 6
M4
3 3 3 3 J1-2 C2
Motor
4 4 2 2 J6 J6
J10 1 2 3 4 5 6
Stapler Shift
15 15
B
A
B
A
5 5 1 1 J2-1 7A
F 14 14
+24V
+24V
6A
Stapler Unit
J307 13 13
J2-2 5A
J301 12 12 G
Host Machine
M
13 13 J1 J1 J2-4 4A
12 12 J305 11 11 +5V JS1-C2
G 2 2 J2-5 3A
11 11 11 11 10 10 HOOKEMP JS1-C3
+24V 1 1 J2-6 2A
10 10 10 10 9 9 CRTSET
J2-7 1A
8 8
M6
9 9 9 9 STPDRHP
8 8 8 8 7 7 STPCON J2 J2
Relay PCB 3
JS1-1A
Staple Motor
7 7 7 7 6 6 HOOKTOP 7 7
JS1-2A
6 6 6 6 5 5 +24V G 6 6
JS1-3A
Relay PCB 4
5 5 5 5 4 4 B +24V 5 5
JS1-4A
4 4 4 4 3 3 A 4 4
3 3 3 3 2 2 B 3 3 J209-3
J302 JS1-5A C
2 2 2 2 1 1 A 2 2
JS1-7A J209
1 1 J5-12 MS6-N0 J209-4
MS6
1 1 1 1 4 4 N0
Switch 2
J5-11 MS6-C
3 3
J5-10 MS2-N0
2 2
J210 J210 J16 J16 J5-9 MS2-C J209-2
J129 1 1 C
3 J12-7 J16-6
3 3 3 A 6 6
Schematic Diagram
2 J12-8 J16-5 J209-2
PI7
MS2
E 2 2 2 B 5 5 N0
Sensor
J12-9 J16-4 J204 J204
Switch 1
1 1 1 1 A 4 4 J11-10 J127-1
Stapler Shift
M
3
1
Home Position
J16-3
M8
J24 J24 B 3 3 J11-9 2 J127-2 J127
J109-1 J16-2 2 J204-1
8 8 EXITSL +24V 2 2 J11-8 1 J127-3 3 3
J109-2 J16-1 3 J204-2
7 7 +24V +24V 1 1
Second Feed Motor

2 2
J110-1
PI18
6 6 J204-3
BUFPASS 1 1
J110-2 J208
Swing Guide Swing Guide Swing Guide

5 5 G J208
J110-3 J14 J14 J11-7 J501-1
4 4 +5V J400-1 1 7 J125
J105-1 SFTCLK1 12 12 J11-6 J501-2 J207B-3
3 3 BUFENTR J400-2 2 6 3 3
J105-2 G 11 11 J11-5 J119-1 J207B-4
J109 2 2 G J400-3 3 5 2 2
J105-3 +5V 10 10 J11-4 J119-2
PI20
1 1 +5V J400-4 4 4 J207B-5

2 1 SFTCLK2 9 9 1 1
J11-3 J134-1
SL
J400-5
Swing Guide
SL3
5 3
Closed Detect Closed Detect Closed Sensor Clock Sensor
Buffer
Outlet
1 2 G 8 8 J11-2 J134-2
Solenoid
J400-6 6 2
+5V 7 7 J11-1 J134-3
J17 J17 J201-1 7 1 J501
J202-2 SNDTRAY 6 6
J110 9 9 PENT J201-2 J206-8 1
J24-8 J202-3 G 2
M7
5 5
M
1 1 8 8 G J201-3 J206-7
J24-7 J202-4 +5V 1 2
2 2 7 7 +5V 4 4
Swing Motor
J201-4
PI14
J24-6 J202-5 FSTTRAY 3 3
3 3 6 6
11.1.9.1. Finisher Unit Circuit Diagram
+24V J201-5
Buffer Path
J24-5 J202-6 G 2 2 J128
Paper Sensor
5 5 +24V J201-6
J24-4 J202-1 +5V 1 1 J207B-2
J105 4 4 B 2 1
SL
D 1 J24-3 J202-2 J207B-2

SL5
1 3 3 A 1 2
Paddle
J24-2 J202-3
Solenoid
2 2 2 2 B J11 J11
J204-1
PI17
3 J24-1 J202-4 SWGOPN 10 10
3 1 1 A J207B J207B J124
J204-2
Buffer Path
Inlet Sensor
G 9 9 J9B-11 J207B-6 5
J204-3 1 11 5
+5V 8 8 J9B-10 J124-1 J207B-7 4
J206-1 2 10 4
J6 J6 7 7 J207B-8
M
J114-1 J9B-9 J124-2 3 3

M3
J206-2 3 9
Motor
4 4 G 6 6 J9B-8 J124-3 J207B-9

J114-2 2 2
Alignment
3 3 Vin J206-3 4 8
J600 J500 J114-3 5 5 J9B-7 J124-4 J207B-10 1 1

2 2 +5V J206-4 5 7
J12-8 J114-4 4 4 J9B-6 J124-5
2 1 2 1 J206-5 6 6
1 1 V0
SL
J12-7
SL7
1 2 1 2 +5V 3 3 J9B-5 J125-1
J206-6 7 5
Solenoid
668
J115 PDEL 2 2 J9B-4 J125-2
Belt Escape
J7 J7 J206-7 8 4 J123
J7-5 J115-1 5 5 G 1 1 J9B-3 J125-3
1 1 9 3 1 3
M
J7-4
M5
J115-2 J9B-2 J126-1 J207A-11
Motor
4 4
2 2 10 2 2 2
Tray Lift
J206-3
SL
J9B-1 J126-2 J207A-10

Swing Guide
3 3
SHUTCLD 11 1
SL6
J502 3 1
J206-2
Escape
Solenoid
2 2
6 6 J202 J206-1 1 1
5 5 +24VMOVE
J101 J1010 J201 J17-1
V J14-1 4 4 1 9 J122
3 J17-2 J207A-1
M
3 1 3 1 6
M9
V J14-2 3 3 2 8 3 3
J17-3 J5 J5
PI11
2 2 2 2 2 5 3 7 J207A-2
V J14-3 2 2 J209-4 2 2
J17-4 SWGGCLD
PI4
12 12
No. 1 Tray
C 1 1 3 1 3 4 J207A J207A J207A-3
Inlet Feed Motor

J14-4 1 1 4 6 J209-3 1 1
Stapling
Paper Sensor
4 3 J17-5 11 11 +24VMOVE (TRYLMT) J9A-11 J123-2
Tray Sensor
J14-5 5 5 J209-2
1 11
5 2 J106 J17-6 10 10 +24VSHIFT J9A-10 J123-3
J14-6 6 4 J209-1
2 10
J102 J1020 6 J17-7 9 9 J9A-9 J120-1
V 1 3 3 7 3 J132-2
3 9
3 3 1 3 J17-8 8 8 TRYLIM J121
2 J9A-8 J120-2 J207A-4
PI1
V 2 8 2 J132-1
4 8
3 3
PI12
2 2 2 2 J17-9 7 7 +24VSHIFT J9A-7 J120-3 J207A-5
V 1 1 9 1 J131-1 J9B J9B
5 7
2 2
Inlet Sensor
No. 2 Tray
1 1 3 1 6 6 TRAYSAFE
PI6
J207B-1 J9A-6 J121-1 J207A-6
Paper Sensor
6 6
J131-2 11 11 1 1
5 5 +24VSHIFT
Alignment
J131-1 J207B-2 J9A-5 7 5 J121-2

Guide Home
4 +24VMOVE A 10 10
4
Position Sensor
J114 J132 J112-2 J207B-3 J9A-4 8 4 J121-3

J6-1 3 DRSW B 9 9
4 J5-7 3 J207B-4 J9A-3 J122-1
4 C 1 2 A 8 8
9 3
J6-2 J5-8 2 2 J207B-5 J134
3 3 NC 2 1 J112-1 J9A-2 10 2 J122-2 J206-1
B 7 7 3 3
MS5
J6-3 1 1 +24V J207B-6
Switch
2 2 N0 J9A-1 J122-3 J206-2
PS1
11 1
+24V 6 6 2 2
Tray Upper
J6-4
Limit Detect
J207B-7
PI3
1 1 +5V 5 5 J206-3
1
Sensor
J12B J12B 1
Delivery
Height Sensor
J108-1 J207B-8
11 11 SWGCLK 4 4
J108-2 J207B-9
J131 10 10 G 3 3
J5-6 ENTSL J207B-10
C 3 J500-1 PDLSL 2 2 FG4 J120
9 9 +24V J207B-11 J207A-7
J5-5 J500-2 +5V 1 1 3 3
NC 2 8 8 BESCPSL
MS3
J5-4 J205-3 J207A-8
Switch
N0 1 7 7 +24V 2 2
PI10
J207A-9
Clock
Motor
J205-1
Safety Range
Sensor
1 1
Delivery
J112 6 6 STOPN
B J112 J205-2
J5-1 5 5 G
C 1 1 1 1 J205-3
J5-3 4 4 +5V
N0 2 2 2 2 J113-1
MS1
3 3 DROPN
NC J113-2
J400 2 2 G J119
Door Switch
J14-12 J113-3 J9A J9A J206-4
1 1 1 1 +5V J207A-1 2 2
M
11 11 J206-5
PI19
ESCPSL
M2
J14-11 1 1
Motor
J113 J113 2 2 J207A-2
Sensor 2
Tray Shift
Delivery
J12B-1 J14-10 J12A +24V 10 10
Motor Clock
3 3 3 J12A J207A-3
3 1 3 J107-1
J12B-2 J14-9 11 11 FLPSL +5V 9 9
PI16
2 2 2 2 4 4 J107-2 J207A-4
DELCLK 8 8
Sensor
J12B-3 J14-8 10 10 +24V
1 1 3 1 5 5 J207A-5
Door Open
J210-1 +5V 7 7 FG5
J14-7 9 9 STPHP
Sensor PCB
6 6 J207A-6
PI9
J210-2 JOGHP 6 6
8 8 G J207A-7
Sensor 1
Tray Shift
J210-3 G 5 5
Motor Clock
7 7 +5V J207A-8
J130-1 +5V 4 4
6 6 TRYHP J207A-9
J107 J130-2 STPTY 3 3
J130 5 5 G J207A-10 J205 J205 J118
J12A-11 J130-3 J128-6 J118-1 J205-1
1 1 J12A-4 4 4 +5V G 2 2
3 3 1 3 3 3
SL1
J12A-10 J117-1 J207A-11 J128-5 J205-2
J12A-5 J118-2
Flapper
+5V 1 1
PI5
2 2
Solenoid
2 2 3 3 JOINT 2 2 2 2
PI8
Closed
Sensor
Shutter
J12A-6 J117-2 J128-4 J118-3 J205-3
Sensor
Position
1 1 2 2 G 3 1 1 1
Tray Home
J117-3
1 1 +5V
J109
A 3 1 J117 J206 J206 J140
J12B-10 J12A-1 J7-1 MS4-C J206-1
2 2 3 3 1 1 3 C
J12A-2
SL
J12B-9 J7-2 MS4-N0 J206-2
SL2
1 3 2 2 2 2 N0
PI15
2
Joint
Shutter Unit
J12A-3
Solenoid
Sensor
J206-3
MS4
J7-3 MS4-NC
Buffer Inlet
1 1 3 3 1 NC
Detect Switch
Shutter Closed
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
NOV 2004
Ver. 5.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J32 J32 J19

J1-2
2 2 2
J1-1 J109
F 1 1 1 N0
J113 J7-1 3
5 5 J4-2
J115 J7-2
2
J5-1 4 4 J4-1
MS1S
1
Switch
1 4 J7-3
Inlet Door
J5-2
M
2 3 3 3
M5S
Motor
J7-4
M1S
Feed
M
Motor
J5-3 2 2 J3
Alignment
3 2 J7-5
J5-4 1 1 8
4 1 J110
J31 J31 7 N0
J2-1 3
8 1 6 J4-4
J2-2 2
7 2 5 J4-3
Finisher Unit
MS2S
Switch
J2-3 1
6 3
Front Door
4
J2-4
5 4 3
J2-5
J116a J116 4 5 2
J5-6 J2-6
2 1 3 6 1 J111
SL
J5-5 N0
Feed
SL4S
1 2 2 7 J205 J305 1
Solenoid
J4-6
1 8 2 2 2
Plate Contact
J114 J4-5
J7-6
MS3S
1 1
Switch
5 5 3
J7-7
Delivery Door
4 4
J7-8
M
3 3
M4S
Paper
J7-9
2 2
Positioning
J117 J112
Plate Motor
E J117a J7-10
J5-4 1 1 J4-7
2 1 1 1
SL
J5-3 J4-8
SL2S
1 2 2 2 M
M2S
Motor
3 3
Plate Solenoid
J119-5
J119-4
J119-3
J119-2
J119-1
J115-4
J115-3
J115-2
J115-1
J118-2
J118-1
J117-2
J117-1
J113-2
J116-1
J120-7
J120-6
J120-5
J120-4
J120-3
J120-2
J120-1
J121-7
J121-6
J121-5
J121-4
J121-3
J121-2
J121-1
Paper Folding
J118a J118
J5-2
2 1 J108
SL
J5-1 J120 J4-9
SL1S
1 2 1 1
J12-1 J4-10 M
J5
J8
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5 5 2 2
10
11
12
13
14
J12
J15
M8S
Plate Solenoid
J12-2
No. 2 Deflecting No. 1 Deflecting

4 4
Plate Motor
J12-3
J5
J8
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Paper Pushing
M
3 3
10
11
12
13
14
J12
J15
M3S
Motor
Guide
J12-4
2 2
B
A
B
A
A
A
B
B
G
G
J12-5 J208 J308 J132
1 1 J13-4
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
4 1 3 3
J1 J1 J13-5
FLPSL1
FSPSL2
RLNPSL
STDHP1
STDHP2
3 2
Path
2 2
HKEMP1
HKEMP2
J6 J6
PI7S
J132-1
Vertical
Sensor
J202-1 +24V 1 1 J13-6

9 9 TRYPAR 2 3 1 1
J202-2 G 2 J132-2
8 8 G 2 1 4
J315 J202-3
J305 J120 7 7 +5V
J8-1 J202-4
1 1 7 7 6 6 PAPPOS
J8-2
MS6S
MS7S
J202-5
Stitcher
2 2 6 6 5 5 G J131
D J8-3 J202-6 J4 J4 J13-1
Switch (Front)
Home Position
3 3 5 5 4 4 +5V J109-1 3 3
J8-4 J201-1 +24V 1 1 J13-2
(Front)
2 2
Staple Sensor (Front)

4 4 4 4 3 3 PPOSPAR J109-2
PI16S
Sensor
J8-5 J201-2 INLTCVRMS 2 2 J13-3
Stitcher Unit
5 5 3 3 2 2 G J110-1 1 1
Stitcher Unit
J8-6
Home Position
J201-3 3 3
6 6 2 2 1 1 +5V J110-2
M
J8-7 FDROPN 4 4
M7S
Motor
(Front)
7 7 1 1
Stitcher
J205-1
5 5
11.1.9.2. Saddle Stitch Unit Circuit Diagram
J205-2 J105
DELVMS 6 6 J201 J301
J9 J9 J112-1 J6-1
J129-1 7 7 3 1 3 3
15 15 LUNGETOP J112-2 J6-2
J129-2 8 8 2 2 2 2
PI8S
14 14 G J108-1 J6-3
J129-3 9 9 1 3 1 1
Plate Sensor
13 13 +5V J108-2
669
J128-1 10 10
Paper Positioning
J316 J306 J121 12 12 LUNGEHP

J8-8 J128-2
1 1 7 7 11 11 G
J8-9 J128-3
MS4S
MS5S
10 10
Stitcher
2 2 6 6 +5V J106
J8-10 J127-1 J7 J7
Swtich (Rear)
9 9 GIDHP 3 3
Home Position
3 3 5 5 J113-5
J8-11 J127-2 +24V 1 1
(Rear)
8 8 G 2 2
Staple Sensor (Rear)

4 4 4 4 J113-4
J127-3 2 2
PI7S
J8-12 B
Stitcher Unit
Sensor
5 5 3 3 7 7 +5V J113-3 J202 J302 1 1

J8-13 J126-1 A 3 3 J6-4
6 6 2 2 6 6 FDRLHP J113-2 6 1
M
J126-2 B
Paper Positioning
J8-14 4 4
M6S
5 5 G J6-5
Plate Home Position
Motor
7 7 1 1 J113-1 5 2
Stitcher
J126-3 A 5 5
4 4 +5V J114-5 J6-6 3 J100
C J125-1 +24V 6 6 4 J502
3 3 DELV J114-4 J6-7
J125-2 7 7 3 4 3 1 3 3
2 2 G B J6-8
J114-3 2 5 2 2 2 2
PI6S
J129 J125-3 A 8 8
Sensor
Saddle Sticher
1 1 +5V J6-9
Controller PCB
J9-13 J114-2 1 6 1 3 1 1
Tray Paper
3 3 B 9 9
J9-14 J114-1
2 2 A 10 10 J402
PI15S
J9-15
Sensor
1 1
Paper Pushing
Plate Top Position
J10 J10
J124-1 J11 J11 J209 J309 J101
8 8 INLTCVR J209-3 J11-1
J124-2 +5V 1 1 3 1 3 3
7 7 G J209-2 J11-2
J124-3 G 2 2 2 2 2 2
PI5S
J128 6 6 +5V J209-1

Sensor
J9-10 J204-1 JOGHP 3 3 J11-3

3 3 5 5 G 1 3 1 1
J102-3
Home Position
J9-11 J204-2 G
Alignment Plate
2 2 4 4 3RDPA 4 4
J102-2
PI14S
J9-12 J204-3 FLDCLK
Sensor
1 1 3 3 2NDPA 5 5
J204-4 J102-1
+5V 6 6 J102
Paper Pushing
2 2 1STPA J203-3 J11-4
J204-5 +5V 7 7 3 3
Plate Home Position

1 1 +5V J203-2 J11-5
G 8 8 2 2
PI4S
Sensor
J203-1 J11-6
PI20S
EJCVR 9 9 1 1
Sensor
J127
Motor Clock
5 1 5 1
Paper Folding
J9-7
J10-5 J104-3
3 3 4 2 4 2 J18 J18 +5V 10 10
J9-8
J10-4 J130-1 J104-2
2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 G G 11 11
J10-3 J130-2 J104-1
PI13S
1 J9-9 2 2 1PAFDJP FDR 12 12
B 1 2 4 2 4
J10-2 J130-3 J107-3
Guide Home
PI19S
1 1 +5V G 13 13
Sensor
Position Sensor
1 5 1 5 J203 J303 J103
J10-1
LUNGECLK J107-2 J11-7
14 14 3 1 3 3
+5V
J123 J304 J204
VPJM
G
+5V
STPLHP
G J14 J107-1 J11-8
J17 +5V 15 15 2 2 2 2
PI3S
Cover
G 6
+24V 5
4
3
2
1
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
Sensor
J2 J13 J11-9
Delivery
14
13
12
11
10
J16 1 3 1 1
PI18S
J126
Sensor
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J9-4 J2 J13
No. 3 Paper No. 2 Paper No. 1 Paper

3 3
3 3 J18-1
J9-5 2 2
2 2 J18-2
PI12S
J9-6
Phase
PI21S
Sensor
sensor
1 1
1 1 J18-3
J104
Paper folding
home position
J11-10
Crescrent Roller
J107
3 3
J131-1
J131-2
J131-3
J131-4
J131-5
J131-6
J208-2
J208-3
J208-4
J131-1
J131-2
J131-3
J11-11
2 2
PI2S
J11-12
Sensor
1 1
Front Door
Open/Closed
3 3 J10-6
J425 J325 J225 J125 2 2
J10-7
1 4 1 4
PI9S
J525
sensor
J9-1 1 1
Inlet cover
J10-8
3 3 2 3 2 3
J9-2
2 2 3 2 3 2 J124
PI11S
J9-3 J107
Sensor
Delivery
1 1 4 1 4 1 J11-13
3 3
J11-14
2 2
PI1S
Sensor
J11-15
A 1 1
Paper Pushing
Plate Motor Clock
NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J2 J2 J114 J114 J113

2 2 2 2 2 2
M
M1P
J21B J38 J38 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 14 14
Punch Motor
2 13 13
3 12 12
4 11 11
5 10 10
6 9 9 J112 J112
7 8 8 J1B-7
4 4
8 7 7 J1B-8
3 3
9 6 6 J1B-9
E 2 2
Scrap full
10 5 5 J1B-10
1 1
Detection PCB
11 4 4
12 3 3
13 2 2
14 1 1
J10 J10
J7-1
6 6
J7-2
5 5
J7-3
4 4
J7-4
3 3
LED PCB
J7-5
2 2
J7-6
1 1
J21A J3A J3A J7 J7
1 14 14 J11-1
G 13 13
2 13 13 J11-2
+5V 12 12
J11-3 J11 J11
11.1.9.3. Punch Unit Circuit Diagram
3 12 12 11 11
SREG1 J7-7
4 11 11 J11-4 7 7
SREG2 10 10 J7-8
5 10 10 J11-5 6 6
9 9
Finisher Unit
SREG3 J7-9
6 9 9 J11-6 5 5
SREG4 8 8 J7-10
7 8 8 J11-7 4 4
D PAEND 7 7 J7-11
8 7 7 G 6 6 J10-1 3 3
J7-12
9 6 6 5 J10-2 2 2
LEDON1 5
Photosensor PCB
J10-3 J7-13
10 5 5 LEDON2 4 4 1 1
11 4 4 J10-4
LEDON3 3 3
12 3 3 J10-5
LEDON4 2 2
13 2 2 J10-6
LEDON5 1 1
14 1 1
670
J4 J4 J101 J101
J23 J1A-7
4 4 4 +24V 1 1
J1A-8
M2P
2 2
Motor
3 3 3 J1A-9
M
Punch Driver PCB

2 2 2 3 3
J1A-10
1 1 1 G 4 4
J1B J1B
11 11
J112-1
G 10 10
J112-2
DFULL 9 9
J112-3
C LEDON8 8
J112-4
+5V
7 7 J104
J105-1 J1B-3
+5V
6 6 3 3
J105-2 J1B-2
PUNCHCLK5 5 2 2
J1B-1
PI3P
J105-3
Sensor
G
4 4 1 1
J104-1
PUNCHHP 3 3
J104-2
+5V 2 2
Punch Home Position
J104-3
G 1 1
J1A J1A
A 11 11 J105
J106 J1B-4
J101-1 3 3
3 B 10 10 J1B-5
NC J101-2 2 2
2 A 9 9 J1B-6
PI2P
C J101-3
Sensor
8 1 1
MS2P
N0 1 B 8
J101-4
+24V 7 7
Punch Motor Clock
J5 J5
Front Door Switch

6 6
4 4 FDROPN 5
B 5
3 3 4
4
2 2 UDROPN J102-1
G 3 3
1 1 +24V J102-2
J106 SREGHP 2 2
J102-3 J1A-1 J102
NC 3 +5V 1 1 3 3
J1A-2
C 2 2 2
J1A-3
MS1P
PI1P
N0 1
Sensor
1 1
Upper Door Switch

Punch Home Position
A
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2. DA-FS330
11.2.1. Introduction
11.2.1.1. DA-FS330 Specifications
Applicable Models : DP-3510/3520/3530 Series
Item Description
Ambient Conditions 50 - 95 °F / 10 - 35 °C
Relative Humidity 15 - 80% RH
Installation Horizontal
Condition
Loading Style Lower Bin Lift
LDR/A3, LGL/B4
LTR/A4, LTR-R/A4-R
Upper Bin:
Copy Paper Size INV-R/A5-R
B5, B5-R Post card
Lower Bin: LTR/A4 only
Copy Paper Weight 16 - 34 lb / 60 - 133 g/m2 (Non-Finishing)
16 - 28 lb / 64 - 105 g/m2 (Punching, Stapling)
Number of Bins 2
Sort Mode, Hole Punch Mode,
Modes Staple Mode (Lower Bin only),
Shift Mode (Lower Bin only)
Upper Bin: 100 sheets
Non-Staple Sort
Loading Capacity Lower Bin: 1,000 sheets
Lower Bin: 30 sets
Staple Sort
(regardless the number of sheets, max. 30 sheets/set)
Shift Operation Shift 23 mm (Lower Bin only, LTR/A4 only)
15.9 x 20.5 x 17.2 in / 420 x 520 x 430 mm
Size (W) (D) (H)
(not including the Finisher Stand)
Weight Approx. 36 lb / 16 kg
Power Source +24 VDC supplied from Copier
Power
60 W
Consumption
Rear Diagonal Stapling
Stapling Position
Refer to the illustration as follows.
Stapled Number of
Max. 30 sheets/set
Copies
Replacement FQ-SS32
Staples
3 Holes (North America)
Hole Punch
4 Holes (Europe / others)
Position
Refer to the illustration as follows.
Ver. 5.0 671 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Stapling Position:
60
6±2.5 mm 6±2.5 mm
ABCDE
FGHIJK
6±2 mm 6±2 mm
FGHIJK
ABCDE
Hole Punch Position:
<North America> <Europe / Others>
D D
B
B
A
A C2 C2
A
A C1
C1
A
A 106 ± 0.5 mm 80 ± 0.5 mm

B 8 ± 0.5 mm 6 ± 0.5 mm
l C1 - C2 l Less than 2 mm Less than 2 mm
D 9.5 ± 1.0 mm 10.5 ± 1.0 mm
Function
Shift Mode Staple Mode Hole Punch Mode

Upper Bin No No Yes
Lower Bin (LTR/A4 only) Yes Yes Yes
Ver. 5.0 672 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.1.2. Features
1. Small-size 2-bin finisher with a stapling and hole punch function
The Finisher is equipped with a stapling function as well as a hole punch function.
2. Large Capacity
A maximum of 1,100 sheets can be stacked in 2 bins.
(20 lbs/80g/m2 small size paper, not stapled).
3. Improved Paper Transport Performance

Copy paper 16-34lbs/60 - 133g/m2 can be used. (Max 28 lbs/105g/m2 for staple and punch mode)
4. Shift
Copies of each job can be discharged to the foreground position, so that copies in a bin can be sorted.
(A4, LTR Only)
11.2.1.3. External Parts

Front Cover
Paper Exit (Face Up)
Top Cover Upper Tray
Rear Cover
Paper Exit
(Face Down)
Lower Tray
Guide Plate
Assembly
Lower Left Cover
Stapler Cover Assembly
I/F Cable
Ver. 5.0 673 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.1.4. Component Location
1. Mechanical Parts
Face Up Exit Roller Bearing
Face Up Exit Roller
Paddle Roller
Face Down Exit Paper Path Select Gate
Roller Bearing
Registration Roller Bearing
Face Down Exit
Roller
Paper Feed
Upper Tray Guide
Registration Roller
Lower Tray
Inverting Roller
Interstage Stack
Stapler Unit
2. Electrical Parts
Punch Registration Clutch (CL1)
Punch Clutch (CL2) Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor (PC10)
Exit Sensor (Face Up) (PC2)
Paper Feed Sensor (PC1)
Jogging Home Position Sensor (PC6)
CPU PCB
Jogging Motor (M2)
Transport Punch Box Detecting Sensor (PC12)
Motor (M1)
Paper Full Gate Solenoid (SL1)
Detecting
Sensor (PC9)
Elevation Ceiling Sensor
Sheet Detecting (PC5)
Sensor (PC7)
Belt Motor (M3)
Cartridge Sensor
(SW2)
Elevating Motor (M4)
Staple Home
Position Sensor
(PC13) Elevating Bottom Sensor (PC11)
Staple Sensor Paper Pass Sensor (PC8)
(SW3)
Staple Motor Set Switch (SW1)
(M5) Belt Home Positon Sensor (PC4)
Exit Sensor (Face Down)
(PC3)
Ver. 5.0 674 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.2. Mechanism and Operation
11.2.2.1. Outline of Operation
DA-DS330 and Host Machine exchange signals through serial communication and carry out the following 8
modes of operations.
11.2.2.1.1. Upper Bin Exit

Discharge the paper into upper bin.
11.2.2.1.2. Upper Bin Punch Exit

Punch the end of paper and discharge into upper bin.
11.2.2.1.3. Lower Bin Exit

Discharge the paper into lower bin from interstage stack.
11.2.2.1.4. Lower Bin Punch Exit

Punch the end of paper and discharge the paper into lower bin from interstage stack.
11.2.2.1.5. Lower Bin Staple Exit

Jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, then staple when they reach specified number,
and discharge into lower bin.
11.2.2.1.6. Punch Staple Exit

Punch the end of paper, jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, staple when they reach
specified number, and discharge into lower bin.
11.2.2.1.7. Shift Exit

Jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, carry out shift operation, and discharge into
lower bin.
11.2.2.1.8. Punch Shift Exit

Punch the end of paper, jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, carry out shift operation
and discharge into lower bin.
Ver. 5.0 675 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.2.2. Paper Transport Mechanism
When the Punch Registration Sensor detects the paper, the Transport Motor (M1) and Belt Motor (M3) are
driven, driving gears and belts, which revolve rollers.
1. Upper Tray paper path (Discharged into Upper Tray)

The Paper Transport Sensor detects the paper when the Transport Motor (M1) is driven and each roller
is rotated. Then the Path Select Gate is switched to the direction of [A] by Gate Solenoid, and the
paper is discharged into the Upper Tray by the Exit Roller.
Exit Sensor (Straight)
Upper Tray Registration Roller Bearing
Face Up Exit Roller Punch Registration
Bearing Sensor
[A]
Registration Roller
Face Up Exit Roller Path Select Gate
(Transport Switching Mechanism)
Path Select Gate
Gate Solenoid
Ver. 5.0 676 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.2.2.1. Paper Transport Mechanism (Interstage Stack)
1. Lower Tray Paper Path (Discharged into Lower Tray)
The rollers are rotated by the Transport Motor (M1). The paper passes through the Registration Roller,
Path Gate, Paddle Roller and is received by the stack. After the paper is detected by the Paper Path
Sensor and jogged, the Belt Motor is driven and the paper is discharged into the Lower Tray.
Path Select Gate
Paddle Roller
Paper Feed Sensor
Lower Tray
Registration Roller
Paper Stack
Paper Pass Sensor
Belt Motor
Paper Stack
Belt Motor
Paper Pass Sensor

Sheet Detecting Sensor
Belt
Belt Home Position Sensor
Ver. 5.0 677 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.2.3. Punch Mechanism
Cam Lifter
Cam
Drive Shaft
Punch Bar
Registration Roller
Paper Feed Bearing
Punch Clutch (CL2) Sensor
A
Registration
Roller Punch Registration
Clutch (CL1)
11.2.2.3.1. Paper Transport Stop Mechanism

Stops the paper momentarily at the punching position.
Process
The leading edge of the paper being transported into the Finisher passes through the Paper Feed Sensor.
• Punch Registration Clutch is turned ON.

When the normally closed type CL1 is turned ON, the driving force to the Registration Roller is cut off,
stopping the paper at the Registration Roller.
• Papers are transported from the printer continuously. The leading edge of the paper is pressed against
the nip of the Registration Roller, which allows positioning of each paper. The Guide Plate, equipped with
a spring moves downward to compensate for the paper loop created during this process.
• The leading edge of the paper is punched by the Punch Unit.
• CL1 is turned OFF, the driving force is transmitted to the Registration Roller, and the paper is transported.
11.2.2.3.2. Punch Unit Drive Mechanism

Punch Unit is composed of Guide A, B, Punch Bar, Cam, Cam Lifter, Drive Shaft, and Single Punch Clutch
(CL2).
11.2.2.3.3. Punch Unit Drive

When the Transport Motor is driven, the Punch Unit’s drive gear rotates the Punch Unit’s clutch gear.
But the driving force is not transmitted to Drive Shaft because the Punch Clutch (CL2) is normally OFF and
locked.
When CL2 is turned ON and the lock is released, the clutch gear’s rotation is transmitted to the drive and
the drive shaft is rotated.
(CL2 is turned ON momentarily, and locks after one rotation, stopping the movement of the shaft)
A rotation of the Drive Shaft causes a single vertical movement of the Punch Bar which is supported by the
Cam, thus punching the paper.
Ver. 5.0 678 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.2.4. Jogging/Shift Mechanism
Holding Spring Shift Bar
Jogging Home Position Sensor
(Rack A)
Reference Plate Pinion Jogging Motor
Gear
B
A
Jogging Bar (Rack B)
Sheet Detecting Sensor
<Jogging Operation>
• The Jogging Bar moves the papers stacked in interstage stack to the Reference Plate, and jogs the
papers toward the STS. The papers are detected by the Sheet Detecting Sensor when they are in the
position where stapling is possible.
This procedure ensures stapling of the arranged papers.
The Reference Plate also ensures the discharge into a fixed position.
<Shift Operation>
• Papers jogged to the direction of the STS go through a shift operation. Therefore, single paper shifts by
the Shift Bar are sorted when discharged.
(There is no shift operation for the stapled paper.)
<Jogging/Shift Mechanism>
• Jogging and shift operations are carried out by the Jogging Bar and Shift Bar which are moved by the
pinion, which is driven by the A and B movement of the Jogging Motor (M2) Gear.
• The Holding Spring pushes the rack toward the pinion to ensure proper engagement of the Rack and
Pinion. The Jogging Bar’s range of movement differs depending on the paper size (A4, LTR only).
<Home Position Detection>

• The Jogging Bar’s home position is decided by the light blocking plate integrated into the Pinion and the
Home Position Sensor.
• The Jogging Bar’s home position is the point where the sensor’s light starts being blocked by the
Blocking Plate.
• The Jogging Bar and Shift Bar’s range of movement, which differs depending on paper size, is calculated
based on this position.
Ver. 5.0 679 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.2.5. Stapling Mechanism
Stapling Mechanism 1.
FQ-SS32
Staple Cartridge
Staple Motor
Cam
Staple Sensor
Cartridge
Sensor
Staple Home Position
Sensor
Staple Table
• The Staple Motor’s rotation drives the stapler by rotating the cam via a gear.
• The link is in contact with the Cam. When the Cam revolves, the link moves around its supporting point.
Stapling Mechanism 2.
Cam
Staple Plate
Staple Table
Ver. 5.0 680 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.2.6. Elevating Mechanism
Belt Paper Full Detecting Sensor
Paper Upper Surface Detecting
Sensor
Wire
Elevation Ceiling Sensor
Hook Plate
Belt Motor
Elevating Bottom
Sensor
Elevating Motor (M4)

When the Elevating Motor rotates the wire drum, the Wire is wound and the Hook Plate moves up and
down, vertical movement of Lower Tray.
11.2.2.6.1. Lower Tray Up/Down Movement Control
1. The Lower Tray is elevated by the Elevating Motor (M4) to the point where the Elevation Ceiling or
Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor is activated.
If paper is not in the Tray, the elevation is stopped when the Elevation Ceiling Sensor is activated.
If paper is in the Tray, elevation is stopped when the Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor is
activated.
When the Elevation Ceiling Sensor is activated, a signal indicating that the Tray is empty is transmitted
to the Host.
2. When the Paper Full Detecting Sensor is activated after papers are discharged, the Lower Tray moves
until the Paper Full Sensor is deactivated.
3. When the Lower Tray is fully loaded and both, the Elevation Bottom Sensor and Paper Full Detecting
Sensor are activated, the Printer stops discharging papers.
4. When papers are removed from the Lower Tray and the Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor is
deactivated, the Lower Tray is elevated.
Ver. 5.0 681 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.3. Preventive Maintenance
11.2.3.1. General
1. A Preventive maintenance inspection should be performed on the Finisher at a regular basis. If the
preventive maintenance inspection is correctly performed, the Finisher can be maintained for a long
period of time, machine down time and the number of service calls can be minimized.
2. Refer to the attached chart for parts replacement schedule.
3. A high voltage hazard remains even when the machine is not operating.
Always disconnect the Copier System from its power source (wall outlet) before servicing or
disassembly.
11.2.3.2. Recommended Tools

1. The following items are necessary to perform an effective, time efficient P.M.
a. Vacuum cleaner
b. Blower brush
c. Isopropyl alcohol
d. Cleaning cotton
e. Lint free wiper (Kim wipes)
f. Cotton swabs
11.2.3.3. Cleaning Recommendations

1. Refer to the appropriate PM cycle on the maintenance chart, where the cleaning cycles is broken down
by Finisher.
Note:
Use of Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) is strongly suggested, and only to be used when dry cleaning is
ineffective. Excessive use of IPA can decrease the operating life of rubber components.
2. IPA should be used sparingly to clean the transport roller (only when required).
11.2.3.4. Maintenance Chart
Q’ty per
Parts Name Parts Number Maintenance Cycle
Unit
Stapler Unit GH03 - 7811 1 200,000 copies
GH03 - 7801
(North America) 500,000 copies
Hole Punch Unit 1
GH03 - 7802 (including electro-magnetic clutch)
(Except North America)
Paddle Roller GH03 - 3504 1 500,000 copies
GH03 - 4601 2
Discharge Brush 500,000 copies
GH03 - 4602 2
Registration Clutch GH03 - 6204 1 500,000 copies
Ver. 5.0 682 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.3.5. Disassembly and Assembly
1. Removal of the External Covers
Upper Tray
(1) Remove the Finisher Tray (x2).

(2) Remove the Front Cover (2 Screws).
(3) Remove the Rear Cover (2 Screws).
(4) Remove the Top Cover (2 Shoulder Screws).
Lower Tray
2. Removal of the Hole Punch Unit
(1) Remove the External Covers.

(2) Remove the Hole Punch Unit Harness (x2).
(3) Remove the Tension Spring.
(4) Remove the Tension Bracket (1 Screw, 1 E ring).
Note:
When the tension bracket is reinstalled, use the
left side screw hole for the 3 Hole Punch Unit and
the right side screw hole for the 4 Hole Punch Unit.
(5) Remove the Hole Punch Unit (2 Screws).

(5)
Ver. 5.0 683 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Removal of the Hole Punch Unit Roller
(1) Remove the Hole Punch Unit.

(2) (2) (2) Remove the Hole Punch Unit Roller Assembly
(2)
(2) (x4, 1 Screw each).
4. Removal of the CPU PCB
(1) Remove the External Covers.

(2) Disconnect all the Connectors.
(3) Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Screws
(3) (4 Screws).
(3)
5. Removal of the Registration Roller Clutch
(2) (1) Remove the Harness from the Harness Clamp

(9 positions).
(2) (2) Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Bracket
(3 Screws).
(2)
(3)
(3) Remove the Registration Clutch Mounting Screw
(1 Set Screw).
(4) Remove the Registration Clutch Connector (x1).
(5) Remove the Registration Clutch.
(5)
Ver. 5.0 684 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6. Removal of the Registration Roller
(1) Remove the Hole Punch Unit.

(2) Remove the Registration Roller Clutch.
(3) Remove the Registration Roller Bushing.
(Front/Rear, 1 E-Ring each)
(4) Remove the Registration Roller.
7. Removal of the Transfer Motor

(2)
(1) Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Bracket.
(2) Loosen the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw.
(3) Disconnect the Transfer Motor Connector.
(4) Remove the Transfer Motor Mounting Bracket
(3 Screws, 1 Connector).
(5) Remove the Transfer Motor Knob (1 Screw).

(6) (6) Remove the Transfer Motor Belt.
(5)
(7) Remove the Transfer Motor from the Bracket

(3 Screws).
Ver. 5.0 685 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8) Remove the Transfer Motor Pulley (1 E-Ring).
(8)
(9) Remove the Transfer Motor.
8 Removal of the Timing Belt 1 and 2

(2) Remove the Transfer Motor Mounting Bracket.
(3) Remove the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw.
(6)
(7) (5) Remove Timing Belt 1.
(6) Loosen the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw of
Timing Belt 2.
(7) Remove Timing Belt 2.
9. Removal of the Paddle Roller
(1) Remove the Front and Rear Cover.

(3) Remove the Upper Left Panel
(3) (2 Screws. Shoulder Screw on the front side).
(3)
Ver. 5.0 686 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Disconnect the Sensor Connector.
(5) Remove the Sensor Harness from the Harness
Clamp.
(6) Remove the Upper Guide Plate for the Inverting
(6) Paper Exit (4 Screws).
(5)
(6) (4)
(7) Remove the Inverting Guide Plate (4 Screws).

(2 positions, Front/Rear).
Note:
(7) Use the upper hole when the Spring is reinstalled.
(8)
(7)
(8)
(9) Remove the Gear and Bushing

(Front/Rear, 1 E-Ring each).
(9)
(10) Remove the Paddle Roller.
(10)
Ver. 5.0 687 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
10. Removal of the Inverting Paper Exit Roller
(1) Remove the External Covers (Front/Rear).

(2) Remove the Lower Left Panel
(4 Screws, Shoulder Screws on the front side).
(3) Disconnect the Harness Connector of the Left
(2) Panel.
(4) Remove the Inverting Paper Exit Roller Bushing

(Rear) (1 E-Ring).
(4)
(7)
(5) Remove the Inverting Idle Gear (1 E-Ring).

(6) Remove the Inverting Drive Gear and Bushing
(Front) (2 E-Rings).
(7) Remove the Inverting Paper Exit Roller.
(5)
(6)
11. Removal of the Straight Paper Exit Roller
(1) Remove the External Covers (Front and Rear).

(3) (2) Remove the CPU PCB.
(3) Remove the Upper Left Panel.
Ver. 5.0 688 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Roller Bushing
(Front) (1 E-Ring).
(4)
(5) Remove the Belt and Pulley (1 E-Ring).

(6) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Roller Bushing
(Rear) (1 E-Ring).
(5)
(5)
(7) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Roller.

(7)
12. Removal of the Path Select Gate

(5)
(5) (1) Remove the External Covers (Front/Rear).
(2) Remove the Top Cover (2 Screws).
(3) (3) Remove the Gate Solenoid with Mounting
Bracket (2 Screws, 1 Spring, 1 Gate Arm and 1
Connector).
(4) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Sensor
Connector.
(5) Remove the Upper Guide Plate for the Straight
Paper Exit (2 Screws and 2 Springs).
Ver. 5.0 689 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(6) Remove the Path Select Gate (1 E-Ring)
(4)
(6) (Adjustment of the Gate Solenoid). Adjust the
solenoid bracket mounting position so that the
Gate Arm is contacting the Solenoid.
13. Removal of the Belt Drive Motor
(1) Remove the Outer Covers.

(2) Remove the Drive Belt.
(2)
(3) Remove the Belt Drive Motor Unit

(3 Screws and 1 Connector).
(3)
(4) Remove the Belt Drive Motor Mounting Bracket 1

(2 Screws).
(5) Remove the Pulley (1 E-Ring).
(5)
(4)
(4)
Ver. 5.0 690 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(6) Remove the belt Drive Motor Mounting Bracket 2
(3 Screws).
(7) Remove the Drive Gear (1 E-Ring).
(8) Remove the Motor from the Bracket.
(7) (6)
(6)
(6)
14. Removal of the Straight Paper Exit Discharge

Brush
(4) (1) Remove the External Covers (Front/Rear).

(3) (2) Remove the Top Cover (2 Screws).
(3) Remove the Lever (2 Screws).
(3) (4) Remove the Discharge Brush (2 Screws).
(4)
15. Removal of the Inverting Paper Exit Discharge

Brush

(4) (2) Remove the CPU PCB.
(3) Remove the Upper Left Panel.
(4) (4) Remove the Discharge Brush (2 Screws).
16. Removal of the Tractor Belt

(2) Remove the Lower Left Panel (Front/Rear).
(3) Remove the Harness Connector of the Left
Panel.
(4) Remove the Belt Motor Unit.
(5) Remove the Lower Guide Support Plate for the
Inverting Paper Exit (4 Screws).
(5) (5)
(5)
(5)
Ver. 5.0 691 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(6) Remove the Tension Spring from the Shaft.
(6)
(7) Remove the Knob for paper jam removal

(1 Screws).
(7)
(8) Remove the Tractor Belts (x2).
Note:
When the Belt is reinstalled, install the Belt so that
the Belt tooth just under the Plastic Hook is aligned
with the slit on the Pulley.
(8)
(8)
17. Removal of the Staple Unit
(1) Open the Staple Cover.

(2) Remove the Staple Connector (x1).
(3) Remove the Staple Unit.
(3)
(2)
Ver. 5.0 692 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
18. Removal of the Stack Area Discharge Brush
(1) Remove the Staple Unit.

(2) Remove the Stack Area Discharge Brushes
(x2, 1 Screw each).
(2)
(2)
19. Removal of the Jogging Motor
(1) Remove the Dust Box.

(2) Remove the Cover (2 Screws).
(5) (3) Disconnect the Jogging Motor Connector.
(4) Disconnect the Jogging Home Position Sensor
Connector (x1).
(5) Remove the Jogging Unit (3 Screws).
(2)
(6) Remove the Jogging Motor Cover (2 Screws).
(2) (7) Remove the Jogging Motor (2 Screws).
(4)
(6) (6) (3)
(5)
(5)
(5)
Ver. 5.0 693 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.4. Electrical
11.2.4.1. Electrical Parts (Functions of Switches and Sensors)
No. Sensor Symbol Function

Detects the setting condition of the Finisher, resets paper
1 Set Switch (SW1)
jam and resets staple jam.
2 Cartridge Sensor (SW2) Detects the Staple Cartridge.
3 Staple Sensor (SW3) Detects staples.
4 (PC13) Detects the home position for stapling.
Sensor
Detects papers taken into paper feeder and paper jam.
5 Paper Feed Sensor (PC1)
Detects trigger for punching operation.
Detects paper jam and paper exit.
6 Paper Exit Sensor (Straight) (PC2)
(Straight)
Detects paper jam and trigger of the Jogging Bar
7 Paper Path Sensor (PC8)
operation.
8 Paper Exit Sensor (PC3) Detects paper jam and paper exit. (Inverting)
(Inverting)
9 Belt Home Position Sensor (PC4) Detects home position of the belt.
10 Elevation Ceiling Sensor (PC5) Detects ceiling of the Lower Tray.
Jogging Home Position
11 (PC6) Detects home position of the Jogging Bar.
Sensor
Detects the paper when it is jogged to the position where
12 Sheet Detecting Sensor (PC7)
stapling is possible.
Detects papers in the Lower Tray when they reach a
13 Paper Full Sensor (PC9)
specified height.
Detects upper surface of the papers in the Lower Tray.
Paper Upper Surface
14 (PC10) Detects when papers in the Lower Tray are removed
Detecting Sensor
during the stacking process.
15 Elevating Bottom Sensor (PC11) Detects the bottom of the Lower Tray.
Ver. 5.0 694 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.4.1.1. Control of Transport Motor
1. Paper Transport Motor for Finisher is of outer rotor type DC, brushless. Its control circuit is shown
below.
2. Pulse signals from P35 of P.C.B. (PWB-A) IC1 controls the speed. Signal L from IC1-P10 starts the
motor, while signal H stops the Motor.
8 GND
7 R10 RA1 IC1
IC7
6 79
2 1 P10
5 PJ6 6
4
4 3 99
3 PJ6 7 P35
R10
2
1 IC7
M1 GND
DC24V
PAPER FEED MOTOR
11.2.4.1.2. Jogging Motor Control

1. Jogging Motor, which jogs papers in stack and carries out offset operation, is a two phase exciting type,
2-phase pulse motor. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. Each pulse signal output from Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, of IC12 in P.C.B. (PWB-A) excites and rotates the coil
in each phase.
3. Motor is stopped when Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, of IC12 change to Low signal level, and the power supply to
motor coil is cut off.
DC5V
DC24V DC24V
SM SM
15
IC15
9
1 1 IC12
COM
COM
RA3 IC9
2 2
A 2 3 2 1 2
3 3 3 PJ5 O1 I1 O1
A 7 6 4 3 5
4 4 5 PJ5 O2 I2 O2
B 10 11 6 5 6
5 5 4 PJ5 O3 I3 O3
B 15 14 8 9 9
6 6 6 PJ5 O4 I4 O4
M2
JOGGING MOTOR
11.2.4.1.3. Belt Motor Control

1. The Motor for discharging papers out of stack is a two phase exciting type, 2-phase pulse motor. Its
control circuit is shown below.
2. Each pulse signal output from P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC1 in P.C.B (PWB-A) excites and rotates the coil
in each phase.
3. Motor is stopped when P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC1 change to Low signal level, and the power supply to
motor coil is cut off.
DC24V
SM SM
1 1 DC5V
2 2
A
3 3 PJ4 3
A
4 4 PJ4 5
B
5 5 PJ4 4
B
6 6 PJ4 6
18
11
IC1
8
M3 R7 R6
RA1
OUTB
OUTB
OUTA
OUTA
R6 6 18
INA P23
BELT MOTOR 2 5 20
TdA INA P21
13 17 19
TdB INB P22
REFB
REFA
RSB
RSA
16 23
INB P20
C7
C6
10
14
C5 C4
R9
R5 R4 R3 R2
GND
Ver. 5.0 695 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.4.1.4. Elevation Motor Control
1. Elevation Motor, which moves the Lower Tray up and down, is a +24V DC motor. Its control circuit is
shown below.
2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from P30 and P31 of IC1 in P.C.B. (PWB-A).
3. Lower tray is elevated when H and L are output from P30 and P31 respectively. Lower Tray descends
when L and H are output from P30 and P31 respectively.
4. Motor is stopped when L is output from P30 and P31, and brakes when H is output from P30 and P31.
DC5V
DC24V
RA3 IC3
IC16
VCC 7
SM SM
3 1 6
7 PJ4 OUT1 IN1 P30
1 1
C15
2 2
5 2
4 GND
8 PJ4 OUT2 IN2 5
P31
C17
M4 GND2
ELEVATION MOTOR C19 C18
GND
11.2.4.1.5. Staple Motor Control

1. Staple Motor, which carries out stapling, is a +24V DC motor. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from P32 and P33 of IC1 in P.C.B (PWB-A).
3. Stapling is done when H and L are output from P32 and P33 respectively.
4. If an anomaly occurs during stapling, P32 and P33 changes to L and H respectively, inverting the
Staple Motor.
12
11 PLT8
10 PJ1 8
9 PJ1 9 PLT9
8 PJ1 11
7 PJ1 12
6
5 GND
4 DC5V
3 R18
2
M5 1
DC24V
R15 R14 R12
R16
Q2 RA1
STAPLE MOTOR 3 IC8
R17 R13
IC8
1 IC5 IC1
4 6 Q3 12 2 2 1 4
P32
5 Q6 Q1 13
4 3 1
P33
Q5 Q4
IC5
R15
GND
Ver. 5.0 696 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.4.1.6. Gate Solenoid Control
1. Gate Solenoid, which switches between straight discharge and invert discharge, is a +24V DC plunger
solenoid. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. Solenoid is turned ON and switched to straight discharge when signal L is transmitted from P25 of IC1
in PC Board (PWB-A), and invert discharge when the signal “H” is transmitted.
DC24V DC5V
IC1
SM SM
IC14 RA3
1 1
16 1 13
2 2 10 PJ4 O1 I1 P25
15 2
O2 I2
14 3
O3 I3
13 4
O4 I4
SL1 12
O5 I5
5
PATH SELECT SOLENOID 11 6

O6 I6
10 7
O7 I7
11.2.4.1.7. Punch Registration Clutch Control

1. Punch Registration Clutch, which stops the movement of Paper Feed Roller at the time of punching, is
a +24V electromagnetic clutch. Its control circuit is shown below.
2. Clutch is turned ON when signal L is transmitted from P27 of IC1 in PC Board (PWB-A).
DC5V
DC24V
IC14
IC1
SM SM 16 1
O1 I1
15 2 RA3
1 1 O2 I2
14 3 11
2 2 4 PJ7 O3 I3 P27
13 4
O4 I4
12 5
O5 I5
11 6
O6 I6
CL1 10
O7 I7
7
PAPER STANDSTILL CLUTCH
11.2.4.1.8. Punch Clutch Control

1. Punch Clutch, which drives Punch Unit, is a +24V electromagnetic clutch. Its control circuit is shown
below.
2. Punching is done when signal L is transmitted from P26 of IC1 in PC Board (PWB-A).
DC5V
DC24V
IC1
IC14
SM SM
16 1 RA3
1 1 O1 I1
15 2 12
2 2 2 PJ7 O2 I2 P26
14 3
O3 I3
13 4
O4 I4
12 5
O5 I5
CL2 11
O6 I6
6
10 7
PUNCH CLUTCH O7 I7
Ver. 5.0 697 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.4.2. Connector Signal
PJ1
No. Signal Name Connection Input/Output Function
1 5V 12 +5V DC+5V
2 GND 11 Ground
0V
3 NC 10 Not Used
Staple Home 5V Stapler Home Position

IC1
4 Position 9 Home Detecting Signal
P45
Sensor 0V
IC1 5V Staple Detecting Sensor

5 Staple Sensor 8 Staple
P46
0V
Stapler
5V Staple Cartridge Detecting
Cartridge IC1
6 7 Cartridge Signal
Sensor P13
0V
7 NC 6 Ground
Staple
8 5 24V
Motor + Normal Inverse
Rev. Rev. Staple Motor Drive Signal +
Staple 0V
9 4
Motor +
10 NC 3 Not Used
Staple
11 2 Normal Inverse 24V
Motor -
Rev. Rev. Staple Motor Drive Signal -
Staple 0V
12 1
Motor -
Ver. 5.0 698 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PJ3
24V
1 (from Power 5 +24V DC+24V
Outlet)
Power PCB
2 NC Not Used
CN2B
GND
3 (from Power 4 Ground
Outlet) 0V
PJ4
1 24V 1 +24V DC+24V
2 24V 2 +24V DC+24V
Belt Motor
IC1
3 Belt Motor A 3 Belt Motor Drive Pulse A
P23
IC1
4 Belt Motor B 4 Belt Motor Drive Pulse B
P22
IC1 Pulse
5 Belt Motor A 5 Belt Motor Drive Pulse A
P21
IC1
6 Belt Motor B 6 Belt Motor Drive Pulse B
P20
Elevation IC1 24V Elevation Motor Drive

7 1 CCW CW
Motor P30 Signal +
0V
Elevation
Motor
Elevation IC1 24V Elevation Motor Drive
8 2 CCW CW
Motor P31 Signal -
0V
Gate +24V
9 24V 1 DC+24V
Solenoid
Gate 24V
IC1
10 Solenoid 2 ON Gate Solenoid Drive Signal
P25
(Signal) 0V
Ver. 5.0 699 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PJ5
1 24V 1 +24V DC+24V
2 24V 2 +24V DC+24V
Joging Motor
Joging Motor IC12
3 6 Joging Motor Drive Pulse A
A Q1
Joging Motor IC12
4 5 Joging Motor Drive Pulse A
B Q3
Joging Motor IC12 Pulse
5 4 Joging Motor Drive Pulse B
A Q2
Joging Motor IC12
6 3 Joging Motor Drive Pulse B
B Q4
PJ6
1 24V 8 +24V DC+24V
2 GND 7 Ground
0V
3 5V 6 +5V DC+5V
Transport
Motor
4 GND 5 Ground
0V
5 H/L 4 Ground
0V
Transport IC1 Transport Motor Drive

6 3
Motor Clock P10 Pulse Speed Pulse Signal
Transport 24V
IC1 Transport Motor Drive ON/
7 Motor ON/ 2 ON
P35 OFF Signal
OFF 0V
Ver. 5.0 700 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
24V Transport Motor Normal

Transport IC1
8 1 Normal Control Drive Detecting
Motor LD P12
0V Signal
PJ7
1 24V 1 +24V DC+24V
Punch Clutch
Punch Clutch IC1 24V

2 2 ON Punch Clutch Drive Signal
(Signal) P26
0V
3 24V 1 +24V DC+24V

Punch
Registration
Punch Clutch
Registration IC1 24V Punch Registration Clutch
4 Clutch 2 Normal
P27 Drive Signal
(Signal) 0V
PJ8
1 GND 3 Ground
0V
Paper Exit
Sensor Paper Exit 5V
IC1 Invert Exit Paper Detecting
2 (Inverting) Sensor 2 No Paper
P01 Signal
(Signal) (Inverting) 0V
3 5V 1 +5V DC+5V
Ver. 5.0 701 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4 GND 3 Ground
0V
Paper Exit
Sensor Paper Exit 5V
IC1 Straight Exit Paper
5 (Straight) Sensor 2 No Paper
P41 Detecting Signal
(Signal) (Straight) 0V
6 5V 1 +5V DC+5V
7 GND 3 Ground
0V
Paper Feed 5V
IC1 Paper Feed Paper Feed Detecting
8 Sensor 2 No Paper
P40 Sensor Signal
(Signal) 0V
9 5V 1 +5V DC+5V
PJ9
1 GND 3 Ground
0V
Paper Full
Detecting Paper Full 5V
IC1 Lower Tray Paper Full
2 Sensor Detecting 2 No Paper
(Signal) Sensor 0V
3 5V 1 +5V DC+5V
Ver. 5.0 702 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4 GND 3 Ground
0V
Paper Upper
Paper Upper 5V
Surface
IC1 Surface Not Lower Tray Paper Upper
5 Detecting 2 Detected 0V
P14 Detecting Surface Detecting Signal
Sensor
Sensor
(Signal)
6 5V 1 +5V DC+5V
7 GND 3 Ground
0V
Paper Path 5V
IC1 Paper Path Stacked Paper Detecting
8 Sensor 2 No Paper
P16 Sensor Signal
(Signal) 0V
9 5V 1 +5V DC+5V
10 GND 3 Ground
0V
Belt Home
Position Belt Home 5V
IC1 Tractor Belt Home Position
11 Sensor Position 2 Home
(Signal) Sensor 0V
12 5V 1 +5V DC+5V
13 GND 3 Ground
0V
Sheet
Detecting Sheet 5V
IC1 Stapled Paper Detecting
14 Sensor Detecting 2 No Paper
P42 Signal
(Signal) Sensor 0V
15 5V +5V DC+5V
Ver. 5.0 703 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
PJ10
1 GND 3 Ground
0V
Joging Home
Position Joging Home 5V
IC1 Joging Home Position
2 Sensor Position 2 Home
(Signal) Sensor 0V
3 5V 1 +5V DC+5V
4 GND 3 Ground
0V
Elevation
Elevation 5V
Celing IC1 Lower Tray Celing Detecting
5 Celing 2 Ceiling
Sensor P17 Signal
Sensor 0V
(Signal)
6 5V 1 +5V DC+5V
Elevation
Bottom
7 GND Sensor 3 Ground
0V
Elevation
Bottom IC1 5V Lower Tray Bottom
8 Sensor 2 Bottom
(Signal) 0V
9 5V 1 +5V DC+5V
Punch Box
Detecting
10 GND Sensor 3 Ground
0V
Punch Box
Detecting IC1 5V Punch Dust Box Detecting
11 Sensor 2 No box
P43 Signal
(Signal) 0V
12 5V 1 +5V DC+5V
Ver. 5.0 704 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
13 NC Not Used
PJ12
IC13 Inverse Signal Received by
1 ISOTRX 11
TZ Finisher
IC13 Pulse
2 SOTRX 12 Signal Received by Finisher
1Y
3 GND I/F Cable 10 Ground

0V
IC13 Inverse Signal Transmitted

4 ISOTTX 8
1B to Finisher
IC13 Pulse Inverse Signal Transmitted
5 SOTTX 9
1A to Finisher
PJ13
1 Set Switch 1 +24V DC+24V
Set Switch
24V Finisher Set Detection
2 Set Switch 3 Set Signal
0V
Ver. 5.0 705 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.5. Section V Troubleshooting
11.2.5.1. Error Detection by Self-Diagnostics
The self-diagnostics function detects troubles in important areas of the Finisher. When any trouble occurs,
the Machine stops. The error indication appears in the “message” display of the Copier and the “Alarm”
indicator on the copier turns ON.
1. User Error
Code Problem Cause/Check

U4 Finisher Inverting Unit/Inverting Shift Tray 1) Are the exit options installed correctly?
(Option) 2) Exit option connector(s) is shorted or loose.
3) Exit option connector(s) is defective.
loose.
6) LVPS connector is shorted or loose.
8) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or
loose.
oF Finisher Tray Capacity Copies exceeded the maximum capacity of
the finisher tray. Remove the copies from the
finisher’s tray and press the Start key. (Face
Down only)
2. Paper Jam
Code Contents
J60 When the finisher is installed.
a) The finisher entry paper feed sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time
after the copier paper exit sensor detected paper.
b) The finisher entry paper feed sensor does not turn off within a predetermined time.
c) The finisher paper exit sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the
finisher entry paper feed sensor detected paper.
d) The finisher paper exit sensor (straight) does not turn off within a predetermined time.
e) The finisher paper exit sensor (invert) does not turn off within a predetermined time.
Ver. 5.0 706 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.2.5.2. Service Mode
1. F4 Mode
a. Input Check
Code Message Display

Function Condition
No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C15 a) 2 bin finisher paper exit sensor Paper is detected.
(inverting exit)
b) 2 bin finisher paper Path sensor Paper is detected.
c) 2 bin finisher paper exit sensor Paper is detected.
(straight exit)
d) 2 bin finisher paper feed sensor Paper is detected.
C16 a) 2 bin finisher Punch Waste Dust box is not detected.
Case detecting sensor
b) 2 bin finisher belt home position Belt in home position.
sensor
c) 2 bin finisher jogging home Jogging in home position.
position sensor
d) 2 bin finisher set switch 2 bin finisher is pulled out.
C17 a) 2 bin finisher stapler cartridge Cartridge is installed.
detecting sensor
b) 2 bin finisher staple detecting Staple is detected.
sensor
c) 2 bin finisher stapler home Stapler in home position.
position sensor
d) 2 bin finisher sheet detecting Paper is detected.
sensor
C18 a) 2 bin finisher elevator bin lower Bin is placed beyond the lower
limit sensor limit.
b) 2 bin finisher paper top Paper is detected.
detecting sensor
c) 2 bin finisher paper full Paper is not detected.
detecting sensor
d) 2 bin finisher elevator bin upper Bin is placed beyond the upper
limit sensor limit.
Ver. 5.0 707 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. Output Check
Activate the door switch before executing output check. Press the Start key to start and press the
Stop key to reset.
Code
Item Function
No.
c109 Finisher bin movement 1 The bin moves downward for one second,
then moves up to the home position.
c110 Finisher bin movement 2 The bin moves downward, then moves up to
the home position.
c111 Finisher paper transport motor Paper transport motor rotates.
c113 Finisher tamper drive motor Tamper drive motor rotates.
c114 Finisher staple motor The stapler operates one time, then resets.
c116 Finisher belt motor Belt motor rotates once.
c117 Finisher gate change solenoid The solenoid turns on/off for one second
cycle.
c118 Finisher hole punch The hole punch operates one time, then
resets.
Ver. 5.0 708 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3. DA-FS355, DA-SP41
11.3.1. General Description
11.3.1.1. Features
1. Through-type Stapler
Adoption of a through-type stapler allows a stapler to carry out saddle stitching.
2. Three Different Auto Stapling Positions

Three different stapling positions (Front 1-point stapling, Rear 1-point stapling, and Middle 2-point
stapling) are supported.
3. Saddle Stitching
A maximum of ten sheets of paper can be delivered stapled and folded in the middle.
4. Punch Mechanism (Option)

Installation of a Punch Unit enables punching holes in sheets before delivery (64 to 133 g/m2 paper; no
transparencies).
Ver. 5.0 709 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.1.2. DA-FS355, DA-SP41 Specifications
1. Finisher / Saddle Assembly
Item Description Remarks

Stacking 2 locations
(1) Delivery Tray (descending type; 1 tray)
Face-down
(2) Bind Tray (fixed type)
Feed Reference Center reference
Stacking Paper Size A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, LDR, LGL, LTR, Large-size: A3, B4, LDR,
LTR-R, INV-R, FLS LGL, FLS
Paper Weight Finisher assembly: 64 to 90 g/ m2
Saddle Assembly : 64 to 90 g/ m2
Mode Non-Sort stack
Sort stack
Staple stack
Bind stack
Stack Height (Note 1) Non-Sort Staple
Large-size : 500 sheets
Small-size : 1000 sheets (Note 2)
Staple Sort
Large-size : 30 sets or 500 sheets
Small-size : 30 sets or 1000 sheets
Folded stack
Stack of 6 to 10 sheets : 10 sets
Stack of 1 to 5 sheets : 20 sheets
Mixed Stack Size mix : 500 sheets (Note 3)
Staple mix: 30 sheets (same paper configuration)
Paper Detection Delivery tray : Yes
Bind tray : Yes
Control Panel No
Display No
Size (W x D x H) 26.18 x 24.21 x 21.85 in (excl. installing kit)
(665 x 615 x 555 mm)
Weight 59.40 lb (27 kg)
Power Supply 24 VDC from host machine
Maximum Power At standby : 13 W
Consumption In operation : 84 W (staple sort)
Stapling Rotary cam type
Stapling Position See Fig. 1-001.
Stapling Thickness Finisher
Large-size : 25 sheets (80 g/m2 paper)
Small-size : 50 sheets (80 g/m2 paper)
Saddle : 10 sheets (80 g/m2 paper)
Staple Supply Cartridge of special staples (5000 Staples)
Replacement Staples DQ-SS35
Staple Detection Yes (nearly empty : 40 remaining staples)
Ver. 5.0 710 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Stapling Size Front 1-Point Stapling :
A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LGL, LTR-R
Rear 1-Point stapling :
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-
R
Middle 2-Point Stapling :
A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR- With the saddle in use.
R
Middle 2-Point Stapling :
A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R
Manual Stapling None
Folding Method Roller contact
Folding Mode Double-folding (single-sheet non-stapling available)
Folding Position Center of sheet Requires a margin of ± 0.2
in (± 5 mm) in the center of
the sheet for a middle
margin.
Saddling Size A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R No special paper.
Note 1 :
The number of sheets is computed based on 80 g/m2 paper.
Note 2 :
Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of 750 sheets or more.
Note 3 :
Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of sheets of different sizes.
Ver. 5.0 711 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Staple Position
Front 1-point stapling Rear 1-point stapling
0.18±0.08 in
(4.5±2 mm)
0.2±0.08 in
(5±2 mm)
0.18±0.08 in
0.2±0.08 in
(4.5±2 mm)
(5±2 mm)
Middle 2-point stapling

0.2±0.08 in
0.2±0.08 in
0.2±0.08 in
(5±2 mm)
(5±2 mm)
(5±2 mm)
A3 or A4 A4-R B4 or B5
3.27±0.16 in (83±4 mm) 1.56±0.16 in (39.5±4 mm) 2.48±0.16 in (63±4 mm)

7.99±0.16 in (203±4 mm) 6.28±0.16 in (159.5±4 mm) 7.2±0.16 in (183±4 mm)
0.2±0.08 in
0.2±0.08 in
(5±2 mm)
(5±2 mm)
LDR LGL or LTR-R

or LTR 8.5 FLS
2.92±0.16 in (74.2±4 mm) 1.67±0.16 in (42.5±4 mm)

6.4±0.16 in (162.5±4 mm)
7.65±0.16 in (194.2±4 mm)
Middle 2-point stapling (w/ saddle in use)

Transfer direction
A3 A4-R B4
1
1
2
Folding
position
1 ±1 mm 3.27±0.16 in (83±4 mm) 1 ±1 mm 1.56±0.16 in (39.5±4 mm) 1 ±1 mm 2.48±0.16 in (63±4 mm)
2 210±1.5 mm 7.99±0.16 in (203±4 mm) 2 148.5±1.5 mm 6.28±6.16 in (159.5±4 mm) 2 182±1.5 mm 7.2±0.16 in (183±4 mm)
LDR LTR-R
1
1
2
1 ±1 mm 2.92±0.16 in (74.2±4 mm) 1 ±1 mm 1.67±0.16 in (42.5±4 mm)

2 216±1.5 mm 7.65±0.16 in (194.2±4 mm) 2 139.7±1.5 mm 6.4±0.16 in (162.5±4 mm)
Fig. 1-001
Stacked Paper Alignment

1.57 in max.(40 mm)
Delivery Direction
0.79 in max.(20 mm)
Fig. 1-002
Ver. 5.0 712 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Punch Unit (Option)

Punching Method Reciprocating method
(sequential processing method)
Paper Size 2- / 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) : For USA and Canada
2-hole / LGL, LTR-R
3-hole / LDR, LTR
4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB) : For EU and Other
A3, A4 Destinations
Paper Weight 64 g/m2~ 133 g/m2 No transparencies.
Punch Hole Diameter 2-/3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) : For USA and Canada
2-hole 0.31 in / 8.0 mm
3-hole 0.31 in / 8.0 mm
0.26 in / 6.5 mm Destinations
Punch Waste 2-/3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) : For USA and Canada
2-hole / 1500 sheets
3-hole / 1500 sheets
1500 sheets Destinations
Size (W x D x H) 3.54 x 22.05 x 6.69 in
(90 x 560 x 170 mm)
Weight 5.5 lb (2.5 kg) (approx.)
Power Supply 24 VDC / 5 VDC supplied by the Finisher Unit.
Maximum Power Standby : 2 W max.
Consumption Operating : 21 W max. (punching)
Manual Stapling None
Folding Method Roller contact
Folding Mode Double-folding (single-sheet non-stapling available)
Folding Position Center of sheet Requires a margin of ± 0.2
1n (± 5 mm) in the center of
the sheet for a middle
margin.
Saddling Size A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R No special paper.
Table 1-002
Ver. 5.0 713 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Hole Position
[1] 2-Holes (Puncher Unit-J1)
1
A3/A4 4.27±0.12 in (108.5±3 mm)
B5/B4 3.48±0.12 in (88.5±3 mm)
3.15±0.04 in (80±1 mm) A4-R 2.56±0.12 in (65±3 mm)
B5-R 2.01±0.12 in (51±3 mm)
0.47±0.12 in
(12±3 mm)
[2] 2-/3-Holes (Puncher Unit-K1)

1
LGL/LTR-R 2.87±0.12 in (73±3 mm)
2.76±0.04 in (70±1 mm)
0.47±0.12 in
(12±3 mm)
1
LDR/LTR 1.24±0.12 in
(31.5±3 mm)
4.25±0.04 in 4.25±0.04 in
(108±1 mm) (108±1 mm)
0.47±0.12 in
(12±3 mm)
[3] 4-Holes (Puncher Unit-G1)

1
A3/A4 1.12±0.12 in (28.5±3 mm)
3.15±0.04 in 3.15±0.04 in 3.15±0.04 in
(80±1 mm) (80±1 mm) (80±1 mm)
0.47±0.12 in
(12±3 mm)
Fig. 1-003
Ver. 5.0 714 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.1.3. Names of Parts
11.3.1.3.1. Cross Section
1. Finisher Unit
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[8] [9] [10] [11]
[1] Delivery Tray [2] Aligning Plate (Front, Rear)

[3] Paddle [4] Delivery Roller
[5] Processing Tray Stopper [6] Feed Roller
[7] Punch Unit (Option) [8] Delivery Belt
[9] Stack Delivery Roller [10] Stapler
[11] Saddle Unit
Fig. 1-004
Ver. 5.0 715 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Saddle Unit
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[1] Bind Stopper [2] Bind Tray

[3] Stack Feed Roller [4] Bind Delivery Roller
[5] Paper Fold Roller [6] Paper Pushing Plate
Fig. 1-005
[1] [2] [3] [4]
(1) Die (2) Cam

(3) Hole Puncher (Punch Blade) (4) Punch Waste Case
Fig. 1-006
11.3.1.4. Routine Maintenance by the User
No. Item Timing

1 Staple Cartridge (Replacement) When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel)
2 Punch Waste Removal (Optional) When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel)
Table 1-003
Ver. 5.0 716 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2. Outline of Operation
11.3.2.1. Basic Operations
11.3.2.1.1. Specifications
The Finisher serves to deliver sheets coming from its host machine. The mode of delivery may be non-sort
stack, job offset*, or staple delivery.
The Saddle Unit build into the Finisher is used to fold a stack of sheets coming from the Finisher Unit in half
for delivery.
All these operations are controlled by various commands sent by the Host Machine in addition to the
commands from the Finisher Controller PCB.
The Punch Unit (option) is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher, and is used to
punch holes in sheets coming from the Host Machine.
The above operations are controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as
the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.
Puncher Unit Drive

System (Puncher Unit;
Option)
Alignment Drive System

Control System
Stapler Drive System
Delivery Drive System
Feed Drive System
Tray Drive System
Saddle Unit Drive System
Fig. 2-001
Caution:
The position of delivery is shifted to the Front/Rear for each stack to assist sorting.
Ver. 5.0 717 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.1.2. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry
The sequence of finisher operations is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB. The Finisher Controller
PCB is a 16-bit microprocessor (CPU), and is also used for combination with the Host Machine (serial).
The Finisher Controller PCB Drive Motors and other loads in response to the various commands from the
Host Machine. It also communicates such data as on the states of various sensors and switches to the Host
Machine by way of the serial communication line.
The ICs mounted to the Finisher Controller PCB have the following functions:
• IC13 (CPU)
Controls sequence of operations.
• IC12 (EEP-ROM)
Backs up adjustment settings.
• IC6 (EP-ROM)
Stores sequence programs.
• IC11 (communication IC)
Communicates with the host machine.
• IC1 (regulator IC)
Generates 5 V.
Fig. 2-001 shows the flow of signals between finisher and options controller.
Finisher Unit
Host Machine DC
Controller PCU
PCB
Motor
IC13
CPU Clutch
IC12 Switch
EEP-ROM
IC11 Sensor
Communication Punch Unit (Option)
IC
Sensor
IC6
EP-ROM Punch Controller
PCB
IC1
Regulator IC
Motor
Fig. 2-002
Ver. 5.0 718 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB
1. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)
PI1 CN44-3 CN43-1 CN42-3 CN16-10
+5V
-1 -3 -1 -12 ENT_S When the sensor
Inlet Sensor -2 -2 -2 -11 detects paper, ‘1’.
PI2 CN51-1 CN9-1

Paddle Home +5V
-3 -3 PDL_HP When the paddle is at
Position Sensor
-2 -2 home position, ‘1’.
PI3 CN55-3 CN54-1 CN53-3 CN9-7

Swing Guide +5V
-1 -3 -1 -9 BDL_ROL_HP When the swing guide
Home Position
Sensor -2 -2 -2 -8 is at home position, ‘1’.
PI4 CN23-3 CN4

Aligning Plate +5V When the aligning
Home Position -1 -3 F JOG_HP plate (Front) is at
Sensor (Front) -2 -2
home position, ‘1’.
PI5 CN36-3 CN5-13

Aligning Plate +5V When the aligning
Home Position -1 -15 R JOG_HP plate (Rear) is at
-2 -14
Sensor (Rear) home position, ‘1’.
PI6 CN30-3 CN29-1 CN28-9 CN5-1

+5V
Processing -1 -3 -7 -3 ADJ_TRAY_S When the sensor
Tray Sensor -2 -2 -8 -2 detects paper, ‘1’.
PI7 CN31-3 -4 -6 -4
Delivery Belt +5V
Home Position -1 -6 -4 -6 EJCT_BLT_HP When the delivery belt
-2 -5 -5 -5 is at home position, ‘1’.
Sensor
PI8 CN32-3 -7 -3 -7
+5V
-1 -9 -1 -9 TRY_EMPS When paper is present
Tray Paper Sensor -2 -8 -2 -8 on the tray, ‘1’.
PI9 CN35-3 CN34-1 CN33-3 CN5-10

Paper Surface +5V When the paper
-1 -3 -1 -12 LVL_S
Sensor -2 -2 -2 -11 surface is detected,
‘1’.
PI10 CN39-3 CN38-1 CN37-9 CN16-1

+5V
Folding Position -2 -2 -8 -2 BIND_P When paper is
Sensor -1 -3 -7 -3 detected, ‘0’.
BIND_L
When LED is lit, ‘1’.
Fig. 2-003
Ver. 5.0 719 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)
PI11 CN40-3 CN38-4 CN37-6 CN16-4 +5V
Folding Home
Position Sensor -1 -6 -4 -6 BIND_HP When at folding home position, ‘0’.
-2 -5 -5 -5
PI12 CN41-3 -7 -3 -7 +5V

Stack Feed Roller When the stack feed roller
-1 -9 -1 -9 BIND_ROL_HP
(Upper) Home -2 -8 -2 -8 (Upper) is at home position, ‘1’.
Position Sensor
PI13 CN47-3 CN15-1 +5V
-1 -3 BIND_EMPS
Bind Tray Sensor -2 -2 When the sensor
detects paper, ‘1’.
PI14 CN52-1 CN9-6 +5V
Staple/Fold Motor -2 -5 BIND_CLK When the staple/fold motor is
Clock Sensor -3 -4 rotating, alternates between
‘1’ and ‘0’.
PI15 CN50-3 CN15-10 +5V
-1 -12 SIFT_UPLMT When the tray is at the
Shift Upper Limit -2 -11
Sensor upper limit, ‘1’.
PI16 CN49-3 CN15-7 +5V
Shift Lower Limit -1 -9 SIFT_DNLMT When the tray is at the
-2 -8
Sensor lower limit, ‘1’.
PI17 CN48-3 CN15-4 +5V
Shift Motor Clock -1 -6 SIFT_CLK While the shift motor
Sensor -2 -5 is rotating, alternates
between ‘1’ and ‘0’.
PI22 CN25-3 CN4-7 +5V
-1 -9 FDOOR_S When the front door
Front Door Sensor -2 -8
is open, ‘1’.
PI23 CN24-3 CN4-4 +5V
Upper Cover Sensor -1 -6 TOPCOV_S When the upper cover
-2 -5 is open, ‘1’.
PI24 CN73-3 CN19-1 +5V

Full Stack Sensor -1 -3 PAPER_F When the paper is
-2 -2 full, ‘1’.
MS2 +24VP
Joint Switch N.O. CN69-2 CN8-6
-1 -5
JOINT SW
When connected to
the host machine, ‘1’.
MS1
N.O. CN68-2 CN8-4
Front Door Switch
-1 -3 When the front
FRONT SW
MS3 door is closed, ‘1’.
Stapler Safety N.O. CN66-2 CN8-2
Switch
-1 -1
STPLSAFE SW
When the swing
guide is closed, ‘1’.
Fig. 2-004
Ver. 5.0 720 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)
Binding Clutch +24V

-1 -2 CN18-1
CN72
CL1 -2 -1 -2
B_CLU When the drive is transmitted,
‘1’.
+24V
Feed Motor -6 -1 CN10-7
-5 -2 -8
-4 -3 -9
PDLMTR_A
CN57
M1 -3 -4 -10 Switches between ‘1’ and
PDLMTR_*A
-2 -5 -11 ‘0’ according to the
PDLMTR_B direction of motor rotation.
-1 -6 -12
PDLMTR_*B
+24V
Paddle Motor CN56-2 CN10-1
-5 -2
-3 -3
FEEDMTR_A
M2 -1 -4 Switches between ‘1’ and
FEEDMTR_*A
-4 -5 ‘0’ according to the
FEEDMTR_B direction of motor rotation.
-6 -6
FEEDMTR_*B
+24V
Delivery Motor -6 -1 CN13-1
-5 -2 -2
-4 -3 -3
EJCTMTR_A
CN59
M3 -3 -4 -4 Switches between ‘1’ and

EJCTMTR_*A
-2 -5 -5
‘0’ according to the
EJCTMTR_B direction of motor rotation.
-1 -6 -6
EJCTMTR_*B
+24V
Alignment Motor
(Front) CN63-1 CN62-5 CN3-1
-2 -4 -2
FJOGMTR_A
-3 -3 -3 Switches between ‘1’ and
M4 FJOGMTR_*A
-4 -2 -4 ‘0’ according to the
FJOGMTR_B direction of motor rotation.
-5 -1 -5
FJOGMTR_*B
+24V
Alignment Motor
(Rear) CN65-1 CN64-5 CN3-6
-2 -4 -7
RJOGMTR_A
-3 -3 -8 Switches between ‘1’ and
M5 RJOGMTR_*A
-4 -2 -9
‘0’ according to the
RJOGMTR_B direction of motor rotation.
-5 -1 -10
RJOGMTR_*B
Fig. 2-005
Ver. 5.0 721 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)
Shift Motor
-2 -2 -2 -2 CN6-1
Switches between ‘+’ and
CN70
CN70
SIFTMTR_1
M6
-1 -1 -1 -1 -2 SIFTMTR_0
‘-’ according to the
direction of motor rotation.
Staple/Fold Motor
-2 -2 CN6-3
Switches between ‘+’ and
CN71
BINDMTR_1
M7
-1 -1 -4 BINDMTR_0
‘-’ according to the
direction of motor rotation.
Fig. 2-006
Ver. 5.0 722 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller
Stapler Unit Finisher Controller PCB
Slide Home
Position Sensor
PI18 +5V
CN72-5 CN72A-5 CN72A-5 CN11-3 SLID_HP When the stapler is at home
position, ‘1’.
Staple Home
Position Sensor
PI19 +5V
CN72-4 CN72A-4 CN72A-4 CN11-4 STPL_HP When the stapler is at
stapling home position, ‘0’.
Staple Empty
Sensor
PI20 +5V
CN72-3 CN72A-3 CN72A-3 CN11-5 HOOK_S When the cartridge has
staples, ‘0’.
Staple Top
Position Sensor
PI21 +5V
CN72-2 CN72A-2 CN72A-2 CN11-6
SELF_P When the staple is at top
the stapler, ‘0’.
+5V
+5V CN72-6 CN72A-6 CN72A-6 CN11-2
CN72-1 CN72A-1 CN72A-1 CN11-7
CN72-7 CN72A-7 CN72A-7 CN11-1 When the stapler is

STPL_CNCT
connected, ‘0’.
Slide Motor
CN72-10 CN72B-5 CN72B-5 CN7-3 SLIDMTR_A
CN72-11 CN72B-4 CN72B-4 CN7-4 Switches between ‘1’ and
SLIDMTR_*A
M8 CN72-12 CN72B-3 CN72B-3 CN7-5 ‘0’ according to the direction
SLIDMTR_B
CN72-13 CN72B-2 CN72B-2 CN7-6 of motor rotation.
SLIDMTR_*B
+24V
CN2-1
-3 GND
-4
GND
-5 TXD
-7 Communication line
RXD
-6
Host
Machine +24V
CN1-1
-2
Fig. 2-007
Ver. 5.0 723 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.1.4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB (Option)
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB
Punch Controller PCB
PI1P J2008-3 J1006-4
+5V
Punch Home -1 -6 When the hole puncher is
Position Sensor -2 -5 PUNCH
at home position, ‘0’.
Horizontal PI2P J2007-3 J1006-1

Registration +5V When the punch slide
-1 -3
Home Position -2 -2 SLIDE unit is at home position,
Sensor ‘1’.
PI3P J2009-3 J1006-7

Punch Motor +5V While the punch motor
-1 -9
Clock Sensor -2 -8 CLOCK is rotating, alternates
between ‘0’ and ‘1’.
Waste full LED PCB +5V

J1005-1
LED121
-2
DUSTLED
Waste Full Photosensor PCB When the light is

blocked, ‘0’.
PT131
J1005-3
DUSTPTR
-4
Photosensor PCB
+5V +5V
J1007-12
PT1 -11 SREG1*
PT2 -10
SREG2*
PT3 -9 When paper is
SREG3*
PT4 -8 detected, ‘0’.
SREG4*
PT5 -7
PAEND*
-13
Fig. 2-008
Ver. 5.0 724 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB
LED PCB +5V

J1007-6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
-1
LEDON5
-5
LEDON4
-4 When ‘1’, LED goes ON.
LEDON3
-3
LEDON2
-2
LEDON1
Punch Motor
J1002-1
Switches between ‘+’
M1P and ‘-’ according to
-2 the direction of motor
rotation.
Horizontal
Registration
Motor J1001-1
A
-2
B Switches the pulse
M2P -3 signals according to
A*
-4 the rotation of the motor.
B*
Fig. 2-009
Ver. 5.0 725 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.2. Feed / Drive System
11.3.2.2.1. Outline
The Machine performs the following in response to the commands coming from its host machine on the
sheets arriving from the Host Machine for delivery: simple stacking, job offset, and stapling or folding (in
two).
If a Punch Unit (option) is installed, the sheets are punched and delivered to the Delivery Tray.
Sheets may be delivered in either of five ways (including one for the Punch Unit):
Delivery Normal Punching Simple stacking
method delivery
Job offset
Stapling Front 1-point stapling
Middle 2-point stapling
Saddle delivery Stitching Middle 2-point stapling
Fig. 2-010
1. Normal Delivery
a. Simple Stacking
The Machine pulls in the sheet once to the processing tray and then delivers it to the Delivery Tray.
Tray
Paper
Fig. 2-011
Ver. 5.0 726 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. Job Offset
The Machine pulls the sheet once to the Processing Tray. It then moves the sheet to the front or the
rear using the Aligning Plate. When it has deposited a specific number of sheets, it delivers them in
the form of an aligning plane. When the number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches
a specified value, the sheets are delivered in a form of a stack. Even if the specified value is not
reached, stacked sheets are temporarily delivered when 10 sheets of large-size paper (300 mm or
longer) or 30 sheets of small-size paper (299 mm or shorter) have been stacked. (5- and STMT-
sizes: 10 sheets)
Results of offset delivery (4 jobs)
4th set
3rd set 2nd set
1st set
(Delivery Direction)
Fig. 2-012
Ver. 5.0 727 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
c. Stapling
The Machine stacks sheets coming from its host machine on the Processing Tray. When the
number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches a specified value, the Finisher staples
them, and delivers the stapled stack to the Delivery Tray.
Fig. 2-013
d. Saddle Delivery
The Machine deposits a stack of sheets on the Processing Tray, staples it (middle 2-point), and then
moves it to the Saddle Unit. The Saddle Unit folds the stack in two, and delivers it to the Bind Tray.
Fig. 2-014
Ver. 5.0 728 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.2.2. Feed / Delivery
1. Outline
The Machine forwards the sheets coming from its host machine to the Delivery Tray, Processing Tray,
or Saddle Unit according to the type of delivery used. The sheets forwarded to the processing tray or
the Saddle Unit are offset, stapled, or folded.
Fig. 2-015 shows the motors that are associated with moving and aligning sheets. These motors are
controlled (rotated clockwise or counter-clockwise) by the microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher
Controller PCB.
The paper path is equipped with the sensors shown in Table 2-002 used to monitor the arrival or
passage of sheets.
If a sheet fails to arrive at or move past a specific sensor within a specific period of time, the Finisher
Controller will assume a jam, and stops the ongoing operation and, at the same time, communicates
the presence of a jam to the Host Machine.
Connector on Finisher
Notation Name Description
Controller PCB
M1 Paddle Motor Stepping Motor CN10
M2 Feed Motor Stepping Motor CN10
M3 Delivery Motor Stepping Motor CN13
M4 Alignment Plate Motor (Front) Stepping Motor CN3
M5 Alignment Plate Motor (Rear) Stepping Motor CN3
M7 Staple / Fold Motor Brush DC Motor CN6
Table 2-001
Ver. 5.0 729 NOV 2004

Ver. 5.0
Shift Motor Drive Signal SIFTMTR
M6
(front) drive signal FJOGMTR
Delivery Motor Drive Signal EJCTMTR
M4
M3
Slide Motor Drive Signal SLIDMTR Alignment Plate Motor
M8
(rear) drive signal RJOGMTR
M5
Paddle Motor
Drive Signal PDLMTR
M2
730
Fig. 2-015
Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)
Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)
Bind Clutch Drive Signal B_CLU

CL
Staple/Fold Motor Drive

Signal BINDMTR Feed Motor
M7
Drive Signal FEEDMTR
Staple/Fold Motor Clock Detect Signal
M1
PI14
BIND_CLK
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Inlet paper detect signal ENT_P
Fold position paper detect signal BIND_P

PI1
PI10
Fig. 2-016
Connector on Finisher
Notation Name Description
Controller PCB
PI1 Inlet Sensor Photo Interrupter CN16
PI10 Fold Position Sensor Photo Interrupter CN16
Table 2-002
Ver. 5.0 731 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.2.3. Job Offset
1. Outline
"Job offset" refers to the operation by which the machine delivers a set of sheets with them pulled
forward or backward for sorting.
Switching between the forward and backward directions is accomplished by using an aligning plate
(Front) and an aligning plate (Rear).
The sheet coming between the Delivery Rollers is fed onto the Processing Tray and then fed toward
the stopper by the Paddle.
A swing guide is at the upper position while a sheet is being pulled onto the Processing Tray or during
alignment. It is at the lower position during stack feeding, stack delivery, or stapling.
At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Aligning Plate (Front) Motor (M4) and the Aligning
Plate (Rear) Motor (M5) to return the two aligning plates to their home positions.
Sensor Symbol Connector Function Motor Symbol

Aligning Plate (Front) PI4 CN4-3 Drives the Aligning Plate Aligning Plate M4
Home Position Sensor (Front) (Front) Motor
Aligning Plate (Rear) PI5 CN5-15 Drives the Aligning Plate Aligning Plate M5
Home Position Sensor (Rear) (Rear) Motor
Swing Guide Home PI3 CN9-9 Drives the Swing Guide Paddle Motor M2
Position Sensor Drive
Paddle Home Position PI2 CN9-3 Drives the Paddle (feeds Paddle Motor M2
Sensor paper)
Table 2-003
Aligning plate (Rear) Aligning plate (Rear)
home position sensor (PI5)
Light-shielding plate
Alignment Plate (Front)

Motor (M4)
Aligning plate (Rear)
motor (M5)
Aligning Plate
(Front)
Light-Shielding Plate Paper

(Front)
Aligning Plate (Front) Home Position Sensor (PI4)
Fig. 2-017
Ver. 5.0 732 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Processing Tray Paper Stacking Operation
A sheet coming between the Delivery Rollers is fed onto the Processing Tray. Then, the Paddle Taps
on the sheet surface twice (once for the second and subsequent sheets) to position the sheet against
the Processing Tray Stopper.
Paper
Aligning Plate
Paddle
Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)
Swing Guide
Delivery Belt Processing Tray Stopper
Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)
Fig.2-018
3. Offset Operation
Each sheet is pulled forward or backward using the Aligning Plate (Front) and the Aligning Plate
(Rear).
The offset operation is performed each time a sheet is pulled onto the Processing Tray.
Aligning Plate (Rear)
Sheet to be offset
Tray
Aligning Plate (Front)
Fig. 2-019 Offsetting in the forward direction
Aligning Plate (Rear)
Sheet to be offset
Tray
Aligning Plate (Front)
Fig. 2-020 Offsetting in the backward direction
Ver. 5.0 733 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. Stack Delivery Operation
Stack delivery takes place when 10 sheets of large-size paper or 30 sheets of small-size paper (A5-
and STMT-sizes: 10 sheets) have been stacked on the Processing Tray with them offset in either
direction.
The Paddle Motor rotates and the Swing Guide descends to hold the paper stack between the Upper
and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery Motor rotates in the forward direction to rotate the
Delivery Rollers, feeding the paper stack in the delivery direction. The Delivery Belt Home Position
Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of pulses, causing the Swing
Guide to ascend. Next, the Paper Delivery Motor is driven. Next, the Delivery Motor is driven to deliver
the paper stack with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.
Swing Guide
Fig. 2-021
Job offset sequence

Start signal
Host machine delivery signal
Inlet Sensor (PI1)
Processing Tray Sensor
(PI6)
Feed Motor (M1)
Delivery Motor (M3)

Delivery Belt Home
360msec 360msec 360msec 360msec
Paddle Motor (M2)
Paddle Home Position
Sensor (PI2)
Swing Guide Home
Stapler Safety Switch
(MS3)
Alignment Motor (Front) 60msec 30msec 220msec
(M4)
Aligning Plate Home Position
Sensor (Front) (PI4)
Alignment Motor (Rear)
(M5)
Sensor (Rear) (PI5)
CW rotation CCW rotation
Fig. 2-022
Ver. 5.0 734 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.3. Stapling Operation
11.3.2.3.1. Outline
Staple operation is performed to staple specified sheets of paper using a stapler unit.
The stapling position depends on the staple mode and paper size.
When the Machine starts immediately after power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Slide Motor
(M8) to return the Stapler Unit to the home position. The Stapler Unit starts moving toward the front of the
Stapler Frame. It stops when the Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18) on the Slide PCB located under the
Stapler Unit. Next, the Slide Motor is driven a specified number of pulses. The Stapler Unit moves to rear
standby position at the back of the Machine, entering the standby state.
Sensor Symbol Connector Function Remarks

Slide Home Position PI18 CN11-3 Detects the home position for the —
Sensor stapler moving back and forth
Staple Home Position PI19 CN11-4 Detects the home position for the In the stapler
Sensor stapling operation
Staple Empty Sensor PI20 CN11-5 Detects presence or absence of In the stapler
staples in the cartridge
Staple Top Position PI21 CN11-6 Detects the staple top position In the stapler
Sensor
Function Motor Symbol Remarks

Moves the Stapler. Slide Motor M8 —
Performs Stapling Operation. Staple/Fold M7 —
Motor
Table 2-004
Stapler
(Deliver Direction)
Paper Stack
Light-Shielding Plate
Slide Motor
(M8)
Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18)
Fig. 2-023
Ver. 5.0 735 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.3.2. Stapling Operation
When stacking and alignment of paper on the Processing Tray are complete, the Finisher Controller PCB
drives the Paddle Motor (M2) in the reverse direction and lowers the Swing Guide. When the Swing Guide
descends, the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers.
The Finisher Controller PCB moves the stapler for stapling according to the specified stapling position
(when rear 1-point stapling is specified, the stapler does not move but it staples at the standby position). As
a stapler moves forward, the Processing Tray Stopper is folded forward.
Paper Stack
Swing Guide
Processing Tray Stopper
Stapler
Delivery Tray
Stack
Delivery
Roller
(Lower)
Fig. 2-024
Swing Guide Home

Paddle Motor (M2)
Staple Safety Switch

(MS3)
Swing Guide
Stack Delivery Roller

(Upper)

(Lower)
12±3 mm
Fig. 2-025
Ver. 5.0 736 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.3.3. Delivery Operation after Stapling
When stapling is complete, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Deliver Motor in the forward direction to
feed the paper stack (sandwiched between the Stack Delivery Rollers) in the delivery direction.
The Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of
pulses, causing the Swing Guide to ascend. At the same time, the Slide Motor is driven to return the stapler
back to the standby position, followed by driving of the Delivery Motor. Then, the paper stack is delivered
with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.
Paper Stack
Swing Guide
Delivery Tray Stapler
Delivery Belt
Stack Delivery
Roller (Lower)
Fig. 2-026
Swing Guide
Home Position Sensor (PI3)
Paddle Motor (M2)
Staple Safety
Switch (MS3)
Swing Guide

Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)
Fig. 2-027
Ver. 5.0 737 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.3.4. Stapler Unit
The Staple/Fold Motor (M7) is used to perform stapling operation. This motor rotates the Cam one turn for
stapling. The home position of this cam is detected by the Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19).
The Staple/Fold Motor is rotated in the forward or reverse direction under the control of the Micro Computer
(IC13) on the Finisher Controller PCB.
When the Staple Home Position Sensor is OFF, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Staple/Fold Motor in
the forward direction until the sensor turns ON, allowing the Staple Cam to the original position.
The Staple Empty Sensor (PI20) is used to detect presence/absence of a staple cartridge in the Machine
and presence/absence of staples in the Cartridge.
The Staple Top Position Sensor (PI21) is used to determine whether staples are pushed up to the top of the
Staple Cartridge.
The Finisher Controller circuit does not drive the Staple/Fold Motor (M7) unless the staple safety switch
(MS3) is ON (the Swing Guide is closed). This assures safety in case where you happen to put your finger
in the stapler.
Fig. 2-028
M7
Staple home position detect signal
Staple top position detect signal
Staple/hold motor drive signal

Staple empty detect signal
Fig. 2-029
Ver. 5.0 738 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Stapler Movement Controller
The Stapler Unit is moved by the Slide Motor (M8). Its home position is detected by the Slide Home
Position Sensor (PI18). The Stapler waits at the back irrespective of the staple mode and paper size.
After paper has been stacked on the Processing Tray, the Stapler is moved to the specified stapling
position in response to the stapling command from the Host Machine.
Fig. 2-030 shows the standby position of the Stapler and the stapling position depending on the staple
mode.
a. Front 1-Point Stapling

The Stapler waits at the back. The Stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each
stapling operation.
Standby position
Stapler
Feed direction
Stopper
Stapling position
Fig. 2-030
b. Rear 1-Point Stapling

The Stapler waits at the back. The stapling position is the same as the standby position.
Standby position
Stapling position
Stapler
Feed direction
Stopper
Fig. 2-031
Ver. 5.0 739 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
c. Middle 2-Point Stapling
The Stapler waits at the back. The Stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each
stapling operation. The Stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position and then
staples it at the front stapling position.
Standby position
Stapler
Stapling position
Stopper
Feed direction
Stapling position
Fig. 2-032
d. Middle 2-Point Stapling (Bind Mode)

The Stapler waits at the back. The stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each
stapling operation. The stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position and then
staples it at the front stapling position.
Standby position
Stapler
Stapling position
Stopper
Feed direction Stapling position
Fig. 2-033
Ver. 5.0 740 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Stapling Operation Sequence
Rear 1-Point Stapling of 2 Sheets
Start Signal
Host Machine Delivery Signal
Inlet Sensor (PI1) Staple ???
Processing Tray Sensor

(PI6)
Feed Motor (M1)
Delivery Motor (M3)
Delivery Belt Home 10msec

360msec 360msec
Paddle Motor (M2)

Sensor (PI2)
Swing Guide Home
(MS3)
Alignment Motor (front)
(M4)
Sensor (front) (PI4)
20msec
Staple/Fold Motor (M7)

Sensor (PI9)
Fig. 2-034
Ver. 5.0 741 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.4. Delivery Tray Operation
11.3.2.4.1. Outline
The Machine has a delivery tray in the Finisher Unit and a bind tray in the Saddle Unit.
The Bind Tray in the Saddle Unit is of the fixed type and all the folded paper stacks are delivered to this tray.
This tray has a bind tray sensor (PI13) to detect presence/absence of paper.
The Delivery Tray in the Finisher Unit is moved up and down using a shift motor (M6).
The Finisher has a tray paper sensor (PI8) to detect presence/absence of paper on the Stack Tray.
The Home Position Sensor of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Paper Surface Sensor (PI19). When
paper has already been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is on the top surface of the stacked
paper. When paper has not yet been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is at the position
where the edge of the Delivery Tray is detected. At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Shift
Motor (M6) to return the Delivery Tray to the home position.
When the paper coming from the Processing Tray is stacked on the Delivery Tray, the Shift Motor is driven
a specified number of pulses, causing the Delivery Tray to descend. Clock pulses are detected by the Shift
Motor Clock Sensor (PI17). Then, the Delivery Tray returns to the home position for the next stacking
operation.
The upper limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15). When the Shift
Upper Limit Sensor (PI15) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is
ascending.
The lower limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16). When the Shift Lower
Limit Sensor (PI16) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is descending.
The Finisher Unit has a full stack sensor (PI24) to detect overstacking of large-size or mixed paper
according to the stack height.
Shift Upper Limit Sensor

(PI15)
Tray Paper Sensor (PI8)

Shift Lower Limit Sensor
(PI16)
Paper Surface Sensor (PI9)
Edge
Delivery Tray
Shift Motor Clock Sensor
(PI17)
Full Stack Sensor (PI24)
Shift Motor (M6)
Fig. 2-035
Ver. 5.0 742 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.5. Saddle Unit
11.3.2.5.1. Basic Operations
1. Outline
The Machine stitches a stack of sheets (middle 2-point), then folds the stack in two in the Finisher.
These operations are controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB.
The Finisher Controller PCB is controlled by the commands from the Host Machine.
11.3.2.5.2. Feed / Drive System

1. Outline
This machine stitches the paper stack coming from the Finisher, folds it, and delivers it to the Bind Tray
in the Saddle Unit in response to the commands from the Host Machine.
That is, the machine performans the following operations :

1) Paper Feed-in
2) Stitching
3) Stack Feed
4) Folding / Delivery
2) Stitching
1) Paper feed-in
3) Stack feed
4) Folding/delivery
Fig. 2-036
Ver. 5.0 743 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
a. Paper Feed-in
After being aligned on the Processing Tray, a stack of sheets is sandwiched between the Stack
Delivery Rollers. As the Stack Delivery Rollers rotate, the stack is fed toward the Saddle Unit.
Paper Stack

(Lower)
Fig. 2-037
b. Stitching
When the center of the paper stack (stitching position) reaches the stapler's staple position, the
Stapler stitches the paper stack.
When only one sheet is fed from the Host Machine, the next step (stack feed) is performed without
performing the stitching operation.
Staple
Stapler (Upper)
Stapler (Lower)
Fig. 2-038
Ver. 5.0 744 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
c. Stack Feed
The Stack Feed Rollers feed the paper stack to the stack folding/delivery position where the center
of the stack (stitched position) is level with the Paper Pushing Plate and Paper Folding Roller's nip
part.
Stack Feed Roller (Upper)
Paper Pushing Plate
Stack Feed Roller (Lower)

Paper Fold Roller
Fig. 2-039
d. Folding / Delivery
The Paper Pushing Plate pushes in the center of the paper stack to feed it toward the Paper Fold
Rollers. Then, the Paper Fold Rollers and Bind Delivery Rollers deliver the paper stack to the Bind
Tray.
Bind Delivery Rollers

Paper Fold Rollers
Fig. 2-040
Ver. 5.0 745 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.5.3. Paper Feed System
1. Outline
The paper feed system feeds a stack of sheets (coming from the Finisher) to the position where the
center of the paper stack (stitching position) is aligned to the stapler's staple, allowing the next step
(stitching and folding) to be performed.
When sheets of paper have been stacked and aligned on the Processing Tray, the Paddle Motor (M2)
rotates in the reverse direction, causing the Swing Guide to descend. As the Swing Guide descends,
the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery
Motor (M3) rotates in the reverse direction, feeding the paper stack toward the Saddle Unit. When the
leading edge of the paper stack reaches the Folding Position Sensor (PI10), the Finisher Controller
PCB drives the Delivery Motor a specified number of motor pulses to stop the center of the paper stack
(stitching position) at the stapler's staple position. Before the paper stack passes through the Stack
Feed Rollers, the Feed Motor (M1) is driven to rotate the Stack Feed Roller (lower) so that the leading
edge of the paper stack is not bent.
Paper stack
Fold Position Sensor

(Lower)
Fig. 2-041
Ver. 5.0 746 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.5.4. Stack Feed System
1. Outline
The stack feed system feeds the stitched paper stack to the folding position.
When stitching is complete, the Feed Motor (M2) rotates, causing the Stack Feed Roller (upper) to
descend. The paper stack is sandwiched between the Stack Feed Rollers. Then, the Bind Clutch (CL1)
is turned ON to rotate the Feed Motor (M2) in the forward direction, thus feeding the paper stack to the
folding position. The feed amount is equivalent to the number of pulses used to drive the Feed Motor
(M2) unit the paper stack reaches the folding position.
Fe
ed
Am
ou
nt
Fig. 2-042
Ver. 5.0 747 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.5.5. Fold / Delivery System
1. Outline
The paper fold mechanism consists of a Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and a Paper Pushing Plate.
The Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and Paper Pushing Plate are driven by the Staple/Fold Motor
(M7). The drive force is transferred with a combination of gears and cams. Motor operation is
monitored by the Staple/Fold Motor Lock Sensor (PI14).
Until the paper stack reaches the folding position, the Guide Plate covers the Paper Fold Rollers to act
as a paper path through which a paper stack is fed to the Saddle Unit and to prevent a paper stack
from touching the rollers.
A Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11) is provided to detect the positions of the Paper Fold Rollers
and Paper Pushing Plate.
The paper stack folded in two by the Paper Fold Rollers is delivered by Bind Delivery Rollers.
The Bind Delivery Rollers are also driven by the Staple/Fold Motor (M7).
A Bind Tray Sensor (PI13) is provided on the Bind Tray to detect presence/absence of a paper stack;
however, it is not used to detect a jam.
2. Paper Folding
Paper is folded using paper fold rollers and a paper pushing plate.
Almost concurrently with the start of roller rotation, the Paper Pushing Plate starts operating to push
the paper stack into the gap between the Paper Fold Rollers. When the paper stack is fed about 10 mm
with the rotation of the Paper Fold Rollers, the Paper Pushing Plate returns to the home position. Then,
the paper stack is delivered to the Bind Tray using the Paper Fold Rollers and Bind Delivery Rollers.
Half the entire surface of each paper fold roller is uncovered excluding the central area and the area at
the left and right ends. The uncovered surface of the Upper Paper Fold Roller comes in touch with the
uncovered surface of the Lower Paper Fold Roller only at the center and left and right ends, allowing a
paper stack to be fed without causing creases. The other half of the Upper Paper Fold Roller that is
covered comes in touch with the other half of the Lower Paper Fold Roller that is also covered, allowing
a paper stack to be folded while being fed.
Sensor Flag
Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11)
Cam
Paper Pushing Plate
Paper stack
Paper Fold Roller (Upper)
Staple/Fold M7
Motor
Paper Fold Roller (Lower)
Fig. 2-043
Ver. 5.0 748 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Folding
Paper Pushing Plate
Paper Fold Roller (Upper)
Staple/Fold M7
Motor
Paper Fold Roller (Lower)
Paper stack
Fig. 2-044
[Paper Folding Start Position]
Paper Stack
Inlet
Paper Push Plate
Outlet
Folds/feeds a paper stack.

Feeds a paper stack.
Fig. 2-045
Ver. 5.0 749 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Staple
?????
Feed Motor (M2)
Delivery Motor (M3)
Paddle Motor (M1)

Sensor (PI2)
Swing Guide Home
(MS3)
Slide Motor (M8)
13571msec
Staple/Fold Motor (M7)
Staple Home Position 50msec

Sensor (PI19)
Folding Position Sensor
(PI10)
Binding Clutch (CL1)
Folding Home Position

Sensor (PI11)
Bind Tray Sensor (PI13)
Fig. 2-046
Ver. 5.0 750 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.6. Punch Unit (Option)
11.3.2.6.1. Basic Operations
1. Outline
The Punch Unit is an option and is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher. The
Punch Unit is not equipped with a paper feeding mechanism, and the sheets from the Host Machine
move through the Punch Unit and then the feed system of the Finisher.
When the trailing edge of a sheet from the Host Machine reaches the Punch Unit, the sheet is stopped
once, and the Punch Shaft is rotated to punch a hole along the trailing edge. These operations are
controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the
Punch Controller PCB.
Punch Drive System
Drive System
Finisher Unit Control System
Punch Controller
PCB
Fig. 2-047
Ver. 5.0 751 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.6.2. Punching Operation
1. Outline
The Punch Unit is located in the pickup assembly of the Finisher, and is used to punch holes in sheets
that have been sent from the Host Machine and stopped inside it. When the trailing edge of a sheet
reaches the Punch Unit, the Inlet Roller of the Finisher Assembly stops the sheet to punch a hole along
the trailing edge of the sheet.
The Punch Unit consists of a Die and Hole Puncher (Punch Blade).
The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). It is attached to the Eccentric Cam of the Punch
Shaft, and the rotation of the Punch Shaft is converted into reciprocating motion for punching
operation.
The Punch Motor (M1P) is a DC motor. The home position of the Punch Shaft is detected by the Punch
Home Position Sensor (PI1P). To make sure that the Punch Motor, which is a DC motor, stops exactly
at its home position, the Punch Motor is stopped in relation to the count of the clock pulses kept by the
Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P).
A single punching operation is executed by rotating punch shaft 180° from its home position.
As many as five light-receiving transistors (Photo Sensor PCB) are mounted over the inlet paper path
of the Punch Unit; on the other hand, as many as five LEDs (LED PCB) are mounted under the path,
together serving as five Sensors. The Frontmost Sensor (LED5, PT5) is used to detect the training
edge of sheets, and the remaining four (LED1 through LED4, PT1 through PTR4) are used as
Horizontal Registration Sensors to detect the rear position of sheets when punching holes.
The Punch Motor, Punch Unit, and Sensors make up the Punch Slide Unit, which moves to the Front/
Rear to suit the selected paper size. The movement to the Front/Rear is driven by the Horizontal
Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal
Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P), and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is a Stepping
Motor.
The Punch Motor and Horizontal Registration Motor are controlled with various commands from the
Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.
The waste paper occurring as the result of punching is collected in the Waste Paper Case. The case is
monitored by the LED121 on the Waste Full LED PCB and PT131 on the Waste Full Photo Sensor
PCB.
Ver. 5.0 752 NOV 2004

Ver. 5.0
LED121
Trailing Edge Detection Signal
(LED5, PT5) PAEND
Horizontal Registration Detection

Signal (LED1~4, PT1~4) SREG1~4
753
5
5
Punch Motor Clock (PI3P)
Fig. 2-048
4
4
Detection Signal PUNCHCLK

3
3
Punch Motor (M1P)

2
2
Punch Controller PCB (2/2)

Punch Controller PCB (1/2)
Drive Signal
PT1
LED1
Waste Full Detection Signal

(LED121, PT131) DFULL
PT131
Horizontal Registration Home Position
(PI2P) Detection Signal SREGHP
Punch Home Position (PI1P)

Detection Signal PUNCHHP
Horizontal Registration Motor
(M2P) Drive Signal
NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Punching Operation
The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). The home position for the Hole Puncher is
detected by the Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P).
The Punch Unit comes in three types, selected to suit the country of installation: 2-hole (Punch Unit
DA-SP41-AZ), 2- and 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU), or 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB).
The 2-hole and 4-hole types punch a hole when the Punch Shaft is rotated 180° from the home
position, causing the punch to make a single round trip. The 2-/3-hole type punches a hole, but the
circumference of the Punch Shaft is divided into two (half for 2-hole and the other half for 3-hole).
a. 2-Hole, 4-Hole Type

The home position is identified when the Punch Home Position is ON. The punching operation for
the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180° and the Punch Home Position Sensor
goes ON; the punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180°
in reverse and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON.
The punching operation takes place as follows when making a hole in two sheets of paper.
1) A hole is punched along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.
Sensor Flag
Punch Home Position

Sensor (PI1P)
Punch Shaft
Eccentric Cam Hole

Puncher
Die
Paper
Die
Waste Paper
(Punch Shaft at (Punch Shaft CW Rotation (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /

Rest/Home Position) by 90 /Hole Made) Punching operation Ends)
Fig. 2-049
2) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.
(Punch Shaft at Rest/ (Punch Shaft CCW Rotation (Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by
Home Position) by 90 /Hole Made) 180 /End of Punching Operation)
Fig. 2-050
Ver. 5.0 754 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
b. 2-/3-Hole Type
The home position is identified when the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. To make two holes,
the punching operation for the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft rotates 180° (half
circumference) and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON. At this time, the 3-Hole Puncher
makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on a half circumference
of the Punch Shaft.
The punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180° counter-
clockwise and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON (half circumference). At this time, the 3-
Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on the
other half circumference of the Punch Shaft.
The punching operation takes place as follows when making two holes in two sheets of paper:
1) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.
Sensor Flag
Punch Home Position

Sensor (PI1P)
Punch Shaft
Eccentric Cam Hole

Puncher
Die
Paper
Die
Waste Paper
(Punch Shaft at Rest/ (Punch Shaft CW Rotation (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /
Home Position) by 90 /Hole Made) End of Punching Operation)
Fig. 2-051
While two holes are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape
direction.
(Punch Shaft at Rest/ (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 90 / (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 /
Home Position) Punch at Upper Limit) Punch Back to Limit Position)
Fig. 2-052
2) Holes are made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.
(Punch Shaft at Rest/ (Punch Shaft CCW Rotation (Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 180 /
Home Position) by 90 /Hole Made) End of Punching Operation)
Fig. 2-053
Ver. 5.0 755 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
While two hole are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction
(moving up the Hole Puncher).
(Punch Shaft at Rest/ (Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by (Punch CCW Rotation by 180 /
Home Position) 90 /Punch at Upper Limit) Punch Back at Initial Position)
Fig. 2-054
3. Horizontal Registration Operation

The horizontal registration drive for the Punch Slide Unit is provided by the Horizontal Registration
Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration
Home Position Sensor (PI2P). The Punch Slide Unit detects the trailing edge of sheets using the
Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) and the Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 through 4, SREG1
through 4), and causes a move to a specific position matching the trailing edge of each sheet (in
relation to the size of the sheet).
The horizontal registration operation takes place as follows:

1) When the leading edge of a sheet from the Host Machine is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor
(LED5, PT5), the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) starts to move the Punch Slide Unit toward
the front.
Punch Slide Unit
Motor (M2P)
Trailing Edge Sensor

(LED5, PT5)
(Direction of
Paper Delivery)
Paper
Fig. 2-055
Ver. 5.0 756 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2) When the Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1 though 4, PT1 through) suited to the paper size
signal from the Host Machine detects the rear edge of the sheet, the Horizontal Registration Motor
(M2P) causes a farther move to a specific position, and stops the Punch Slide Unit.
Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1, PT1);

used to detect the edge of sheets of A3, A4,
LTR, 279x432 (11"x17").
Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 (LED2, PT2);
used to detect the edge of sheets of B4, B5,
LTR-R, LGL.
used to detect the edge of sheets of A4-R.

used to detect the edge of sheets of B5-R.
Fig. 2-056
3) When the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) detects the trailing edge of the sheet, the drive of the
Feed Motor (M2) is stopped, thereby stopping the sheet. Then, the Punch Motor (M1P) is driven to
punch holes in the sheet.
Punch
Fig. 2-057
4) When the punching operation ends, the Feed Motor (M2) of the Fisher Unit is driven and, at the
same time, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is rotated in reverse to return the Punch Slide
Unit to its home position.
5) For each sheet that arrives in succession, the Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position, and
is caused to repeat steps 1 through 4.
Trailing Edge Sensor
(LED5, PT5)
Sensor (LED1~4, PT1~4)
Punch Home Position
Sensor (PI1P)
Horizontal Registration Home
Position Sensor (PI2P)
Motor (M2P)
Punch Motor (M1P)
Feed Motor (M2)
CW Rotation CCW Rotation
Fig. 2-058
Ver. 5.0 757 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.7. Detecting Jams
11.3.2.7.1. Outline
The Microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB is programmed to check for jams in the Finisher/
Saddle/Puncher (option) at such times as set in advance. It identifies a jam in reference to the presence/
absence of paper at a specific sensor. If a jam is found, the Finisher Controller PCB communicates the
nature of the jam to the Host Machine in the form of a code (which may be checked in service mode of the
Host Machine).
PI1
PI10
PI1 : Inlet Sensor

PI10 : Folding Position Sensor
Fig. 2-059
1. Inlet Sensor Delay Jam (1011)

If the Inlet Sensor does not detect the paper 3 times the specified period of time after the paper out
signal was sent from the hooked-up machine.
Host machine delivery signal Host machine delivery signal
approx. 1.5sec. approx. 1.5sec.

Jam check Jam check
Inlet Sensor (PI1) Normal Inlet Sensor (PI1) Jam
Feed Motor (M1) Feed Motor (M1)
Fig. 2-060
2. Inlet Sensor Stationary Jam (1021)

If the paper does not pass the Inlet Sensor 3 times the specified period of time after the Inlet Sensor
detected the paper's front edge.
approx. 2sec. approx. 2sec.

Jam check Jam check
Inlet Sensor (PI1) Normal Inlet Sensor (PI1) Jam
Feed Motor (M1) Feed Motor (M1)
Fig. 2-061
Ver. 5.0 758 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. Folding Position Sensor Delay Jam (1012)
In bind mode, the Folding Position Sensor does not detect paper 1200 msec after the Intermediate
Processing Tray starts to send paper to the stapling position.
1200 ms 1200 ms
Jam Check Jam Check
Folding Position Normal Folding Position Jam
Fig. 2-062
4. Folding Position Sensor Stationary Jam (1022)

In bind mode, paper does not leave the Holding Position Sensor approximately 10.5 sec after the
Staple/Fold Motor is driven.
Approx. 10.5sec. Approx. 10.5sec.

Jam Check Jam Check
Folding Position Normal Folding Position Jam
Staple/Fold Staple/Fold
Motor (M7) Motor (M7)
Fig. 2-063
5. Door Open Jam (paper present)(1008)

The Finisher is disconnected from its host machine or the Front Door, or the Upper Cover is opened
while the system is in operation (paper on the move).
6. Staple Jam (1006)

The Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19) does not go OFF 600 msec after the Stapler is driven. Or, it
does not return to its home position (where the sensor goes ON).
7. Punch Jam
• Paper stuck at punch stapler
• Punching not ended 1 second after the punching request signal.
Ver. 5.0 759 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.2.8.1. Finisher / Saddle Assembly
1. Outline
When the Host Machine is turned on, it supplies the Finisher Controller PCB with two channels of 24
VDC; one is for the motors and clutches, and the other is turned into 5 VDC by the Regulator IC (IC1)
of the Finisher Controller PCB for use by the sensors and ICs on PCBs.
If a punch unit (option) is installed, power is also supplied to the Punch Controller PCB. Some of 24
VDC used to drive motors is cut off when the Joint Switch (MS2), Front Door Switch (MS1), or Stapler
Safety Switch (MS3) is open.
Fig. 2-061 is a block diagram of the power supply system :
Front Door Switch
Joint Switch (MS1) Stapler Safety Switch
(MS2) (MS3)
24V
Motor
24V
Motor
24VP
Circuit Breaker 24V

Clutch
(CB1)
Finisher
Host Controller PCB
Machine
5V
Sensor
(IC1)
24VL 5V
Regulator IC Logic System

(Puncher Unit; Option)
Fig. 2-064
2. Protective Mechanism
A circuit breaker (CB1) is monitored to protect the 24 VDC system sued to drive the motors against
overcurrent. The 24-V system used to drive the Feed Motor (M1), paddle motor (M2), and delivery
motor (M3) is equipped with a fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.
11.3.2.8.2. Punch Unit (Option)

1. Outline
When the Host Machine is turned on, the Punch Unit is supplied by the Finisher Controller PCB with
24-V and 5-V power.
The 24-V power is used to drive the motors, while the 5-V power is used by sensors and the ICs on the
Punch Controller PCB.
The 24-V power to the motors will be cut off when the Joint Switch (MS2) or the Front Door Switch
(MS1) of the Finisher Unit is open.
Ver. 5.0 760 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Fig. 2-062 is a block diagram for the power supply system :
24V 24V
Motors
Finisher Punch Controller PCB

Controller 5V
PCB Sensors
5V 5V
Logic System
Fig. 2-065
2. Protective Mechanisms
The 24-V system used to drive the Punch Motor (M1P) and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is
equipped with a built-in fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.
Ver. 5.0 761 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.3. Mechanical Systems
11.3.3.1. Finisher Saddle Unit
[1] Tray (4)
[1] [5] [6] [2]
[2] Rear Cover (3)
[3] Front Cover (5)
[4] Front Door
[5] Upper Door
[6] Upper Right Cover Assembly (4)
[7] [7] Jam Removal Cover
The number in parentheses indicates the number of
[4] Mounting Screws used.
[3]
Fig. 3-001
1-1. Removing the Delivery Tray
[2]
(1) Remove the four Screws [1], and detach the
Delivery Tray [2].
[1]
Fig. 3-002
[1] [4] 1-2. Removing the Front Cover

(1) Open the Front Door [1].
(2) While picking the Claw [2], detach the Fold Jam
Releasing Dial [3].
(3) Remove 2 Screws [4].
[3]
[2]
[4]
Fig. 3-003
Ver. 5.0 762 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Remove 3 Screws [5], and detach the Front
[6]
Cover [6].
[5]
[5]
Fig. 3-004
1-3. Removing the Rear Cover

(1) Remove 2 Screws [1] on the pickup side, and
remove 1 Screw [2] on the delivery side; then,
[3] detach the Rear Cover [3].
[1]
Fig. 3-005
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-006
Ver. 5.0 763 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1-4. Removing the Upper Cover
[1]
(1) Open the Upper Cover [1], and turn the Cover
Band Retainer [2] to the left to remove it.
(2) Remove the Cover Band [3].
[3] [2]
Fig. 3-007
(3) Remove 1 Screw [4], and detach the Processing
[6] Tray Rear Cover [5]; then, detach the Upper
Cover [6].
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-008
Ver. 5.0 764 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1-5. Removing the Processing Tray Upper Cover
(1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 1-2.)
(2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)
(3) Remove the Upper Cover. (See 1-4.)
(4) Disconnect the Connector [1], and remove the
Screw [2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-009
(5) While lifting the Processing Tray Upper Cover
[3]
[3], disconnect the Connector [4]; then, detach
the Processing Tray Upper Cover [3].
[4]
Fig. 3-010
Ver. 5.0 765 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1-6. Removing the Upper Right Cover Assembly
[3]
(1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 2.)
(2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 3.)
(3) Remove 2 Screws [1] at the front and the two
Screws [2] at the rear; then, detach the Upper
Right Cover Assembly [3].
[1]
Fig. 3-011
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-012
1-7. Removing the Saddle Guide

(1) Remove the Delivery Tray. (See 1.)
[3] (2) Remove the Front Cover. (See 2.)
[3]
[2]
(3) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 3.)
(4) Free the Delivery Tray Support Plate (front) [1]
[1]
and the Delivery Tray Support Plate (rear) [2] to
the outside from the rail grooves.
[3] (5) Remove 4 Screws [3].
[3]
Fig. 3-013
(6) Shift the Side Guide [4] lightly to the front, and
free the engagement of the Paper surface
[5]
Detecting Lever (rear) [5]; then, detach the Side
Guide [4].
[4]
Fig. 3-014
Ver. 5.0 766 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Caution:
Be sure to mount the Side Guide after securely
fitting the Paper Surface Detecting Lever (rear) [5]
in the groove of the Paper Surface Detecting Lever
(middle) [6].
After mounting, push the Paper Surface Detecting
Lever several times to make sure that Side Guide
[5] [6] is mounted securely.
[5]
[6]
Fig. 3-015
Ver. 5.0 767 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.3.1.2. Feeding System
2-1. Removing the Stapler Unit
[1]
(1) Open the Front Door [1].
(2) Slide out the Stapler Unit [3] while pressing the
Stopper Lever [2].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-016
Caution:
[5] Do not remove the stapler from the Stapler Frame
Shaft. If removed, the position where the Staple
Driver (Lower Unit of the Stapler) [4] shoots
[4] staples will shift from the position where the Staple
Clincher (Upper Unit of the Stapler) [5] receives
Staples.
Fig. 3-017
2-2. Adjusting the Stapler Phase

When the Gears or Timing Belt at the front of the
Stapler is replaced or removed for some reason, the
Gear staple shooting timing of the Staple Driver (Lower Unit
of the Stapler) does not match the staple bending
timing of the Staple Clincher (Upper Unit of the
Stapler). Adjust the Stapler phase following the
Timing Belt procedure described below.
Gear
Fig. 3-18
Ver. 5.0 768 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(1) Detach the Gear Cover [2] from the Staple Driver
[4]
[1].
(2) Remove the E-Ring [3] to detach the Side Cover
[5] of the Stapler Clincher [4].
[3]
[5]
[2] [1]
Fig. 3-019
(3) Remove 2 E-Rings [6] to remove the Staple Jam
[7] Releasing Gear [7], Timing Belt [8], and Relay
Gear 1 [9]. Remove the Spacer and Spring at the
[8]
back of the Staple Jam Releasing Gear.
(4) Remove 1 Screw [10] and Spring [11] to remove
[6] [9] the Belt Tentioner [12].
[11] [10]
[12]
Fig. 3-020
(5) Remove the Timing Belt [13].
[15]
(6) Remove 1 E-Ring [14] to remove the Staple
[14] Position Check Gear [15].
[13]
Fig. 3-021
Ver. 5.0 769 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7) Turn the Gear [16] to align the round hole in the
Staple Driver Gear with the Round Hole [17] at
the back.
[16]
[17]
Fig. 3-022
(8) Insert a Pin [18] with a diameter of approximately
2 mm (use of a 2 mm Allen wrench is
recommended) in the Round Hole to secure the
Gear.
[18]
Fig. 3-023
(9) Turn the Gear [19] to align the Round Hole in the
Staple Clincher Cam with the Round Hole [20] at
[19]
the back.
[20]
Fig. 3-024
Ver. 5.0 770 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(10) Insert a Pin [21] with a diameter of approximately
2 mm (use of a 2 mm Allen wrench is
recommended) in the Round Hole to secure the
Gear.
[21]
Fig. 3-025
(11) With the Gears and Cam fixed, install the Timing
Belt [22] on Gears [23] and [24].
[23]
[22]
[24]
Fig. 3-026
(12) Mount the Staple Position Check Gear [27] so
that the Blue Mark [25] on the Staple Position
[26]
Check Gear is aligned with the Round Hole [26]
in the frame.
[25] Caution:
The position where the Blue Mark is aligned with
the Round Hole is the home position for stapling. If
[27]
the Staple Jam Cancel Dial is turned for some
reason, the home position deviates, making it
impossible to remove the Stapler Cartridge. If such
a case, the Gear can be returned to the home
position by checking Blue Mark position.
Therefore, it is necessary to mount the Gear at the
correct position.
Fig. 3-027
(13) Remove the Pin securing the Gear to the Cam.
[28] (14) Assemble the Spring [28], Spacer [29], Staple
Jam Releasing Gear [30], Timing Belt [31], and
[31] Relay Gear [32] and secure them with 1 E-Ring
[33].
[29] [32]
[30] [33]
Fig. 3-028
Ver. 5.0 771 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2-3. Adjusting the Phase of the Gear in the Saddle
Unit
If the Gears at the front of the Saddle Unit or the
Paper Fold Rollers in the Sale Unit are replaced or
[2] removed for some reason, adjust the Gear phase
following the procedure described below.
(1) The Paper Fold Rollers [1] and Saddle Cam [2]
must be positioned as shown below.
[1]
Fig. 3-029
(2) With the Paper Fold Rollers and Saddle Cam
positioned as shown in Fig. 3-029, mount Gears
as shown in Fig. 3-030.
• Align the mark (either of two marks) on the
[3] saddle cam drive gear [3] with the mark on
the relay gear [4] (on the half of the periphery
where gears with a smaller face width are
[4] arranged).
• With the mark on the Saddle Cam Drive Gear
[3] aligned with the mark on the Relay Gear
[4], align the other mark on the relay gear with
[5] the rib of the Paper Folding Roller Drive Gear
[5].
Fig. 3-030
2-4. Removing the Saddle Unit

[3] (1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 1-2.)
[2] (2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)
(3) Open the Jam Removal Cover [1]; then, remove
2 Screws [2] and the Right Stay [3].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-031
Ver. 5.0 772 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Turn the Fold Jam Releasing Dial Assembly [4]
[5] to move the Paper Retaining Plate Assembly [5]
to the inside.
[4]
Fig. 3-032
(5) Remove the Stop Ring [6], and detach the
[6] Timing Belt [7].
[7]
[8]
Fig. 3-033
(7) Remove 3 Screws [9], and slide out the Stapler
[10] [9]
Unit [10] slightly to the front.
(8) Slide out the Saddle Unit [11] to the front.
[9] [11]
Fig. 3-034
2-5. Removing the Processing Tray Assembly

[1]
(1) Remove the processing Tray Upper Cover.
(See 1-5.)
(2) Remove the Side Guide. (See 1-7.)
(3) Remove 2 Screws [1], and disconnect 5
[2] Connectors [2].
[2] [1] [2]
Fig. 3-035
Ver. 5.0 773 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Pull the processing Stopper Base [3] to the front,
and free the Claw [5] at the front and the Claw [6]
at the rear of the Processing Stopper [4].
[6]
[5]
[4] [4]
[3]
Fig. 3-036
(6) Release 2 Claws [8] of the harness retainer, and
detach the Motor Harness [9].
[9]
[8]
[7]
Fig. 3-037
Ver. 5.0 774 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7) Remove the Stop Ring [10], the flange [15], and
detach the Timing Belt [11].
(8) Disconnect the Connector [12], and free the
Harness [14] from the Edge Saddle [13].
[12]
[11] [14]
[15]
[10]
[13]
Fig. 3-038
(9) Remove 2 Screws [15], and slide the Processing
Tray Assembly [16] to the rear; then, lift it to
detach.
[16]
[15]
Fig. 3-039
Ver. 5.0 775 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2-6. Removing the Paddle Assembly
[1] (1) Remove the Processing Tray Assembly.
(See 2-3.)
(2) Place the Processing Tray Assembly [1] as
shown.
Caution:
Be sure to take care not to damage the Aligning
Plate [2].
[2]
Fig. 3-040
(3) Detach the Timing Belt [3], and remove 2 Screws
[4].
[4]
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-041
(4) Separate the Processing Tray Assembly [5] and
the Paddle Assembly [6] as shown.
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-042
Ver. 5.0 776 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2-7. Removing the Staple/Fold Drive Unit
[2]
[1] (1) Open the Front Door [1], and slide out the
Stapler Unit [2] slightly to the front.
Fig. 3-043
(2) Remove 1 screw [3], and detach the Interface
Retainer [4].
[9] (3) Free the six Harness Retainers [5], and
disconnect the Connector [6].
(4) Free the Harness [7] from the Harness Retainer
[8]
[5].
[7]
(5) Free the Harness [7] from the Edge Saddle [8];
then, disconnect the two Connectors [9].
[5]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[7] [5]
[5]
[4] [5] [7]
Fig. 3-044
(6) Release the Harness Retainer [10], and
[14] [11] disconnect the Connector [11].
(7) Free the Harness [12] from the Harness Retainer
[10].
[12] (8) Free the Harness [12] for the Edge Saddle [13];
and disconnect the two Connectors [14].
[10]
[13]
Fig. 3-045
Ver. 5.0 777 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(9) Remove 1 Screw [15], and free the Claw [17] of
[15]
the Harness Guide from the Long Angle [16] of
the Base Plate.
[17]
[16]
Fig. 3-046
(10) Disconnect 2 Connectors [18], and free the
Harness [20] from the Edge Saddle [19].
[18]
[20]
[18] [19]
Fig. 3-047
[21]
[21]
[21]
Fig. 3-048
Ver. 5.0 778 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(12) Remove 1 Screw [22], and detach the Staple/
Fold Drive Unit [23].
[22]
[23]
Fig. 3-049
2-8. Removing the Feed Motor Unit

[3] (1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)
(2) Release the Harness Retainer [5], and
[3] disconnect the Connector [6].
[1] [7] (4) Remove 1 Screw [1], and detach the Harness
Guide [2].
(5) Remove 3 Screws [3], and detach the Feed
Motor Unit [4].
[2]
[4]
[6]
[5]
Fig. 3-050
Ver. 5.0 779 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2-9. Removing the Feed Roller
(1) Remove the Upper Cover. (See 1-4.)
(2) Remove the Upper Right Cover Assembly.
(See 1-6.)
(3) Remove the Feed Motor Unit. (See 2-6.)
Bushing [3].
[1] [3]
[2]
Fig. 3-051
[4]
Fig. 3-052
Ver. 5.0 780 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(7) Remove the Gear [5], and detach the Gear [6]
while spreading the Claw.
[5]
[8]
[9] Bushing [8].
(9) Remove 1 Screws [9], and detach the Inlet
Sensor [10].
(10) Remove the Lower Paper Guide [11].
[10]
[7] [6]
[11]
Fig. 3-053
(11) Remove the Feed Roller [12].
[12]
Fig. 3-054
2-10. Removing the Stack Delivery Roller (upper)

(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly. (See 2-4.)
[1] (2) Place the Paddle Assembly [1] as shown.
Fig. 3-055
Ver. 5.0 781 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3) Turn the Gear [2] in the direction of the arrow to
move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly
(upper) [3].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-056
(4) Push up the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [4]
from below to free the Stack Deliver Roller
(upper) [4] from the Shaft [5].
[4]
[5]
Fig. 3-057
(5) Shift up the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [4], and
[6]
then push it down to detach the Stack Deliver
[4] Roller (upper) [4].
(6) Likewise, remove the Stack Delivery Roller
(upper) [6] at the front.
Fig. 3-058
Ver. 5.0 782 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2-11. Removing the Paddle
(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly. (See 2-4.)
[1] (2) Place the Paddle Assembly [1] as shown.
Fig. 3-059
(3) Turn the Gear [2] in the direction of the arrow to
move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly
[3] (upper) [3].
[2]
Fig. 3-060
(4) Push up the Safety Guide [4] from below to free
one side of the Safety Guide [4] from the Shaft
[5].
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-061
Ver. 5.0 783 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(5) Push up the Safety Guide [4] from below to free
the Safety Guide [4] from the Shaft [5].
[4]
[5]
Fig. 3-062
(6) Remove the Paddle [6] in the direction of the
[1] arrow.
(7) Likewise, remove the other Paddle.
Fig. 3-063
2-12. Removing the Stack Delivery Roller (lower)/

[1] Delivery Belt
(1) Remove the Paddle Assembly, and separate it
from the Processing Tray Assembly. (See 2-4.)
(2) Slide the Aligning Plate (front) [2] and the
Aligning Plate (rear) [3] of the Processing Tray
[3]
Assembly [1] by sliding them to the outside.
[2]
Fig. 3-064
(3) Remove the Processing Tray Stopper [4].
[4]
Fig. 3-065
Ver. 5.0 784 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Remove the Screw [5], and detach the Paper
[5] Guide (front) [7] while freeing 2 Claws [6].
[7]
[6]
Fig. 3-066
(5) Remove 1 Screw [8]; then, while freeing the
[8] Claw [9], detach the Paper Guide (rear) [10].
[10]
[9]
Fig. 3-067
(6) Remove 2 Stop Rings [11]; then, move 2
Bushings [12] to the inside.
[12]
[11]
[11]
[12]
Fig. 3-068
(7) Remove 4 Screws [13]; then, lift the Stack
Delivery Roller Assembly (lower) [14] to detach.
[13]
[14] [13]
Fig. 3-069
Ver. 5.0 785 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(8) Remove the Stack Delivery Roller (lower) [15]
[16] and 2 Delivery Belts [16].
[15]
Fig. 3-070
Caution:
Be sure to mount them so that the Edges [17] of
the Claws of the Delivery Belts are flush.
[17]
Fig. 3-071
11.3.3.1.3. PCBs
3-1. Removing the Finisher Controller PCB
(1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.)
(2) Disconnect 17 Connectors [1], and remove 1
[2]
[3] Screw [2].
(3) Free the PCB Retainer [3], and detach the
[1]
[1]
Finisher Controller PCB [4].
[1]
[4]
Fig. 3-072
3-2. Removing the Slide Home Position PCB

[1]
(1) Open the Front Door [1], and turn the Tab [2] on
the stapler slide in the direction of the arrow to
slide the Stapler to the frontmost point.
(2) Remove the Stapler Unit. (See 2-1.)
[2]
Fig. 3-073
Ver. 5.0 786 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(3) Place the Stapler Unit [3] as shown.
(4) Remove 2 Screws [4], and detach the Guide [5].
[3]
[4]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-074
(5) Turn the Tab [2] on the Stapler side in the
direction of the arrow so that the Fixing Screw [7]
[2]
of the Slide Home Position PCB [6] is in view
through the round hole.
(6) Remove the Fixing Screw [7].
[6]
[7]
Fig. 3-075
(8) Remove the Flexible Cable Retainer [9].
[8] [10]
(9) Free the Lock [10] of the Connector in the
[11] direction of the arrow; then, detach the Flexible
Cable [11], and then detach the Slide Home
Position PCB [12].
[12]
[9]
Fig. 3-076
Ver. 5.0 787 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.3.2. Punch Unit (Option)
11.3.3.2.1. Puncher Driving System
1-1. Removing the Punch Motor
[2] (1) Remove 2 Screws [1].
(2) Disconnect the Connector [2] to remove the
Punch Motor [3].
[1] [3]
Fig. 3-077
1-2. Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor

[4] (1) Disconnect Connector J1001 [1].
(2) Remove the Harness [3] from the Harness Guide
[3] [2].
(3) Remove 2 Screws [4] to remove the Horizontal
Registration Motor [5].
[1]
[2]
[5]
Fig. 3-078
1-3. Removing the Punch Unit

[1] [2] (1) Remove the Waste Case.
(2) Remove 1 Screw [1] to detach the Jam
Processing Cover [2].
Fig. 3-079
(3) Disconnect the Connector J1005 [3].
[4].
[3]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 3-080
Ver. 5.0 788 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
[6] (6) Remove 1 Screw [7] and Sensor Support Plate
[8].
[8] [7]
Fig. 3-081
(7) Remove 1 Screw [9] and Washer [10].
(9) Remove 2 Screws [12] to detach the Base Cover
[13].
[9]
[10]
[13]
[11] [12]
Fig. 3-082
Ver. 5.0 789 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(10) Remove 4 Screws [14] to remove the Upper
Transmission Sensor Unit [15] and Lower
[15]
Transmission Sensor [16].
[14] [14] [16] [14]
Fig. 3-083
(11) Remove the Punch Unit [18] from the Horizontal
[17] Registration Motor Assembly [17].
[18]
Fig. 3-084
11.3.3.2.2. PCBs
2-1. Removing the Punch Controller PCB
[2] [3]
(2) Disconnect 5 Connectors [2] to remove the
Punch Controller PCB [3].
[2]
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-085
Ver. 5.0 790 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2-2. Removing the Photo Sensor PCB
(1) Remove the Punch Motor. (See 1-1.)
[4] [1] (2) Remove 1 Screw [1].
[2] on the PCB, then detach the PCB Cover [4].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-086
[6]
Photosensor PCB [6].
[5]
Fig. 3-087
2-3. Removing the LED PCB

(1) Remove the Waste Case.
(2) Disconnect Connector J1005 [1].
[1]
[2].
[3]
[2]
Fig. 3-088
Ver. 5.0 791 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
(4) Remove the Screw [4] and Washer [5].
(6) Remove 1 Screw [7] to detach the Base Cover
[8].
[4]
[5]
[8]
[6] [7]
Fig. 3-089
[10] (8) Disconnect the Connector [10] to remove the
[9]
LED PCB [11].
[11]
Fig. 3-090
Ver. 5.0 792 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2-4. Removing the Waste-Full Photo Sensor PCB
(1) Remove the Punch Controller PCB. (See 2-1.)
(2) Remove 2 Screws [1] to remove the PCB Film
[2].
[2]
[1]
Fig. 3-091
Waste-full Photosensor PCB [4].
[3]
[4]
Fig. 3-092
2-5. Removing the Waste Full LED PCB

Waste-full LED PCB [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
Fig. 3-093
Ver. 5.0 793 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.4. Maintenance and Inspection
11.3.4.1. Periodically Replaced Parts
11.3.4.1.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit
The unit does not have components that require periodical replacement.

The unit does not have components that require periodical replacement.
11.3.4.2. Consumables and Durables

Some components of the Machine may require replacement once or more over the period of machine
warranty because of deterioration or damage. Replace them as needed.
11.3.4.2.1. Saddle / Finisher Unit
No. Part Name Part No. Q’ty Expected Life Remarks

A single cartridge is
1 Stapler 4G1-4268-000 1 300,000 operations good for about 5,000
operations.
Table. 4-001
11.3.4.3. Scheduled Maintenance
Item Interval Description Remarks

Feeding Assembly Roller
Feeding Assembly Member Wiping with water.
Minimum maintenance intervals
Paper Path Guide Cleaning
of host machine
Transmission Type Sensor
Dry wiping.
(Optional Punch Unit)
Table. 4-002
Ver. 5.0 794 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.5. Troubleshooting
11.3.5.1. Standards and Adjustments
11.3.5.1.1. Electrical System (Finisher / Saddle Unit)
1. Adjusting the Folding Position
The folding position is adjusted by matching it with the stapling position.
IF you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB, you must transfer the existing settings to the new
PCB. Perform the following if the folding position must be adjusted for some reason.
Caution:
Both the folding and stapling positions may deviate for some type of paper. In such a case, change
the "middle stapling position" in the User Mode of the Host Machine.
1) Set SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as follows :

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 5-001
2) Adjust the folding position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a
required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the folding position about 0.16mm.
• To move the folding position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1.
• To move the folding position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2.
• Turn on Points 1, 4 and 8 of SW1 on the circuit board first and then press PSW1 and PWS2 at
once, and settings can be cleared.
- direction + direction
Fig. 5-002
3) When adjustment of the folding position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher
Controller PCB to OFF.
4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine and check whether the folding position is adjusted
properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the folding position again (Adjustable range ±5 mm).
Ver. 5.0 795 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Adjusting the Middle 2-Point Stapling Position (Adjustment area : ±5 mm)
The stapling position is adjusted by matching it with the folding position.
If you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB, you must transfer the existing settings to the new
PCB. Perform the following if the stapling position must be adjusted for some reason.
Caution:
Both the folding and stapling positions may deviate for some type of paper.
In such a case, change the "middle stapling position" in the User Mode of the Host Machine.
1) Set SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as follows :

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 5-003
2) Adjust the stapling position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a
required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the stapling position about 0.14mm.
• To move the stapling position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1.
• To move the stapling position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2.
• Turn on Points 1, 4 of SW1 on the circuit board first and then press the PSW1 and PSW2 at the
same time clears the adjustment value.
- direction + direction
Fig. 5-004
3) When adjustment of the stapling position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher
Controller PCB to OFF.
4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine and check whether the stapling position is adjusted
properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the stapling position again.
Ver. 5.0 796 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.5.1.2. Electrical System (Punch Unit; Option)
1. Adjusting the Punch Hole Position
This mode requires operation in service mode. The range of hole displacement is between 3 and -3 in
1-mm increments. A higher setting will move the hole toward the leading edge of sheet. (See the
Service Manual of the Host Machine.)
2. Adjusting the Sensor Output

Perform the following when the Punch Controller PCB, Horizontal Registration Sensor (Photosensor
PCB/LED PCB), or Waste Full Sensor (Waste Full Photosensor PCB / Waste Full LED PCB) has been
replaced.
1) Shift bits 1 through 4 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :

ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 5-005
2) Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB. A press will automatically adjust the
sensor output.
• The adjustment is over when all LEDs on the Punch Controller PCB are ON: LED1001, LED1002,
LED1003.
3) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
3. Registering the Number of Punch Hole

Perform the following to register the type of punch unit (number of holes) used to the IC on the Punch
Controller PCB for identification by the Finisher. Be sure to register the type whenever you have
replaced the Punch Controller PCB.
1) Set bits 1 through 4 on the DIPSW1001 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 5-006
2) Press SW1002 on the Punch Controller PCB to select the appropriate number of punch holes.
• Each press on SW1002 moves the selection through the following (repeatedly from top to bottom).
Number of Punch Hole LED1001 LED1002 LED1003

2 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-AZ) ON OFF OFF
2 / 3 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) ON ON OFF
4 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB) OFF ON OFF
Table 5-001
3) Press SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB twice. The presses will store the selected number of
punch holes on the Punch Controller PCB.
• A single press on SW1003 will cause the LED indication to flash; another press on SW1003 will
cause the indication to remain ON to indicate the end of registration.
4) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
Ver. 5.0 797 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. After Replacing the EEP-ROM (IC1002)

1) Turn off the Host Machine.
2) Set bits 1 through 4 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :

ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 5-007
3) Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB at the same time.
• The presses will initialize the EEP-ROM. At the end, all LEDs (LED1001, LED1002, LED1003) will
go ON.
4) Adjust the sensor output, and store the number of punch holes.
Ver. 5.0 798 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.5.2. Arrangement of Electric Components
11.3.5.2.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit
1. Sensors, Microswitches, and Clutch
MS3
PI14
PI16
PI24
PI4
PI23 PI17
MS1
PI22
PI13 MS2
PI19
PI20
PI21
PI18
PI15
PI5 PI3
PI1
PI2
PI7
PI12
CL1
PI8 PI9
PI6
PI11
PI10
Fig. 5-008
Ver. 5.0 799 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Name Notation Description

Photo-interrupters PI1 Inlet paper detection
PI2 Paddle home position detection
PI3 Stack roller home position detection
PI4 Aligning plate home position (front) detection
PI5 Aligning plate home position (rear) detection
PI6 Processing tray paper detection
PI7 Delivery belt home position detection
PI8 Tray paper detection
PI9 Paper surface detection
PI10 Folding position detection
PI11 Folding home position detection
PI12 Folding roller home position detection
PI13 Bind tray paper detection
PI14 Stapler / fold motor clock detection
PI15 Shift upper limit detection
PI16 Shift lower limit detection
PI17 Shift motor clock detection
PI18 Slide home position detection (inside stapler)
PI19 Stapler drive home position detection (inside stapler)
PI20 Staple detection (inside stapler)
PI21 Staple top position detection (in stapler)
PI22 Front door open detection
PI23 Upper cover open detection
PI24 Paper full detection
Micro Switch MS1 Front door open detection
MS2 Joint open detection
MS3 Staple safety detection
Clutch CL1 Bind clutch
Table 5-002
Ver. 5.0 800 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Motor PCBs
M1
M2
M8
M3 M7
M5
M4
[1]
M6
Fig. 5-009
Ver. 5.0 801 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Motor M1 Paddle Motor
M2 Feed Motor
M3 Delivery Motor
M4 Alignment Motor (front)
M5 Alignment Motor (rear)
M6 Shift Motor
M7 Staple / Fold Motor
M8 Slide Motor
Finisher Controller [1] Finisher Control
PCB
Table 5-003
Ver. 5.0 802 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1. Sensors
PI3P
PI1P
PI2P
Fig. 5-010

Photo-interrupters PI1P Puncher home position detection
PI2P Horizontal registration home position detection
PI3P Punch motor clock detection
Table 5-004
Ver. 5.0 803 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
2. Motors
M1
M2
Fig. 5-011

Motor M1P Punch Motor
M2P Horizontal Registration Motor
Table 5-005
Ver. 5.0 804 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. PCBs
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]
Fig. 5-012
Ref. Name
[1] Punch Controller PCB
[2] Photosensor PCB
[3] LED PCB
[4] Waste Full Photosensor PCB
[5] Waste Full LED PCB
Table 5-006
Ver. 5.0 805 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.5.3. LEDs and Check Pins by PCB
Of the LEDs and check pins used in the Machine, those needed during servicing in the field are discussed.
Caution:
Do not touch the check pins not found in the list herein. They are exclusively for factory use, and require
special tools and a high degree of accuracy.
11.3.5.3.1. Finisher Controller PCB

1 6
6 1 1 2
CN13
1 12 1 10
CN8 4 1 CN18 CN10 CN3
CN6
1
CN7
3
CB1
CN1
7
9
1
CN4
5
CN14
1
1 1
15
CN2
CN5
7
1
CN12
3
CN19
1
1 5
12
LED3 LED2 LED1
CN15
CN16
PSW3 PSW2 PSW1
1
CN11
12
CN9 7 1
CN17
6 1 SW1 1 9
Fig. 5-013
Switch Description
SW1 Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.
PSW1 Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.
PSW2 Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc.
PSW3 Factory mode
Table 5-007
Ver. 5.0 806 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.5.3.2. Punch Controller PCB
13 1
4
J1007
J1005
91
J1006
SW1001
51
J1001
SW1002
SW1003
1 1
LED1001
J1002
LED1002
LED1003
2
J1003 J1004
1 10 1 5
Fig. 5-014
Switch Description
SW1001 Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc.
Table 5-008
Ver. 5.0 807 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.5.4. Troubleshooting
11.3.5.4.1. Troubleshooting (Finisher / Saddle Unit)
1. E7-26, Finisher Unit Back-Up Memory Fault

1)Turn off and then on the Host Machine. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
Table 5-010
2. E7-21, Feed Motor Fault
Stack Feed Roller (upper) Home Position Sensor (PI12)

1) Check the stack feed roller (upper) home position sensor. Is it normal?
NO : Replace the sensor.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the feed motor normal?
NO : Correct the wring.
Feed Roller
3) Try turning the stack feed roller (upper) shaft by hand. Does the stack feed roller
(upper) move up/down normally?
NO : Correct the mechanical system.
Feed Motor (M1), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the feed motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-011
3. E7-51, Delivery Motor Fault
Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7)

1) Check the delivery belt home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the delivery motor normal?
3) Try turning the stack delivery roller by hand. Is the rotation smooth?
NO : Correct the mechanical system.
Delivery Motor (M3), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the delivery motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
Table 5-012
Ver. 5.0 808 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
4. E7-22, Alignment Plate Motor (Rear) Fault
Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (rear; PI5)

1) Check the aligning plate home position sensor (rear). Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the rear alignment motor
(rear) normal?
Aligning Plate (rear)
3) Is there mechanical trapping in the path of the aligning plate?
YES: Correct the mechanical mechanism.
Alignment Motor (rear; M5), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the alignment motor (rear). Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-013
5. E7-23, Staple / Fold Motor Fault
Wiring
1) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Staple/Fold Motor
normal?
Stapler Unit
2) Try turning the staple jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping?
YES : Correct the mechanical system.
Staple / Fold Motor (M7), Finisher Controller PCB
3) Try replacing the staple / fold motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-014
Finisher Controller PCB, Stapler Unit

1) Does the stapler / fold motor operate at the appropriate timing?
YES: Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
NO : Check the stapler unit drive mechanism: if faulty, correct it; if normal.
Staple / Fold Motor (M7), Finisher Controller PCB
2) Try replacing the staple / fold motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-015
Saddle Unit
3) Try turning the fold jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping?
Table 5-016
Ver. 5.0 809 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
6. E7-24, Slide Motor Fault
Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18)

1) Check the slide home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
NO : Replace the sensor PCB.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the slide motor normal?
Stapler Unit
3) Is there mechanical trapping in the stapler path?
Slide Motor (M8), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the slide motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-018
7. E7-22, Alignment Motor (front) Fault
Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (front; PI4)

1) Check the aligning plate home position sensor (front). Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the front aligning plate
motor (front) normal?
Aligning Plate (front)
3) Is there mechanical trapping in the aligning plate path?
Alignment Motor (front; M4), Finisher Controller PCB
4) Try replacing the Alignment motor (front). Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-019
8. E7-27, Shift Motor Fault
Paper Surface Sensor (PI9)

1) Check the paper surface sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Tray Up / Down Mechanism
2) Check the tray up/down mechanism. Is the mechanism normal?
NO : Correct the mechanism.
3) Is 24 VDC supplied from the Finisher Controller PCB to the shift motor as soon as
the tray is driven?
Ver. 5.0 810 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Shift Motor (M6), Wiring
4) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the shift motor normal?
YES: Replace the shift motor.
Table 5-020
9. E7-52, Paddle Motor Fault (For DA-FS355 only)
Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2)

1) Check the paddle home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3)
2) Check the swing guide home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
3) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the paddle motor normal?
Paddle, Swing Guide Assembly
4) Try turning the paddle motor clockwise and counter-clockwise by hands. Is there
mechanical tapping in the rotation of the paddle or the up/down movement of the
swing guide?
Paddle Motor (M2), Finisher Controller PCB
5) Try replacing the paddle motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-024
Ver. 5.0 811 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.5.4.2. Troubleshooting (Punch Unit, Option)
1. E7-54, Communication Faulty
Finisher Controller PCB, Punch Controller PCB

1) Turn off and then on the host machine. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the punch controller PCB
normal?
Power Supply
3) Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN14-3 (-) on the Finisher
Controller PCB. Is it 24VDC?
YES: Replace the punch controller PCB.
Table 5-025
2. E7-55, Punch Unit Power Supply Fault
Finisher Controller PCB, Host Machine DC Controller PCB

1) Turn off and then off the host machine. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the punch controller PCB
normal?
Power Supply
3) Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN4-3 (-) on the Finisher
Controller PCB. Is it 24 VDC?
YES: Replace the punch controller PCB.
Table 5-027
Ver. 5.0 812 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
3. E7-28, Punch Motor Fault
Punch Motor Home Position Sensor (PI1P)

1) Check the punch home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P)
2) Check the punch motor clock sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
3) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the sensor normal?
Punch Mechanism, Punch Motor (M1P)
4) Is there a fault in the punch mechanism?
YES: Correct the punch mechanism.
NO : Replace the punch motor.
Punch Controller PCB, Finisher Controller PCB
5) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES: End.
Table 5-028
4. E7-57, Punch Sensor (Horizontal Registration) Fault
Horizontal Registration Sensor (Photo Sensor PCB / LED PCB)

1) Check the horizontal registration sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the punch controller PCB and the horizontal registration
sensor normal?
3) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem correct?
YES: End.
Table 5-029
Ver. 5.0 813 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
5. E7-58, Punch Sensor (Waste Full) Fault
Waste Full Sensor (Waste Full Photo Sensor PCB / Waste Full LED PCB)
1) Check the waste full sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the punch controller PCB and the waste full sensor normal?
YES: End.
Table 5-030
6. E7-29, Horizontal Registration Motor Fault
Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P)

1) Check the horizontal registration home position sensor. Is the sensor normal?
Wiring
2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the horizontal registration
home position sensor normal?
Horizontal Registration Mechanism, Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P)
3) Is there a fault in the horizontal registration mechanism?
YES: Correct the horizontal registration mechanism.
NO : Replace the horizontal registration motor.
YES: End.
Table 5-031
Ver. 5.0 814 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.5.5. Self Diagnosis
11.3.5.5.1. Alarm
1. Finisher / Saddle Unit
Timing of
Error Condition Operation Resetting
Detection
Stapler Absent The stapler is not Monitored at all The staple / fold Set the stapler.
set. times motor (M7) and the
slide motor (M8)
will stop.
Stapler Absent The staple Monitored at all Normal operation Replace the staple
cartridge has run times will continue; cartridge; or, set it
out of staples. however, operation correctly.
is subject to
instructions from
the host machine.
Mixed Sheets Sheets of different When a sheet of a The sheet will be —
sizes are deposited different size is aligned based on
in the placed. maximum size
compartment. width and delivered
as a stack.
Overstacking The number of When an extra The sheets will be —
for Stapling sheets in the sheet is placed. delivered with
compartment has stapling.
exceeded the limit
imposed on
stapling.
Stack Tray The number of When an extra Normal operation Remove the sheets
Overstacking sheets deposited sheet is placed. will continue. from the delivery
on the delivery tray tray.
has exceeded the
limit imposed on
the tray. (sheets,
sets)
Saddle Remove the stack When an extra Normal operation Remove the stack
Overstacking from the bind tray. sheet is placed. will continue. from the bind tray.
More than 10
stacks are
deposited on the
folded stack tray.
Table 5-034
Ver. 5.0 815 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Timing of
Error Condition Operation Resetting
Detection
Punch Waste The amount of During punching. Normal operation Remove the waste
Paper Full waste paper in the will continue. paper from the
waste case has waste case.
reached the limit.
Punch Waste The amount of During punching. Punching will be Remove the waste
Paper Excess waste paper in the disabled. paper from the
(Overflow) waste case has water case.
exceeded the limit.
Table 5-035
Ver. 5.0 816 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
11.3.6. Appendix
11.3.6.1. Signals and Abbreviations
The following presents the abbreviations of signals used in this manual and in drawings, and the meaning of
each signal.
Reference:
Signals enclosed by brackets [ ] are electrical signals.
Finisher / Saddle-Stitch Unit

ADJ_TRAY_S Jog Tray Paper Detect Signal
B_CLU Bind Clutch Drive Signal
BDL_ROL_HP Swing Guide HP Detect Signal
BIND_CLK Staple/Fold Motor Clock Detect Signal
BIND_EMPS Bind Tray Paper Detect Signal
BIND_HP Folding HP Detect Signal
BIND_L Fold Position LED ON Signal
BINDMTR Staple/Fold Motor Drive Signal
BIND_P Fold Position Paper Detect Signal
BIND_ROL_HP Bundle Feed Roller HP Detect Signal
EJCT_BLT_HP Eject Belt HP Detect Signal
EJCTMTR Eject Motor Drive Signal
ENT_S Inlet Paper Detect Signal
FDOOR_S Front Door Open Detect Signal
FEEDMTR Feed Motor Drive Signal
FJOG_HP Front Jog Plate HP Detect Signal
FJOGMTR Front Jog Motor Drive Signal
FRONT_SW Front Door Switch Signal
HOOK_S Hook Empty Detect Signal
JOINT_SW Joint Switch Signal
LVL_S Paper Surface Detect Signal
PAPER_F Paper Full Detect Signal
PDL_HP Paddle HP Detect Signal
PDLMTR Paddle Motor Drive Signal
RJOG_HP Rear Jog Plate HP Detect Signal
RJOGMTR Rear Jog Motor Drive Signal
SELF_P Hook Top Position Detect Signal
SIFT_CLK Sift Motor Clock Detect Signal
SIFT_DNLMT Sift Down Limit Detect Signal
SIFTMTR Sift Motor Drive Signal
SIFT_UPLMT Sift Upper Limit Detect Signal
SLID_HP Slide HP Detect Signal
SLIDMTR Slide Motor Drive Signal
STPL_CNCT Stapler Connect Detect Signal
STPL_HP Staple HP Detect Signal
STPLSAFE_SW Staple Safety Switch Signal
TOPCOV_S Top Cover Open Detect Signal
TRY_EMPS Tray Paper Detect Signal
Ver. 5.0 817 NOV 2004

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Punch Unit (Option)

CLOCK Punch Motor Clock Detect Signal
DUSTLED Dust LED ON Signal
DUSTPTR Dust Full Detect Signal
PAEND Paper End Detect Signal
PUNCH Punch HP Detect Signal
SLIDE Side Registration HP Detect Signal
REG4 Side Registration Detect Signal 4
Ver. 5.0 818 NOV 2004

Ver. 5.0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
11.3.7.
1 CN56-1 +12V CN56-6
1
9 2 CN56-2 +12V CN56-5
2
CN20-1 FGND CN20-1 1
2 DC+24V CN1-1 1 3 CN56-3 FEEDMTR_A CN56-4
3
CN20-2 PGND CN20-2 CN10-1 +12V MOT Feed Motor
1 N.C. CN1-2 2 4 CN56-4 FEEDMTR_*A CN56-3
4 M1
CN20-3 DC+24VP CN20-3 2 CN10-2 +12V
PGND CN1-3 3 5 CN56-5 FEEDMTR_B CN56-2
5
CN20-4 N.C. CN20-4 CN10-3 FEEDMTR_A
4 6 CN56-6 FEEDMTR_*B CN56-1
6
4 CN10-4 FEEDMTR_*A
CN20A-1 SGND CN20A-1 CN10-5 FEEDMTR_B
5
CN20A-2 DC+24VP CN20A-2
3 6
5 3 CN10-6 FEEDMTR_*B F
CN20A-3 RXD CN20A-3 DC+24VL CN2-1 CN10-7 +24V
7
CN20A-4 TXD CN20A-4
6 N.C. CN2-2 8
8 4 CN10-8 +24V 7 1
CN20A-5 SGND CN20A-5 SGND CN2-3 CN10-9 PDLMTR_A
9 CN57-1 +24V CN57-6
CN20A-6 N.C. CN20A-6
5 SGND CN2-4 10 8 CN57-2 +24V CN57-5
2
To Host 7 6 CN10-10 PDLMTR_*A 9 3
1 CN20A-7 SGND CN20A-7 TXD CN2-5 CN10-11 PDLMTR_B
11 CN57-3 PDLMTR_A CN57-4
CN23-3 DC+5V Machine 7 12 10 4 MOT Paddle Motor M2
2 SGND CN2-6 CN10-12 PDLMTR_*B CN57-4 PDLMTR_*A CN57-3
CN23-2 SGND CN20B-1 N.C. 8 11 5
PI4
3 RXD CN2-7 CN57-5 PDLMTR_B CN57-2
CN23-1 FJOG_HP CN20B-2 N.C. 12 6
CN57-6 PDLMTR_*B CN57-1
CN20B-3 N.C.
Sensor (Front)
Home Position
CN20B-4 N.C.
CN24-3 DC+5V
4 CN20B-5 N.C.
CN24-2 SGND
5 CN20B-6 N.C.
PI23
6
Sensor
CN24-1 TOPCOV_S CN20B-7 N.C.
Aligning Plate Upper Cover

CN20B-8 N.C. 1 DC+5V CN4-1 1 1 1
2 CN13-1 +24V CN59-1 +24V CN59-6
SGND CN4-2 CN13-2 +24V
2 2 CN59-2 +24V CN59-5
2
CN25-3 DC+5V
7 3 FJOG_HP CN4-3 3 3 3
8 4 CN13-3 EJCTMTR_A CN59-3 EJCTMTR_A CN59-4
CN25-2 SGND DC+5V CN4-4 4 4 4 MOT Delivery Motor M3
CN13-4 EJCTMTR_*A CN59-4 EJCTMTR_*A CN59-3
PI22
9 5
Sensor
CN25-1 FDOOR_S SGND CN4-5 CN13-5 EJCTMTR_B
5 5 CN59-5 EJCTMTR_B CN59-2
5
Front Door
6 TOPCOV_S CN4-6 6 6 6
7 CN13-6 EJCTMTR_*B CN59-6 EJCTMTR_*B CN59-1
DC+5V CN4-7
8 SGND CN4-8
1 9 E
CN30-3 DC+5V FDOOR_S CN4-9
CN30-2 SGND
2 1 1
CN29-1 DC+5V CN28-9
Schematic Diagram
Tray
PI6
3 2 2 1 1
Sensor
CN30-1 ADJ_TRAY_S CN29-2 SGND CN28-8 CN62-5 +24V CN63-1
3 3 2 CN62-4 FJOGMTR_A CN63-2
2
CN29-3 ADJ_TRAY_S CN28-7
4 4 3 CN62-3 FJOGMTR_*A CN63-3
3 MOT Alignment Motor (Front) M4
CN29-4 DC+5V CN28-6 1
CN31-3 DC+5V
4 5 5 CN3-1 +24V 4 CN62-2 FJOGMTR_B CN63-4
4
CN29-5 SGND CN28-5 2
CN31-2 SGND
5 6 6 1 CN3-2 FJOGMTR_A 5 CN62-1 FJOGMTR_*B CN63-5
5
CN29-6 EJCT_BLT_HP CN28-4 DC+5V CN5-1 3
PI7
6 7 7 2 CN3-3 FJOGMTR_*A
Sensor
CN31-1 EJCT_BLT_HP CN29-7 DC+5V CN28-3 SGND CN5-2 4
8 8 3 CN3-4 FJOGMTR_B
CN29-8 SGND CN28-2
Home Position
ADJ_TRAY_S CN5-3 5
9 9 4 CN3-5 FJOGMTR_*B
CN29-9 TRY_EMPS CN28-1 DC+5V CN5-4 6
7 5 CN3-6 +24V
CN32-3 DC+5V SGND CN5-5 7
8 6 CN3-7 RJOGMTR_A 6 1
CN32-2 SGND EJCT_BLT_HP CN5-6 8 CN64-5 +24V CN65-1
PI8
9 7 CN3-8 RJOGMTR_*A
Sensor
CN32-1 TRY_EMPS DC+5V CN5-7 9 7 CN64-4 RJOGMTR_A CN65-2
2
CN3-9 RJOGMTR_B
Processing Delivery Belt Tray Paper

8 SGND CN5-8 8 3
9 CN3-10 RJOGMTR_*B
10 CN64-3 RJOGMTR_*A CN65-3 MOT Alignment Motor (Rear) M5
TRY_EMPS CN5-9 9 CN64-2 RJOGMTR_B CN65-4
4
1 10 DC+5V CN5-10 10 5
CN35-3 DC+5V
1 CN34-1 DC+5V CN33-3
10 11 CN64-1 RJOGMTR_*B CN65-5
2 2 11 SGND CN5-11
CN35-2 SGND CN34-2 SGND CN33-2 12
PI9
3 3 12 LVL_S CN5-12
Sensor
CN35-1 LVL_S CN34-3 LVL_S CN33-1 13 DC+5V CN5-13
14 SGND CN5-14 2
15 CN66-2 STPLSAFE_SH NO D
RJOG_HP CN5-15 1 Stapler Safety Switch MS3
13 CN66-1 FDOOR_SH COM
CN36-3 DC+5V
CN36-2 SGND
14
PI5
CN36-1 RJOG_HP
15
CN8-1 STPLSAFE_SW
1
Paper Surface Aligning Plate
Sensor (Rear)
Home Position
CN8-2 FRONT_SW
2
CN8-3 FRONT_SW
3 4 CN68-2 FDOOR_SH NO
4 3 Front Door Switch MS1
CN8-4 JOINT_SW CN68-1 JOINT_SH COM
CN39-3 DC+5V
1 JOINT_SW
5
CN8-5
CN39-2 BIND_P
2 1 DC+24VP
6
DC+5V CN16-1 CN8-6
PI10
3 1 1 2
Sensor
Folding
Position
CN39-1 BIND_L CN38-1 DC+5V CN37-9 BIND_P CN16-2
819
2 CN38-2 BIND_P CN37-8
2 3 BIND_L CN16-3 6
3 3 4 CN69-2 JOINT_SH NO
CN38-3 BIND_L CN37-7 DC+5V CN16-4 5 Joint Switch MS2
4 4 4 5 CN69-1 DC+24VP COM
CN40-3 DC+5V CN38-4 DC+5V CN37-6 SGND CN16-5
CN40-2 SGND
5 5 CN38-5 SGND CN37-5
5 6 BIND_HP CN16-6
PI11
6 6 6 7
Sensor
Folding
CN40-1 BIND_HP CN38-6 BIND_HP CN37-4 DC+5V CN16-7
7 CN38-7 DC+5V CN37-3
7 8 SGND CN16-8

8 CN38-8 SGND CN37-2
8 9 BIND_ROL_HP CN16-9 1 1 1
CN70-2 SIFTMTR_1 CN70-2 CN70-2 SIFTMTR_1 CN70-2
7 9 CN38-9 BIND_ROL_HP CN37-1
9 10 DC+5V CN16-10 2 2 2 MOT Shift Motor M6
CN41-3 DC+5V CN70-1 SIFTMTR_0 CN70-1 CN70-1 SIFTMTR_0 CN70-1
8 11 SGND CN16-11 CN6-1 SIFTMTR_1
1
CN41-2 SGND
12 2
PI12
9
Sensor
CN41-1 BIND_ROL_HP ENT_S CN16-12 CN6-2 SIFTMTR_0 C
3
Stack Feed
CN6-3 BINDMTR_1
Home Position Roller (Upper)

Home Position
CN6-4 BINDMTR_0
4 3 1
CN71-2 BINDMTR_1 CN71-2
1 1 10 4 2 MOT Staple/Fold Motor M7
CN44-3 DC+5V CN43-1 DC+5V CN42-3 CN71-1 BINDMTR_0 CN71-1
2 2 11
11.3.7.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit General Circuit Diagram
CN44-2 SGND CN43-2 SGND CN42-2
Inlet
PI1
3 3 12
Sensor
CN44-1 ENT_S CN43-3 ELT_S CN42-1 1 DC+5V CN15-1
2 SGND CN15-2 1 1 1
3 CN18-1 +24V CN72-2 +24V CN72-1
BIND_EMPS CN15-3 2 2 2 CLU Slide Motor CL1
4 CN18-2 B_CLU CN72-1 B_CLU CN72-2
DC+5V CN15-4
CN47-3 DC+5V
1 5 SGND CN15-5
CN47-2 SGND
2 6 SIFT_CLK CN15-6
PI13
3 7
Sensor
CN47-1 BIND_EMPS DC+5V CN15-7
Bind Tray
8 CN11-1 STPL_CNCT
1
SGND CN15-8
9 CN11-2 DC+5V
2
SIFT_DNLMT CN15-9
4 10 CN11-3 SLID_HP
3 7
CN48-3 DC+5V DC+5V CN15-10 CN72A-1 SGND CN72-1 Stapler Unit
5 11 CN11-4 STPL_HP
4 6
CN48-2 SGND SGND CN15-11 CN72A-2 SELF_P CN72-2
12 CN11-5 HOOK_S
5 5
Clock
P118
PI17
6 SIFT_UPLMT CN15-12 CN72A-3 HOOK_S CN72-3
Sensor
CN48-1 SIFT_CLK 6 4
Shift Motor
CN11-6 SELF_P CN72A-4 STPL_HP CN72-4 STPL_HP
CN11-7 SGND
7 3 Stapler Home P119
CN72A-5 SLID_HP CN72-5
2 CN72A-6 DC+5V CN72-6 Position Sensor
CN49-3 DC+5V
7 1 SLIP HP
8 CN72A-7 STPL_CNCT CN72-7 P120 B
CN49-2 SGND Stapler Slide Home
CN72A-8 N.C. N.C.
Shift
Limit
PI16
9
Sensor
CN49-1 SIFT_DNLMT 8 Position Sensor
CN72B-7 +24V CN72-8 P121
9 HOOK S
1 CN7-1 +24V
8 CN72B-6 +24V CN72-9 Hook Sensor
DC+5V CN9-1 9 10 CN72B-5 SLIDMTR_A CN72-10
10 2 CN7-2 +24V 11 SLIDMTR
CN50-3 DC+5V SGND CN9-2 10 CN72B-4 SLIDMTR_*A CN72-11
11 3 CN7-3 SLIDMTR_A 12 Slide Motor (M8)
CN50-2 SGND PDL_HP CN9-3 11 CN72B-3 SLIDMTR_B CN72-12
CN7-4 SLIDMTR_*A
Limit
4 13
PI15
12 SGND CN9-4
Sensor
CN50-1 SIFT_UPLMT 12 CN72B-2 SLIDMTR_*B CN72-13
5 CN7-5 SLIDMTR_B
Shift Upper
BIND_CLK CN9-5 13 CN72B-1 N.C. CN72-14 M8
6 CN7-6 SLIDMTR_*B 14
DC+5V CN9-6 CN72C-1 FG CN72-15
7 CN7-7 N.C.
DC+5V CN9-7
CN51-3 DC+5V
1 8 SGND CN9-8
CN51-2 SGND
2 9 BDL_ROL_HP CN9-9
PI2
3
Sensor
Position
CN51-1 PDL_HP
Paddle Home
1 CN12-1 PNCH_TXD
1
DC+5V CN19-1
2 CN12-2 SGND
2
4 SGND CN19-2
CN52-3 DC+5V 3 3
5 PAPER_F CN19-3 CN12-3 PNCH_RXD
CN52-2 BIND_CLK 4
CN12-4 PNCH_CNCT
Clock
PI14
6
Sensor
CN52-1 DC+5V PNCH_TM_S
5
CN12-5
To Punch Unit (Option)
CN55-3 DC+5V
1 1 CN54-1 DC+5V CN53-3
7 A
CN55-2 SGND
2 2 CN54-2 SGND CN53-2
8 SGND CN17-1
PI3
3 3 9 TXD2 CN17-2 CN14-1 PNCH_+5V
9
Sensor
CN55-1 BDL_ROL_HP CN54-3 BDL_ROL_HP CN53-1 10
RXD2 CN17-3
Staple/Fold Swing Guide

CN14-2 PNCH_SGND
Home Position
DSR CN17-4 CN14-3 PNCH_PGND
11
CN73-3 DC+5V
1 DTR CN17-5 CN14-4 N.C.
2 RESET CN17-6 CN14-5 PNCH_+24V
12
CN73-2 SGND
PI24
3
Sensor
CN73-1 PAPER_F
Full Stack
NOV 2004
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Ver. 5.0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2011 J2011
F
J1007-13
1 1
J1007-12
2 2
J1007-11 3 3 Photo-sensor
J1007-10 PCB
4 4
J1007-9
5 5
J1007-8
6 6
J1007-7
7 7
J2010 J2010
J1007-6
1 1
J1007-5
2 2
J1007-4 3 3 LED PCB
J2011-1
J2011-2
J2011-3
J2011-4
J2011-5
J2011-6
J2011-7
J2010-1
J2010-2
J2010-3
J2010-4
J2010-5
J2010-6
J1007-3
4 4
J1007-2
5 5
J1007-1 E
6 6
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
13
12
11
10
J1007
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
13
12
11
10
J1007
J1005 J1005 J2006 J2006 Waste Bottle Full

Photo-sensor
4 4 1 1
3 3 2 2 PCB
2 2
1 1
J2005 J2005 Waste Bottle

1 1 Full LED PCB
2 2
D
J2009
1 1 PI3P
2 2 Punch Motor Clock
3 3 Sensor
J1006 J1006
9 9
11.3.7.2. Punch Unit General Circuit Diagram
8 8
7 7 J2008
820
6 6 1 1 PI1P
5 5 2 2 Punch Home Position
CN12 CN12 4 4 3 3 Sensor
10 10 3 3
9 9 2 2
8 8 1 1
J2007

7 7 PI2P
1 1
6 6 Horizontal Registration C
2 2
5 5 Home Position
3 3
4 4 Sensor
3 3
2 2 J1001 J1001 J2001
1 1
5 5 1 M2P
4 4 2 Horizontal Registration
M
3 3 3
Motor
Finisher Unit
CN14 CN14 2 2 4
1 1
5 5
4 4
3 3 J1002 J1002 J2002
2 2 1 1 1 M1P
M
1 1 2 2 2 Punch Motor
5
4
3
2
1
J1003 J1004 B
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
5
4
3
2
1
10 10
J2003 J2004
A
DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
NOV 2004
Panasonic
88
Software
Network Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD001829-9
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)
Table of Contents
1. General 3
1.1 Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3
2. Installation 4
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 4
2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................ 4
2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool...................................................................................... 5
3. Preparing the Firmware Update 6

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 6
3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher) 6
3.1.2 For other models 6
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 6
4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool 7
1st Edition : 2002 March 20

2nd Edition : 2002 August 1
3rd Edition : 2002 December 5
4th Edition : 2003 April 10
6th Edition : 2003 December 18
8th Edition : 2004 August 3
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 1999 - 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
1. General
The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to
program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the
Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
• Windows 98 / Me
• Windows NT 4.0
• Windows 2000
• Windows XP
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

A list of the compatible Panasonic Fax/Copy machines are shown below:
• DP-180 / 190
• DP-2310 / 3010
• DP-2330 / 3030
• DP-1520 / 1820
• DP-3510 / 4510 / 6010
• DP-3520 / 4520 / 6020
• DP-3530 / 4530 / 6030
• DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)
• UF-7000 / 7100 / 8000 / 8100
• UF-9000
Note:
1. Depending on the country, some Panasonic models may not be available.
2. The DX-800 works only when it's firmware is Version 1.31 or higher.
.
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool
Start Microsoft Windows.
1.
For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or
change configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Run \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the setup disk or folder.

2.
Enter the installation password.
3. Please ask your Sales Company to obtain the password.
Follow the instruction on your screen to install the program.

4.
The completion message is displayed when install is completed.
5. Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to restart your PC.
2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Network
1. Firmware Update then click Network Firmware Update Configuration.
The Configuration dialog box appears.

2.
General Tab
Please change the settings if necessary.
File Selection Tab

Auto-Select Update Mode
When you select this mode, the tool acquires
the type of firmware and version from the
device(s) of the specified address, and
updates the device to the latest version from
the “Local Firmware Folder”.
However, this mode cannot change the type of
firmware, so you must use the manual mode
when changing from the standard firmware to
the option firmware.
Click [OK] to finish the setup.

3.
Page 4
2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool

The Network Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.

1.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
2. Update then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool.
Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

3.
The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.
4.
Page 5
3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code
3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher)
1. If the device password is changed (Remote Password) from the default value (blank = 0000), it is
not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the
Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication.
2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
3.1.2 For other models

1. If the device password is changed (Key Operator Password) from the default value (0000 or 000),
it is not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the
Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication.
As for three-digit Key Operator Password device, only “000” of the default value is judged “0000” in
the value.
2. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...).
Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data
Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)
Page 6
4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool
1. Please close the all applications that are currently running.

Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using Network Firmware Update Tool, the authority more than a
Power User is required.
2. From the Windows Desktop, double-click on

the Network Firmware Update shortcut icon
to start the Network Firmware Update Tool.
Click [Next>].
Note:
1) Make sure the Key Operator Password on the remote unit and FTP Password on this application
are set correctly.
2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...).
3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote
unit, or a communication error may occur.
4) Do not operate or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the
firmware update isn’t done properly and the device will not boot up again.
5) If the Network Firmware Update fails and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than 20
minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using the
Local Firmware Update Tool or with the FROM card.
3. Click [Device Address List].
Page 7
4. Enter the destination device(s) by using

Manual Input or Device Address List.
Click [OK].
5. Confirm the destination device(s).
Click [Next>].
Page 8
Specify the Firmware Code File using the

6 following methods.
Select an Archive File (Complete Set)
--> Step 6a1
You can select the Firmware Code Archive
File directly here.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically and
it is chosen as a set when the update of
multiple firmware code files are necessary.
Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
--> Step 6b1
If the archive file is already extracted into
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
Select Independent File Folders
--> Step 6c1
the local \Data folder, you can select
independent file folders here.
Note: Files are chosen automatically in the automatic mode, so the screen of step 6 isn’t indicated.
6a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
Set)" and click [Browse...] button.
Page 9
6a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].
ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030228.exe
6a3 Extracting...
6a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
6a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 10
6b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete

6b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].
ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030228
6b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
Page 11
6b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
6c1 Select Independent File Folders

Select "Select Independent File Folders" and
click [Browse...] button.
6c2 Select the Firmware Code File Folder and

click [OK].
ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
Page 12
6c3 Select the other Firmware Code File Folder

and click [OK].
6c4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
7. The version check for the specified devices

starts.
Click [Next>].
Page 13
8. Verify that the information you want to update

is correct.
Then click [Next>].
Note: The firmware of PNL, SC and SPC are

transmitted separately and each time
the unit erases, writes and reboots in
the normal mode.
If you check "Send at once", all
firmware will be sent at once and then
erase, write and reboot. This "Send at
once", function cannot be used if the
firmware type is PCL or PS and the unit
SC version is V1.xxxx
(DP-3510/4510/6010).
9. Confirm the destination device(s) again.
Set timer communication if necessary.
Then click [Next>].
10. Data is transferred to the Spooler and the

update is started.
The Spooler screen appears automatically
showing the progress of the data transfer.
The spooler will take time to open depending
on the number of addresses to update.
Page 14
11. When the transfers are completed, all jobs in

the spooler disappear and the communication
log is displayed.
Click [Finish] to close the tool.
After each firmware code is successfully

programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in
the unit, the unit reboots and restarts again
automatically.
Page 15
memo
Panasonic ®
Software
Local Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD000965-14
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)
Table of Contents
1. General 3
1.1 Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3
2. Installation 4
2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine ................................................................ 4
2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................... 4
2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only) ................................................. 5
2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 6
3. Preparing the Firmware Update 7

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 7
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 7
4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool 8
1st Edition : 1999 February 10

2nd Edition : 1999 September 30
3rd Edition : 2000 September 8
4th Edition : 2000 November 28
5th Edition : 2001 June 20
6th Edition : 2001 September 7
9th Edition : 2003 December 18
10th Edition : 2004 January 19
11th Edition : 2004 February 10
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 1999 - 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)
1. General
The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash
Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit
directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of
the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are
very similar to the Printer Interface.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS
• Windows 98 / Me
• Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only)
• Windows 2000 / XP
1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

A list of the compatible Panasonic Fax/Copy machines are shown below:
Parallel Port Models
Programming a Flash Memory Card
• DP-130/135/150
• DP-1510/1810/2010
• DP-2000/2500/3000
• DP-3510/4510/6010, DP-3520/4520/6020, DP-3530/4530/6030
• UF-585/595/590/790/885/895/890/990, DX-2000
Direct Firmware Update
• DP-1510/1810/2010
• DP-3510/4510/6010, DP-3520/4520/6020, DP-3530/4530/6030
• UF-E1
• UF-490/525/UF-590/790
USB Port Models

Programming a Flash Memory Card
• DP-180/190, UF-9000
• DP-1520/1820
• DP-2310/3010, DP-2330/3030
Direct Firmware Update
• DP-180/190, UF-9000
• DP-1520/1820
• DP-2310 / 3010, DP-2330/3030
• UF-7000/7100/8000/8100
Note:
1. Depending on the destination, some Panasonic models may not be available.
2. Some UF-E1 models with the earlier versions of firmware will not support Parallel Firmware Update. Please
confirm whether your machine’s firmware version supports Parallel Firmware Update with your service provider.
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine
Depending on the model, a Parallel Port or USB Port is installed.
1 Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic
Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model.
Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and
2 your PC.
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool

1
For Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, log onto the computer/network with an account that can add or
change printer configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
Run \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the install disk.

2
Installation Destination Folder
3
Click [Next] button.
Program Folder
4
Click [Next] button.
Page 4
Copying...
5
The installation is completed.

6
Check “Yes, I want to …” and click [Finish] to
restart your PC.
2.3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only)
After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool, if you need to install the USB Firmware
1 Update Driver, please set the unit to "Update from USB/* IN PROGRESS *" in the Service
Mode first, and then connect the USB Cable. The required Driver will then be installed
automatically.
Note: For instructions of how to get into the Service Mode, refer to your machine's Service
Manual.
Searching...
2
Installing driver...
When the install screen disappears, the

3 installation of the Firmware Update (USB)
Driver is completed.
Note:
1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS.
2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the "Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be
displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please
click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation
3. If you are asked for the Inf file location, please specify the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\UsbDrv1
4. After the USB Firmware Update Driver is installed, and you are not updating the machine's firmware at this time, turn the
Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode.
Page 5
2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool

The Local Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program.
Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry
setting problems.

1.
Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware
2. Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool.
Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

3.
The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.
4.
Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control
Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it
after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be
deleted properly.
Page 6
3. Preparing the Firmware Update
3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code

Please refer to the Service Manual to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode (Service Mode).
3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder.
C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data
Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder.
(ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)
Page 7
4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool
Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel
1 cable or USB cable.
Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the
USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If
this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver
installation.
Please close the all applications that are
2 currently running. Status Monitor Port Controller
Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or
Port Controller are closed. If they are
running, right click on the icons in the system
tray and select Exit/End.
Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using
Network Firmware Update Tool, the
authority more than a Power User is
required.
From the Windows Desktop, double-click on
3 the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut
icon to start the Panasonic Firmware
Programming Wizard.
Click [Next>].
Note: Please close all applications that are

currently running.
Also ensure that the Status Monitor
and/or Port Controller are closed. If
they are running, right click on the icons
in the system tray and select Exit/End.
Select the Firmware Update Driver USB or

4 Parallel.
Click [Next>].
Note: The “Firmware Update Driver (USB)” is

only displayed if you installed it with the
unit Plug and Play.
Page 8
Specify the Firmware Code File by the

5 following methods.
Select an Archive File (Complete Set)
--> Step 5a1
You can select the Firmware Code Archive
File directly here.
The selected archive file will be extracted
into the local \Data folder automatically and
it is chosen as a set when the update of
Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
--> Step 5b1
the local \Data folder, you can select the
Parent File Folder directly here.
It is chosen as a set when the update of
Select an Independent File
--> Step 5c1
the local \Data folder, you can select an
independent file here.
When updating multiple firmware files, you
must repeat the file selection operation.
5a1 Select an Archive File (Complete Set)

Select "Select an Archive File (Complete
5a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and

click [Open].
ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030227.exe
5a3 Extracting...
Page 9
5a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears.

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
5a5 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 10
5b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)
Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete

5b2 Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK].
ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030327
5b3 Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].
Page 11
5b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 12
5c1 Select an Independent File

Select "Select an Independent File" and click
[Browse...] button.
5c2 Select the Firmware Code File and click

[Open].
ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
5c3 Firmware Code File selection is completed.

Click [Next>].
Page 13
The selected Firmware Code File(s) are

6 indicated. Uncheck the box if you do not need
to transfer a file.
On the unit side:

Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode.
Click [Next>].
The Firmware Code File starts transferring.

7
When there is more than one file to be
updated, the operation will be the following;
For USB connected unit:

they are transferred in turn automatically if the
unit is ready to receive the next firmware code
file.
Note: If you are updating the
DP-2310/3010, the sending of
sequential multiple files to the unit
isn't done automatically. The
"Waiting..." display on the PC will not
advance to "Executing..." until you set
the unit back to USB Firmware
Update on the machine to start
receiving the next file. See Unit
information of the Firmware
Update Mode on the next page.
For Parallel connected unit:
the confirmation screen is displayed when the
current firmware code file transfer is finished
and there are remaining firmware code files.
Click [OK] when the machine is ready to
receive the next file.
Page 14
Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode:

For USB Connected Unit (DP-2310/3010):
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and
rewrite of the firmware code and will return to Service Mode again. Set the unit back to
USB Firmware Update after the machine returns to Service Mode and continue the
firmware update.
When the last firmware code file (PNL) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return
to standby. The unit doesn't re-boot automatically when you select an independent file and the
PNL firmware wasn't transferred. Cycle the power Off-On and reset the unit if the firmware code
file transfer is finished and the unit has returned to the Service Mode.
For USB Connected Unit (Other models):
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and
rewrite of the firmware code and will return to USB Firmware Update and continue the
firmware update automatically.
When the last firmware code file (AutoBoot) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and
return to standby. The unit doesn't boot automatically when you select an independent file. (The
display returns to “Update in Progress”) Cycle the power Off-On to reset the unit if the firmware
code file transfer is finished and the display shows Completed.
For Parallel Connected Unit:
Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite
of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service
Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update.
When the transfers of all the firmware files are

8 finished, click [Finish] to close the tool.
Note: For USB Connected Unit only.

When the unit returns to standby, Plug
and Play of the printer will popup.
Click [Cancel] to close the Printer Plug
and Play window.
Page 15
DZZSM00272

Panasonic Manual Service DP 6020

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Panasonic Manual Service DP 6020

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Order Number: MGCS041001C0

Digital Imaging Systems

© 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

Distinction of PbF PCB:

Specifications Table ................................ 9 System Description ............................. 263

1.5. External View..........................................29 6.4. Inverting Automatic Document

8.18. Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board 9.9. POP

8.29. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher 11.3. DA-FS355, DA-SP41............................ 709

General Network Information ............. 423

Inverting ADF (i-ADF)

Scanner Unit Document Sensor

Network Parallel Port

Expansion Flash Image Memory

SPC PC Board DRV PC Board 1,550 Sheet

Exit Tray (Outer)

550 Sheet x 2 Paper Tray

(For USA only)

29.8 in (758 mm)

Top View Manufacturer's name and address Factory ID

35.4 in (900 mm)

Left View Front View Right View Rear View

2. With Optional System Console Configuration

19.9 in (505 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

19.9 in (505 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT

23.6 in (600 mm)

19.9 in (505 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT + (LT-R_LGL Adapter)

23.6 in (600 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

Sequential Production Number

00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units

Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit)

PRINT DATA ACTIVE

Drive Motor Lift Motor (Tray 2)

i-ADF Scanner Unit

Control Panel Unit LSU

Paper Exit Transportation Sheet Bypass Unit

Fuser Unit Drive Unit

ADU Paper Feed Module

Bias Charge Unit 3000-Sheet Tray (LCT)

Filters Toner Waste Container PC Boards

Ver. 5.0 36 NOV 2004

(6) Remove the Ozone Filter 1 (4204).

(7) Remove the Dust Filter Cover (4217).

(8) Remove the Dust Filter (4218).

Ver. 5.0 37 NOV 2003

(10) Remove the Ozone Filter 2 (107).

<Following steps (11)~(15) are not applied for

(11) Remove 9 Screws (H8).

(13) Remove the Ozone Filter 4 (4226).

Ver. 5.0 38 NOV 2004

Ver. 5.0 39 NOV 2003

(4) Remove the Toner Waste Container (4108).

Ver. 5.0 40 NOV 2004

(3) Open the ADF Cover.

(4) Clean the Pickup Roller (511), Paper Feed

(5) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).